Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
8/30/13 projectmanual
UNIVERSITY OF IOWA -HAWKEYE COURT Student Housing Iowa City, Iowa Design Build Contractor Balfour Beatty Construction Architect Solomon Cordwell Buenz Structural Engineer KJWW Engineering Consultants MEP/FP Engineers KJWW Engineering Consultants 6.7.2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 1 OF 2 © 2013 Solomon Cordwell Buenz UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT StudentHousing Iowa City,Iowa Design Build Contractor Balfour Beatty Construction Architect Solomon Cordwell Buenz Structural Engineer KJWW Engineering Consultants MEP/FP Engineers KJWWEngineeringConsultants 6.7.2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 2 OF 2 © 2013Solomon Cordwell Buenz UNIVERSITY OF IOWA HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING The following listed documents comprise the project manual for t numerical sequence of sections is interrupted, such interruption The complete Project Manual for this project consists of this entire Volume, which must n separated for any reason. The Architect and Owner disclaim any r assumptions made by a contractor or subcontractor who does not r Manual, including all sections listed in the Table of Contents. All Division 01 Sections are a part of and apply to each and every Section of the Project Manual Specifications. VOLUME 1 Design Issue TABLE OF CONTENTS Firm Date DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Signatures and Seals DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 Summary SCB 06/07/13 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures SCB 06/07/13 Substitution Request Form 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination SCB 06/07/13 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation SCB 06/07/13 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures SCB 06/07/13 Chain of Action Indemnity Agreement 01 40 00 Quality Requirements SCB 06/07/13 01 42 00 References SCB 06/07/13 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls SCB 06/07/13 01 60 00 Product Requirements SCB 06/07/13 01 73 00 Execution SCB 06/07/13 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures SCB 06/07/13 DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS No Sections DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement KJWW 06/07/13 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete KJWW 06/07/13 03 54 13 Gypsum Cement Underlayment SCB 06/07/13 DIVISION 04 MASONRY 04 20 00 Brick Masonry SCB 06/07/13 UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING TABLE OF CONTENTS JUNE 7, 2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION TOC - 1 DIVISION 05 - METALS 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications SCB 06/07/13 05 52 13 Pipe and Tube Railings SCB 06/07/13 DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry KJWW 06/07/13 06 17 53 Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses KJWW 06/07/13 06 40 23 Interior Architectural Woodwork SCB 06/07/13 06 64 00 Plastic Paneling SCB 06/07/13 DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 19 00 Water Repellents SCB 06/07/13 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation SCB 06/07/13 07 25 00 Weather Barriers SCB 06/07/13 07 31 13 Asphalt Shingles SCB 06/07/13 07 41 13 Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels SCB 06/07/13 07 41 16 Formed Metal Roof Panels SCB 06/07/13 07 46 00 Siding SCB 06/07/13 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim SCB 06/07/13 07 84 13 Penetration Firestopping SCB 06/07/13 07 84 43 Fire-Resistive Joint Systems SCB 06/07/13 07 92 00 Joint Sealants SCB 06/07/13 DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames SCB 06/07/13 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors SCB 06/07/13 08 14 76 Bi-Fold Doors SCB 06/07/13 08 31 13 Access Doors and Frames SCB 06/07/13 08 36 13 Sectional Doors SCB 06/07/13 08 41 13 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts SCB 06/07/13 08 53 13 Vinyl Windows SCB 06/07/13 08 71 00 Finish Hardware SCB 06/07/13 08 80 00 Glazing SCB 06/07/13 08 83 00 Mirrors SCB 06/07/13 DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies SCB 06/07/13 09 29 00 Gypsum Board SCB 06/07/13 09 30 00 Tiling SCB 06/07/13 09 51 13 Acoustical Panel Ceilings SCB 06/07/13 09 65 13 Resilient Base and Accessories SCB 06/07/13 09 65 16 Resilient Sheet Flooring SCB 06/07/13 09 65 19 Resilient Tile Flooring SCB 06/07/13 09 65 66 Resilient Athletic Flooring SCB 06/07/13 UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING TABLE OF CONTENTS JUNE 7, 2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION TOC - 2 09 68 16 Sheet Carpeting SCB 06/07/13 09 91 13 Exterior Painting SCB 06/07/13 09 91 23 Interior Painting SCB 06/07/13 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10 14 00 Signage SCB 06/07/13 10 21 13 Toilet Compartments SCB 06/07/13 10 22 38 Operable Panel Partitions SCB 06/07/13 10 26 00 Wall Protection SCB 06/07/13 10 28 00 Toilet Accessories SCB 06/07/13 10 28 13 Residential Toilet Accessories SCB 06/07/13 10 41 16 Emergency Key Cabinet SCB 06/07/13 10 44 13 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets SCB 06/07/13 10 44 16 Fire Extinguishers SCB 06/07/13 10 55 00 Postal Specialties SCB 06/07/13 10 57 00 Closet Fittings SCB 06/07/13 DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT 11 31 00 Residential Appliances SCB 06/07/13 DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12 21 13 Horizontal Louver Blinds SCB 06/07/13 12 24 13 Roller Window Shades SCB 06/07/13 12 35 30 Residential Casework SCB 06/07/13 12 36 61 Simulated Stone Countertops SCB 06/07/13 12 48 16 Entrance Floor Grilles SCB 06/07/13 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION No Sections DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT No Sections UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING TABLE OF CONTENTS JUNE 7, 2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION TOC - 3 VOLUME 2 Design Issue TABLE OF CONTENTS Firm Date DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00 Basic Fire Suppression Requirements KJWW 06/07/13 21 05 03 Through Penetration Firestopping KJWW 06/07/13 21 05 29 Fire Suppression Supports and Anchors KJWW 06/07/13 21 13 00 Fire Protection Systems KJWW 06/07/13 DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 22 05 00 Basic Plumbing Requirements KJWW 06/07/13 22 05 03 Through Penetration Firestopping KJWW 06/07/13 22 05 13 Motors KJWW 06/07/13 22 05 29 Plumbing Supports and Anchors KJWW 06/07/13 22 05 53 Plumbing Identification KJWW 06/07/13 22 07 19 Plumbing Piping Insulation KJWW 06/07/13 22 09 00 Instrumentation KJWW 06/07/13 22 10 00 Plumbing Piping KJWW 06/07/13 22 10 30 Plumbing Specialties KJWW 06/07/13 22 30 00 Plumbing Equipment KJWW 06/07/13 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures KJWW 06/07/13 DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 05 00 Basic HVAC Requirements KJWW 06/07/13 23 05 03 Through Penetration Firestopping KJWW 06/07/13 23 05 13 Motors KJWW 06/07/13 23 05 29 HVAC Supports and Anchors KJWW 06/07/13 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing KJWW 06/07/13 23 07 13 Ductwork Insulation KJWW 06/07/13 23 07 19 HVAC Piping Insulation KJWW 06/07/13 23 31 00 Ductwork KJWW 06/07/13 23 33 00 Ductwork Accessories KJWW 06/07/13 23 34 23 Power Ventilators KJWW 06/07/13 23 37 00 Air Inlets and Outlets KJWW 06/07/13 23 54 00 Force Air Furnaces KJWW 06/07/13 23 74 11 Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioning Units KJWW 06/07/13 23 82 00 Terminal Heat Transfer Units KJWW 06/07/13 DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 Basic Electrical Requirements KJWW 06/07/13 26 05 03 Through Penetration Firestopping KJWW 06/07/13 26 05 13 Wire and Cable KJWW 06/07/13 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding KJWW 06/07/13 26 05 33 Conduit and Boxes KJWW 06/07/13 26 05 53 Electrical Identification KJWW06/07/13 26 09 33 Lighting Control Systems KJWW 06/07/13 26 20 00 Service Entrance KJWW 06/07/13 26 24 16 Panelboards KJWW 06/07/13 26 27 26 Wiring Devices KJWW 06/07/13 UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING TABLE OF CONTENTS JUNE 7, 2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION TOC - 4 26 28 16 Disconnect Switches KJWW 06/07/13 26 51 00 Lighting KJWW 06/07/13 26 52 00 Emergency Lighting Equipment KJWW 06/07/13 DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS 27 05 00 Basic Communications Systems Requirements KJWW xx/xx/xx 27 05 03 Through Penetration Firestopping KJWW xx/xx/xx 27 05 26 Communications Bonding KJWW xx/xx/xx 27 05 28 Interior Communication Pathways KJWW xx/xx/xx 27 05 53 Identification and Administration KJWW xx/xx/xx 27 11 00 Communication Equipment Rooms KJWW xx/xx/xx 27 13 00 Backbone Cabling Requirements KJWW xx/xx/xx 27 15 00 Horizontal Cabling Requirements KJWW xx/xx/xx 27 17 10 Testing KJWW xx/xx/xx 27 17 20 Support and Warranty KJWW xx/xx/xx DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 05 00 Basic Safety and Security Systems Requirements KJWW xx/xx/xx 28 05 03 Through Penetration Firestopping KJWW xx/xx/xx 28 13 00 Electronic Access Control KJWW xx/xx/xx 28 31 00 Fire Alarm and Detection Systems KJWW 06/07/13 DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK 31 23 00 Foundation Excavation and Backfilling KJWW 06/07/13 END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING TABLE OF CONTENTS JUNE 7, 2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION TOC - 5 SECTION011000 SUMMARY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01GENERAL STATEMENT A.The DrawingsandSpecifications listed herein (the “Documents”) are intended to be complementary, and are intended to define the scope of work required for the proper and complete execution of the work. The Documents are not complete, and do not show all details required. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to include, in the project budget, sufficient funds, plus a contingency proportionate to the level of completeness of the Documents, to properly execute and complete the project. B.The Contractor is responsible for coordinating the parts of the Work so that no part shall be left in an unfinished or incomplete condition owing to discrepancies, inconsistencies, or omissions contained within these Documents. Distribution of the Documents by the Contractor shall be in the form of complete sets. The Contractor is to coordinate and distribute the documents, as required, establishing the full scope of work for all trades, regardless of the division of the Documents by discipline. C.The Contractor has participated in meetings with the Owner, Architect, Consultants and potential subcontractors. It is understood that, to the best of the Contractor’s knowledge, information and belief, that the budget reflects the direction and decisions established in those meetings and as indicated in the documents. 1.02PROJECT INFORMATION A.Project Identification:University of Iowa Family and Graduate Housing Project, University of Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa. B.Architect Identification: TheContract Documents were prepared for the Project by Solomon Cordwell Buenz, 625 North Michigan Avenue, Suite 800, Chicago, Illinois 60611. C.Owner:Balfour Beatty Campus Solutions, LLC. 1.Address: 10 Campus Boulevard, Newtown Square, Pennsylvania. 1.03WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS A.General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSUMMARY JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION011000-1 1.04ACCESS TO SITE A.General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. B.All Owner work to be coordinated with Contactor and scheduled as not to delay the project. 1.05WORK RESTRICTIONS A.Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1.Comply with limitations on use of public streets and other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B.Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet(8 m)of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor air intakes. 1.06SPECIFICATION ANDDRAWING CONVENTIONS A.Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1.Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2.Specification requirements are tobe performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. B.Division01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division01 apply to the Work ofall Sections in the Specifications. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSUMMARY JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION011000-2 SECTION012100 ALLOWANCES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. B.Types of allowances include the following: 1.Lump-sum allowances. 2.Unit-cost allowances. 3.Quantity allowances. C.Related Requirements: 1.Section012200"Unit Prices" for procedures for using unit prices. 2.Section014000"Quality Requirements" for procedures governing the use of allowances for testing and inspecting. 1.02SELECTION AND PURCHASE A.At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work. B.At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work. C.Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier. 1.03ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders. 1.04INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. B.Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for installation of allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGALLOWANCES APRIL 11, 2013 -DD012100-1 C.Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions ofthe Work. 1.05COORDINATION A.Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to coordinate installation. 1.06ALLOWANCES A.Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner or selected by Architect under allowance and shall include taxes,freight,and delivery to Project site. B.Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials selected under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance. C.Unused Materials: Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted. 1.If requestedby Architect, retain and prepare unused material for storage by Owner. Deliver unused material to Owner's storage space as directed. 1.07CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES A.Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Architect for Owner's purposes and only by Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance. B.Contractor'soverhead, profit, andrelated costs for products and equipment ordered by Owner under the contingency allowance are included in the allowance and are not part of the Contract Sum. These costs include delivery, installation,taxes, insurance, equipment rental, and similar costs. C.Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will include Contractor's related costs and reasonable overhead and profit margins. D.AtProject closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to Owner by Change Order. 1.08ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES A.Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order proposal based on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place where applicable. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGALLOWANCES APRIL 11, 2013 -DD012100-2 1.Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance. 2.If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs and other margins claimed. 3.Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders related to unit-cost allowances. 4.Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity survey, measure, or count. B.Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature ofthe allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. 1.Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents. 2.No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher-or lower- priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement. 3.02PREPARATION A.Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. 3.03SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A.Allowance No.04-01: Lump-Sum Allowance: To be calculated by the contractor to provide exterior brick as indicated and at the unit prices as listed in Section 012200 “Units Prices”. B.Allowance No.05-01:Unit-CostAllowance: Include the sum of:$25,000 for structural steel as specified in Section051200"Structural Steel Framing"and as shown on Drawings. C.Allowance No.09-01: Lump-Sum Allowance: To be calculated by the contractor to provide carpeting in the areas indicated at the unit prices as listed in Section 012200 “Units Prices”, unless the carpet material is specifically called out in the drawings. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGALLOWANCES APRIL 11, 2013 -DD012100-3 END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGALLOWANCES APRIL 11, 2013 -DD012100-4 SECTION012200 UNIT PRICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices. 1.02DEFINITIONS A.Unit price isan amount incorporated in the Agreement, applicable during the duration of the Work asa price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion of the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the scope of Work or estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased. 1.03PROCEDURES A.Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable taxes,overhead, and profit. B.Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. C.Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use ofestablished unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor. D.List of Unit Prices: A schedule of unit prices is included in Part3. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES A.Unit Price No.04-01–Brick Allowance: 1.Description: Unit price of brick is to be $900/one thousand brick. 2.Unit of Measurement: Per one thousand brick, Norman Size. B.Unit Price No.09-01–Sheet Carpeting at Common Areas: UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGUNIT PRICES APRIL 11, 2013 -DD012200-1 1.Description: Unit price of carpet and pad at Common Areas is to be $15.00/square yard. 2.Unit of Measurement: Square Yard. C.Unit Price No.09-02–Sheet Carpeting at Residential Units: 1.Description:Unit price of carpet and pad at Residential Units is to be $10.00/square yard. 2.Unit of Measurement: Square Yard. ENDOF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGUNIT PRICES APRIL 11, 2013 -DD012200-2 SECTION012300 ALTERNATES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01DEFINITIONS A.Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept acorresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1.The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.02PROCEDURES A.Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1.Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part ofalternate. B.Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, ofthe status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates. C.Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A.Alternate No.07-01: Blanket insulation in exterior walls between studs. 1.Base Bid: Kraft faced fiberglass blanket insulation. 2.Alternate: Mineral Fiber Blanket insulation with smart vapor barrier. B.Alternate No.08-01:Clad Wood Windows at Residential Buildings. 1.Base Bid: PVC windows per section 085313. 2.Alternate: Clad wood windows per section 085200. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGALTERNATES APRIL 11, 2013 -DD012300-1 C.Alternate No.08-02: Clad Wood Windows at Community Center. 1.Base Bid: PVC windows per section 085313. 2.Alternate: Clad wood windows per section 085200. D.Alternate No.08-03: Fiberglass Windows at Residential Buildings. 1.Base Bid: PVC windows per section 085313. 2.Alternate: Fiberglass windows per section 085413. E.Alternate No.08-04: Fiberglass Windows at Community Center. 1.Base Bid: PVC windows per section 085313. 2.Alternate: Fiberglass windows per section 085413. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGALTERNATES APRIL 11, 2013 -DD012300-2 SECTION012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A.Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIADocumentG710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.02PROPOSAL REQUESTS A.Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests:Architectwill issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1.Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architectare not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. B.Contractor-Initiated Work Change Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change. C.Proposal Request Form: AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests. 1.03CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A.On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architectwill issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIADocumentG701. 1.04CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A.ConstructionChange Directive:Architectmay issue a ConstructionChange Directive on AIADocumentG714.ConstructionChange Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. B.Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by theConstructionChange Directive. 1.After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGCONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION012600-1 1.05SUBSTITUTIONS A.Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1.Substitution Request Form: Use facsimile of form provided in the Project Manual. 2.Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a.Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. b.Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c.Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of theWork specified. Include annotated copy of applicable specification section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. d.Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e.Samples, where applicable or requested. f.Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g.List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h.Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. i.Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project. j.Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. k.Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. l.Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. m.Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01SUBSTITUTIONS A.Substitution Requests: UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGCONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION012600-2 1.Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately upon discovery of need for change, but not later than 15days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. 2.Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60days after commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. B.Substitution Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1.Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may includecompensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. 2.Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3.Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 4.Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5.Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. 6.Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 7.Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8.Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9.Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 10.If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. C.Substitution Procedures: 1.Substitution request is submitted to the Architect. 2.Architect reviews, and if there are no objections, approves and Owner is informed of change. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01ATTACHMENTS A.List of attachments 1.Substitution Request Form END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGCONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION012600-3 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING TO:Solomon Cordwell Buenz & Assoc. 625 North Michigan Ave., Suite 800 Chicago, IL 60611 INSTALLER:_____________________________PHONE:_______________ Name of Subcontractor ADDRESS:_____________________________ _____________________________ 1.Specification Section:___________Paragraph:___________ 2.Proposed Substitute: A.Name and Model No.: ______________________________________________ B.Manufacturer:____________________________________________________ Address:________________________________________________________ Phone Number and Person to Contact:________________________________ C.Applicable reference standards: ______________________________________ D.Cost Implications of Proposed Substitution:_____________________________ E.Schedule Impact Implications of Proposed Substitution:____________________ 3.Attachments: A.Product Information: 1.Performance and test data. 2.Color chart, if applicable. (Follow with samples, if requested). UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM JUNE 7, 2013 –PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION1of3 B.Sample product warranty, if applicable. 1.Installation and maintenance instructions. 2.Manufacturer's Reputation: Attach evidence of reputation for prompt delivery and efficiency in servicing products. 3.Comparison:Attach an itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with product specified. Significant qualities may include elements such as size, weight, durability, performance and visual effect. 4.Previous Installation: Attach list of not less than 3 similar projects on which proposed substitution was used. List name and address of project, date of installation, and name, address, and phone number of Architect. C.Coordination Information: Attach a list of changes needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by the Owner and separate Contractors, that will become necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution. D.Cost Data: Attach accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product specified, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Contract Sum. E.Impact on Schedule: Attach a statement indicating the substitution's effect on the Contractor's Construction Schedule compared to the schedule without approval ofthe substitution. Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on overall Contract Time. 4.In making request for substitution, Contractor: A.represents that the Contractor has personally examined the Contract Documents and has determined that, to the best of Contractor's knowledge, the proposed substitution is appropriate for the use intended in the Contract Documents,andis equal or superior in all respects to that specified. B.represents that the substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. C.representsthat Contractor will provide the same warranties for substitution as for that specified. D.will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into Work, making such changes as may be required for Work to be complete in all respects. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM JUNE 7, 2013 –PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION2of3 E.certifies that cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under the Contract, except the Architect's redesign costs, and waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently become apparent. F.has coordinated the substitution with other portions of the Work, is compatible with other products and is acceptable to all contractors involved. ____________________________________________________________________________ Name of Manufacturer, Signature of Manufacturer's RepresentativeDATE ____________________________________________________________________________ Name of Installer, Signature of Installer's RepresentativeDATE ____________________________________________________________________________ Name of Contractor, Signature of Contractor's Representative DATE END OF SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM JUNE 7, 2013 –PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION3of3 SECTION012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SCHEDULE OF VALUES A.Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1.02APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A.Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. B.Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C.Application for Payment Forms: Use AIADocumentG702 and AIADocumentG703as form for Applications for Payment. D.Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor.Architectwill return incomplete applications without action. E.Transmittal: Submit threesigned and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architectby a method ensuring receipt. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. F.Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1.Submitwaivers of mechanic’s lien from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction periodcovered by the previous application. G.Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. H.Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGPAYMENT PROCEDURES APRIL 11, 2013 -DD012900-1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGPAYMENT PROCEDURES APRIL 11, 2013 -DD012900-2 Contractor’s Certificate in Support of Stored Materials In Support of its Application for PaymentNo: Covering the Period from:To:As to Stored Materials (“Project”) Project: (“Owner”) Owner: (“Contract”) Contract Dated: Copy To: The undersigned hereby certifies to Solomon Cordwell Buenz,that all off-site or on-site stored materials for which the undersigned has applied for payment (1) conformto the Contract Documents, (2) are of the quantity, quality and cost set forth in the Application for Payment, (3) will remain unaffected by storage or later shipment and handling and (4) are covered against damage or loss by a builder’s risk policy with appropriate transit and off-site storage coverage and/or an installation floater with appropriate transit coverage and/or an appropriate endorsement to the undersigned’s general commercial liability policy. The Terms in this certificate shall have the same meaning as those in the Contract. The undersigned acknowledges that Solomon Cordwell Buenz will rely upon this certificate in executing any Certificate of Payment required of it by the Owner. An itemized list of all stored materials covered by this certificate is attached hereto. Signature Printed Name Company SECTION013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES A.Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part ofthe Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. B.Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. C.Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activitiesand activities of other contractorsto avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. 1.02COORDINATION DRAWINGS A.Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity. 1.03REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs) A.General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI.RFI to contain the request, references to drawings and specifications and suggested response to the RFIfor the Architect’s consideration. B.Contractor’s Responsibility for RFI review: The Contractor shall review all RFIs prior to submission to Architect to ensure that the RFI is not already answered in the Contract Documents, field conditions, or other Owner-provided information, Contractor prepared coordination drawings, or prior Project correspondence or documentation. 1.04PROJECT MEETINGS A.General:Schedule and conductmeetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.Contractor to recordsignificant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within threedays ofthe meeting. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURTPROJECT MANAGEMENT STUDENT HOUSINGAND COORDINATION JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION013100-1 B.Preconstruction Conference:Schedule and conducta preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15days after execution of the Agreement.Conference to be conducted at the Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities, schedule, and personnel assignments. C.Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. D.Progress Meetings:Conductprogress meetings at regularintervals.Coordinate dates of meeting with the preparation and review of payment requests. E.Coordination Meetings: Conduct contractor coordination meetings at regular intervals. Coordination meetings are for the benefit of contractor coordination. Owner and Architect attendance is not required. 1.05ARCHITECT’S FIELD REPORT A.General: The Architect will make field reports at regular intervals and identify items not in compliance with contract documents. Contractor shall create a Field Report Log identifying corrections to non-complying work. Corrective proposals shall be submitted to Architect for approval. Once approved, the non-compliance item may be removed from the list. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURTPROJECT MANAGEMENT STUDENT HOUSINGAND COORDINATION JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION013100-2 SECTION013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Submittal Schedule: Submittal schedule is to be issued at least one week prior to the first product submittal. 1.02COORDINATION A.Coordinate Contractor's construction schedulewith the schedule of values, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A.Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1.Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2.Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3.Mock-ups:Include dates for all mock-ups. If mock-ups are not part of the final work, building mock-ups and obtain approvals prior to start of the final work represented by the mock-up. 4.Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section013300"Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule. 5.Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 6.Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30days for completion of punch list items and final completion. B.Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURTCONSTRUCTION STUDENT HOUSINGPROGRESS DOCUMENTATION JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION013200-1 C.Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion. D.Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished. 2.02REPORTS A.Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A.Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthlyintervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one weekbefore each regularly scheduled progress meeting. B.Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURTCONSTRUCTION STUDENT HOUSINGPROGRESS DOCUMENTATION JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION013200-2 SECTION013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01DEFINITIONS A.Action Submittals:Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. B.Informational Submittals:Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.Architectural Intent: Submittals for work designed by Owner’s Consultants,and submittalsfor worknot designed by the Architectincluding delegated design submittals, may be submitted to the Architect as an Informational Submittal. 1.02SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A.Architect's Digital Data Files: 1.Electronic copies of digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittalsonly when the following conditions are met in advance: a.The Architect allowsthe Contractor to use the Architect’s background electronic drawings. b.Contractor, in advance of the submittals process, signs the “Agreement to Transfer Electronic Media –Indemnity Agreement”. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. 2.Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings.Drawing files are limited to: a.Architectural plan, reflected ceiling plan, and roof plan drawing files. b.Exterior elevation and building section drawing files. B.Coordination:Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. C.Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect'sreceipt of submittal. Time for review shall commence on the date of Architect’s receipt of submittal if prior to 10:30 a.m. that day. If receipt of submittal is after 10:30 a.m., then the time of review will start on the following business day. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals and resubmittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing and proper coordination of submittals with related or adjacent parts of the Work. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSUBMITTAL PROCEDURES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION013300-1 1.Primary Reviewer Initial Review: Allow10 business days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architectwill advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2.Secondary Reviewer Initial Review: Where a secondary review of submittals is required, allow 5 additional business days for secondary reviewer’s comments of each submittal, in addition to the 10 business days for primary reviewer’s initial review. 3.Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 4.Resubmittal Review: Allow the same number days as the initial review for processing each resubmittal. 5.Large, multi-page submittals (over 20 sheets), or complex submittals, or multiple submittals received during the same review period will typically require longer review periods.If submittal is anticipated to take a longer time to review, Architect and Contractor to agree upon a reasonable time limit. D.Identification: Pace a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. E.Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect. F.Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.Identify deviations from previously approved submittals on re-submitted submittals. G.Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect or Primary Reviewer observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serviceas final submittal. H.Transmittal: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabrications, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance ofconstruction. Show distribution on transmittal forms. I.Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance ofconstruction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. J.Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01GENERALSUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A.General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1.Submittals that are 11 inch by 17 inch size or smaller, 20 sheets or less, and under 2 megabytes in size: Submit as electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files with one paper copy. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSUBMITTAL PROCEDURES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION013300-2 a.Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 2.Submittals that are larger than 11 inch by 17 inch size or more than 20 sheets: Submit submittal as paper sheets with optional additional electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files. a.Provide a separate PDF file for each large format sheet in the submittal. b.Architect will return either an annotated paper copy or an annotated electronic file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 3.Submittals sent via email shall be sent individually. One submittal per email. 4.Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return one copy. a.Architectural Review Only: Submit three copies. b.Architectural and Consultant Review: Submit one copy to the Architect and two copies to the reviewing consultant. 5.Informational Submittals: Submit paper copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. a.Architectural Review Only: Submit two paper copies unless otherwise indicated. b.Architectural and Consultant Review: Submit one copy to the Architect and two copies to the reviewing consultant unless otherwise indicated. 6.Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division01 Section "Closeout Procedures." 7.Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. a.Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically-submitted certificates and certifications where indicated. b.Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated. 2.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. B.Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings onreproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. C.Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. D.Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSUBMITTAL PROCEDURES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION013300-3 2.03INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Coordination Drawings Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section"Project Management and Coordination." B.Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section"Construction Progress Documentation." C.Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittalsby Owner: Comply with requirements specified in Section"Quality Requirements." D.Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section"Closeout Procedures." E.Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section"Operation and Maintenance Data." F.SustainableSubmittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section"Sustainable Design Requirements”. G.Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience offirm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. H.Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWSforms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. I.Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. J.Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. K.Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. L.Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. M.Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. N.Product Test Reports:Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSUBMITTAL PROCEDURES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION013300-4 O.Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. P.Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Section014000 "Quality Requirements." Q.Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. R.Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testingagency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. S.Field Test Reports:Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. T.Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. 2.04DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES A.Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications bya design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B.Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list ofcodes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.Design professional responsible for the design shall also sign and seal all drawings, certificates, and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by the delegated-design professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when submitted to the Architect. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSUBMITTAL PROCEDURES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION013300-5 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A.Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals to the Architect, the Contractor represents to the Owner and the Architect that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. B.Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date ofContractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.02ARCHITECT'S ACTION A.General: Architectreserves the right tonot review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. 1.A maximum of one initial submittal and one re-submittal will be reviewed by the Architect. B.Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. C.Action Submittals –Delegated Design: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions that the delegated designer should consider, and return it. The Architect’s review is for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Comments are for the sole purpose of providing the Contractor additional information which the Contractor may choose to utilize in the Contractors’ design and to alert the contractor that the proposed design appears not to confirm to the design requirements. Design of such systems or equipment remains in the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. D.Informational Submittals:Architect or Primary Review does not approve, review, and/or return Informational Submittals. Informational submittals are for Architect’s or Primary Reviewer’s reference and record. Architect or Primary Reviewer may review portions of Informational submittals as Architect or Primary Reviewer deems necessary and may reject and return reviewed portions if it does not comply with the requirements. E.Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. F.Submittals not required by the Contract Documents willnot be reviewed and willbe discarded. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSUBMITTAL PROCEDURES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION013300-6 3.03ATTACHMENTS A.List of attachments 1.Indemnity Agreement END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSUBMITTAL PROCEDURES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION013300-7 Chain Of Action for Submittals Chain Of Action For Submittals Contractor (1) transmittal, (2) copies Prepare Drawings Examine/Approve (1) transmittal, (2) copies Distribute (1)transmittal, Architect * SecondaryReviewer(s) * PrimaryReviewer Review/Comment Review/Action Coordinate Comments Resubmittal CommentsComments (1) transmittal, (1) copy(1) transmittal, (1) copy (1) transmittal . (1) copy Contractor Record Comment Correct/Resubmit or Fabricate LEGND Submittal Comment Return * Primary or Secondary reviewer may be the Architect DisciplinePrimary ReviewerSecondary Reviewer(s) Architectural Structural Mechanical Electrical Plumbing Fire Protection Building Enclosure Elevator Owner Other __________________ Pageof 11 1/3/2006 Disclaimer IndemnityAgreement Date: Project: Project Number: IndemnityAgreement, Transfer ofElectronic Data, Architect/Contractor A.Disclaimer The information, whether transmitted herewith or made available through a website, is being provided by Solomon Cordwell Buenz to you (the “Recipient”) for use in furthering the coordination of project activities and communications. Only the Recipient is permitted to access and use the information contained herein. Unauthorized access or use is strictly prohibited. Under no circumstances and under no legal theory, whether in tort, contract, or otherwise, shall Solomon Cordwell Buenz be liable for any indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character including, without limitation, damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, any and all other commercial damages or losses, or infringement of privately owned rights, even if informed of the possibility of such damages, or for any claim by any other party arising from the unauthorized access or use of the information, files or software transmitted herewith or made available through a website. The information, whether transmitted herewith or made available through a website, isprotected by applicable federal, state and international laws. Access to such information by the Recipient shall not, in any way, 1) constitute publication of such information, 2) abridge or extinguish Solomon Cordwell Buenz’ rights and, to the extent applicable, exclusive ownership interest in such information under all applicable federal, state and international laws including, without limitation, laws governing the protection of copyrights and intellectual property or 3) constitute a license to the Recipient to reproduce or disseminate such information without Solomon Cordwell Buenz express written authorization. B.Agreement 1.[Contractor] has requested that Solomon Cordwell Buenz (“SCB”) provide electronic versions of the design documents (the “Electronic Design Documents”) prepared for the project (the “Project”) for [Contractor’s] convenience in performing services on the Project. In consideration of SCB’s willingness to provide the Electronic Design Documents to [Contractor], [Contractor] hereby agrees to each of the following terms and conditions: 2.The Electronic Design Documents are instruments of service of SCB and shall not be used by you nor shall you allow them to be used by anyone else for any purpose other than as a convenience in connection with the original construction of the Project. The use of the Electronic Design Documents is expressly limited in the same manner as the use of any design documents are limited by the terms of the architectural services agreement entered into between [Owner] and SCB (the “Contract”). 3.[Contractor] expressly acknowledges that the Electronic Design Documents are not contract documents, as that term is defined in the Contract (the “Contract Documents”). [Contractor] further acknowledges and agrees that the Electronic Design Documents may contain significant differences from the Contract Documents due to addenda, change orders and other revisions or errors introduced during the transfer of the material into electronic format. SCB makes no representation or warranty regarding the accuracy or completeness of the Electronic Design Documents and Contractor expressly acknowledges the absence of any such representation or warranty. In the event of any conflict between the Contract Documents and the Electronic Design Documents, it is understood that the Contract Documents shall govern. 4.[Contractor] acknowledges that by the use of the Electronic Design Documents, it is not relieved of its obligations pursuant to its agreement with [Owner] to fully comply with the Contract Documents, including and without limitations, the responsibility to check, confirm and coordinate all dimensions and details, take field measurements, verify field conditions and coordinate its work with that of any other contractors on the Project. 5.[Contractor] acknowledges that the delivery of the Electronic Design Documents shall not be deemed a sale by SCB and understands that SCB makes no warranties, express or implied, including without limitations, warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. 6.[Contractor] acknowledges that any use or reuse of the Electronic Design Documents shall be at [Contractor’s] sole risk. [Contractor] agrees to make no claim and hereby waives, to the fullest extent permitted by law, any claim or Page1of2 Disclaimer IndemnityAgreement cause of action of any nature whatsoeveragainst SCB, its officers, directors, employees, agents or subconsultants which may result from or arise out of [Contractor’s] use of the Electronic Design Documents. Without limiting the foregoing, [Contractor] expressly waives any claim whatsoever to loss of profit or consequential damages. 7.To the fullest extent permitted by law, [Contractor] hereby agrees to indemnify and hold SCB harmless from and to defend SCB against any and all claims, damages, losses and expenses, including reasonable attorneys’ fees that arise out of or result from [Contractor’s] use of the Electronic Design Documents. C.Service Fee There is a service fee of $XXX.00 per set of electronic files covering reproduction and gathering costs. D.Transmitted Documents 1.In accordance with and expressly in reliance upon [Contractor’s] acceptance of all of the terms set forth in this agreement, SCB will furnish the following electronic files via electronic mail, computer disk or electronic bulletin board service: Last Date No.Titleon DrawingDiscipline E.Accepted and Approved Solomon Cordwell Buenz Contractor: Signed:Signed: Name:Name: Title:Title: Date:Date: Please send the original signed copy of this agreement and a check in the amount listed in Item C. to: SolomonCordwell Buenz 625 North Michigan Avenue, Suite 800 Chicago, IL 60611 Attention: ______________________ Upon receipt of these documents, the electronic file for this project will be released. Page2of2 SECTION014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01DEFINITIONS A.Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B.Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C.Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. D.Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work,to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. E.Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. F.Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop. G.Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation ofthe Work and for completed Work. H.Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. I.Experienced: When used with an entityor individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of fiveprevious projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGQUALITY REQUIREMENTS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION014000-1 1.02CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A.Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B.Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.03INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Contractor's Statement of Responsibility:When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before startingwork. B.Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. 1.04REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A.Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.05QUALITY ASSURANCE A.General:Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B.Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C.Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D.Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGQUALITY REQUIREMENTS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION014000-2 E.Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. F.Structural Engineer Qualifications: A structural engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing structural engineering. G.Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. H.Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer'sproducts that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. I.Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods. J.Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1.06QUALITY CONTROL A.Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. B.Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. C.Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's services include examination ofsubstrates and conditions, verification of materials, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. D.Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. E.Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGQUALITY REQUIREMENTS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION014000-3 F.Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. G.Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. H.Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents.Testing to be scheduled and coordinated at project meetings. I.Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency/special inspectoras required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A.Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. 3.02REPAIR AND PROTECTION A.General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. B.Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C.Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGQUALITY REQUIREMENTS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION014000-4 SECTION014200 REFERENCES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01DEFINITIONS A.General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B."Approved":When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C."Directed": A instruction by Architect and is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D."Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents.Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E."Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F."Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G."Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H."Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I."Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.02INDUSTRY STANDARDS A.Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGREFERENCES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION014200-1 Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B.Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. C.Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1.Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. D.Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more standards or requirements is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimal quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. E.Minimum quality or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quality or quantity specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.03ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A.Abbreviations:Where abbreviations are used in the drawings, refer to the abbreviation list in the drawing set. If abbreviation is not listed, refer to “United States National CAD Standard –Version 4.0” for meaning. Refer uncertainties to Architect for clarification before proceeding. B.Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in ColumbiaBooks' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States." C.Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the industry. Refer uncertainties to Architect for clarification before proceeding. . D.Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the industry. Refer uncertainties to Architect for clarification before proceeding. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGREFERENCES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION014200-2 E.State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the context of referencing a standard or publication. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGREFERENCES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION014200-3 SECTION015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01USE CHARGES A.General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. 1.02INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire prevention program. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA70. B.Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01TEMPORARY FACILITIES A.Field Offices, General:Provide secure field officeswith serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. 2.02EQUIPMENT A.General: Provide equipment suitable for use intended. B.Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. C.PermanentHVAC Equipment:HVAC systems to be used for conditioning during construction. Air filters will be changed out before unit turnover. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGTEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION015000-1 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. B.Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.02TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A.General: Install temporary service. B.Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. C.Water Service:Provide temporary utilities to provide potable water as required for construction. D.Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. E.Heating: Provide temporary heating required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. F.Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. G.Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. H.Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 3.03SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A.Common-Use Field Office: Provide a weather-tight, heated and air-conditioned field office for use as a common facility by all personnel engaged in construction activities; of sufficient size to accommodate required office personnel and meetings of 10 persons at Project site. Keep office clean and orderly.Office is for use of General Contractor personnel only. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGTEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION015000-2 B.Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section017300"Execution." C.Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. D.TemporaryStairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate.Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be permitted, provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial Completion. 3.04SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A.Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. B.Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.Avoid using tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise-making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firm adjacent to the construction. C.Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas ofconstruction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day. D.Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. E.Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. F.Temporary Fire Protection: Comply with NFPA241; manage fire prevention program. 3.05MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A.Contractor's Moisture Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction. 3.06OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A.Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B.Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGTEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION015000-3 Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGTEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION015000-4 SECTION016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01DEFINITIONS A.Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. B.Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. B.Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section"Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. B.Nameplates: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer’s or producer’s nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products that will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior. 1.04PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGPRODUCT REQUIREMENTS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION016000-1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A.General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unlessotherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1.Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2.Standard Products: If available, and unless customproducts or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3.Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4.Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. B.Product Selection Procedures: 1.Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements.Comparable products will be considered. C.Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample.Custom colors and custom finishing may be required.Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. D.Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.02COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A.Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1.Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2.Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3.Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4.List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGPRODUCT REQUIREMENTS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION016000-2 5.Samples, if requested. PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGPRODUCT REQUIREMENTS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION016000-3 SECTION017300 EXECUTION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1.Construction layout. 2.Field engineering and surveying. 3.Installationof the Work. 4.Cutting and patching. 5.Coordination of Owner-installed products. 6.Progress cleaning. 7.Starting and adjusting. 8.Protection of installed construction. 1.02QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. 1.Structural Elements: Shore, brace, and support structural element during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection 2.Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 3.Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 4.Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. B.Cutting and Patching Conference: Prior to proceeding, coordinate a meeting at the Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGEXECUTION JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION017300-1 Review areas of potential interference and conflicts. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01MATERIALS A.General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B.In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, and other construction affecting the Work. 1.Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities. B.Examination and Acceptance of Conditions:Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. C.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.02PREPARATION A.Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities servicng facilities occupied by Owner or others unless it has been previously arranged. B.Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGEXECUTION JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION017300-2 C.Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D.Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section013100"Project Management and Coordination." 3.03CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A.Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings,in relation to the existingbenchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architectpromptly. 3.04FIELD ENGINEERING A.Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. B.Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of twopermanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1.Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. 3.05INSTALLATION A.General: Locate the Workand components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1.Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2.Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3.Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. B.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C.Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditionsrequired for product performance until Substantial Completion. D.Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E.Tools and Equipment: Donot use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGEXECUTION JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION017300-3 F.Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. G.Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1.Mounting Heights:Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect and compliant with accessibility codes. 2.Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3.Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. H.Joints: Make joints of uniform width.Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. I.Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.06CUTTING AND PATCHING A.Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B.Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. C.Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. D.Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. E.Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closingup, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable. F.Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGEXECUTION JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION017300-4 3.07PROGRESS CLEANING A.General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. B.Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C.Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. D.Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E.Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F.Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G.Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. H.During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I.Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J.Limiting Exposures: Superviseconstruction operations to assure that no part of the construction,completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.08STARTING AND ADJUSTING A.Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B.Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. C.Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D.Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section014000 "Quality Requirements" UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGEXECUTION JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION017300-5 3.09PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A.Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 3.10CORRECTION OF THE WORK A.Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. B.Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C.Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidences of repair. D.Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E.Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGEXECUTION JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION017300-6 SECTION017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A.Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the listand reasons why the Work is incomplete. B.Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Submit three copies of list. C.Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1.02FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A.Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance.On receipt ofrequest, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completedor corrected before certificate will be issued. 1.03WARRANTIES A.Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. B.Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. C.Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operationand maintenance manuals. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGCLOSEOUT PROCEDURES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION017700-1 1.04OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A.Submit one paper copy and one electronic copy of the Operation and Maintenance Manualor provide a PDF copy if available. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A.General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect’s reference during normal working hours. B.Record Drawings: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised Drawings as modifications are issued. C.Record Specifications: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. D.Record Product Data: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. E.Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. 2.02OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A.Assemble a complete set of operational and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual specification sections. B.Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and index data in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-coated loose-leafbinder, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the printed title “OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL,” project name, and subject matter of contents. 1.Provide an electronic copy of the Operation and Maintenance Manual on a CD/DVD disk. Files to be in a PDF format and organized per the index if available. 2.03CLEANING MATERIALS A.Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 1. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGCLOSEOUT PROCEDURES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION017700-2 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A.Instruction: Instruct Owner’s personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. B.Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements. 3.02FINAL CLEANING A.General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B.Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGCLOSEOUT PROCEDURES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION017700-3 SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The General and Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. B. This section includes the fabrication and placement of reinforcing steel for concrete, and all related accessories. C. Reinforcing steel for use in bond beams, masonry columns, and lintels is specified in Division 4 and is not a part of the work in this section. D. Structural notes indicated on the drawings regarding concrete reinforcement shall be considered a part of this specification. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 2. ACI 301 - Standard Specification for Structural Concrete. 3. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 4. ACI 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement. 5. ASTM A82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain for Concrete Reinforcement. 6. ASTM A184 - Standard Specification for Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement. 7. ASTM A185 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcing, Plain for Concrete Reinforcement. 8. ASTM A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 9. AWS D1.4 - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel. 10. CRSI - Manual of Standard Practice. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 03 20 00 - 1 B. Where provisions of other pertinent codes and standards conflict with this specification, the more stringent provision shall govern. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Placing Drawings: Submit placing drawings showing fabrication dimensions and locations for placement of reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. Indicate bar sizes, spacing, locations, and quantities of reinforcing steel, bending and cutting diagrams, and supporting and spacing devices. Dowels shall be shown in placing drawings for the element that is to be placed first. Reinforcing steel descriptions or shop drawings shall be inch-pound sizes. B. Product Data: Submit product data sheets for all specified products. 1. Fibrous concrete reinforcing material. a. Application rate per cubic yard of concrete b. Manufacturer’s printed batching and mixing instructions. c. Letter of Certification that materials supplied meets or exceeds ASTM C1116. C. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Submit mill certifications at time of delivery. D. Splices: Submit request for splices not indicated in the Contract Documents. Request shall indicate locations, types, and lengths of splices for approval. E. Field Bending: Submit requests and procedure for field bending or straightening of reinforcement partially embedded in concrete not described in the Contract Documents. F. Reinforcement Relocation: Submit requests to adjust reinforcement spacing necessitated by conflicts with other reinforcement, conduits, etc. for approval. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate reinforcement installation with the placement of formwork and other embedded items such as inserts, conduit, pipe sleeves, drains, metal supports, anchor rods, etc. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver reinforcement to the jobsite in bundles sorted and labeled with durable tags indicating bar size, length, and shop drawing mark. B. Store elevated clear of ground and protect at all times from contamination and deterioration. C. Prevent bending, coating with earth, oil, or other material, or otherwise damaging the reinforcement. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 03 20 00 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Bar Deformations: Bars used for reinforcement shall be deformed except column spirals and welded wire reinforcement, which may be plain. B. Reinforcing Steel: Reinforcing steel shall conform to the ASTM standard and grade indicated in the General Notes on the Drawings. C. Micro Fiber Reinforcing: 100% virgin polypropylene, MD grade, fibers containing no reprocessed olefin materials and specifically manufactured for use as concrete secondary reinforcement. 1. Fiber length: Multi-Design Gradation Fibrillated Fibers 2. Mix proprietary materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, product data and technical bulletins. 3. Application Rate: 1 to 1½ lbs. per cubic yard or as recommended by the fiber- reinforcing manufacturer. a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Fibrasol F; Axim Concrete Technologies. 2) Fibermesh; Fibermesh, Div. of Synthetic Industries. 3) Forta; Forta Corporation. 4) Grace Fibers; W. R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Div. D. Synthetic Macro Fiber Reinforcing: Shall meet the requirements of ASTM C116, Type III, be approved by UL for use in a two-hour rated floor assembly, and be specifically manufactured for use as concrete secondary reinforcement. 1. Fiber Length: 1-1/2” to 2”. 2. Aspect Ratio: Between 70 and 100. 3. Specific Gravity: Between 0.90 and 0.93. 4. Mix proprietary materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, product data and technical bulletins. 5. Application Rate: Per drawings. a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include: 1) STRUX 90/40; Grace Construction Products. 2) Fibermesh 650; Propex Concrete Systems. 3) TUF-STRAND SF; Euclid Chemical Company. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 03 20 00 - 3 E. Welded Wire Reinforcement: Welded wire reinforcement shall conform to the ASTM standard indicated in the General Notes on the Drawings. F. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain-steel bars. Cut bars true to length with square ends and free of burrs. G. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. 2. Concrete cast against earth: Bars may be supported by precast concrete bricks or approved prefabricated wire bar supports with footpads large enough to support the weight of the bars and construction traffic without being pushed into underlying grade. Precast concrete blocks shall have a minimum compressive strength of 6,000 psi. H. Epoxy Anchoring System: Epoxy anchoring shall consist of a reinforcing dowel and the epoxy adhesive cartridge. 1. Reinforcing shall be as specified earlier in this Section. 2. Epoxy injection gel shall consist of a two-component structural epoxy adhesive applied in a dual cartridge dispensing system, which properly mixes the components at the point of application. Refer to General Notes for acceptable epoxy anchoring systems. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fabrication Tolerances: Reinforcing steel shall be shop fabricated within tolerances to conform in size, shape, quantity, dimensions, etc. to the Construction Drawings and approved Shop Drawings. B. Bar Condition: Bars shall be free from mill scale, excessive rust and other coatings, which would reduce or destroy the bond with the concrete. C. Bars Bending: Bars shall be bent cold, and no method of fabrication shall be used which would be injurious to the material. Heating of bars for bending is not permitted. D. Identification: After fabrication, bars shall be sorted, bundled and tagged with metal tags bearing the bar mark before delivery to the jobsite. E. Corner Bars: Provide corner bars to make reinforcing continuous at all times, including intersections at footings, walls, beams or caps. Such bars shall be the same size and spacing as the horizontal reinforcing and each leg shall have a length of at least 30 inches. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 03 20 00 - 4 F. Continuous reinforcing in beams and grade beams shall be lapped as follows unless noted otherwise: 1. Top bars Midspan 2. Bottom bars Directly over support G. Where beams and grade beams are simple span, top bars shall be continuous for full length and hooked down at each end. H. Reinforcing for wall footings shall extend into column footings a minimum of 2'-0". I. Dowels between footings and walls or columns shall be the same grade, size and spacing or number as the vertical reinforcing respectively, unless noted otherwise. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLACING A. Reinforcement Relocation: When necessary to move reinforcement beyond the specified spacing to avoid interference with other reinforcement, or embedded items, submit resulting arrangement of reinforcement to Engineer for approval. B. Reinforcement Cutting: Cutting of reinforcement which conflicts with embedded objects is not acceptable. C. Welded Wire Reinforcement: Extend welded wire reinforcement to within 1 inch of the concrete edge. Lap edges and ends of fabric sheets a minimum of one full mesh square plus 2”. Support welded wire reinforcement during placing of concrete to assure required positioning in the slab. Do not place wire reinforcement on grade or metal deck and raise into position in freshly-placed concrete. D. Wire Tie Orientation: Set wire ties so that ends are directed away from concrete surface. E. Slab on Grade Reinforcement Placement: Place shrinkage and temperature reinforcement 2 inches from the top surface of the slabs on grade unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. F. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. G. Support for Reinforcement: Unless noted otherwise, supports for reinforcement shall have Class 2 protection as defined in the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. Submit data on supports indicating class of protection at all different locations for approval. H. Fibrous Reinforcement: Add fibrous reinforcement to concrete materials at the time concrete is batched in amounts indicated on the approved submittals for each type of concrete required. 1. Mix concrete for uniform and complete distribution of fibrous reinforcement. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 03 20 00 - 5 I. Support for Bars in Concrete Cast on Ground: Bar supports for slabs on grade, grade beams, footings, and all other concrete cast directly onto grade shall be supported at an average spacing of 4 feet or less in each direction. J. Securing Reinforcing Bars: All bars must be placed, spaced, secured and supported prior to casting concrete. Bars embedded in hardened or partially hardened concrete shall not be bent unless approved in writing prior to placement by the Engineer of Record. K. Foot Traffic: Restrict foot traffic over the slab on grade reinforcing after it has been properly positioned. L. Reinforcement at Expansion Joints: Do not continue reinforcement or other embedded metal items bonded to concrete through expansion joints. Dowels bonded on only one side of a joint and waterstops may extend through joint. M. Pumping Concrete: When using a pump to place concrete, pump hose shall be supported directly on forms. Do not allow hose to rest on reinforcing bars if doing so could cause displacement of bars. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 03 20 00 - 6 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The General and Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. B. The work includes all items required for executing and completing the cast-in-place concrete work and related work shown on the drawings or specified herein. Work shall include installation of items furnished in other sections of these specifications. C. Concrete paving, walks, and curbs are specified elsewhere. D. Structural notes indicated on the drawings regarding Cast-In-Place concrete shall be considered a part of this specification. E. Refer to Section 03 54 13 for gypsum cement underlayment. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified herein: 1. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 2. ACI 301 - Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete 3. ACI 305.1 - Specification for Hot Weather Concreting 4. ACI 306.1 - Standard Specification for Cold-Weather Concrete 5. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 6. ASTM C31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 7. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 8. ASTM C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 9. ASTM C42 - Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. 10. ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 03 30 00 - 1 11. ASTM C143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 12. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 13. ASTM C157 - Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic- Cement Mortar and Concrete 14. ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. 15. ASTM C172 - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 16. ASTM C173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. 17. ASTM C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 18. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 19. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 20. ASTM C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 21. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete. 22. ASTM C1017 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete. 23. ASTM C1064 - Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Portland Cement Concrete. 24. ASTM C1077 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation. 25. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). 26. ASTM E154 - Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover. 27. ASTM E329 –Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Material Used in Construction 28. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) - Manual of Standard Practice. B. Comply with all local building code requirements which are more stringent than those listed above. All referenced codes or standards shall be the most currently adopted as of the date for Receipt of Proposal. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 03 30 00 - 2 C. Where any provision of other pertinent codes and standards conflict with this specification, the more stringent provision shall govern. D. Maintain records verifying materials used are of the specified and accepted types and sizes and are in conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. E. Use of testing services will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to furnish materials and construction in full compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.3 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Testing and inspection will be Owner provided. B. Sampling and testing requirements: 1. Take samples of fresh concrete at the job site for each mix design placed each day. Sampling and testing shall be done after the final addition and proper mixing of any water or admixtures that are added on site. a. Personnel and testing equipment shall meet the requirements of ASTM E329. b. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. 1) On a given project, if the total volume of concrete is such that the frequency of testing required above would provide less than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, tests shall be made from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five batches are used. c. A strength test shall be the average of the strengths of two cylinders made from the same sample of concrete and tested at 28 days. 2. For each sample of fresh concrete, perform the following duties: a. Measure and record slump in accordance with ASTM C143. b. Measure and record temperature in accordance with ASTM C1064. 1) Provide one test hourly when air temperature is 40F (4.4C) and below and when 80F (27C) and above, and one test for each composite sample. c. Measure and record air content by volume in accordance with either ASTM C231 or ASTM C173. d. Mold three cylinders (laboratory cylinders) in accordance with ASTM C31 to be laboratory-cured. Protect from moisture loss and maintain at 60F to 80F for 24 to 48 hours before moving. Deliver cylinders to testing laboratory for curing and testing. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 03 30 00 - 3 e. Mold one cylinder (field cylinder) in accordance with ASTM C31 to be field-cured. Field cylinder shall be placed as near as possible to the in- place concrete from which it was taken, protected, and cured in the same manner. Deliver field-cured cylinder to testing laboratory, and measure and record compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C39. Field cylinder shall be used to determine if concrete footings, walls, or piers have reached the required compressive strength for steel erection to begin. 3. Measure and record compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C39 for laboratory cylinders. Test one laboratory cylinder at 7 days and all other cylinders at 28 days. Acceptance is based on the average of the two laboratory cured 28-day tests. Notify Architect in the event strength levels do not meet the acceptance requirements of ACI 318. a. Any additional cylinders molded for Contractor to have a compressive strength test done before seven days shall be at the Contractor's expense. 4. Prepare and submit test reports to the Architect, Engineer, Contractor, and Supplier. Reports shall be completed and furnished within 48 hours of testing. Refer to description in Submittals. 5. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Concrete Materials: Submit information on concrete materials as listed below. 1. Cementitious materials: Submit type, class, producer name, and certification not more than 90 days old of compliance with applicable ASTM standard. 2. Aggregates: Submit type, pit or quarry location, producer name, gradations, specific gravity, water content, and certification not more than 90 days old. 3. Admixtures: Submit product data sheet. Product data shall include: dosages and performance data, brand names, producers, chloride ion concentrations, and certifications of compliance with applicable ASTM standard. Certifications shall not be more than 90 days old. 4. Water: Submit name of source. B. Product Data: Prepare and submit product and performance data for materials and accessories, including patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, finish materials and other concrete related items. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 03 30 00 - 4 C. Concrete Mix Design: 1. Concrete mix design submittals shall be submitted at least 14 days prior to placing concrete. 2. Submit concrete mixture proportions and characteristics for each concrete mix. Include standard deviation analysis or trial batch data with mix design. Submit historical field test data to demonstrate the average compressive strength for approval. Concrete mix proportions, materials, and handling methods for field test data or trial batches shall be the same as used for the work. Include the following information for each mix design: a. Water/cementitious materials ratio. b. Slump per ASTM C143 c. Air content per ASTM C231 or ASTM C173 d. Unit weight of concrete per ASTM C138 e. Compressive strength at 28 days per ASTM C39 3. If trial batches are used, submit representative samples of each proposed ingredient to independent testing laboratory for use in preparation of mix design. 4. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. 5. Provide a record copy of the final mix designs and test results to the testing agency prior to commencement of the concrete work. D. Concrete Finish Shop Drawings: Submit drawings indicating type of finish to be used at each location. E. Slab-on-Grade Joint Layout: Submit drawings for proposed slab-on-grade control joint and construction joint layout for approval. F. Test Reports: Submit laboratory test reports for concrete materials, mix design, compressive strength, slump, air content, and temperature. Each report shall indicate date of sampling, date of test, mix design, and location of concrete in structure. G. Repair Methods: When stains, rust, efflorescence, and surface deposits must be removed, submit the proposed method of removal. H. Certificates: Submit written certification regarding the design mix from the ready-mix supplier and the admixture manufacturer stating all concrete and admixtures do not contain chloride ions in excess of concentrations specified herein. I. Placement Notification: Notify the Architect at least 24 hours in advance of concrete placement. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 03 30 00 - 5 J. Adjustments: Submit any adjustments to mixture proportions or changes in materials, suppliers, or sources along with supporting documentation during the course of the work. K. Cold Weather Procedure Submittal: Refer to Cold Weather Concreting article in Part 3 for more information. 1.5 MATERIAL DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Cementitious materials: Store cementitious materials in dry weather tight buildings, bins, or silos that exclude contaminants. B. Aggregates: Store and handle aggregate in a manner that will avoid segregation and prevent contamination with other materials or other sizes of aggregates. Store aggregates so as to drain freely. C. Admixtures: Protect stored admixtures against contamination, evaporation, or damage. Protect liquid admixtures from freezing and temperature changes, which would adversely affect their performance. Handle chemical admixtures in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C150, Type I Normal, and be a standard brand of Portland cement. Use one brand of cement throughout project, unless approved in writing by the Engineer. Cement, which conforms to ASTM C150 Type II, may be used if it also meets the requirements of ASTM C150 Type I. Cement used in concrete shall be of the same brand and type as the cement used in the concrete represented by the submitted field test data or used in the trial mixtures. Maintain consistent cement color throughout project unless directed otherwise by architectural requirements. 1. Total replacement of Portland cement by supplementary cementitious materials in design mixture shall not exceed 50% (by weight). B. Supplementary Cementitious Materials 1. Fly Ash: Fly ash shall conform to ASTM C618, Class C or Class F. Replacement of Portland cement by fly ash shall not exceed the following (percentages are by weight): a. Concrete Flatwork: 15 percent. b. Mass Concrete (more than two feet thick): 50 percent. c. All other concrete: 25 percent. d. Concrete to be placed in cold weather as defined herein: No fly ash allowed unless the cold weather procedure submitted has compensated for the increased setting time and decreased rate of strength gain due to cold weather and fly ash. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 03 30 00 - 6 2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. a. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slab Limit: 50% by weight of total cementitious materials. b. In mass concrete more than 2 feet thick, the usage rate may be 80% by weight of total cementitious materials. 3. Silica Fume: ASTM C1240, amorphous silica. a. Silica Fume Limit: 10% by weight of total cementitious materials. 4. Combined Fly Ash and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: a. Supplementary Cementitious Materials Limit: 50% with fly ash not exceeding 25% by weight of total cementitious materials. b. In mass concrete more than 2 feet thick: 80% with fly ash not exceeding 50% by weight of total cementitious materials. 5. Combined Fly Ash and Silica Fume: a. Supplementary Cementitious Materials Limit: 35% with fly ash not exceeding 25% and silica fume not exceeding 10% by weight of total cementitious materials. 6. Combined Fly Ash, Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slab, and Silica Fume: a. Supplementary Cementitious Materials Limit: 50% with fly ash not exceeding 25% and silica fume not exceeding 10% by weight of total cementitious materials. C. Blended Hydraulic Cements 1. Portland Blast-Furnace Slag Cement: ASTM C 595M, Type IS. a. Blast-Furnace Slag Content: 25% to 50% by weight of total cementitious materials. 2. Portland-Pozzolan Cement: ASTM C 595M, Type IP. a. Pozzolan Content: 15% to 40% by weight of Pozzolan total cementitious materials. 3. Pozzolan-Modified Portland Cement: ASTM C 595M, Type I (PM). a. Pozzolan Content: 0% to 15% by weight of total cementitious materials. 4. Slag-Modified Portland Cement: ASTM C 595M, Type I (SM. a. Blast-Furnace Slag Content: 0% to 25% by weight of total cementitious materials. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 03 30 00 - 7 D. Coarse Aggregate for Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ASTM C33. Provide coarse aggregate from a single source for exposed concrete. Gradations shall be similar to that described in the following table: COARSE AGGREGATE GRADATIONS SIEVE SIZE - PERCENT PASSING Grade 1-1/2" 1" 3/4" 1/2" 3/8" No. 4 No. 16 No. 90-100 420-55 0-15 --- 0-5 --- Note 1 57 100 95-100 --- 25-60 0-10 0-10 --- 67 100 90-100 --- 20-55 0-10 --- 89 --- --- --- 100 90-100 20-55 0-10 1. Shall be 100 percent passing the 2" sieve. E. Fine Aggregate for Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ASTM C33. Provide fine aggregate from a single source for exposed concrete. Fine aggregate shall consist of washed sand. Gradations shall be similar to that described in the following table: FINE AGGREGATE GRADATIONS SIEVE SIZE - PERCENT PASSING No. Grade No. 3/8 No. 4 No. 8 No. 16 No. 50 No. 80 100 FA 100 95-100 80-100 50-85 5-30 --- 0-10 F. Do not use aggregates containing deleterious substances that could cause spalling on any exterior exposed surface. These include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Organic impurities. 2. Ferrous metals. 3. Soluble salts. 4. Coal, lignite, or other lightweight materials. 5. Soft particles. 6. Clay lumps and friable particles. 7. Cherts of less than 2.40 specific gravity. G. Water: Mixing water for concrete shall meet the requirements of ASTM C94. Water shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of acids, alkalies, organic materials, chloride ions and oils deleterious to concrete or reinforcing steel. H. Testing agency shall be given access to plants and stockpiles to obtain samples for testing for compliance with the Contract Documents. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 03 30 00 - 8 2.2 ADMIXTURES A. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures. Calcium chloride thiocyanates or admixtures containing more than 0.05 percent chloride ions by weight are not permitted. B. Water Reducing Admixture: Material shall comply with ASTM C494, Type A. Acceptable manufacturers and products include: 1. Euclid Chemical Company - Eucon WR Series. 2. Sika Chemical Corp. - Plastocrete 161. 3. GRT – Polychem 400 NC. 4. Grace Construction Products - WRDA 82. C. High Range Water Reducing Admixture (superplasticizer): Material shall comply with ASTM C494, Type F or Type G. Acceptable manufacturers and products include: 1. Euclid Chemical Company - Eucon 37 or Plastol Series. 2. Sika – ViscoCrete 2100. 3. GRT – Melchem. 4. Grace Construction Products - Mira 110. D. High Range Water Reducing, Slump Retaining Admixture: Material shall comply with ASTM C494, Type F or Type G. Acceptable manufacturers and products include: 1. Euclid Chemical Company - Eucon 537, Eucon 1037, or Plastol Series. 2. Sika – Sikament 686. 3. GRT – Melchem – M. 4. Grace Construction Products – ADVA FLEX. E. Non-Chloride Accelerator: Material shall comply with ASTM C494, Type C or Type E, and not contain a higher chloride ion concentration than municipal drinking water. Acceptable manufacturers and products include: 1. Euclid Chemical Company - Accelguard Series. 2. Sika Chemical Corp. - Sika Rapid-1. 3. GRT – Polychem HE. 4. Grace Construction Products – Lubricon NCA. F. Air Entraining Admixture: Air entraining admixture shall comply with ASTM C260, and be certified by the manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures to be used. Acceptable manufacturers and products include: 1. Euclid Chemical Company - Air-Mix or AEA Series. 2. Sika Chemical Corporation - Sika-Aer. 3. GRT – Polychem VR. 4. Grace Construction Products - Darex II or Daravair 1000. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 03 30 00 - 9 G. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: Material shall comply with ASTM C494, Types B and D, and not contain more than 0.05% chloride ions by weight of admixture. Acceptable manufacturers and products include: 1. Euclid Chemical Company - Eucon Retarder Series. 2. Sika Chemical Corporation - Plastiment. 3. GRT – Polychem – R. 4. Grace Construction Products - Daratard 17 or Recover. H. Set Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Admixture shall contain at least 30% calcium nitrite, while meeting the requirements of ASTM C494 as a Type C admixture. Acceptable manufacturers and products include: 1. Euclid Chemical Company - Eucon CIA. 2. Grace Construction Products - DCI. I. Shrinkage Reducing and Shrinkage Compensating Admixture: Admixture used for the compensation and reduction of shrinkage in Portland cement concrete. Acceptable manufacturers and products include: 1. Euclid Chemical Company - Conex. 2. Grace Construction Products - Eclipse Floor 200. 3. BASF - Tetraguard. J. Admixtures used in concrete shall be the same brand, type, and dosage used in concrete represented by field test data or used in trial mixes. 2.3 CURING PRODUCTS A. Moisture Retaining Cover 1. Plastic Film: Use 6 mil polyethylene film sheet materials that meet the requirements of ASTM C171. 2. White burlap-polyethylene sheet meeting ASTM C171. 3. Reinforced Curing Paper complying with ASTM C171. 4. Moisture Retaining Fabric: A naturally colored, non-woven, polypropylene fabric with a 4-mil, non-perforated reflective (white) polyethylene coating containing stabilizers to resist degradation from ultraviolet light. Fabric shall exhibit low permeability and high moisture retention. Acceptable manufacturers and products include: a. PNA Construction Technologies, Inc: Hydracure M15. b. Reef Industries Incorporated: Transguard 4000. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 03 30 00 - 10 B. Curing and Sealing Compound: Clear, membrane-forming curing and sealing compound complying with ASTM C309, Type 1, and ASTM C1315, Type 1, Class A. Compound shall dry to a clear finish, resist yellowing due to ultraviolet degradation and provide a long lasting finish that has high resistance to chemicals, oil, grease, deicing salts, and abrasion. 1. Curing and sealing compounds used on interior enclosed environments shall be a water-borne product and VOC compliant as required by the U.S. EPA Architectural Coating Rule. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Patching Mortar: Non-shrink, non-slump, non-metallic, quick setting. Acceptable manufacturers and products: 1. Euclid Chemical Company - Eucospeed. 2. BASF - Thorite. 3. Adhesive Technologies. - Hard Rok Vertipatch. 4. W.R. Meadows - Speed Crete (Red Line). 5. Dayton Superior – Re-Crete 20 minute. 6. SpecChem - Precast Patch. B. Expansion Joint Material: Preformed, resilient, non-extruding asphalt impregnated resilient fiber conforming to ASTM D1751. Thickness of expansion joint material shall be 1/2” unless noted otherwise on the drawings. C. Magnesium phosphate patching cement specially designed for cold weather grouting and anchoring. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. BASF - Set-45. 2. Euclid Chemical Company - Eucospeed MP. D. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A, not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm) thick. Acceptable manufacturers and products: 1. Stego Industries, LLC - Stego Wrap. 2. W.R. Meadows, Inc. - Perminator. 3. Raven Industries - Vapor Block 4. Insulation Solutions - Viper VaporCheck II. E. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; colorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces. Acceptable manufacturers and products: 1. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc. - Intraseal 2. Curecrete Chemical Co., Inc. - Ashford Formula 3. Dayton Superior Corporation - Day-Chem Sure Hard (J-17) 4. Euclid Chemical Company - Eucosil UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 03 30 00 - 11 5. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. - Seal Hard 6. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc - Vexcon Starseal PS 7. SpecChem - SpecHard F. Control Joint Filler: Flexible, single-component polyurethane sealant with backer rod compliant with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25. Apply sealant per manufacturers written recommendations. Acceptable manufacturers and products: 1. Dayton Superior – Perma 230 SL. 2. Euclid Chemical Company – Eucolastic I. 3. Sonneborn – Sonolastic SL 1. 2.5 STRENGTH AND PROPERTIES A. Concrete Mix Designs: Refer to Drawings for specified compressive strength. Proportion concrete mixes according to the properties in the following tables. The concrete supplier may produce a mix at a lower water-cement ratio to allow for adjustment of slump at the site by adding water. The addition of site water shall be in accordance with ASTM C94, and the total water-cement ratio shall not exceed the value specified below. CoarseFineRange AggregateAggregateofMax.Other ClassGradationGradationSlump w/c Air Content Requirements Use water reducing D 57 or 67 FA 4" to 6" 0.50 — admixture to achieve slump specified E 4 or 57 FA 1" to 4" 0.50 — Note: w/c = water-cementitious materials ratio. B. Schedule of Concrete Classes: Provide concrete of the specified class according to the following schedule. 1. Footings: Class E 2. Interior slabs on grade: Class D C. Slump of Superplasticized Concrete: Concrete containing high-range water reducing admixtures (superplasticizer) shall have 8" maximum slump, unless otherwise approved by Structural Engineer. Concrete shall arrive at job site with 2" to 3" slump, be verified, then high range water reducing admixture added to increase slump to approved level. D. Accelerators: Add non-chloride accelerator to all concrete slabs placed at air temperatures below 50F. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 03 30 00 - 12 E. Water Reducer: Add water reducing admixture or high range water reducing admixtures (superplasticizers) as follows: 1. All pumped concrete. 2. Fiber reinforced concrete. 3. As required for placement or workability. 4. As required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 5. Concrete with water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. F. No other admixtures shall be used unless approved by Structural Engineer of record. G. Chlorides: Admixtures or other ingredients including aggregates containing calcium chloride or more than 0.05% chloride ions by weight shall not be used. H. Workability: Concrete shall have a workability such that it will fill the forms without voids, honeycombs, or rock pockets with proper vibration without permitting materials to separate or excess water to collect on the surface. I. Concrete Temperatures: Minimum concrete temperature of fresh concrete varies in relation to average air temperature over a 24-hour period as follows: 1. Air temperature below 0F Concrete temperature 70F min. 2. Air temperature 0F to 30F Concrete temperature 65F min. 3. Air temperature 30F to 50F Concrete temperature 50F min. 4. Air temperature above 50F No minimum temperature The maximum temperature of concrete at the time of delivery shall be 90F. When concrete temperature exceeds 90F, concrete supplier shall attempt to reduce temperature by shading aggregates and cement and cooling mix water. When these methods fail to reduce concrete temperature below 90F, supplier shall use ice in the water to reduce the concrete temperature. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Do not place concrete until data on materials and mix designs have been approved, Architect has been notified, and all other affected trades have coordinated their work. B. Remove snow, ice, frost, water, mud, and other foreign material from surfaces, reinforcing bars and embedded items against which concrete will be placed. C. Do not allow form release agent to contact reinforcing bars. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 03 30 00 - 13 3.2 SLABS A. Slab on Grade: 1. All interior slabs on grades shall have a polyethylene vapor retarder conforming to ASTM E1745. Lap all joints minimum 6” and seal edges with adhesive tape. Fit vapor retarder around utilities and seal with adhesive tape as required. Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Refer to Drawings and Section 31 23 00 for required sub-grade preparation beneath slabs on grade. 3. Where vapor retarder is not used below slab on grade, wet sub-grade below slab prior to placing concrete. Subgrade shall be moist with no free water and no muddy or soft spots. 4. Saw cut control joints: Cut with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. Control joints shall be located along column lines, with intermediate joints spaced at a maximum distance of 36 times the slab thickness, unless noted otherwise. Control Joints shall be continuous, not staggered or offset. Slab panels shall have a maximum length to width ratio of 1.5 to 1. Provide additional control joints at all reentrant or isolated corners formed in the slab on grade. Refer to Drawings for typical control joint detail, and submit a proposed layout of slab-on-grade control joints for approval. 5. Provide isolation joints against grade beams and along foundation walls. Form isolation joints with 1/2" expansion joint material. Extend isolation joint material full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Depress slabs as required for mats architectural finishes, pits and kitchen equipment. Obtain layout and locations from Architect. 7. Verify completion of all under slab work with mechanical and electrical trades before placing slabs. 8. Slope slabs as indicated on Drawings and to provide positive drainage. Slope slab keeping bottom level and varying top. Maintain minimum thickness of concrete as indicated on Drawings. Refer to floor finishes for tolerances. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. Construction Sequence Submittal: Contractor shall submit a construction sequence indicating construction joints and the pour sequence. B. Vertical: Locate vertical construction joints in grade beams not farther than a maximum of 100 feet on center. Coordinate joint locations with architectural design. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 03 30 00 - 14 C. Reinforcing: Stop all welded wire reinforcement and/or reinforcing at construction joint in slabs on grade and provide dowel bars as detailed. Provide reinforcement at other construction joints as detailed. Roughen and thoroughly clean the surface of the concrete, remove all laitance, and wet the surface before placing new concrete against the joint. Slush vertical joints with a neat cement grout before placing new concrete. 3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Place concrete as continuously as possible until placement is complete. Do not place against concrete that has attained initial set, except at authorized joints. If, for any reason, concrete pour is delayed for more than 45 minutes, bulkhead off pour at last acceptable construction joint. Immediately remove excess concrete and clean forms. B. Do not begin to place concrete during periods of rain, sleet or snow unless adequate protection is provided. C. No concrete shall be cast onto or against sub-grades containing free water, frost, ice or snow. D. Notify the architect in advance if concrete is to be pumped. E. Do not place concrete until all reinforcement is in place, forms have been thoroughly cleaned and approval has been given. F. Do not accept concrete delivered to the job site more than 90 minutes after initial mixing. G. Concrete from its point of release to mixers, hoppers, or conveyances, shall not be permitted to drop more than 5 feet (10 feet for concrete containing high range water reducers). Deposit concrete directly into conveyances and directly from conveyances to final points of deposit. Sufficient transportation equipment in good working order shall be on hand before work begins. All conveying equipment must be clean and kept clean during concreting operations. Take every possible precaution to prevent segregation or loss of ingredients. H. Deposit concrete in wall forms in layers not greater than 12 inches in depth, each layer being compacted by internal vibration before succeeding layer is placed. I. Place concrete as near as possible to its final position to prevent segregation. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete within forms. Consolidate concrete in walls, columns, beams and slabs or joist construction thicker than 8" with internal vibrators (8,000 to 12,000 V.P.M.). Slabs less than 8" thick may be consolidated with internal vibrators (9,000 to 13,500 V.P.M.) or vibrating screeds supported on forms, boards or rails, approved by Structural Engineer, supplement vibration by forking or spading by hand along surfaces adjacent to forms and construction joints. J. Re-tempering of concrete will not be permitted. Concrete that has obtained its initial set shall be discarded. K. Exercise care in placing concrete over waterproof membranes, rigid insulation and/or protection boards to avoid damaging those materials. Report damage immediately, and do not proceed until damage is repaired. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 03 30 00 - 15 L. Remove loose debris from surfaces, thoroughly wet and slush with a neat cement grout immediately before placing new concrete, or apply bonding compound to surface and let dry before placing new concrete. M. Protect existing concrete work to be exposed to view and other finished materials from damage and staining resulting from concreting operations. Handle concrete carefully to avoid dripping and spillage. Remove spilled concrete from existing surfaces immediately. Covering sills, ledges, and other surfaces with protective coverings may be necessary to protect the work. N. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete Work. O. Refer to mechanical and civil for any equipment pads. 3.5 CONCRETE FINISHES AND TOLERANCES A. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 CONCRETE SLAB FINISHES AND TOLERANCES A. Trowel Finish: 1. Screed concrete to an even plane, float, then power trowel the surface. 2. Hand trowel the surface smooth and free of trowel marks. Continue hand troweling until a ringing sound is produced as the floor is troweled. 3. Provide trowel finish as indicated on the Drawings and at the following locations: a. Concrete floors exposed in finished work unless otherwise indicated. b. Slabs to receive curing compounds and sealers. c. Slabs to receive resilient flooring or carpet. B. Fine Broom Finish: 1. Screed concrete to an even plane, float, then power trowel the surface. Provide fine hair broom finish perpendicular to slope, free of loose particles, ridges, projections, voids and concrete droppings. 2. Provide fine broom finish as indicated on the Drawings and at the following locations: a. Stoop slabs. b. Raised curbs and walkway areas. c. Slabs to receive thin set ceramic tile. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 03 30 00 - 16 C. Broom Finish: 1. Screed concrete to an even plane and then float. Immediately after concrete has received a floated finish, give the concrete surface a coarse transverse scored texture by drawing a coarse broom across the surface. 2. Provide as indicated on the Drawings and at the following locations: a. ADA ramp slabs. b. Exterior walkway slabs. D. Floor Finish Tolerances: Floor finish tolerances shall be measured by placing a freestanding (unleveled) 10 foot straightedge anywhere on the slab and allowing it to rest upon two high spots within 72 hours after placement of slab and removal of shoring (if present). The gap at any point between the straightedge and the floor (and between the high spots) shall not exceed: 1. Slab on Grade (Office, School): 1/4” E. Slab Drainage: Finish all concrete slabs to proper elevations to insure that all surface moisture will drain freely to floor drains, and that no puddle areas exist. Contractor shall bear the cost of corrections to provide positive drainage. Refer to mechanical and architectural drawings for floor drain locations. F. Special Tolerances for Concrete Slabs: No abrupt change in vertical elevation of 1/4" or more is acceptable at the interface between slabs and within areas where pedestrian traffic is expected. 3.7 CONCRETE CURING A. Freshly placed concrete shall be protected from premature drying and excessively hot temperatures. B. Concrete other than high-early strength shall be maintained above 50F and in a moist condition for at least the first 7 days after placement, except when special curing is used. Special curing procedures shall not be used without written permission from the Structural Engineer of Record. C. Formed surfaces shall be cured by leaving the formwork in place during the curing period. D. Protect concrete from excessive changes in temperature during the curing period and at the termination of the curing process. Changes in the temperature of the concrete shall be as uniform as possible and shall not exceed 5F in any one hour or 50F in any 24 hour period. E. Protect concrete from injury from the elements until full strength is developed. Protect from mechanical injury. F. During cold weather construction, all footings shall be protected from frost penetration until the building is enclosed and temporary heat is provided. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 03 30 00 - 17 3.8 SLAB CURING A. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. Use one of the methods described below. B. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing for Concrete Floors not Exposed in Final Condition: Cover concrete surface with waterproof sheet material as soon as finishing operations are complete and the concrete is sufficiently hard to be undamaged by covering. The cover shall be placed flat on the concrete surface, avoiding wrinkles. Sprinkle concrete with water as necessary during application of covering. Place in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and seal with waterproof tape or adhesive. Verify that the concrete is continuously wet under the sheets; otherwise, add water through soaker hoses under the sheets. Weight down covering to prevent displacement. Immediately repair any holes or tears during the curing period using polyethylene sheet and waterproof tape. Curing process shall be maintained for a minimum of 7 days. C. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by low pressure spray equipment or roller as soon as finishing operations are complete, free water on the surface has disappeared and no water sheen can be seen. Follow the manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. Verify compatibility of the curing compound with paint, finishes, or toppings that require positive bond to the concrete. If curing compound is not compatible with paint finishes or toppings, utilize a dissipating curing compound and remove in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.9 PENETRATING LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer’s written instructions. B. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and complete surface repairs in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. C. Do not apply to concrete that is less than seven days old. D. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet; and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous. 3.10 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. C. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 03 30 00 - 18 D. Install semi-rigid joint filler in saw-cut joints and in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. 3.11 APPLICATION OF FLOOR SEALER - FINISH COAT A. Give concrete floors as indicated in Room Finish Schedule and where exposed in finished Work, second coat of curing and sealing compound immediately prior to Substantial Completion. B. Clean floors and apply sealer strictly according to manufacturer's instructions. Dilution and coverage shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Apply sealer evenly. 3.12 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING A. Definition: Cold weather shall be defined as a period when for more than three successive days the average daily outdoor temperature drops below 40F. The average daily temperature is the average of the highest and lowest temperature during the period from midnight to midnight. When temperatures above 50F occur during more than half of any 24 hour duration, the period shall not be regarded as cold weather. B. All cast-in-place concrete work occurring during cold weather shall conform to all requirements of ACI 306.1, “Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting”, published by the American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, except as modified by the contract documents or this specification. C. Planning: The General Contractor, concrete contractor, concrete supplier and the architect shall have a pre-construction conference to outline the cold weather concreting operations concerning the placing, finishing, curing and protection of the concrete during cold weather. Pre-construction conference shall occur before cold weather is expected to occur. D. Detailed procedure submittal: Concrete contractor shall prepare and submit for review detailed procedures for the production, transportation placement, protection, curing and temperature monitoring of concrete during cold weather. Include procedures to be implemented upon abrupt changes in weather conditions. Do not begin cold weather concreting until these procedures have been reviewed and approved. E. Mixing: Concrete flatwork poured in cold weather shall be proportioned to obtain a lower slump to minimize the amount of bleed water during finishing. All bleed water should be skimmed off flatwork prior to troweling. Concrete that will be exposed to cycles of freezing and thawing while saturated should be properly air entrained as outlined in this specification. F. Protection of Concrete: Cure and protect concrete against damage from freezing for a minimum period of 72 hours, unless approved by the structural engineer. The protection period may be reduced according to ACI 306.1 requirements. Concrete contractor shall submit a letter of request to reduce the protection period, by outlining the method used to achieve the reduction per ACI 306.1. 1. When practical for the construction schedule, formwork shall be insulated and remain in place for at least the required protection period. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 03 30 00 - 19 G. Concrete Temperatures: The minimum temperature of concrete immediately after placement shall be as specified in the following table. Mixing Temperatures SectionMinimum Maximum Sizetemperature of gradualAbove Below 0 to 30F concrete as decrease in 30F0F placed and surface maintained during temperature the protection during any 24 periodhours after the end of the protection. < 12 in 55F 50F 60F 65F 70F 12-36 50F 40F 55F 60F 65F in 36-72 50F 30F 50F 55F 60F in > 72 in 50F 20F 45F 50F 55F H. Mixing Temperatures: As the ambient air temperature decreases the concrete mixing temperature shall be increased to compensate for the heat lost in the period between mixing and placement. The concrete supplier shall use one or both of the following methods for increasing the concrete temperature. 1. Heating the mixing water to a temperature necessary to offset the temperature losses during transport. Supplier shall not heat water to temperatures in excess of 140F, without taking special precautions as outlined in ACI 306. 2. Heating the aggregate with a circulated steam piping system. I. Temperature measurements: The Contractor shall be responsible for monitoring and recording the concrete temperatures during placement and throughout the protection period. 1. Inspection personnel shall keep a record of the date, time, outside air temperature, temperature of concrete as placed, and weather conditions. 2. Temperature of the concrete and the outside air shall be recorded at regular intervals but not less than twice in a 24 hour period. The record shall include temperatures at several points within the enclosure and on the concrete surface of sufficient frequency to determine a range of temperatures. 3. Inspection agency shall submit the temperature logs to the Architect for permanent job records. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 03 30 00 - 20 3.13 HOT WEATHER PROTECTION A. Definition: Hot weather shall be defined as any combination of high ambient temperature, low relative humidity, high winds and intense solar radiation that leads to higher than usual evaporation. The table below defines low relative humidity based on air temperature. For a given air temperature, if the relative humidity is equal to or less than the specified minimum, provisions for hot weather concreting shall be as follows: Air Temperature Minimum Relative Humidity 90% 105F 80% 100F 70% 95F 60% 90F 50% 85F 40% 80F 30% 75F B. Scheduling: When hot weather is expected, adjust concrete placement schedules to avoid placing or finishing during the period from noon until 3:00 pm. When possible, slab pours should be delayed until the building is enclosed to protect the concrete from wind and direct sunlight, Construction schedule shall account for 7 day moist curing period. C. Mixing: Concrete supplier shall adjust mix designs and admixtures to minimize slump loss. Concrete shall be mixed at a water-cement, which is lower than the specified maximum to allow for the adjustment of slump by addition of water in the field. Water reduction shall be accomplished without reducing initial slump by increasing dosage of water reducing admixture. D. Preparation: Do not order concrete earlier than is required to avoid delays. Cool forms, subgrades and reinforcing bars with water spray from fog nozzle prior to concrete placement. E. Delivery: Site traffic shall be coordinated and delivery times scheduled to minimize waiting times for concrete trucks. F. Placement: Preparations shall be made to place and consolidate the concrete at the fastest possible rate. Maintain a continuous flow of concrete to the job site to avoid development of cold joints, during placement of slabs, apply fog spray to prevent moisture loss without causing surplus water to stand on concrete surface. G. Finishing: Finish concrete as fast as practical. Continue fogging concrete during finishing. Where fogging is not possible, apply sprayable moisture-retaining film between finishing passes. H. Curing: Formed concrete shall be covered with a waterproof material to retain moisture. Flat work shall be moisture cured as described in this specification. Moist curing shall continue for at least 7 days. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 03 30 00 - 21 3.14 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sampling and testing services as described in Part 1 of this specification section shall be performed. B. In cases where samples have not been taken or tests conducted as specified or strength of laboratory test cylinders for a particular portion of the structure fails to meet requirements of ACI 301, for evaluation of concrete strength, Structural Engineer shall have the right to order compressive or flexural test specimens or both be taken from the hardened concrete according to ASTM C42, load tests according to ACI 318, or such other tests as may be necessary to clearly establish the strength of the in situ concrete, and such tests shall be paid for by the Contractor. 3.15 REPAIR OF DEFECTIVE AREAS A. All repair of defective areas shall be made, with prior approval of Architect, as to method and procedure, in accordance with Section 5 of ACI 301, except specified bonding compound must be used. B. Patch form tie holes at the following locations: 1. Unfinished exposed concrete (not scheduled for painting, plus at board formed concrete finish). 2. All other areas: Prime voids with bonding compound and fill with patching mortar. Strike flush without overlap, float to uniform texture to match adjacent surfaces. C. All structural repairs shall be made, with prior approval of the Architect/Engineer, as to method and procedure, using the specified epoxy adhesive and/or epoxy mortar. D. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white Portland cement and standard Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 03 30 00 - 22 E. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. 3.16 CLEANING A. Clean exposed concrete to remove laitance, efflorescence and stains. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 03 30 00 - 23 PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 03 30 00 - 24 SECTION035413 GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section includes gypsum-cement-based, self-leveling underlayment for applicationbelow interior floor coverings at all floor levels except the first floor. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data:For eachtype of product indicated. B.Shop Drawings:Include plans indicating substrates, locations, and average depths of underlayment based on survey of substrate conditions. 1.State acoustical ratings of the assemblies for each condition. 1.03INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Qualification Data:For qualified Installer. B.Product Certificates:Signed by manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering systems certifying that products are compatible. 1.04QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications:Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of underlayment products required for this Project. B.Product Compatibility:Manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering systems certify in writing that products are compatible. C.Fire-Resistance Ratings:Where indicated, provide gypsum-cement underlayment systems identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTME119 by a qualified testing agency.Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1.Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency. D.Sound Transmission Characteristics:Where indicated, provide gypsum-cement underlayment systems identical to those of assemblies tested for STC and IIC ratings per ASTME90 and ASTME492 by a qualified testing agency. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGGYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION035413-1 E.Preinstallation Conference:Conduct conference at Project site. 1.05DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from moisture or other detrimental effects. 1.06PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Environmental Limitations:Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ventilation, ambient temperature and humidity, and other conditions affecting underlayment performance. 1.Place gypsum-cement-based underlayments only when ambient temperature and temperature of substrates are between 50 and 80 degF(10 and 27 degC). 1.07COORDINATION A.Coordinate application of underlayment with requirements of floor-covering products and adhesives, to ensurecompatibility of products. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01GYPSUM-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENTS A.Underlayment:Gypsum-cement-based, self-leveling product that can be applied in minimum uniform thickness of 1/8 inch(3 mm)and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1.Provide in thickness no less than 1 inch thick. 2.BasisofDesign for Areas with Floor Covering: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide USG Corporation: Levelrock 2500 or equivalentproduct from one of the following: a.Ardex. b.Hacker Industries, Inc.. c.Maxxon Corporation. 3.BasisofDesign for Areas of Exposed Underlayment:Subject to compliance with requirements, provideUSG Corporation: LevelrockCSDorequivalentproduct from one ofthe following: a.Ardex. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGGYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION035413-2 b.Hacker Industries, Inc.. c.Maxxon Corporation. 4.Cement Binder:Gypsum or blended gypsum cement as defined by ASTMC219. 5.Compressive Strength:Not less than 2000 psi(13.8 MPa)at 28 days when tested according to ASTMC109/C109M. 6.Underlayment Additive:Resilient-emulsion product of underlayment manufacturer, formulated for use with underlayment when applied to substrate and conditions indicated. B.Aggregate:Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch(3 to 6 mm); or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1.Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for underlayment thickness required. C.Water:Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 degF(21 degC). D.Reinforcement:For underlayment applied to wood substrates, provide galvanized metal lath or other corrosion-resistant reinforcement recommended in writingby underlayment manufacturer. E.Primer:Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate, conditions, and application indicated. F.Corrosion-Resistant Coating:Recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for metal substrates. G.Sealer: Manufacturer’s recommended sealer for application ot the underlayment at areas where the underlayment will be an exposed floor surface. 2.02ACCESSORIES A.Sound Mat: 1.Provide sound mat into the floor assembly below the gypsum cement underlayment, that will maintain the fire rating indicated, and obtain the sound ratings indicated. a.Sound mat to extend up the walls at perimeter of room. b.Sound mat to wrap all penetrations through the floor. 2.BasisofDesign:Subject to compliance with requirements, provide USG Corporation; Levelrock Brand Sound Reduction Mat or equivelant product from one of the following: a.Hacker Industries, Inc.. b.Keene Building Products. c.Maxxon Corporation. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGGYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION035413-3 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance. 1.Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02PREPARATION A.General:Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1.Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment. 2.Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking. B.Wood Substrates:Mechanically fasten loose boards and panels to eliminate substrate movement and squeaks.Sand to remove coatings that might impair underlayment bond and remove sanding dust. 1.Install underlayment reinforcement recommended in writing by manufacturer. C.Sound Control Mat:Install sound control materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1.Do not install mechanical fasteners that penetrate through the sound control materials. 3.03APPLICATION A.General:Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1.Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application recommended in writing by manufacturer. 2.Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-substrate and intercoat adhesion. 3.At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue through underlayment. B.Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. C.Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface. D.Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions.Prevent contamination during application and curing processes. E.Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGGYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION035413-4 F.Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped. 3.04PROTECTION A.Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder ofconstruction period. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGGYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION035413-5 SECTION042000 BRICK MASONRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Face brick. 2.Foundation block. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B.Samples: For each type and color of brick, stone.andcolored mortar. 1.03INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Material Certificates: For each type and size of product indicated. 1.04QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI530.1/ASCE6/TMS602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. B.Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1.Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2.Cleanone-halfofexposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated. 3.Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 4.Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities ofworkmanship. a.Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. b.Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. C.Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGBRICK MASONRY JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION042000-1 1.05PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI530.1/ASCE6/TMS602. 1.Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 degFand higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning. B.Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI530.1/ASCE6/TMS602. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A.Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work. 2.02CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS –AT FOUNDATION A.Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows; 1.Provide special shapes for corners, movement joints, and other special conditions. 2.Providesquare-edgedunits for outside corners unless otherwise indicated. B.Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent where indicated. 1.Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integralwater-repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested according to ASTME514 as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive, with test period extended to 24 hours, shall show no visible water or leaks on the back of test specimen. C.CMUs: ASTMC90. 1.Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions. 2.03BRICK A.General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows. 1.For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGBRICK MASONRY JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION042000-2 2.Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view. B.Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTMC216. 1.Brick types as noted below and on the drawings: a.E-BRK-01: Brick at Student Housing Buildings. 1)Color: TBD. 2)Size (Actual Dimensions):3-5/8 incheswide by 2-1/4 incheshigh by 11-5/8 incheslong. b.E-BRK-01A: Rowlock Course. 1)Color: TBD. 2)Size (Actual Dimensions):3-5/8 incheswide by 2-1/4 incheshigh by 7-5/8 incheslong. c.E-BRK-02: Brick at Community Center. 1)Color: TBD. 2)Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 incheswide by 2-1/4 incheshigh by 11-5/8 incheslong. 2.Grade:SW. 3.Type:FBS 4.Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in.per minute when tested per ASTMC67. 5.Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTMC67 andis rated "not effloresced." 6.Surface Coating: Brick with colors or textures produced by application of coatings shall withstand 50 cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTMC67 with no observable difference in the applied finish when viewed from 10 feet. 2.04MORTAR MATERIALS A.Portland Cement: ASTMC150, TypeI or II, except TypeIII may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. B.Hydrated Lime: ASTMC207, TypeS. C.Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients. D.Masonry Cement: ASTMC91. E.Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTMC979. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. F.Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated limeor masonry cementand mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGBRICK MASONRY JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION042000-3 G.Aggregate for Mortar: ASTMC144. 1.White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 2.Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color. H.Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTMC494/C494M, TypeC, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar ofcomposition indicated. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a.Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard80. b.Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.-Conn.; Morset. c.Sonneborn Products, BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Trimix-NCA. I.Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with concrete masonry units, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a.ACM Chemistries, Inc.; RainBloc for Mortar. b.BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Mortar Admixture. c.Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.-Conn.; Dry-Block Mortar Admixture. 2.05REINFORCEMENT A.Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTMA951/A951M. 2.06TIES AND ANCHORS A.Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated: 1.Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTMA82/A82M; with ASTMA153/A153M, ClassB-2 coating. 2.Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTMA1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel, with ASTMA153/A153M, ClassB coating. B.Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inchcover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inchesparallel to face of veneer. C.Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors: 1.General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and as follows: UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGBRICK MASONRY JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION042000-4 a.Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbfload in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch. 2.Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie and a metal anchor section. a.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1)Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division;D/A213. 2)Heckmann Building Products Inc.;315-D with 316. 3)Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.;DW-10. 4)Wire-Bond;RJ-711. b.Anchor Section: Rib-stiffened, sheet metal plate with screw holes top and bottom, having slotted holesfor inserting wire tie. c.Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 0.075- inch-thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication. d.Wire Ties: Triangular-, rectangular-, or T-shaped wire ties fabricated from 0.187- inch-diameter,hot-dip galvanized steel wire. 2.07EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A.Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"and as follows: 1.Metal Drip Edge: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inchesintowall and 1/2 inchout from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degreesand hemmed. B.Flexible Flashing: Use the following unless otherwise indicated: 1.Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch. a.Accessories: Provide preformed corners, end dams, other special shapes, and seaming materials produced by flashing manufacturer. C.Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates. 2.08MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A.CompressibleFiller: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTMD1056, Grade2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; formulated from neopreneurethaneorPVC. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGBRICK MASONRY JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION042000-5 B.Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTMD226, TypeI (No.15 asphalt felt). C.Weep/Vent Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated: 1.Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inchless than depth ofouter wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard. a.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1)Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Maze weep vent. 2)Blok-Lok Limited; Cell-Vent. 3)Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Cell Vents. 4)Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No.85 Cell Vent. 5)Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Quadro-Vent. 6)Wire-Bond; Cell Vent. D.Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a.Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Breakseries. b.Archovations, Inc.; CavClear Masonry Mat. c.Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Polytite MortarStop. d.Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net. 2.Provide one of the following configurations: a.Strips, full-depth of cavity and 10 incheshigh, with dovetail shaped notches 7 inchesdeep. b.Strips, not less than 3/4 inchthick and 10 incheshigh, with dimpled surface designed to catch mortar droppings and prevent weep holes from clogging with mortar. 2.09MASONRY CLEANERS A.Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b.EaCo Chem, Inc. c.ProSoCo, Inc. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGBRICK MASONRY JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION042000-6 2.10MORTAR MIXES A.General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1.Do not use calcium chloride in mortar. 2.Useportland cement-limemasonry cementormortar cementmortar unless otherwise indicated. 3.Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent. B.Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C.Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTMC270, Proportion Specification.Provide Type N unless another type is indicated. D.Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product. E.Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates and natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortarcolor. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. B.Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. C.Wettingof Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in.per minute when tested per ASTMC67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying. 3.02TOLERANCES A.Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1.Fordimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inchor minus1/4 inch. 2.For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus1/2 inch. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGBRICK MASONRY JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION042000-7 3.For location of elements in elevation do not vary fromthat indicated by more than plus or minus1/4 inchin a story height or 1/2 inchtotal. B.Lines and Levels: 1.For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inchmaximum. 2.For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet,1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inchmaximum. 3.For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inchmaximum. 4.For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inchmaximum. 5.For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet,3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inchmaximum. C.Joints: 1.For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch; do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch. 2.For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus1/8 inch.Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than1/8 inch. 3.03LAYING MASONRY WALLS A.Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B.Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inchhorizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. C.Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. 3.04MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A.Lay hollow brick as follows: 1.With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2.With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGBRICK MASONRY JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION042000-8 B.Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. C.Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. 3.05ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS A.Anchor masonry veneers to wall framingwith masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: 1.Fastenscrew-attachedanchorsthrough sheathing to wall framingwith metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener. 2.Embedtie sectionsin masonry joints. 3.Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down. 4.Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 incheso.c. vertically and 24 inches o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 2.67 sq. ft.of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inchesof openings and at intervals, not exceeding 36 inches, around perimeter. 3.06FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS A.General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. B.Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1.Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing.Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2.At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inchesinto masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inchesat ends and turn up not less than 2 inchesto form end dams. 3.Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inchback from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination. C.Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1.Usespecified weep/vent productsto form weep holes. 2.Space weep holes 24 incheso.c. unless otherwise indicated. D.Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGBRICK MASONRY JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION042000-9 3.07CLEANING A.In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. B.Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1.Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes 2.Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner. 3.Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 4.Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in "BIA Technical Notes20."If additional methods are required to clean the masonry, clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 5.Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMATEK8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 3.08MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A.ExcessMasonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGBRICK MASONRY JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION042000-10 SECTION055000 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. 2.Shelf angles. 3.Loose bearing and leveling plates. B.Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1.Loose steel lintels. 2.Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. B.Delegated-Design Submittal:For ladders, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section014000 "Quality Requirements," to design ladders. 1.Interior Countertop Support a.Dead loads of material and supported material. b.Live Loads on countertops:100 lbf/sq. ft.(4.8 kN/sq.m)or a concentrated load of 300 lbf(1.3 kN)on an area of 4 sq. in.(26 sq. cm), whichever produces the greater stress. c.Live load deflection limit 1)Stone countertops deflection limit: L/720 but not more than ½ inch. 2)Plastic laminate countertop deflection limit: L/360 but not more than ½ inch. 2.Plumbing and mechanical supports. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGMETAL FABRICATIONS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION055000-1 2.02METALS A.Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. B.RecycledContent of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25percent. C.Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTMA36/A36M. D.Steel Tubing: ASTMA500/A500M, cold-formed steel tubing. E.Steel Pipe: ASTMA53/A53M, Standard Weight (Schedule40) unless otherwise indicated. 2.03FASTENERS A.General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type304stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTMB633 or ASTMF1941 (ASTMF1941M), ClassFe/Zn5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 1.Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 2.Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel. 3.Provide stainless-steelfasteners for fastening nickel silver. B.Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTMA47/A47M malleable iron or ASTMA27/A27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTMF2329. C.Post-Installed Anchors:Torque-controlled expansion anchorsorchemical anchors. 1.Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTMB633 or ASTMF1941(ASTMF1941M), ClassFe/Zn5, unless otherwise indicated. 2.Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group1 (A1)stainless-steel bolts, ASTMF593(ASTMF738M), and nuts, ASTMF594 (ASTMF836M). D.Slotted-ChannelInserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4,1-5/8 by 7/8 inches(41 by 22 mm)by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3 inches(75 mm)long at not more than 8 inches(200 mm)o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc- plated to comply with ASTMB633, ClassFe/Zn5, as needed for fastening to inserts. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGMETAL FABRICATIONS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION055000-2 2.04MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section099113"Exterior Painting," and Section099123Interior Painting." B.Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. C.Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTMD1187/D1187M. D.Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTMC1107/C1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. E.Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section033000"Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal- weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi(20 MPa). 2.05FABRICATION, GENERAL A.Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. B.Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C.Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1.Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2.Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3.Remove welding flux immediately. 4.At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended. D.Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous. E.Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. F.Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors not less than 8 inches(200 mm)from ends and corners of units and24 inches(600 mm)o.c. 2.06MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A.General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGMETAL FABRICATIONS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION055000-3 B.Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars ofwelded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. 2.07SHELF ANGLES A.Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch(19-mm)bolts, spaced not more than6 inches(150 mm)from ends and 24 inches(600 mm)o.c., unless otherwise indicated. B.For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and concrete. C.Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls. D.Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-in- place concrete. 2.08MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A.Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. B.Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. C.Galvanizeexteriormiscellaneous steel trim. 2.09PIPEANDDOWNSPOUTGUARDS A.Fabricatepipeand downspoutguards from 3/8-inch-(9.5-mm-)thick by 12-inch-(300-mm-) wide steel plate, bent to fit flat against the wall or column at both ends and to fit around pipe with2-inch(50-mm)clearance between pipe and pipe guard. Drill each end for two 3/4-inch (19-mm)anchor bolts. B.Galvanizepipeand downspout guards. 2.10LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A.Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. 2.11LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A.Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGMETAL FABRICATIONS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION055000-4 B.Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls. 2.12STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES A.Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. 2.13FINISHES, GENERAL A.Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 2.14STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A.Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTMA153/A153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTMA123/A123M for other steel and iron products. B.Shop prime iron and steel items unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. 1.Shop prime with primers specified in Section099113"Exterior Painting"andprimers specified in Section099123"Interior Painting". C.Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below: 1.Exterior Items: SSPC-SP6/NACE No.3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2.Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP6/NACE No.3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 3.Other Items: SSPC-SP3, "Power Tool Cleaning." D.Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA1, "Paint Application Specification No.1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B.Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGMETAL FABRICATIONS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION055000-5 C.Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1.Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2.Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3.Remove welding flux immediately. 4.At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D.Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. E.Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. 3.02INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A.Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. B.Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with nonshrink grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure thatno voids remain. 3.03ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. B.Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTMA780/A780M. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGMETAL FABRICATIONS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION055000-6 SECTION055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Interior steeltuberailings. 1.02PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B.General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: 1.Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength. 2.Aluminum: The lesser of minimum yield strength divided by 1.65 or minimum ultimate tensile strength divided by 1.95. 3.Stainless Steel: 60 percent of minimum yield strength. C.Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1.Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a.Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft.(0.73 kN/m)applied in any direction. b.Concentrated load of 200 lbf(0.89 kN)applied in any direction. c.Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2.Infill of Guards: a.Concentrated load of 50 lbf(0.22 kN)applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093 sq.m). b.Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. D.Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1.03ACTION SUBMITTALS–DELEGATED DESIGN A.Product Data: For the following: UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGPIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION055213-1 1.Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings. 2.Railing brackets. 3.Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. B.Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.04INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. B.Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. 1.05QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer. B.Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWSD1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code -Steel." 1.06PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. 1.07COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A.Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B.Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry.Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. C.Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGPIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION055213-2 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01METALS, GENERAL A.Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. B.Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. 2.02STEEL AND IRON A.Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25percent. B.Tubing:ASTMA500 (cold formed)orASTMA513. C.Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTMA36/A36M. D.Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTMA48/A48M, or malleable iron, ASTMA47/A47M, unless otherwise indicated. 2.03FASTENERS A.General: Provide the following: 1.Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTMB633 or ASTMF1941(ASTMF1941M), ClassFe/Zn 5 for zinc coating. B.Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicatedand capable of withstanding design loads. C.Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: 1.Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for railings indicated. 2.Providesquare, torxor hex socketflat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. D.Post-Installed Anchors:Torque-controlled expansion anchorsorchemical anchorscapable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTME488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1.Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTMB633 or ASTMF1941(ASTMF1941M), ClassFe/Zn5, unless otherwise indicated. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGPIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION055213-3 2.Material for Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group1(A1)stainless-steel bolts, ASTMF593(ASTMF738M), and nuts, ASTMF594(ASTMF836M). 2.04MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWSspecifications for metal alloy welded. 1.For railings, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items. B.Interior ShopPrimers: Provide primers that comply with Section Section099123 "Interior Painting." C.Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTMD1187. D.Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTMC1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. E.Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. 1.Water-Resistant Product:At exterior locationsandwhere indicatedprovide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. 2.05FABRICATION A.General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage,but not less than that required to support structural loads. B.Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. C.Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius ofapproximately1/32 inch(1 mm)unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D.Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. E.Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. F.Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGPIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION055213-4 G.Connections: Fabricate railings with weldedconnections unless otherwise indicated. H.Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1.Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2.Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3.Remove flux immediately. 4.At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. I.Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. 1.Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is manufacturer's standard splicing method. J.Form changes in direction as follows: 1.By flush bendsorby inserting prefabricated flush-elbow fittings. K.Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. L.Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. M.Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends ofreturns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch(6 mm)or less. N.Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. 1.At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush- resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. O.Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. P.For railing posts set in concrete, provide stainless-steelsleeves not less than 6 inches(150 mm)long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch(13 mm)greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal plate forming bottom closure. Q.Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGPIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION055213-5 2.06FINISHES, GENERAL A.Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B.Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C.Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-halfof the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. D.Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings. 2.07INTERIOR STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A.Interior Railings 1.For nongalvanized steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or masonry. 2.Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP6/NACE No.3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." B.Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA1, "Paint Application Specification No.1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 1.Shop prime uncoated railings with primers specified in Section099123 "Interior Painting". 2.Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces. C.Finish Painting: Comply with Division 09 Section “interior painting” for interior finish coats. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGPIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION055213-6 3.02INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. B.Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1.Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2.Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet(2 mm in 1 m). 3.Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet(5 mm in 3 m). C.Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. D.Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. E.Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners wherenecessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 3.03RAILING CONNECTIONS A.Interior FieldConnections-Welded: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. B.Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-jointinternal sleeve extending 2 inches(50 mm)beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint within 6 inches(150 mm)of post. 3.04ANCHORING POSTS A.Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. B.Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches(125 mm)deep and 3/4 inch(20 mm)larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. C.Leave anchorage joint exposed with 1/8-inch(3-mm)buildup, sloped away from post. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGPIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION055213-7 D.Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows: 1.For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces. 3.05ATTACHING RAILINGS A.Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction and welded to railingends. B.Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and welded to railing ends. C.Attach railings to wall with wall brackets. Provide brackets with 1-1/2-inch(38-mm)minimum clearance from inside face of handrail and finishedwall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. 1.Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. 2.Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. D.Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows: 1.For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 2.For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 3.For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood backing between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. 4.For steel-framed partitions, use self-tapping screws fastened to steel framing or to concealed steel reinforcements. 3.06ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section099123 "Interior Painting"and as recommended by the finish coat manufacturer for exterior coatings. 3.07PROTECTION A.Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGPIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION055213-8 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The General and Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the Work specified in this section. B. This section includes dimensional lumber, minor timber framing, engineered wood products, APA rated structural sheathing, wood blocking, wood furring, cants, plywood backing panels, and studs for non-structural partition walls. C. This section also includes appropriate anchoring and/or fastening devices for wood members, as well as acceptable wood treatment. D. Structural notes indicated on the drawings regarding lumber shall be considered a part of this specification. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip), on Iron and Steel Hardware 2. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength 3. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts 4. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process 5. ASTM D245 - Standard Practice for Establishing Structural Grades and Related Allowable Properties for Visually Graded Lumber 6. AWPA P5 - Standard for Waterborne Preservatives 7. AWPA T1 - Processing and Treatment Standard 8. AWPA U1 - User Specification for Treated Wood 9. ICC Evaluation Report ESR-1721 10. NDS - American Forest & Paper Association National Design Specification UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING ROUGH CARPENTRY JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 06 10 00 - 1 11. PRP-108 - American Plywood Association Performance Standards and Qualification Policy for Structural-Use Panels 12. PS 1 - National Institute of Standards and Technology Voluntary Product Standard for Structural Plywood 13. PS 2 - National Institute of Standards and Technology Voluntary Product Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels 14. PS 20 - National Institute of Standards and Technology Voluntary Product Standard for Softwood Lumber B. Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood product through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All lumber shall be delivered, piled and handled so as to protect it from warping due to excessive moisture or damage. Lumber shall be stored off the ground and under a waterproof cover properly fastened down to resist wind forces. B. All installed exposed wood roof nailers, cants, curbs, and similar items shall be protected from moisture until covered with subsequent roofing materials or flashings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data for each distinct product specified. B. Material certificates for dimensional lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses indicated on the documents. Indicate species and grade selected for each use, and design values approved by American Lumber Standards Committee. C. Wood treatment data as follows, including chemical treatment manufacturer’s warranty and instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated materials: 1. For each type of preservative-treated wood product, include certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and compliance with applicable standard. 2. For waterborne-treated products, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels indicated before shipment to the project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Lumber Standards: 1. Dimensional Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC’s Board of Review. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING ROUGH CARPENTRY JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 06 10 00 - 2 a. Each piece of lumber to be factory marked with grade, producing mill and the agency providing inspection services. Where exposed lumber is indicated to have a natural finish or receive stain, grade stamp to be located on the end or back of each piece. b. Moisture content not to exceed 19% for kiln-dry or air-dry lumber. 2. Wood Structural Panels: Comply with PS 1 or PS 2. B. Grade and Species: 1. Refer to general notes on the drawings. C. Lumber grading rules shall be obtained from one of the following agencies: 1. NELMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. NSLB -Northern Softwood Lumber Bureau. 4. RIS -Redwood Inspection Services. 5. SPIB -Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 6. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 7. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association. D. When nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 2.2 DIMENSIONAL LUMBER A. Beams, headers, joists, and rafters: Refer to the material specifications listed in the General Notes of the Drawings. B. Exterior and bearing wall framing: Refer to plans for material specification. C. Non-load bearing partitions: Standard, stud, or No. 3 of mixed Southern Pine, Hem-Fir, Hem-Fir (North), or Spruce-Pine-Fir. D. Non-load bearing ceiling joists: Standard, stud, or No. 3 of mixed Southern Pine, Hem- Fir, Hem-Fir (North), or Spruce-Pine-Fir. 2.3 ENGINEERED LUMBER A. Provide engineered lumber capable of supporting required loads and meeting or exceeding the bending stress and modulus of elasticity as designated in the General Notes of the Drawings. B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with design requirements. Manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following: UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING ROUGH CARPENTRY JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 06 10 00 - 3 C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: a. Boise Cascade Corporation. b. Georgia-Pacific Corporation. c. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation. d. Weyerhaeuser Company. 2. Parallel-Strand Lumber: a. Weyerhaeuser Company. 3. Prefabricated Wood I-Joists: a. Boise Cascade Corporation. b. Georgia-Pacific Corporation. c. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation. d. Superior Wood Systems, Inc. e. Weyerhaeuser Company. 2.4 WALL SHEATHING A. Oriented-Strand-Board Wall Sheathing: 1. Exposure Durability: As indicated on plans. 2. Span rating: As indicated on plans. 3. Thickness: As indicated on plans. 2.5 ROOF SHEATHING A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: 1. Exposure Durability: As indicated on plans. 2. Span rating: As indicated on plans. 3. Thickness: As indicated on plans. 4. Veneer Grade: C-C. B. Oriented-Strand-Board Roof Sheathing: 1. Exposure Durability: As indicated on plans. 2. Span rating: As indicated on plans. 3. Thickness: As indicated on plans. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING ROUGH CARPENTRY JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 06 10 00 - 4 2.6 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT A. Oriented-Strand-Board Subflooring: Refer to structural general notes. Refer to details 1 and 2/A8.05. 1. Span rating as indicated on plans. 2. Thickness as indicated on plans. 2.7 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Backing Panels for Telephone and Electrical Equipment: PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated. Provide thickness as indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2 inch thick. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. Grounds, Nailers, Rooftop Equipment Bases and Curbs, Blocking, Cants, Bucks and Shims: Standard, stud, or No. 3 of mixed Southern Pine, Hem-Fir, Hem-Fir (North), or Spruce-Pine-Fir. B. Wood preservative treatment for wood plates, curbs, cleats, nailing strips, cants, blocking, nailers and similar items for roof deck construction shall be ACQ or other non- arsenate based preservative. 1. Oil based preservatives, such as creosote or pentachlorophenol types are not acceptable. 2. Paint surfaces, which are cut after treatment with a concentrated solution of the treatment. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS FASTENING REQUIREMENTS A. Furnish and install all fasteners and anchoring devices for entire project, which shall include items as nails, screws, bolts, anchors, and similar items. Common nails or screens shall be used for all fastening in rough carpentry. Exterior exposed nails and screws shall be hot-dipped galvanized. Bolts shall have standard threads and be complete with washers and nuts. 1. Wood assemblies such as wood curbs, top nailers and other built-up members shall be anchored with common nails or wood screws having at least 1-1/2 inch anchoring penetration spaced in two staggered rows at 24 inches on center for each row. 2. Miscellaneous nailing shall be at Contractor’s discretion for a secure and tight installation. 3. Pre-drill holes for all nails larger than 20d. Field drill bolt holes for proper matching and bearing. 4. Lead holes for lag screws shall be installed as per NDS Section 9.1.2. Lag screws shall be screwed and not driven into place. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING ROUGH CARPENTRY JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 06 10 00 - 5 5. Bolts shall be installed in holes bored with a bit 1/16 inch larger than the diameter of the bolt. Bolts and nuts seating on wood shall have cut steel washers under heads and nuts. Nuts shall be pulled tight and again checked and tightened just prior to enclosing bolted members. Counterbore for bolted heads or nuts only where so indicated on the drawings, and then only to sufficient depth to house the bolt or head or nut and washer. Cut off excessive bolt projection where necessary. Nick threads to prevent loosening. 2.10 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture and as indicated on drawings. B. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M of Type 304 stainless steel. C. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. D. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. E. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. F. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. G. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. H. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. I. Metal Framing Anchors 1. General: Provide framing anchors made from metal indicated, of structural capacity, type, and size indicated, and as follows: a. Approved Manufacturers: 1) Simpson Strong-Tie 2) USP Structural Connectors 3) TECO b. Research/Evaluation Reports: Provide products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which model code research/evaluation reports exist that show compliance of metal framing anchors, for application indicated, with building code in effect for Project. c. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, which meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING ROUGH CARPENTRY JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 06 10 00 - 6 or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 2. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G60 coating. 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Sheathing Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape for sealing joints and penetrations in sheathing and recommended by sheathing manufacturer for use with type of sheathing required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. C. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood. D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. 3. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule" in the IBC Code. E. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as required. F. Use finishing nails for exposed work, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with wood filler. G. All installed wood roof nailers, cants, curbs, and similar items shall be protected from moisture until covered with subsequent materials or flashing. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING ROUGH CARPENTRY JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 06 10 00 - 7 3.2 WOOD GROUND, SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build anchor bolts into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, secure anchor rods to formwork before concrete placement. C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. 3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. 1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level and at ceiling, with wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. 3.4 WOOD FRAMING INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," and as indicated on drawings. B. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. The design provisions for solid sawn Douglas Fir lumber in the Code are applicable to laminated veneer lumber. C. Do not splice structural members between supports. D. Maximum concentrated load on any joist to not exceed 100 pounds. E. Provide a minimum of three inches of bearing for dimensional lumber. Refer to the supplier requirements for bearing of laminated veneer lumber, unless noted otherwise. F. Laminated veneer lumber beams shall be laterally supported at all points of bearing. Side mounted joist hangers, nailing to shoulder studs, and nailing of sheathing to beam will satisfy this requirement. G. Nails installed parallel to the glue lines on the narrow face shall not be spaced closer than four inches for 10d common nails and three inches for 8d common nails. H. Nails installed perpendicular to the glue lines on the wide face shall be installed in accordance with the Building Code. Assemble laminated veneer lumber beams with a minimum of three 16d nails per foot, fully penetrating each piece, unless noted otherwise. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING ROUGH CARPENTRY JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 06 10 00 - 8 I. Where built-up beams or girders of 2-inch nominal dimension lumber on edge are required, fasten together with 2 rows of 20d nails spaced not less than 32 inches o.c, staggered on opposite faces. Locate one row near top edge and other near bottom edge. Provide two (2) 20d nails at each end and at each splice. 1. For continuous members, stagger end joints at quarter points between supports. J. Provide treated sole plates where wood is in contact with concrete. 3.5 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Arrange studs so wide face of stud is perpendicular to direction of wall or partition and narrow face is parallel. Provide sill and top plates as indicated in the Drawings. Anchor plates to supporting construction as indicated on the drawings. 1. For exterior load bearing and shear walls, provide studs as indicated on the drawings. 2. For interior non-structural partitions, provide 2-by-4-inch nominal size wood studs spaced 16 inches 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at all shear walls and at mid-height of partitions more than 96 inches high, using members of 2-inch nominal thickness and of same width as wall or partitions. B. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level and at ceiling line of top story. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted wood blocks of 2-inch nominal thick lumber of same width as framing members. C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Set headers on edge and support on jamb studs. 1. For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs with headers not less than 4-inch nominal depth for openings 48 inches and less in width, 6-inch nominal depth for openings 48 to 72 inches in width, 8-inch nominal depth for openings 72 to 120 inches in width, and not less than 10-inch nominal depth for openings 10 to 12 feet in width. 2. For load-bearing walls, provide studs and headers as indicated on plans. D. Provide permanent shear walls as indicated on plan. Contractor responsible for temporary bracing as required until permanent lateral system is in place. 3.6 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Install floor joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less than 1-1/2 inches of bearing on wood or metal, or 3 inches on masonry. Attach floor joists as follows: 1. Where supported on wood members, by using metal framing anchors. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING ROUGH CARPENTRY JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 06 10 00 - 9 2. Where framed into wood supporting members, by using wood ledgers as indicated or, if not indicated, by using metal joist hangers. B. Frame openings with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers; double headers and trimmers where span of header exceeds 48 inches or as indicated on drawings. C. Do not notch in middle third of joists; limit notches to one-sixth depth of joist, one-third at ends. Do not bore holes larger than 1/3 depth of joist; do not locate closer than 2 inches (50 mm) from top or bottom. D. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal thickness by depth of joist at ends of joists unless nailed to header or band, or as shown on drawings. E. Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams, girders, or partitions not less than 4 inches (or securely tie opposing members together or as shown on drawings. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal thickness by depth of joist over supports. F. Provide solid blocking between joists under jamb studs for openings. G. Provide bridging of type indicated below, at intervals of 96 inches o.c., between joists where nominal depth-to-thickness ratio exceeds 6:1. 1. Diagonal wood bridging formed from bevel-cut, 1-by-3-inch nominal size lumber, double-crossed and nailed at both ends to joists. 3.7 CEILING JOIST AND RAFTER FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Ceiling Joists: Install ceiling joists with crown edge up and complying with requirements specified above for floor joists. Face nail to ends of parallel rafters. B. Rafters: Notch to fit exterior wall plates and toe nail. Double rafters to form headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing, if any, and support with metal hangers. C. Provide special framing as indicated for eaves, overhangs, dormers, and similar conditions, if any. 3.8 STAIR FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Provide stair framing members of size, space, and configuration indicated or, if not indicated, to comply with the following requirements: 1. Stringer Size: 2-by-12-inch nominal size, minimum. B. Provide stair framing with no more than 3/16-inch variation between adjacent treads and risers and no more than 3/8-inch variation between largest and smallest treads and risers within each flight. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING ROUGH CARPENTRY JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 06 10 00 - 10 3.9 WOOD STRUCTURAL-USE PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA “Engineered Wood Construction Guide” for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. B. Refer to general notes for all structural-use panel types at floor, roof, and walls. C. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: a. Glue and nail to wood framing as indicated on drawings. b. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. 2. Sheathing: a. At shear wall locations, fasten to wood framing as indicated on drawings. b. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. 3. Plywood Backing Panels: Screw to supports. 3.10 GYPSUM SHEATHING A. At shear wall locations: fasten gypsum sheathing to supports as indicated on the drawings. Keep perimeter fasteners 3/8 inch from edges and ends of units. B. At all other locations: 1. Install 24-by-96-inch sheathing horizontally with long edges at right angles to studs with V-grooved edge down and tongue edge up. Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent board without forcing. Abut ends of boards over centers of studs and stagger end joints of adjacent boards not less than one stud spacing, two where possible. 2. Install 48-by-96-inch and longer sheathing vertically with long edges parallel to, and centered over, studs. Install solid wood blocking where end joints do not occur over framing. Fit units tightly against each other. 3.11 SHEATHING TAPE APPLICATION A. Apply sheathing tape to joints between sheathing panels and at items penetrating sheathing. Apply at upstanding flashing to overlap both flashing and sheathing. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING ROUGH CARPENTRY JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 06 10 00 - 11 PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING ROUGH CARPENTRY JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 06 10 00 - 12 SECTION 06 17 53 METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION: A. The General and Supplementary Conditions of the Construction Contract and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the Work specified in this Section. B. This section includes the engineering, fabrication, and erection of metal plate connected wood trusses to withstand the design loads as shown on the Drawings and herein specified. C. This section also includes all fastening devices and bridging requirements related to the manufacture or erection of the wood trusses. D. Structural notes indicated on the drawings regarding metal-plate-connected wood trusses shall be considered part of this specification. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. “Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing, Restraining & Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses” (BCSI) 2. “Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses Guideline” Allowable Stress Design Manual for Engineered Wood Construction 3. AFPA - American Forest & Paper Association 4. ANSI/TPI 1 – National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction 5. ASTM A653 -Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process. 6. NDS - National Design Specification for Wood Construction 7. TPI - Truss Plate Institute 8. WTCA - Wood Truss Council of America B. Where any provision of other pertinent codes and standards conflict with this specification, the more stringent provision shall govern. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 06 17 53 - 1 C. Engineering Responsibility: 1. Engage a fabricator who uses a qualified professional engineer, licensed in the state where the trusses are to be installed, to prepare calculations, shop drawings and other structural data for metal-plate-connected wood trusses. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. Engage a fabricator who participates in a recognized quality-assurance program that involves inspection by Western Wood Products Association (WWPA), West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB), or National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA); Timber Products Inspection, Inc.; Truss Plate Institute (TPI); or other independent inspecting and testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 DESIGN A. Trusses shall be designed in accordance with NDS, AFPA, TPI, WTCA and the local code of jurisdiction. B. Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of TPI 1, “Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing, Restraining & Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses” (BCSI), and “Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Handbook” (WTCA). C. Comply with applicable requirements of AFPA’s “National Design Specification for Wood Construction” and it’s “Supplement.” D. Single-Source Engineering Responsibility: 1. Provide trusses engineered by metal-plate connector manufacturer to support superimposed dead and live loads indicated, with design approved and certified by a qualified professional engineer who is legally authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where the project is located and who is experienced in the design of metal-plate-connected wood trusses. E. Structural Performance: 1. Design Loads: As indicated on the drawings. Truss superimposed dead load at floor = 25 psf; at roof = 20 psf. 2. Maximum Deflection Under Design Loads: a. Roof Trusses: L/360 live load deflection and L/240 total load deflection. b. Floor Trusses: L/480 live load deflection and L/360 total load deflection. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For metal-plate connectors, metal framing anchors, bolts and fasteners. B. In addition to product data, submit shop drawings detailing location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of truss required; lumber species, sizes, and stress grades; connector plate size, material, finish, design values, orientation and location; splice details; and bearing details. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 06 17 53 - 2 C. Prepare and submit truss shop drawings and structural analysis calculations signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer registered in the State where the project is located. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. All metal-plate-connected wood trusses shall be stored clear of the ground to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, and corrosion. B. All items shall be transported, stored and erected in a manner that will avoid any further damage or deformation. Bent or deformed items will be rejected and shall be replaced or repaired at the expense of the responsible party. C. Handling during erection shall be in accordance with recommended practices set forth in ”BCSI’s “Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing, Restraining & Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses.” 1.7 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Special Inspection and Testing: 1. In accordance with Chapter 17 of the 2009 International Building Code, the Owner shall employ a Special Inspection Agency to perform the duties and responsibilities specified in Section 1704.0 of the International Building Code. 2. Refer to architectural, civil, mechanical, and electrical specifications for testing and inspection requirements of non-structural components. 3. Work performed on the premises of a fabricator approved by the building official need not be tested and inspected per the table below. The fabricator shall submit a certificate of compliance that the work has been performed in accordance with the approved plans and specification to the building official and the Architect and Engineer of Record. 4. Duties of the Special Inspection Agency: a. Perform all testing and inspection required per approved testing and inspection program. b. Furnish inspection reports to the building official, the Owner, the Architect, the Engineer of Record, and the General Contractor. The reports shall be completed and furnished within 48 hours of inspected work. c. Submit a final signed report stating whether the work requiring special inspection was, to the best of the Special Inspection Agency’s knowledge in conformance with the approved plans and specifications. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 06 17 53 - 3 5. Structural Component Testing and Inspection Schedule for Section 06 17 53 is as follows: ReferencedIBC WoodStandardReference Inspection of fabricators and during construction 1704.6 only required if fabricator is not approved by the Building Official PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Lumber Standards: 1. Comply with DOC PS 20 and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC) Board of Review. B. Grade and Species: 1. Provide dimension lumber of any species for truss chord and web members, graded visually or mechanically, and capable of supporting required loads without exceeding allowable design values according to AFPA’s “National Design Specifications for Wood Construction” and its “Supplement.” C. Metal Connector Plates: 1. Fabricate connector plates from structural-quality steel sheet, zinc coated by hot- dip process complying with TPI 1 and ASTM A 653, G60 (ASTM A 653M, Z180) coating designation; Designation SS Grade 33 and not less than 0.036 inch (0.91 mm) coated thickness. 2.2 FASTENERS A. Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified below for material and manufacture. Where truss members are exposed to weather or to high relative humidity, provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A153 or of stainless steel, Type 304 or 316. 1. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105. 2. Power Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. 3. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. 4. Lag Bolts and Screws: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M). UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 06 17 53 - 4 5. Bolts: Steel Bolts complying with ASTM A307, Grade A (ASTM F568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A563 (ASTM A563M) hex nuts and where indicated, flat washers. 6. Expansion Anchors: Carbon steel anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 2.3 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Provide metal framing anchors with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated, of the following metal and finish: 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A653, G60 (ASTM A653M, Z180) coating designation; structural, commercial, or lock-forming quality, as standard with manufacturer for type of anchor indicated. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIAL A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated using jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with the requirements of NDS and TPI. B. Fabricate wood trusses in compliance with the requirements in NDS and TPI. C. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded simultaneously by air or hydraulic press into both sides of wood members. D. Trusses shall be fabricated in a properly equipped manufacturing facility of a permanent nature. Trusses shall be manufactured by experienced workmen, using precision cutting, jigging and pressing equipment under the requirements of NDS and TPI. E. Fabricate metal connector plates in sizes, configurations, thicknesses and anchorage details as required to withstand design loads for types of joint designs indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install and brace trusses according to recommendations of TPI. Space trusses as indicated; install plumb, square, and true to line; and securely fasten to supporting construction. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 06 17 53 - 5 B. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points using metal framing anchors and fasten according to metal framing anchor manufacturer’s fastening schedules and written instructions. C. Securely connect each truss ply required for forming built-up girder trusses. Anchor trusses to girder trusses as indicated. D. Install and fasten temporary and permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are applied to prevent toppling. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams. E. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances required by TPI 1. F. Cutting, removal, or altering of trusses is not permitted without written authorization from the structural engineer of record. G. Return wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements to fabricator and replace with trusses that do meet requirements. 3.2 REPAIR A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on exposed surfaces with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A780 and manufacturer’s written instructions. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 06 17 53 - 6 SECTION064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.This Section includes the following: 1.Interior standing and running trim and window sills. 2.Doorframes and casing. 3.Wood cabinets for transparent finish. 4.Plastic-laminate countertops. 5.Shop finishing of interior woodwork. 1.02DEFINITIONS A.Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1.03ACTIONSUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For panel products,fire-retardant treated materials, high-pressure decorative laminate,adhesive for bonding plastic laminate,solid-surfacing, quartz agglomeratematerial, cabinet hardware and accessoriesandfinishing materials and processes. 1.Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by the treating plant that treated the materials comply with requirements. B.Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1.Show details full size. 2.Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3.Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixturesfaucetssoap dispensersand other itemsinstalled in architectural woodwork. 4.ApplyAWI-certified compliance label to first page of Shop Drawings. C.Samples for Initial Selection: 1.Plastic laminates. 2.Thermoset decorative panels. 3.Shop applied transparent finishes. D.Samples for Verification: 1.Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches(200 by 250 mm), for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish and specified edge material applied to 1 edge. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGINTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION064023-1 2.Thermoset decorative-panels,8 by 10 inches(200 by 250 mm), for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish,with edge banding on 1 edge. 3.Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each typeand finish. 4.Lumber for transparent finish, not less than 5 inches(125 mm)wide by 24 inches(600 mm)long, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. 5.Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparent- finished cabinets. 6.Lumber and panel products factory prime painted to receive anopaque finish,5 inches (125 mm)wide by 24inches(300 mm)long for lumber, trimor casing. 1.04INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer. B.Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates:AWI Quality Certification. C.Qualification Data: For fabricator. 1.05QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance.Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. B.Installer Qualifications:Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. C.Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production of interior architectural woodwork with sequence-matched wood veneersand wood paneling. D.Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1.Provide AWIQuality Certification Program labelsandcertificatesindicating that woodwork,including installation,complies with requirements of grades specified. E.Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1.Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. F.Regulatory Requirements: Comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the 2010 ADA Guidelines for Accessible Design,andICC/ANSIA117.1. 1.06DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGINTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION064023-2 installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. 1.07PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B.Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 degF(16 and 32 degC)and relative humidity between25 and 55percent during the remainder of the construction period. C.Field Measurements:Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1.Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.08COORDINATION A.Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01MATERIALS A.General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI'squality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. B.Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1.Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSIA208.2, Grade130. 2.Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 3.Softwood Plywood: DOCPS1,Medium Density Overlay. 4.Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVAHP-1. C.Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with requirements of NEMALD3, GradeVGL, for test methods3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10. D.High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMALD3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated,as required by woodwork quality standard. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGINTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION064023-3 1.Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative laminates as indicated on the drawings, or by one of the following manufacturers if not listed: a.Formica Corporation. b.Lamin-Art, Inc. c.Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div. d.Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. 2.02CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A.General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)." B.Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMAA156.9, B01602, 170degrees of opening,self-closing. C.Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMAA156.9, B02011. D.Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal,4 inches(100 mm)long,5/16 inch(8 mm)in diameter. E.Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports:BHMAA156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081 andBHMAA156.9, B04102; with shelf brackets, B04112. F.Shelf Rests: BHMAA156.9, B04013; metal,metal, two-pin type with shelf hold-down clip. G.Drawer Slides: BHMAA156.9, B05091. 1.Heavy Duty (Grade1HD-100 and Grade1HD-200): Side mounted; full-extensiontype; zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides. 2.Box Drawer Slides:Grade1HD-100; for drawers not more than 6 inches(150 mm)high and24 inches(600 mm)wide. H.Door Locks: BHMAA156.11, E07121. I.Drawer Locks: BHMAA156.11, E07041. J.Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMAA156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1.Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA652 for steel base. K.For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMAA156.9. 2.03MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips:Softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGINTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION064023-4 B.Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face ofexterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. C.Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. D.Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate:Unpigmented contact cement. 2.04FABRICATION, GENERAL A.Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium-grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard. B.Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. C.Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. D.Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1.Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails:1/16 inch (1.5 mm). E.Complete fabrication, including assembly,finishing,and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1.Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2.Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors,and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment. F.Shop-cut openingsto maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1.Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 2.05INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM AND WINDOW SILLSFOR OPAQUE FINISH A.Wood Species:Any closed-grain hardwood. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGINTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION064023-5 B.Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. C.Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly. D.Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in plant and prepare for field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together. 2.06INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR OPAQUE FINISH A.Grade:Custom. B.Wood Species:Any closed-grain hardwood. 2.07WOOD CABINETS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A.Grade:Premium. B.AWI Type of Cabinet Construction:Flush overlay. C.Reveal Dimension:As indicated. D.Wood Species and Cut for Exposed Surfaces:As indicated. 1.Grain Direction:Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels. 2.Matching of Veneer Leaves:Bookmatch. 3.Vertical Matching of Veneer Leaves: End match. 4.Veneer Matching within Panel Face:Balancematch. 5.Veneer Matching within Room: Provide cabinet veneers in each room or other space from a single flitch with doors, drawer fronts, and other surfaces matched in a sequenced set with continuous match where veneers are interrupted perpendicular to the grain. 6.Comply with veneer and other matching requirements indicated for blueprint-matched paneling. E.Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below: 1.Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies:Same species and cut indicated for exposed surfaces. 2.Drawer Sides and Backs:Thermoset decorative panels. 3.Drawer Bottoms:Thermoset decorative panels. 2.08PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A.Grade:Premium. B.High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade:HGS. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGINTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION064023-6 C.Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1.As indicated by manufacturer's designationson the drawings. D.Edge Treatment:Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. E.Core Material:Particleboard made with exterior glue, orMedium-density fiberboard made with exterior glue. F.Core Material at Sinks:Particleboard made with exterior glueorMedium-density fiberboard made with exterior glue. G.Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, GradeBKL, on underside of countertop substrate. 2.09SHOP FINISHING A.Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished. B.General: Shop finish transparent-finished interior architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. C.Shop Priming: Shop apply the prime coat including backpriming, if any, for items specified to be field finished. Refer to Division09 paintingSections for material and application requirements. D.Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. 1.Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative panels. E.Transparent Finish: 1.Grade: Premium. 2.AWI Finish System: Catalyzed polyurethane(system 11). 3.Staining:Match Architect's sample. 4.Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closed- grain wood before staining and finishing. 5.Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods. 6.Sheen:Satin,31-45gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTMD523. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGINTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION064023-7 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01PREPARATION A.Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B.Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete workas required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.02INSTALLATION A.Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved. B.Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication atProject site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop. C.Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches(3 mm in 2400 mm). D.Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E.Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure withcountersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. F.Standing andRunning Trimand Window Sills: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 96 inches(2400 mm)long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary.Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. 1.Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base if finished. 2.Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches(3 mm in 2400 mm). G.Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1.Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch(3 mm in 2400-mm)sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. H.Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGINTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION064023-8 1.Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in colorto match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. 2.Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch(3 mm in 2400-mm)sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 3.Secure backsplashes towalls with adhesive. 4.Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division07 Section "Joint Sealants." I.Closet shelf and clothesrod: Install closet shelf and clothesrod as indicated. 1.Hang rod to be centered 12 inches away from the back wall of closet, unless noted otherwise. 2.Install shelf brackets and clothes rod support brackets according to manufacturer’s written instructions, spaced not more than 36 inches o.c. Fasten brackets to framing members or blocking. 3.Install rod flanges at ends of clothes rods. J.Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. 3.03ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B.Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C.Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGINTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION064023-9 SECTION066400 PLASTIC PANELING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section includes glass-fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) wall panelingand trim accessories. 1.02ACTIONSUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B.Samples for Initial Selection: For plastic panelingand trim accessories. C.Samples for Verification: For plastic panelingand trim accessories, in manufacturer's standard sizes. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Source Limitations: Obtain plastic panelingand trim accessoriesfrom single manufacturer. B.Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTME84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1.Flame-Spread Index:200or less. 2.Smoke-Developed Index:450or less. 1.04PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install plastic paneling until spaces are enclosed and weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01PLASTIC SHEET PANELING A.General: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTMD5319. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGPLASTIC PANELING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION066400-1 1.Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provideMarlite panelsor comparable product by one of the following: a.Crane Composites. b.Kemlite Company Inc. c.Marlite. d.Nudo Products, Inc. 2.Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.075 inch(1.9 mm). 3.Surface Finish:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, smooth or textured. 4.Color:Match P-100, white. 2.02ACCESSORIES A.Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners,outside corners,and caps as needed to conceal edges. 1.Color:Match panels. B.Trim Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard one or two piece vinyl extrusion wall base trim, designed to retain and cover edges of panels. 1.Color: Match panels C.Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer. D.Sealant:Single-component, mildew-resistant, neutral-curing siliconesealant recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02PREPARATION A.Prepare substrate by sanding high spots and filling low spots as needed to provide flat, even surface for panel installation. B.Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGPLASTIC PANELING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION066400-2 C.Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to manufacturer's written recommendations. D.Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel jointsto provide equal panels at ends of walls not less than half the width of full panels. 1.Mark plumb lines on substrate at locations for accurate installation. 2.Locate to allow clearance at panel edges according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.03INSTALLATION A.Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions. B.Install panels in a full spread of adhesive. C.Install factory-laminated panels using concealed mounting splines in panel joints. D.Install trim accessories with adhesive. E.Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside corner trim in a bead of sealant. F.Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant. G.Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGPLASTIC PANELING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION066400-3 SECTION071900 WATER REPELLENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section includes penetratingwater-repellent treatments for the following horizontal surfaces: 1.Cast-in-place concrete. B.Related Sections: 1.Section042000 "Unit Masonry" for integral water-repellent admixture for unit masonry assemblies. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.Include manufacturer's recommended number of coats for each type of substrate and spreading rate for each separate coat. 1.03INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Product Certificates: For each type of water repellent, from manufacturer. 1.04QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Applicator Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.05PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Limitations: Proceed with application only when the following existing and forecasted weather and substrate conditions permit water repellents to be applied according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements: 1.Concrete surfaces and mortar have cured for not less than 28 days. 2.Building has been closed in for not less than 30 days before treating wall assemblies. 3.Ambient temperature is above 40 degF(4.4 degC)and below 100 degF(37.8 degC) and will remain so for 24 hours. 4.Substrate is not frozen and substrate-surface temperature is above 40 degF(4.4 degC) and below 100 degF(37.8 degC). 5.Rain or snow is not predicted within 24 hours. 6.Not less than 24 hourshave passed since surfaces were last wet. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGWATER REPELLENTS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION071900-1 7.Windy conditions do not exist that might cause water repellent to be blown onto vegetation or surfaces not intended to be treated. 1.06WARRANTY A.Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturerandApplicator agree(s) to repair or replace materials that fail to maintain water repellency specified in "Performance Requirements" Article within specified warranty period. 1.Warranty Period:Fiveyears from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01PENETRATING WATER REPELLENTS A.Silane, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, containing 40 percent or more solids of alkyltrialkoxysilanes; with alcohol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier; and with 400g/L or less of VOCs. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a.BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC; Enviroseal40 or Hydrozo100. b.Degussa Corp; Protectosil Chem-Trete PB100. c.LymTal; IsoFlex 628 (<200 g/L) d.PROSOCO, Inc.; SLX100. e.Tamms Industries, Inc., Euclid Chemical Company (The); Baracade Silane100. f.Tnemec Inc.; DurAPell100. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1.Verify that surfaces are clean and dry according to water-repellent manufacturer's requirements. Check moisture content in threerepresentative locations by method recommended by manufacturer. 2.Inspect for previously applied treatments that may inhibit penetration or performance of water repellents. 3.Verify that there is no efflorescence or other removable residues that would be trapped beneath the application of water repellent. 4.Verify that required repairs are complete, cured, and dry before applying water repellent. B.Test pH level according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions to ensure chemical bond to silica-containing or siliceous minerals. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGWATER REPELLENTS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION071900-2 C.Proceed with installation only afterunsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02PREPARATION A.Cleaning: Before application of water repellent, clean substrate of substances that could impair penetration or performance of product according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructionsand as follows: 1.Cast-in-Place Concrete: Remove oil, curing compounds, laitance, and other substances that inhibit penetration or performance of water repellents. B.Protect adjoining work, including mortar and sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow-over ofwater repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if there is the possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live vegetation. C.Coordination with Sealant Joints: Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment have been installed and cured. 1.Water-repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, waterrepellent, and sealant materials identical to those required. 3.03APPLICATION A.Apply a heavy-saturation coating of water repellent, on surfaces indicated for treatment, using 15 psi-(103 kPa-)pressure spray with a fan-type spray nozzlerollerorbrushto thepoint of saturation. Apply coating in dual passes of uniform, overlapping strokes. Remove excess material; do not allow material to puddle beyond saturation. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for application procedure unless otherwise indicated. B.Apply a second saturation coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting of surfaces between coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if written instructions are not applicable to Project conditions. 3.04FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Testing of Water-Repellent Material: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when water repellent is being applied: 1.Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample water-repellent material being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified inpresence of Contractor. 2.Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of water-repellent material with product requirements. 3.Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying water repellents if test results show material being used does not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGWATER REPELLENTS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION071900-3 remove noncomplying material from Project site, pay for testing, and correct deficiency ofsurfaces treated with rejected materials, as approved by Architect.. B.Coverage Test: In the presence of Architect, hose down a dry, repellent-treated surface to verify complete and uniform product application. A change in surface color will indicate incomplete application. 1.Notify Architect sevendays in advance of the dates and times when surfaces will be tested. 2.Reapply water repellent until coverage test indicates complete coverage. 3.05CLEANING A.Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged by water-repellent application as work progresses. Correct damage to work of other trades caused by water-repellent application, as approved by Architect. B.Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGWATER REPELLENTS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION071900-4 SECTION072100 THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Foam-plastic board insulation. 2.Mineral-wool board insulation. 3.Glass-fiber blanket insulation. 4.Loose-fill insulation. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.03INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Product test reports. B.Insulation Certification: Installer of loose fill and spray insulated to provide a certificate indicating the installed R-Value of the installation for each installed location. C.Research/evaluation reports. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION A.Board Insulation for foundations: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTMC578,squareorshiplapedged. 1.Manufacturers: Subjectto compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.DiversiFoam Products. b.DowChemical Company (The). c.Owens Corning. d.Pactiv Corporation. e.T. Clear Corporation. 2.TypeIV,25-psi(173-kPa)minimum compressive strength for vertical applications. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGTHERMAL INSULATION JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION072100-1 3.Thermal resistivity of 5.0degF xh x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 degF, minimum. 2.02MINERAL-WOOL BOARD INSULATION A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.Owens Corning. 2.Roxul Inc. 3.Thermafiber. B.Foil-Faced, Mineral-Wool Board Insulation: ASTMC612; faced on one side with foil-scrim or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor retarder; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 5, respectively, per ASTME84. 1.Nominal density of 4 lb/cu. ft.(64 kg/cu.m), TypesIA and IB, thermal resistivity of 4 degF xh x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 degF(27.7K x m/Wat 24 degC). 2.03GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.CertainTeed Corporation. 2.Guardian Building Products, Inc. 3.Johns Manville. 4.Knauf Insulation. 5.Owens Corning. B.Kraft-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTMC665, TypeII (non-reflective faced), ClassC (faced surface not rated for flame propagation); Category1 (membrane is a vapor barrier). 1.R-Value for 5-1/2 inch insulation to be R-21. C.Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves. D.Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass-fiber blanket insulation as follows: 1.Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no formaldehyde. 2.Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTMD5116 and shown to emit less than 0.05-ppm formaldehyde. 2.04LOOSE-FILL INSULATION A.Cellulosic-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTMC739, chemically treated for flame-resistance, processing, and handling characteristics. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGTHERMAL INSULATION JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION072100-2 B.Glass-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTMC764,TypeI for pneumatic application; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTME84. 2.05SMARTVAPOR RETARDERS A.Provide CertainTeed, MemBrain vapor retarder film. B.Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. 2.06POLYETHYLENE VAPOR RETARDERS A.Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTMD4397,10 mils(0.25 mm)thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm(7.5 ng/Pa xs x sq.m). B.Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated. B.Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. C.Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly aroundobstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D.Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation unitsto produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.02INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION A.Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B.Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1.Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGTHERMAL INSULATION JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION072100-3 2.Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3.Maintain3-inch(76-mm)clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. 4.Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented eaves. 5.For wood-framed construction, install blankets according to ASTMC1320 and as follows: a.With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is installed over it. 6.Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings, and seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation. a.Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward as indicated on Drawings. C.Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: 1.Loose-Fill Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft.(40 kg/cu.m). 2.Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.03INSTALLATION OF LOOSE FILL INSULATION A.Blow in loose fill insulation at attic areas to provide the R-Value based upon the manufacturer’s settled R-Value documentation. B.Install eave ventilation troughs prior to insulating attic spaces. C.Install insulation markers every 300 square feet indicating thickness of insulation in inches. Markers are to be attached to the roof framing and face the attic access opening. Markers to be marked with the initial installed thickness with numbers a minimum of 1 inch in height. 3.04INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A.Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings. Extend vapor retarders to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarders to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. B.Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs. 1.Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches(406 mm)o.c. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGTHERMAL INSULATION JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION072100-4 C.Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarders. D.Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders. 3.05FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Testing Agency: Perform inspections and provide a report per the following. B.Inspections: Insulation and insulation installation is subject to inspection for compliance with requirements and criteria listed in the IECC 2009, table 402.4.2. 3.06PROTECTION A.Protect installed insulationand vapor retardersfrom damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGTHERMAL INSULATION JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION072100-5 SECTION072500 WEATHER BARRIERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Weather Barrier BuildingWrap. 2.Seam Tape. 3.Flashing. 4.Fasteners. B.Related Sections: 1.Thermal Insulation 2.Masonry for through wall flashing, cavity insulation and brick tie information. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. 1.03INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Installation instructions for exterior wall system indicated. B.Design Data, Test Reports: Provide manufacturer test reports indicating product compliance with indicated requirements. C.Manufacturer Instructions: Provide manufacturer’s written installation instructions. D.Manufacturer’s Field Service Reports: Provide site reports from authorized field service representative, indicating observation of weather barrier assembly installation. 1.04CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Weather Barrier Warranty: Manufacturer’s executed warranty form with authorized signatures and endorsements indicating date of Substantial Completion. 1.05MOCK-UP A.Install mock-up using approved weather barrier assembly including fasteners, flashing, tape and related accessories per manufacturer’s current printed instructions and recommendations. 1.Mock-up size:10 feet by 10 feet. 2.Mock-up Substrate: Match wall assembly construction, including window opening. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGWEATHER BARRIERS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION072500-1 3.Mock-up may remain as part of the work. B.Contact manufacturer’s designated representative prior to weather barrier assembly installation, to perform required mock-up visual inspection and analysis as required for warranty. 1.06PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A.Hold a pre-installation conference, two weeks prior to start of weather barrier installation. Attendees shall include Contractor, Architect, installer, Owner’s Representative, and weather barrier manufacturer’s designated representative. B.Review all related project requirements and submittals,status of substrate work and preparation, areas of potential conflict and interface, availability of weather barrier assembly materials and components, installer’s training requirements, equipment, facilities and scaffolding, and coordinate methods, procedures and sequencing requirements for full and proper installation, integration and protection. 1.07SCHEDULING A.Review requirements for sequencing of installation of weather barrier assembly with installa- tion of windows, doors, louvers and flashings to provide a weather-tight barrier assembly. B.Schedule installation of weather barrier materials and exterior cladding within nine months of weather barrier assembly installation. 1.08WARRANTY A.Special Warranty 1.Weather barrier manufacturer's warranty for weather barrier for a period of ten (10) years from date of purchase. 2.Pre-installation meetings and jobsite observations by weather barrier manufacturer for warranty is required prior to assembly installation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER A.Building Wrap: ASTME1677, TypeI air barrier; with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 250, respectively, when tested according to ASTME84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.BasisofDesign: Subject to compliance with requirements,provideDuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company); TyvekCommercialWrapD. 2 2.Air Penetration:Less than 0.04 cfm/ft@ 75 Pa when tested in accoradance with ASTM E2357. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGWEATHER BARRIERS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION072500-2 3.Water Vapor Transmission:not less than 20 perms, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96, Method B. 4.Allowable UV Exposure Time: Not less than sixmonths. 2.02MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesivebutyl rubbercompound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch(0.6 mm). B.Seam Tape:Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap. 1.Seam tape to be a minimum of 3-inches wide. C.Fasteners: Corrosion resistant fasteners and caps as recommended by the weather barrier manufacturer. D.Sealants: Orivude are recommended by the manufacturer and as indicated inSection 07 92 00 Joint Sealants. E.Adhesives:Provide adhesive recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. F.Primers: Provide flashing manufacturer recommended primer to assist in adhesion between substrate and flashing. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Verify substrate and surface conditions are in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer recommended tolerances prior to installation of weather barrier and accessories. 3.02INSTALLATION-WEATHER BARRIER A.Install weather barrier over exterior face of exterior wall substrate in accordance with manufacturer recommendations B.Install weather barrier prior to installation of windows and doors. C.Install weather barrier in a horizontal manner starting at the lower portion of the wall surface with subsequent layers installed in a shingling manner to overlap lower layers. Maintain weather barrier plumb and level D.Sill Plate Interface: Extend lower edge of weather barrier over sill plate interface 3-6 inches. Secure to foundation with elastomeric sealant as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGWEATHER BARRIERS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION072500-3 E.Window and Door Openings: Extend weather barrier completely over openingsfor opening preparation as noted below. F.Overlap weather barrier 1.Exterior corners: minimum 12 inches. 2.Seams: minimum 6 inches. G.Weather Barrier Attachment: 1.Attach weather barrier to studs through exterior sheathing.Secure using weather barrier manufacturer recommend fasteners, space 6 -18 inches vertically on center along stud line, and 24 inch on center, maximum horizontally. H.Masonry Ties and other Cladding Anchors:Apply 4 inch by 7 inch piece of flashing or weather barrier manufacturer approved alternate to weather barrier membrane prior to the installation cladding anchorsat every anchor location. 3.03SEAMING A.Seal seams of weather barrier with seam tape at all vertical and horizontal overlapping seams. B.Seal any tears or cuts as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. 3.04OPENING PREPARATION A.Cut weather barrier in pattern recommended by the manufacturer. 1.Cut weather barrier horizontally along the bottom and top of window opening. 2.From top center of the window opening, cut weather barrier vertically down to the sill. 3.Fold side and bottom weather barrier flaps into window opening and fasten. B.Cut a head flap at 45-degree angle in the weather barrier at window head to expose 8 inches ofsheathing. Temporarily secure weather barrier flap away from sheathing with tape. 3.05FLASHING A.Cut9-inchwide flashinga minimum of 12 inches longer than width of sill rough opening. B.Cover horizontal sill by aligning flashing edge with inside edge of sill. Adhere to rough opening across sill and up jambs a minimum of 6 inches. Secure flashing tightly into corners by working in along the sill before adhering up the jambs. C.Fan flexible flashing at bottom corners onto face of wall. Firmly press in place. Mechanically fasten fanned edges unless it is not required by the manufacturer. D.On exterior, apply continuous bead of sealant to wall or backside of window mounting flange across jambs and head. Do not apply sealant across sill. E.Install window according to windowmanufacturer’s instructions. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGWEATHER BARRIERS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION072500-4 F.Apply 4-inch wide strips of flashing at jambs overlapping entire mounting flange. Extend jamb flashing1-inch above top of rough opening and below bottom edge of sill flashing. G.Apply 4-inch wide strip of head flashing overlapping the mounting flange. Head flashing should extend beyond outside edges of both jamb flashings. H.Position weather barrier head flap across head flashing. Adhere using 4-inch wide flashing over the 45-degree seams. I.Tape head flap in accordance with manufacturer recommendations J.On interior, install backer rod in joint between frame of window and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant around entire window to create air seal.Apply sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM C 1193. 3.06INTERFACE AT BASE OF WALL A.Overlap thru-wall flashing with weather barrier by 6-inches. B.Mechanically fasten bottom of weather barrier through top of thru-wall flashing. C.Seal vertical and horizontal seams with tape or sealing membrane. 3.07FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Testing Agency: Perform inspectionsand provide a report per the following. B.Inspections: Weather-barrier materials, accessories, and installation are subject to inspection for compliance with requirements. 1.Compliance with the IECC 2009, table 402.4.2. 2.Continuity of weather-barrier system has been achieved throughout the building envelope with no gaps or holes. 3.Continuous structural support of weather-barrier system has been provided. 4.Laps in strips and transition strips have complied with minimum requirements and have been shingled in the correct direction (or mastic has been applied on exposed edges), with no fishmouths. 5.Strips and transition strips have been firmly adhered to substrate. 6.Compatible materials have been used. 7.Transitions at changes in direction and structural support at gaps have been provided. 8.Connections between assemblies (weather-barrier and sealants) have complied with requirements for cleanliness, surface preparation and priming, structural support, integrity, and continuity of seal. 9.All penetrations have been sealed. C.Weather barriers will be considered defective if they do not pass inspections. 1.Remove and replace deficient weather-barrier components for retesting as specified above. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGWEATHER BARRIERS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION072500-5 D.Repair damage to weather barriers caused by testing; follow manufacturer's written instructions. E.Notify manufacturer’s designated representative to obtainrequiredperiodic observations of weather barrier assembly installation. 3.08PROTECTION A.Protect installed weather barrier from damage. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGWEATHER BARRIERS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION072500-6 SECTION073113 ASPHALT SHINGLES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Asphalt shingles. 2.Underlayment. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B.Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and blend specified. 1.03INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Product test reports. B.Research/evaluation reports. 1.04CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance data. 1.05QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Fire-Resistance Characteristics:Where indicated, provide asphalt shingles and related roofing materials identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per test method below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1.Exterior Fire-Test Exposure:ClassA; ASTME108 or UL790, for application and roof slopes indicated. 1.06WARRANTY A.Special Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace asphalt shingles that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Material Warranty Period:30years from date of Substantial Completion, prorated, with firstfiveyears nonprorated. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGASPHALT SHINGLES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION073113-1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES A.Multitab-StripAsphalt Shingles: ASTMD3462, glass-fiber reinforced, mineral-granule surfaced, and self-sealing. 1.Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products listed on the drawings or equivalentproducts by one of the following manufacturers: a.CertainTeed Corporation. b.Elk Premium Building Products, Inc.; an ElkCorp company. c.GAF Materials Corporation. d.Owens Corning. B.Hip and Ridge Shingles:Manufacturer's standard units to match asphalt shingles. 2.02UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A.Felt:ASTMD226orASTMD4869,TypeI, asphalt-saturated organic felts, nonperforated. B.Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Polyethylene Faced: ASTMD1970, minimum of 30-mil- thick, slip-resisting, polyethylene-film-reinforcedor glass reinforcedtop surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release paper backing; cold applied. 2.03RIDGE VENTS A.Rigid Ridge Vent:Rigid section high-density polypropylene or other UV-stabilized plastic ridge vent with nonwoven geotextile filter stripsandexternal deflector baffles; for use under ridge shingles. 1.Minimum Net Free Area:18 square inches per linear foot. 2.04AREA VENTS A.Basis of Design: Master Flow, model SSB960A metal roof louver. 1.Color to be selected from the manufacturer’s standard color options. 2.Minimum quantity is one vent per 1000 square feet and not less than the number shown onthe drawings. 2.05SNOWGUARDS A.Basis of Design: Zaleski Snow-Guards for Roofs, Inc. or approved equal. 1.Model: Zaleski Model #8 Snow-Guard. 2.Material: Stainless Steel, minimum of 0.02 inches thick. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGASPHALT SHINGLES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION073113-2 2.06ACCESSORIES A.Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTMD4586, TypeII, asbestos free. B.Roofing Nails: ASTMF1667; aluminum, stainless-steel, copper, or hot-dip galvanized-steel wire shingle nails, minimum 0.120-inch-(3-mm-)diameter,barbedshank, sharp-pointed, with a minimum 3/8-inch-(9.5-mm-)diameter flat head and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch (19 mm)into solid wood decking or extend at least 1/8 inch(3 mm)through OSB or plywood sheathing. 1.Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as flashing. C.Felt Underlayment Nails: Aluminum, stainless-steel, or hot-dip galvanized-steel wire with low- profile capped heads or disc caps, 1-inch(25-mm)minimum diameter. 2.07METAL FLASHING AND TRIM A.General: Comply with requirements in Division07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1.SheetMetal:Zinc-tin alloy-coated steel. B.Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A.General: Comply with underlayment manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. B.Single-Layer Felt Underlayment at Typical Locations with Roof Slopes 4:12 or Greater: Install on roof deck parallel with and starting at the eaves. Lap sides a minimum of 2 inches(50 mm) over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches(100 mm). Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches(1830 mm). Fasten with roofingnails. 1.Install felt underlayment on roof deck not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment. Lap sides of felt over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches(75 mm) in direction to shed water. Lap ends offelt not less than 6 inches(150 mm)over self- adhering sheet underlayment. C.Double-Layer Felt Underlaymentat Roof Slopes less than 4:12: Install on roof deck parallel with and starting at the eaves. Install a 19-inch-(485-mm-)wide starter course at eaves and completely cover with full-width second course. Install succeeding courses lapping previous courses19 inches(485 mm)in shingle fashion. Lap ends a minimum of 6 inches(150 mm). UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGASPHALT SHINGLES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION073113-3 Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches(1830 mm). Fasten with felt underlaymentnails. 1.Install felt underlayment on roof sheathing not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment. Lap edges over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches (75 mm)in direction to shed water. 2.Terminate felt underlayment flushagainst sidewalls, curbs, chimneys, and other roof projectionsand overlay with self-adhering sheet underlayment. D.Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install, wrinkle free, on roof deck. Comply with low- temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. Install at locations indicated below, lapped in direction to shed water. Lap sides not less than 3-1/2 inches(89 mm). Lap ends not less than 6 inches(150 mm)staggered24 inches(600 mm) betweencourses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days. 1.At all valleys. 2.At all transitions to sidewalls, curbs, chimneys, and other roof projections. 3.At all eaves and entire perimeter of roof. 3.02METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION A.General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in Division07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1.Install metal flashings according to recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual" and asphalt shingle recommendationsin NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." 3.03ASPHALT SHINGLE INSTALLATION A.General: Install asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions, recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual," and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." B.Install starter strip along lowest roof edge, consisting of an asphalt shingle strip with tabs removedwith self-sealing strip face up at roof edge. 1.Extend asphalt shingles 1/2 inch(13 mm)over fasciae at eaves and rakes. 2.Install starter strip along rake edge. C.Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck with manufacturer's recommendedoffset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform exposure. D.Fasten asphalt shingle strips with a minimum of fourroofing nails located according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1.Where roof slope is less than 4:12, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots. E.Closed-Cut Valleys: Extend asphalt shingle strips from one side of valley 12 inches(300 mm) beyond center of valley. Use one-piece shingle strips without joints in valley. Fasten with UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGASPHALT SHINGLES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION073113-4 extra nail in upper end of shingle. Install asphalt shingle courses from other side of valley and cut back to a straight line 2 inches(50 mm)short of valley centerline. Trim upper concealed corners of cut-back shingle strips. F.Ridge Vents: Install continuous ridge vents over asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing. G.Ridgeand HipCap Shingles: Maintain same exposure of cap shingles as roofing shingle exposure. Lap cap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing winds. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing. 1.Fasten ridge cap asphalt shingles to cover ridge vent without obstructing airflow. H.Snow Guards: Install snow guards in locations noted on the drawings. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGASPHALT SHINGLES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION073113-5 SECTION074113 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY 1.Section includes standing-seam metal roof panels. 1.02PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A.Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.03ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. B.Shop Drawings: Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. C.Samples: Foreach type of metal panel indicated. 1.04INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Product test reports. 1.05CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance data. B.Warranty. 1.06QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approvedby manufacturer. B.UL-Certified, Portable Roll-Forming Equipment: UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment capable of producing metal panels warranted by manufacturer to be the same as factory- formed products. Maintain UL certification of portable roll-forming equipment for duration of work. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSTANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION074113-1 1.07WARRANTY A.Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Warranty Period:Twoyears from date of Substantial Completion. B.Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory- applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1.Finish Warranty Period:20years from date of Substantial Completion. C.Special Weathertightness Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace standing-seam metal roof panel assemblies that fail to remain weathertight, including leaks, within specified warranty period. 1.Warranty Period:20years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTME1592: 1.Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. B.Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTME1646or ASTME331at thefollowing test-pressure difference: 1.Test-Pressure Difference:6.24 lbf/sq. ft.(300 Pa). C.Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: No water penetration when tested according to ASTME2140. D.Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1.Temperature Change (Range):120 degF(67 degC), ambient; 180 degF(100 degC), material surfaces. 2.02STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS A.General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSTANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION074113-2 mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips, cleats, pressure plates, and accessories required for weathertight installation. 1.Steel Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with ASTME1514. B.Vertical-Rib, Seamed-Joint, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges and a flat panbetween ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels, engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels, and mechanically seaming panels together. 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.AEP Span; a BlueScope Steel company. b.Architectural Metal Systems; a Nucor company. c.ATAS International, Inc. d.Berridge Manufacturing Company. e.CENTRIA Architectural Systems. f.Firestone Metal Products, LLC. g.MBCI; a division of NCI Building Systems, L.P. h.Merchant & Evans. i.Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC. j.Morin; a Kingspan Group company. k.Petersen Aluminum Corporation. l.Ryerson, Inc. 2.Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTMA653/A653M,G90(Z275)coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet complying with ASTMA792/A792M,ClassAZ50(ClassAZM150)coating designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTMA755/A755M. a.Nominal Thickness:0.034 inch(0.86 mm)minimum. b.Exterior Finish:Two-coat fluoropolymer. c.Color:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3.Clips: Designedto accommodate thermal movement. a.Material:0.028-inch-(0.71-mm-)nominal thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized) or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet. 4.Joint Type:As standard with manufacturer. 5.Panel Coverage:16 inches(406 mm). 6.Panel Height:2.0 inches. 2.03UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A.Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Underlayment: Provide self-adhering, cold-applied, sheet underlayment, a minimum of 30 mils(0.76 mm)thick, consisting of slip-resistant, polyethylene- UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSTANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION074113-3 film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release- paper backing. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1.Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 degF(116 degC); ASTMD1970. 2.Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 degF(29 degC); ASTMD1970. B.Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application. 2.04SNOWGUARDS A.BasisofDesign: Zaleski Snow-Guards for Roofs, Inc. or approved equal. 1.Model: Zaleski Model #11-A Snow-Guard. 2.Material: Cast aluminum. 3.Finish: Baked enamel finish to match roofing system. 2.05MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring:ASTMC645; cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTMA653/A653M,G90(Z275 hot-dip galvanized)coating designation or ASTMA792/A792M,ClassAZ50(ClassAZM150)coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system. B.Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated. 1.Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal panels. 2.Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates atpanel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. 3.Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch-(25-mm-)thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. C.Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels. D.Gutters and Downspouts: Formed from same material as roof panels according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Finish to match roof fascia and rake trim. E.Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSTANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION074113-4 F.Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish. 1.Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing; 1/2inch(13 mm)wide and 1/8 inch(3 mm) thick. 2.Joint Sealant: ASTMC920; as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. 3.Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTMC1311. 2.06FABRICATION A.General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. B.On-Site Fabrication: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, metal panels may be fabricated on-site using UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment if panels are of same profile and warranted by manufacturer to be equal to factory-formed panels. Fabricate according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with details shown. C.Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from movements. D.Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. 2.07FINISHES A.Panels and Accessories: 1.Two-Coat Fluoropolymer:AAMA621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. 2.Concealed Finish:White or light-coloredacrylic or polyester backer finish. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01PREPARATION A.Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTMC754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSTANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION074113-5 3.02UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A.Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply at locations indicatedbelow, wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than6 inches(152 mm)staggered24 inches(610 mm)between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches(90 mm). Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 1.Apply over the entire roof surface. 3.03METAL PANEL INSTALLATION A.Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panel Installation: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1.Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners. 2.Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3.Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved, motorized seamer tool so clip, metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged. 4.Watertight Installation: a.Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal joints of metal panels, using sealant or tape as recommend in writing by manufacturer as needed to make panels watertight. b.Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories. c.At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch(152-mm)end lap, sealed with sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates. B.Snow Guards: Install snow guards in locations noted on the drawings. C.Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. D.Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Installwork with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 3.04CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSTANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION074113-6 END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSTANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION074113-7 SECTION074116 FORMED METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section includes exposed-fastener, lap-seam, metal roof panels. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data:For each type of product. B.Shop Drawings:Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels;details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. C.Samples:For each type of metal panel indicated. 1.03INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Product test reports. 1.04CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance data. 1.05QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications:An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.06WARRANTY A.Special Warranty:Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Warranty Period:Twoyears from date of Substantial Completion. B.Special Warranty on Panel Finishes:Manufacturer's standardform in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory- applied finishes within specified warranty period. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGFORMED METAL ROOF PANELS JUNE 7, 2013 –PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION074116-1 1.Finish Warranty Period:10years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Structural Performance:Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTME1592: 1.Wind Loads:As indicated on Drawings. 2.Other Design Loads:As indicated on Drawings. 3.Deflection Limits:For wind loads, no greater than 1/180of the span. B.Wind-Uplift Resistance:Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL580 for wind- uplift-resistance class. C.Thermal Movements:Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1.Temperature Change (Range):120 degF(67 degC), ambient; 180 degF(100 degC), material surfaces. 2.02EXPOSED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM, METAL ROOF PANELS A.General:Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps.Include accessories required for weathertight installation. B.Corrugated-Profile, Exposed-Fastener Metal Roof Panels Residential Building Canopies: Formed with alternating curved ribs spaced at 2.67 inches(68 mm)o.c. across width of panel. 1.Manufacturers:Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.AEP Span; a BlueScope Steel company. b.Alcoa Inc. c.CENTRIA Architectural Systems. d.Firestone Metal Products, LLC. e.Flexospan Steel Buildings, Inc. f.MBCI; a division of NCI Building Systems, L.P. g.McElroy Metal, Inc. h.Morin; a Kingspan Group company. 2.Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet:Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTMA653/A653M,G90(Z275)coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet complying with ASTMA792/A792M,ClassAZ50(ClassAZM150)coating UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGFORMED METAL ROOF PANELS JUNE 7, 2013 –PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION074116-2 designation; structural quality.Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTMA755/A755M. a.Nominal Thickness:0.028 inch(0.71 mm)minimum, thickness as required for performance requirements. b.Exterior Finishon both sides of panel:Two-coat fluoropolymer. c.Color:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3.Panel Coverage:34.67 inches(881 mm). 4.Panel Height:0.875 inch(22 mm). C.Rib-Profile, Exposed-Fastener Metal Roof Panelsat Community Center Canopy:Formed with raised, ribs and recesses that are approximately same size, evenly spaced across panel width, and with rib/recess sides angled at approximately 45 degrees. 1.Manufacturers:Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.AEP Span; a BlueScope Steel company. b.Alcoa Inc. c.Berridge Manufacturing Company. d.CENTRIA Architectural Systems. e.Flexospan Steel Buildings, Inc. f.MBCI; a division of NCI Building Systems, L.P. g.Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation. h.Morin; a Kingspan Group company. i.Petersen Aluminum Corporation. 2.Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet:Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTMA653/A653M,G90(Z275)coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet complying with ASTMA792/A792M,ClassAZ50(ClassAZM150)coating designation;structural quality.Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTMA755/A755M. a.Nominal Thickness:0.028 inch(0.71 mm)minimum, thickness as required for performance requirements. b.Exterior Finishon both sides of panel:Two-coat fluoropolymer. c.Color:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3.Rib Spacing:7.2 inches(183 mm)o.c. 4.Panel Coverage:36 inches(914 mm). 5.Panel Height:1.5 inches(38 mm). 2.03MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring:ASTMC645; cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTMA653/A653M,G90(Z275 hot-dip galvanized)coating designation or ASTMA792/A792M,ClassAZ50(ClassAZM150)aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated.Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGFORMED METAL ROOF PANELS JUNE 7, 2013 –PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION074116-3 B.Panel Accessories:Provide components required for a complete, panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated. 1.Closures:Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal panels. 2.Backing Plates:Provide metal backing plates at panelend splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. 3.Closure Strips:Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch-(25-mm-)thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile.Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. C.Flashing and Trim:Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panelsas required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance.Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels. D.Panel Fasteners:Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads.Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of plastic caps or factory- applied coating.Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners. E.Panel Sealants:Provide sealant types recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish. 1.Sealant Tape:Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing; 1/2inch(13 mm)wide and 1/8 inch(3 mm) thick. 2.Joint Sealant:ASTMC920; as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. 3.Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant:ASTMC1311. 2.04FABRICATION A.General:Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessoriesat the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing.Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. B.Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length ofpanel. C.Fabricate metal panel joints with captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from movements. D.Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim:Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGFORMED METAL ROOF PANELS JUNE 7, 2013 –PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION074116-4 2.05FINISHES A.Panels and Accessories: 1.Two-Coat Fluoropolymer:AAMA621.Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. 2.Concealed Finish:White or light-colored acrylic or polyester backerfinish. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01PREPARATION A.Miscellaneous Supports:Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTMC754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.02METAL PANEL INSTALLATION A.Lap-Seam Metal Panels:Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer. 1.Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib.Apply panels and associated items true to line for neat and weathertight enclosure. 2.Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal panels. 3.Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of washer. 4.Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels.Install screws in predrilled holes. 5.Flash and seal panels with weather closures at perimeter of all openings. B.Accessory Installation:Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion.Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. C.Flashing and Trim:Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level.Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight. 3.03CLEANING A.Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.On UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGFORMED METAL ROOF PANELS JUNE 7, 2013 –PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION074116-5 completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer.Maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGFORMED METAL ROOF PANELS JUNE 7, 2013 –PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION074116-6 SECTION074600 SIDING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Fiber-cementsiding, paneling, trim, fascia, and accessories 2.Fiber-cement soffit. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated.Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B.Samples for Initial Selection: For sidingand soffitincluding related accessories. C.Samples for Verification:For each type, color, texture, and pattern required. 1.24-inch-(600-mm-)wide-by-36-inch-(900-mm-)high Sample panel of siding assembled on plywood backing. 2.12-inch-(300-mm-)long-by-actual-width Sample of soffit. 3.12-inch-(300-mm-)long-by-actual-width Samples of trim and accessories. 1.03INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Product Certificates: For each type of sidingand soffit, from manufacturer. B.Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for fiber-cement siding. C.Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of siding required, from the ICC. 1.04CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance Data: For each type of sidingand soffitand related accessories to include in maintenance manuals. B.Warranty. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSIDING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION074600-1 1.05MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A.Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.Furnish full lengths of sidingand soffitincluding related accessories, in a quantity equal to 2 percent of amount installed. 1.06QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Labeling: Provide fiber-cement siding that is tested and labeled according to ASTMC1186 by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B.Source Limitations: Obtain sidingand soffit, including related accessories, from single source from single manufacturer. C.Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1.Build mockups for sidingand soffitincluding accessories. a.Size:96incheslong by 96incheshigh. b.Include outside corner on one end of mockupand inside corner on other end. 2.Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3.Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. D.Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.07DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Store materials in adry, well-ventilated, weathertight place. 1.08COORDINATION A.Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper sequencing. 1.09WARRANTY A.Special Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace sidingand soffitthat fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Failures include, but are not limited to, structural failures including cracking, deforming. 2.Warranty Periodexcept for finishes: 25years from date of Substantial Completion. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSIDING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION074600-2 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01FIBER-CEMENT SIDING A.General: ASTMC1186, TypeA, GradeII, fiber-cement board, noncombustible when tested according to ASTME136; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTME84. 1.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a.Cemplank. b.CertainTeed Corp. c.Fibre C. d.James Hardie. e.MaxiTile, Inc; a California corporation. f.Nichiha Fiber Cement. g.Swiss Pearl. h.Taktl. 2.Lap Siding -Horizontal Pattern: Boards 7-1/4 to 7-1/2 inches(184 to 190 mm)wide. a.Texture:Wood grain–James Hardie; Cedarmill. 3.VerticalBoard and Batten Panel Siding:48-inch-(1200-mm-)wide sheets with smooth texture and smooth texture battens. 4.Vertical Board and Reveal Panel Siding:48-inch-(1200-mm-)wide sheets with smooth texture with aluminum reveals as indicated on the drawings. 5.Factory FinishingTrim as Noted: Manufacturer’s recommended factory finish. a.Color: As indicated on the drawings, if not indicated, as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer’s full line of options. 6.Factory PrimingSiding as Noted: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer.Field finish per Exterior Painting specifications. 2.02FIBER-CEMENT SOFFIT A.General: ASTMC1186, TypeA, GradeII, fiber-cement board, noncombustible when tested according to ASTME136; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTME84. 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the same manufacturer as the siding material, or productsapproved by the siding manufacturer. B.Pattern:24-inch-(600-mm-)wide sheets with smoothtexture. C.Ventilation: Provide perforatedsoffitunless otherwise indicated. 1.Net-Free Area: 6 sq. in. / linear ft. minimum. D.Factory Finishing: Manufacturer’s recommended factory finish. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSIDING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION074600-3 1.Color: As indicated on the drawings, if not indicated, as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer’s full line of options. 2.03ACCESSORIES A.Siding Accessories, General: Provide starter strips, edge trim, outside and inside cornercaps, and other items as recommended by siding manufacturer for building configuration. 1.Provide accessories made from same material asadjacent siding unless otherwise indicated. B.Decorative Accessories: Provide the fiber-cementdecorative accessories as indicated on the drawings. C.Reveals: Fry Reglet clear anodized ½-inch reveals as shown in the drawings. D.Colors for Decorative Accessories:Manufacturer’s recommended factory finish. 1.Color: As indicated on the drawings, if not indicated, as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer’s full line of options. E.Flashing: Provide aluminumflashing complying with Section076200"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" at window and door heads and where indicated. 1.Finish for Aluminum Flashing:Siliconized polyester coating, same color as siding. F.Fasteners: 1.For fastening to wood, use ribbed bugle-head screwsof sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1 inch(25 mm)into substrate. 2.For fastening fiber cement, use hot-dip galvanizedorstainless-steelfasteners. G.Insect Screening for Soffit Vents:Aluminum,18-by-16(1.4-by-1.6-mm)meshorPVC-coated, glass-fiber fabric, 18-by-14 or 18-by-16(1.4-by-1.8-or 1.4-by-1.6-mm)mesh. H.Continuous Soffit Vents: Aluminum, hat-channel shape, with perforations;2 inches(51 mm) wide and not less than 96 inches(2438 mm)long. I.Mount Blocks: Provide siding manufacturer’s recommended mount blocks for light fixtures, electrical outlets, alarm bell, exhaust vents, push plates and other items mounted on face of the building. Products from the siding manufacturer, as recommended by the siding manufacturer and products from Mid-America are acceptable, subject to the requirements stated. 1.Light fixture mount blocks to be a minimum of 6-1/2inches by 6-1/2inches. 2.Push plate mount blocks to be a minimum of 4-1/2 inches by 6-1/2 inches. J.Exhaust Dryer Vents: Provide dryer exhaust vents that comply with the dryer manufacturer requirements. 1.Basis of Design: Subject to the requirements, provide Mid-America 6” hooded vent with concealed exhaust flap, wire screen and 25 sq.in. net free area minimum or approved equal. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSIDING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION074600-4 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of sidingand soffitand relatedaccessories. B.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02PREPARATION A.Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. 3.03INSTALLATION A.General: Comply with sidingand soffitmanufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. 1.Do not install damaged components. B.Install fiber-cementsidingand soffitand related accessories per manufacturer recommendations. 1.Install fasteners no more than 24 inches(600 mm)o.c. 2.Install spacers between weather resistant barrier and back side of siding to allow for air movement and drainage. 3.Install flashings over doors, windows and other wall penetrations. 4.Install flashings over horizontal trim that is installed directly against the weather resistant barrier. 5.Install flashing at base of wall. C.Ventilation space: Provide 3/8 inch ventilation space at the board and batten siding and the reveal board siding as indicated on the drawings. 3.04ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective materials and replace with new materials complying with specified requirements. B.Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSIDING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION074600-5 SECTION076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Formed roof-drainage sheet metal fabrications. 2.Formed steep-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. 3.Formed wall sheet metal fabrications. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. B.Shop Drawings: Show installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop-and field- assembled work. 1.Include details for forming, joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including pattern of seams, termination points, fixed points, expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, edge conditions, special conditions, and connections to adjoining work. C.Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.03CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance data. 1.04QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings. B.Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION076200-1 1.05WARRANTY A.Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1.Finish Warranty Period:10years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. B.Recycled Content of Steel-Sheet Flashing and Trim: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-halfof preconsumer recycled content not less than 25percent. C.Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1.Temperature Change:120 degF(67 degC), ambient; 180 degF(100 degC), material surfaces. 2.02SHEET METALS A.General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. B.Aluminum Sheet:ASTMB209(ASTMB209M), alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required. 1.Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a.Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. b.Siliconized Polyester: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel topcoat; with dry film thickness of not less than 0.2 mil(0.005 mm)forprimer and 0.8 mil(0.02 mm)for topcoat. 2.Color:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION076200-2 C.Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to ASTMA653/A653M,G90(Z275)coating designation; prepaintedby coil-coating process to comply with ASTMA755/A755M. 1.Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a.Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating toexposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. b.Siliconized Polyester: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel topcoat; with dry film thickness of not less than 0.2 mil(0.005 mm)for primer and 0.8 mil(0.02 mm)for topcoat. 2.Color:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.03UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A.Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils(0.76 to 1.0 mm)thick, consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS- modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1.Thermal Stability: ASTMD1970; stable after testing at 240 degF(116 degC). 2.Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTMD1970; passes after testing at minus 20 degF(29 degC). B.Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft.(0.16 kg/sq.m)minimum. 2.04MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metalor manufactured itemunless otherwise indicated. B.Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metalor manufactured item. 1.General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head. a.Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal. b.Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. 2.Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series300 stainless steel. 3.Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)Steel Sheet: Series300 stainless steel or hot- dip galvanized steel according to ASTMA153/A153M or ASTMF2329. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION076200-3 C.Solder: 1.For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTMB32, GradeSn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead or GradeSn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead. D.Sealant Tape:Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch(13 mm)wide and 1/8 inch(3 mm)thick. E.Elastomeric Sealant: ASTMC920, elastomeric polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. F.Butyl Sealant: ASTMC1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. G.Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTMD1187. H.Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTMD4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. 2.05FABRICATION, GENERAL A.General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible. 1.Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 2.Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 3.Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view. B.Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion ofexposed flashing and trim. 1.Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch(25 mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. 2.Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings. C.Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard. D.Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. E.Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION076200-4 F.Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. 2.06ROOF-DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A.Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section required, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-(2400-mm-)long sections. Furnish flat-stock gutter brackets and gutter spacers and straps fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by cited sheet metal standard but with thickness not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters.Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. 1.Gutters with Girth up to 15 Inches(380 mm): Fabricate from the following materials: a.Aluminum:0.032 inch(0.81 mm)thick. 2.Gutters with Girth 16 to 20 Inches(410 to 510 mm): Fabricate from the following materials: a.Aluminum:0.040 inch(1.02 mm)thick. B.Downspouts: Fabricate rectangulardownspouts to dimensions indicated, complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers from same material as downspouts and anchors. 1.Fabricate from the following materials: a.Aluminum:0.024 inch(0.61 mm)thick. 2.07STEEP-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A.Apron, Step, Cricket, and Backer Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1.Aluminum:0.032 inch(0.81 mm)thick. 2.Galvanized Steel:0.022 inch(0.56 mm)thick. B.Valley Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1.Galvanized Steel:0.028 inch(0.71 mm)thick. C.Drip Edges: Fabricate from the following materials: 1.Aluminum:0.032 inch(0.81 mm)thick. 2.Galvanized Steel:0.022 inch(0.56 mm)thick. D.Eave, Rake,Ridge, and HipFlashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1.Aluminum:0.032 inch(0.81 mm)thick. 2.Galvanized Steel:0.022 inch(0.56 mm)thick. 2.08WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS(except at masonry walls) A.Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches(100 mm)beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch-(50-mm-) high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials: 1.Aluminum:0.032 inch(0.81 mm)thick. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION076200-5 B.Aluminum Sills: Fabricate sill to provide water resistant coverage over masonry sills and other conditions as noted. Form sill flashing to connect with the adjacent construction to provide a water tight result. All fasteners to be concealed. Fabricate from the following materials: 1.Aluminum:0.050inch. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A.Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches(150 mm)staggered24 inches(600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches(90 mm). Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 3.02INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.General: Anchor sheet metalflashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metalflashing and trim system. 1.Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2.Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3.Space cleats not more than 12 inches(300 mm)apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 4.Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks. 5.Install sealant tape where indicated. 6.Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. B.Metal Protection:Where dissimilar metals contact each other,or where metal contacts pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer andas recommended by SMACNA. 1.Coat concealed side of uncoated-aluminumsheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2.Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashingand trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION076200-6 C.Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet(3m)with no joints within24 inches(600 mm)of corner or intersection. 1.Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch(25 mm) deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints. 2.Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings. D.Fasteners:Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches(32 mm)for nails and not less than 3/4 inch(19 mm)for wood screws. E.Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimizepossibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation. F.Seal joints as required for watertight construction. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section079200"Joint Sealants." G.Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where necessary for strength. 3.03ROOF-DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A.General: Install sheet metal roof-drainage items to produce complete roof-drainage system according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-drainage system. B.Hanging Gutters: Join sections with joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchor them in position. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts. 1.Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50 feet (15.24m)apart. Install expansion-joint caps. C.Downspouts: Join sections with1-1/2-inch(38-mm)telescoping joints. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches(1500 mm)o.c. 3.04ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A.General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements,sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions,and cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. Installwork with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant. B.Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION076200-7 C.Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. 1.Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 16-inch(400-mm)centers. 2.Anchor interior leg of coping with washers and screw fasteners through slotted holes at 24-inch(600-mm)centers. D.Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches(100 mm)over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten. E.Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing4 inches(100 mm)over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches(100 mm). F.Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation ofroofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof. 3.05WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION A.General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers. B.Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Section042000 "Unit Masonry." C.Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches(100 mm)beyond wall openings. 3.06CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B.Clean off excess sealants. C.Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION076200-8 SECTION078413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. 2.Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. 1.02PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.For the following constructions, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly penetrated. 1.Fire-resistance-rated walls, including partitions, with fire-protection-rated openings. 2.Fire-resistance-rated floor and roof assemblies. B.F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, as determined per ASTME814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. C.T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, as determined per ASTME814, where systems protect penetratingitems exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas: 1.Penetrations located outside wall cavities. 2.Penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft enclosures. 3.Penetrations located in construction containing fire-protection-rated openings. 4.Penetrating items larger than 4-inch-diameter nominal pipe or 16 sq. in. in overall cross-sectional area. D.For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread ratings of less than 25 and smoke-developed ratings of less than 450, as determined per ASTME84. 1.03ACTIONSUBMITTALS–DELEGATED DESIGN A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B.Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGPENETRATION FIRESTOPPING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION078413-1 1.04INFORMATIONAL SUBMITALS A.Delegated Design: 1.Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. a.Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fire-protection engineer asan engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. 1.05QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer. B.Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following requirements: 1.Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systemscomplying with the following requirements: a.Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b.Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations listed by UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 1.06PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet because ofrain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B.Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.07COORDINATION A.Coordinate construction ofopenings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is installed according to specified requirements. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGPENETRATION FIRESTOPPING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION078413-2 B.Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A.Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated.Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any. B.Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTME814 or UL1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg(2.49 Pa). 1.Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire wallsfire-barrier wallsandfire partitions. 2.F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. C.Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTME814 or UL1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg(2.49 Pa). 1.Horizontal assemblies include floorsandceilings. 2.F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 3.T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall. 4.W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping showing no evidence of water leakage when tested according to UL1479. D.W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping showing no evidence of water leakage when tested according to UL1479. E.Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTME84. F.Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated. 1.Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following: a.Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation. b.Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c.Fire-rated form board. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGPENETRATION FIRESTOPPING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION078413-3 d.Fillers for sealants. 2.Temporaryforming materials. 3.Substrate primers. 4.Collars. 5.Steel sleeves. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditionsaffecting performance of the Work. B.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02PREPARATION A.Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B.Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C.Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates. 3.03INSTALLATION A.General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B.Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1.After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping. C.Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1.Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGPENETRATION FIRESTOPPING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION078413-4 2.Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3.For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.04CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B.Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. 3.05PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE A.Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product CategoryXHEZ. PENETRATIONUL CLASSIFIEDUL NUMBERFILL MATERIAL DESCRIPTIONSYSTEM Firestop Systems C-AJ-W-J-0001-0999Latex sealant with No Penetrating C-BJ-W-L-Silicone sealant ItemsF-A-Mortar Intumescent putty Firestop Systems for C-AJ-F-C-1001-1999Latex sealant Metallic Pipes, Con-C-BJ-W-J-Silicone sealant duit, or TubingC-BKW-K-Mortar F-A-W-L-Intumescent putty F-B- Firestop Systems for C-AJ-F-C-2001-2999Latex sealant Nonmetallic Pipe, C-BJ-W-J-Siliconesealant Conduit, or TubingF-A-W-L-Intumescent putty F-B-Intumescent wrap strips Firestop device Firestop Systems for C-AJ-F-C-3001-3999Latex sealant Electrical Cables C-BJ-W-J-Silicone sealant F-A-W-L-Intumescent putty F-B-Silicone foam Firestop Systems for C-AJ-F-C-4001-4999Latex sealant Cable TraysC-BJ-W-J-Intumescent putty F-A-W-K-Silicone foam F-B-W-L-Pillows/bags UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGPENETRATION FIRESTOPPING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION078413-5 Firestop Systems for C-AJ-F-C-5001-5999Latex sealant Insulated PipesC-BJ-W-J-Intumescent putty F-A-W-L-Intumescent wrap strips Silicone foam Firestop Systems for C-AJ-6001-6999Latex sealant Miscellaneous Elec-F-A-Intumescent putty trical PenetrantsW-L-Mortar Firestop Systems for C-AJ-7001-7999Latex sealant Miscellaneous Me-F-C-Mortar chanical Penetra-W-J- tionsW-L- Firestop Systems forC-AJ-8001-8999Latex sealant Groupings of Pene-C-BJ-Mortar trationsF-AIntumescent wrap F-C-strips W-J-Firestop device W-L-Intumescent compo- site sheet. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGPENETRATION FIRESTOPPING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION078413-6 SECTION 078443 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.This Section includes fire resistant joint systems through fire resistance rated assemblies, consisting of adjacent wall and floor assemblies and the materials designed to prevent the spread offire through wall and floor assemblies, including: 1.Floor to floor joint systems 2.Floor to wall joint systems 3.Wall to wall joint systems 4.Head of wall joint systems B.Related Sections: 1.Division 7 Section "Through Penetration Fire Stopping" for firestopping through fire-resistance-rated assemblies. 2.Division 7 Section "Perimeter Fire Containment Systems" for fire safing insulation and accessories. 1.02PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.General: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly in which fire-resistive joint systems are installed. B.Joint Systems in and between Fire-Resistance-Rated Constructions: Provide systems with assembly ratings equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance ratings of construction that they join,andwith movement capabilitiesindicated as determined by UL2079. C.For fire resistant joint systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread ratings of less than 25 and smoke-developed ratings of less than 450, as determined per ASTME84. 1.03ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of fire resistant joint system product indicated. B.Shop Drawings: For each fire resistant joint system, show each kind of construction condition and relationships to adjoining construction. Include design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. 1.Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each fire resistant joint system configuration for construction and penetrating items. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGFIRE RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION078443-1 2.Where Project conditions require modification of qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration to suit a particular fire resistant joint condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by fire resistant joint system manufacturer's fire-protectionengineer. 1.04INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Delegated Design: Letter from manufacturer indicating that the fire resistive joints systems are compliant with code requirements at the installed conditions. B.Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. C.Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating fire resistant joint system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products. 1.05QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed fire resistant joint systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B.Installation Responsibility: Assign installation ofthrough-penetration firestop systems andfire- resistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer. C.Source Limitations: Obtain fire-resistive joint systems, for each kind of joint and construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer. D.Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fire resistant joint systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in "Performance Requirements" Article: 1.Fire resistant joint system tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for fire resistant joint systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.Fire resistant joint systems are identical tothose tested per UL 2079 Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:. a.Fire resistant joint system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b.Fire resistant joint systems correspond to those indicated by reference to fire resistant joint system designations listed by the following: 1)UL in "Fire Resistance With Hourly Ratings for Joint Systems and Through- Penetration Firestop Systems." UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGFIRE RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION078443-2 1.06DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver fire resistant joint system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project; curing time; and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B.Store and handle materials for fire resistant joint systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. 1.07PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire resistant joint systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire resistant joint system manufacturers or when substratesare wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B.Ventilate fire resistant joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01FIRE RESISTANT JOINT SYSTEMS, GENERAL A.Compatibility: Provide fire resistant joint systems that are compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating fire resistant joint systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by fire resistant joint system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B.Accessories: Provide components for each fire resistant joint system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article.Use only components specified by fire resistant joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for fire resistant joint systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items: 1.Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following: a.Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation. b.Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c.Fire-rated form board. d.Fillers forsealants. 2.Temporary forming materials. 3.Substrate primers. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGFIRE RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION078443-3 2.02FILL MATERIALS A.Provide fire resistant joint systems containing the types of fill materials indicated in the Fire resistant joint System Schedule at the end of Part3 by reference to the types of materials described in this Article. Fill materials are those referred to in directories of the referenced testing and inspecting agencies as fill, void, or cavity materials. B.Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that after cure do not re-emulsify during exposure to moisture. C.Silicone Sealants: Moisture-curing, single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants. Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping, gunnable sealant, unless indicated fire resistant joint system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening conditions. 2.03MIXING A.For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with fire resistant joint system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02PREPARATION A.Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing fire resistant jointsystems to comply with written recommendations of fire resistant joint system manufacturer. B.Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire resistant joint system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C.Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fire resistant joint systems from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from fire resistant joint system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire resistant joint system’s seal with substrates. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGFIRE RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION078443-4 3.03FIRE RESISTANT JOINT SYSTEM INSTALLATION A.General: Install fire resistant joint systems to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article and fire resistant joint system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. 3.04CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire resistant joint system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. 3.05FIRE RESISTANT JOINT SCHEDULE A.Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to the alpha-alpha-numeric designations listed in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHBN. JOINTULNOMINALUL CLASSIFIED ASSEMBLYJOINT DESCRIPTIONSYSTEMJOINT WIDTHSYSTEMSRATINGMATERIAL Floor to Floor FF-DAs Indicated0001-09991Hours mini-Latex Sealants 1000-1999mum, not less Silicone Sealants 2000-2999than indicated 3000-3999 4000-4999 Wall to WallWW-DAs Indicated0001-09991Hours mini-Latex Sealants 1000-1999mum, not less Silicone Sealants 2000-2999than indicated 3000-3999 4000-4999 Floor to WallFW-DAs Indicated0001-09991Hours mini-Latex Sealants 1000-1999mum, not less Silicone Sealants 2000-2999than indicated 3000-3999 4000-4999 Head of WallHW-DAs Indicated0001-09991Hours mini-Latex Sealants 1000-1999mum, not less Silicone Sealants 2000-2999than indicated 3000-3999 4000-4999 END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGFIRE RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION078443-5 SECTION079200 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section Includes silicone, latex, and acousticaljoint sealants. 1.02PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 1.03ACTIONSUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. 1.04INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer. B.Sealant, Waterproofing,and Restoration Institute (SWRI) Validation Certificate: For each sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program. C.Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article. D.Field-Adhesion Test Reports: For each sealant application tested. 1.05CLOSE-OUT SUBMITTALS A.Warranties:Allwarranties. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01MATERIALS, GENERAL A.Compatibility:Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGJOINT SEALANTS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION079200-1 B.Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTMC1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. C.Suitability for Contact with Food:Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21CFR177.2600. D.Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants:Match Architect's samples. 2.02SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A.Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTMC920, TypeS, GradeNS, Class100/50 and Class 50, for UseNT. 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.Dow Corning Corporation. b.GEAdvanced Materials. c.Pecora Corporation. d.Sika Corporation e.Tremco B.Single-Component, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTMC920, TypeS, GradeNS, Class50, for UseT. 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.Dow Corning Corporation. b.GE Advanced Materials. c.Pecora Corporation. d.Sika Corporation e.Tremco C.Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Neutral or Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTMC920, TypeS, GradeNS, Class25, for UseNT. 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.Dow Corning Corporation b.Pecora Corporation. c.Sika Corporation d.Tremco Incorporated. 2.03URETHANEJOINT SEALANTS A.Multi-Component, Nonsag Urethane Joint Sealant, ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade Nonsag Class 25 for Use T. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGJOINT SEALANTS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION079200-2 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.BASF Building Systems. b.Pecora Corporation. c.Sika Corporation d.Tremco Incorporated. 2.04LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A.Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex orsiliconized acrylic latex, ASTMC834, TypeOP, GradeNF. 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.BASF Building Systems b.GE Momentive Performance Materials c.Pecora Corporation. d.Tremco Incorporated. 2.05SOLVENT-RELEASE-CURING JOINT SEALANTS A.Butyl-Rubber-Based Joint Sealant: ASTMC1311. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a.Pecora Corporation; BC-158 b.Tremco Incorporated; Tremco Butyl Sealant. 2.06ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A.Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTMC834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTME90. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: a.Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR. b.USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2.07JOINT SEALANT BACKING A.General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGJOINT SEALANTS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION079200-3 2.08MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant- substrate tests and field tests. B.Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C.Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint- sealant performance. B.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02PREPARATION A.Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: B.Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint- sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C.Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.03INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A.General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B.Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendationsin ASTMC1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGJOINT SEALANTS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION079200-4 C.Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. D.Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E.Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed. F.Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1.Provide concave joint profile per Figure8A in ASTMC1193, unless otherwise indicated. G.Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere asindicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTMC919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.04CLEANING A.Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.05PROTECTION A.Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.06JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A.Joint-Sealant Application: Façade Sealant, joints in vertical surfaces. 1.Joint Locations: a.Non-structural seals at storefront, window wall, masonryand other cladding locations. b.Joints between different materials listed above. c.Exterior and Interior perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors windows and louvers. d.Other joints as indicated. 2.Façade Joint Sealant: Silicone; single component, nonsag, non-traffic grade, Class50. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGJOINT SEALANTS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION079200-5 3.Joint-Sealant Color: Match Architect’s custom color. B.Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1.Joint Locations: a.Isolation, control, expansion and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b.Paving and flooring control and expansion joints. c.Joints between different materials listed above. d.Other joints as indicated. 2.Joint Sealant: Urethane; Multicomponent, nonsag, traffic grade, Class25. 3.Joint-Sealant Color: Match Architect’s custom color. C.Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints and concealed interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1.Joint Locations: a.Concealed sheet metal sealants b.Sealing thresholds 2.Joint Sealant:Solvent Release Curing; Butyl-Rubber Based Sealant D.Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal non-traffic surfaces. 1.Joint Locations: a.Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. b.Control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces. c.Other joints as indicated. . 2.Joint Sealant: Silicone; Single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Class100/50 3.Joint-Sealant Color: Match Architect’s custom color. E.Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1.Joint Locations: a.Control and expansion joints in hard surface flooring. 2.Joint Sealant: a.Silicone;Singlecomponent, pourable, traffic grade, neutral curing. b.Joint Sealant: Urethane; Multicomponent, nonsag, traffic grade, Class25. 3.Joint-Sealant Color:Match Architect’s custom color. F.Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces. 1.Joint Locations: a.Tile control and expansion joints. b.Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors windows. c.Other joints as indicated. 2.Joint Sealant: UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGJOINT SEALANTS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION079200-6 a.Siliconesinglecomponent, neutral curing, non-traffic. 3.Joint-Sealant Color:Match Architect's sample. G.Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1.Joint Sealant Location: a.Tile and stone control and expansion joints in washrooms, toilet rooms, and kitchens. b.Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. c.Joints between countertops, side and backsplashes, and adjoining walls. d.Other joints as indicated. 2.Joint Sealant:Single component, nonsag, mildew resistant, acid curingsiliconeor neutral curing silicone. 3.Joint-Sealant Color:Match Architect's sample. H.Joint-Sealant Application: Interior non-moving exposed sealants. 1.Joint Location: a.Interior non-moving exposed sealants in gypsum board drywall construction 2.Joint Sealant: Acrylic Latex Sealant 3.Joint-Sealant Color:Match Architect’s sample. I.Joint-Sealant Application: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1.Joint Location: a.Joints in acoustically rated construction. b.Other joints as indicated. 2.Joint Sealant:Acoustical. 3.Joint-Sealant Color:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGJOINT SEALANTS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION079200-7 SECTION081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section includes hollow-metal work. 1.02DEFINITIONS A.Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA803 or SDIA250.8. 1.03ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data:For each type of product. B.Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, preparations for hardware, and other details. C.Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers fordetails and openings as those on Drawings. 1.04INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Product test reports. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01MANUFACTURERS A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.Amweld International, LLC. 2.Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 3.Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4.Karpen Steel Custom Doors & Frames. 5.LaForce, Inc. 6.Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGHOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION081113-1 2.02REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A.Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying withNFPA80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings and temperature-rise limitsindicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA252 or UL10C. 1.Smoke-and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL1784 and installed in compliance withNFPA105. 2.Fire rated doors in the non-sprinklered buildings, to have temperature rise limits as required by code. B.Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Assemblies: Complying with NFPA80 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA257 or UL9. 2.03INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES A.Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDIA250.8, Level2.. 1.Physical Performance: LevelB according to SDIA250.4. 2.Doors: a.Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b.Thickness:1-3/4 inches(44.5 mm). c.Face:Uncoated,cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch(1.0 mm). d.Edge Construction:Model1, Full FlushorModel2, Seamless. e.Core:Manufacturer's standard. 3.Frames: a.Materials:Uncoated,steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch(1.3 mm). b.Construction:Full profile welded. 4.Exposed Finish:Primefor field finish. 2.04EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES A.Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDIA250.8,Level3. 1.Physical Performance: LevelA according to SDIA250.4. 2.Doors: a.Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b.Thickness:1-3/4 inches(44.5 mm). UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGHOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION081113-2 c.Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch(1.3 mm), with minimumA60coating. d.Edge Construction:Model2, Seamless. e.Core:Manufacturer's standard insulation material. 3.Thermal-Rated Doors: Provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) ofnot less than 2.0degF xh x sq. ft./Btu(0.370K x sq.m/W)whentested according to ASTMC1363. 4.Frames: a.Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch(1.3 mm), with minimum A60coating. b.Construction:Full profile welded. 5.Exposed Finish:Prime. 2.05FRAME ANCHORS A.Jamb Anchors: 1.Stud-Wall Type:Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch(1.0 mm)thick. 2.Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. B.Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch(1.0 mm), and as follows: 1.Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2.06MATERIALS A.Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25percent. B.Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTMA1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), TypeB; suitable for exposed applications. C.Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTMA1011/A1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), TypeB; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. D.Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTMA653/A653M, Commercial Steel (CS), TypeB. E.Frame Anchors: ASTMA879/A879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z(12G)coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1.For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTMA1008/A1008M or ASTMA1011/A1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTMA153/A153M, ClassB. F.Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTMA153/A153M. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGHOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION081113-3 G.Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: From corrosion-resistant materials. H.Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTMC665, TypeI (blankets without membrane facing). I.Glazing: Section088000"Glazing." 2.07FABRICATION A.Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B.Hollow-Metal Doors: 1.Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 2.Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. C.Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal asframes. 1.Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 2.Provide countersunk, flat-or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 3.Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs. 4.Jamb Anchors:Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a.Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches(457 mm)from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches(813 mm)o.c. and as follows: 1)Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches(1524 mm)high. 2)Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches(1524 to 2286 mm)high. 3)Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches(2286 to 2438 mm)high. 4)Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches(610 mm)or fraction thereof above96 inches(2438 mm)high. b.Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame. 5.Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers. a.Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b.Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGHOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION081113-4 D.Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDIA250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 1.Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 2.Comply with applicable requirements in SDIA250.6 and BHMAA156.115 for preparation ofhollow-metal work for hardware. E.Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with hairline joints. 1.Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow- metal work. 2.Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3.Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 4.Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work. 5.Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated. 2.08STEEL FINISHES A.Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1.Shop Primer: SDIA250.10. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION A.Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDIA250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA840 as required by standards specified. 1.Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a.At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA80. b.Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. c.Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. d.Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e.Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGHOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION081113-5 f.Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g.Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout containing antifreezing agents. 2.Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a.Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3.ExteriorMetalFramed Walls: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 4.Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a.Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch(1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b.Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch(1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c.Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch(1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d.Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch(1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor. B.Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1.Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: a.Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head:1/8 inch(3.2 mm)plus or minus 1/32 inch(0.8 mm). b.Between Edges of Pairs of Doors:1/8 inch(3.2 mm)to1/4 inch(6.3 mm)plus or minus1/32 inch(0.8 mm). c.Between Door Face and Stop:1/16 inch(1.6 mm)to1/8 inch(3.2 mm)plus or minus1/32 inch(0.8 mm). 2.Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA80. C.Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section088000"Glazing" and with hollow- metal manufacturer's written instructions. 1.Secure stops with countersunk flat-or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches(230 mm)o.c. and not more than 2 inches(51 mm)o.c. from each corner. 3.02ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGHOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION081113-6 B.Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. C.Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGHOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION081113-7 SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 2. Shop priming flush wood doors. 3. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 4. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 08 80 00 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include factory-finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the follow 1. Dimensions and locations of blocking. 2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts. 4. Undercuts. 5. Requirements for veneer matching. 6. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 7. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors. C. Samples: For factory-finished doors. 1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FLUSH WOOD DOORS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 081416 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by following: 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Eggers Industries. 3. Graham; an Assa A bloy Group company. 4. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 5. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite company. 6. Oshkosh Architectural Door Company. 7. VT Industries Inc. 2.02 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, complyAWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards." 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified. B. Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composit not contain urea formaldehyde. C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provde fire-protection rating indicated. 2. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent s outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edg 3. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intume seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. D. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and drafttrol, based on testing according to UL 1784. E. Particleboard-Core Doors: 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware. 3. Provide doors with glued-wood-stave or structural-composite-lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FLUSH WOOD DOORS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 081416 - 2 F. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors: 1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10. a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf (3100 N). b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf (1780 N). G. Mineral-Core Doors: 1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirement quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated. 2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware. 3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements exposed edges. 2.03 VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Interior Solid-Core Doors: 1. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces. 2. Species: As indicated on the drawings. 3. Cut: As indicated on the drawings. 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Center-balance match. 6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by mullions. 7. Core: Particleboard. 8. Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press. 2.04 DOORS FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Interior Solid-Core Doors: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Faces: Any closed-grain hardwood of mill option. 3. Exposed Vertical Edges: Any closed-grain hardwood. 4. Core: Particleboard. 5. Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FLUSH WOOD DOORS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 081416 - 3 2.05 LIGHT FRAMES AND LOUVERS A. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard wood-veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door fa for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for opening size and fire-protection rating indicated. B. Metal Louvers: 1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with baked- enamel- or powder-coated finish. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicat 1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and pro 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be facto applicable requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing." 3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings. 2.07 SHOP PRIMING A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime faces, all four edges, edge with one coat of wood primer specified in Section 09 91 23" Interior Painting." 2.08 FACTORY FINISHING A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory fi including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware before finishing. 1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains a omitted on bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. B. Factory finish doors that are indicated to receive transparent f C. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FLUSH WOOD DOORS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 081416 - 4 2. Finish: AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" System 5, conversion varnish System 10, UV curable, water based or System 11, catalyzed polyurethane. 3. Staining: Match Architect's sample. 4. Effect: Open-grain finish. 5. Sheen: Satin. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware." B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufac referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80. 2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105. C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edg D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting o Project site. E. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform cleara indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limit for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provid 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicat a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 3.02 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not c Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requir evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FLUSH WOOD DOORS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 081416 - 5 SECTION081476 BI-FOLDDOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Solid core bi-fold doors with medium density overlay for opaque finish. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Source Limitations: 1.Obtain doors from single manufacturer. 1.04DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B.Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting. C.Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.05PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 degF(16 and 32 degC)and relative humidity between25 and 55percent during the remainder of the construction period. 1.06WARRANTY A.Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGFLUSH WOOD DOORS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION081416-1 a.Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch(6.4 mm)in a 42-by-84-inch (1067-by-2134-mm)section. b.Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch (0.25 mm ina 76.2-mm)span. 2.Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 3.Warranty shall be in effect during following period of time after date of substantial completion. a.Bi-foldDoors:Three (3) years. 4.This warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. B.Contractor's Responsibilities: Replace or refinish doors where Contractor's work contributed to rejection or to voiding of manufacturer's warranty. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01BI-FOLDDOORS A.Solid Core Bi-fold Doors for Opaque Finish: 1.Grade: Premium. 2.Faces for Interior Doors: Medium-density overlay. 3.Apply medium-density overlay to standard thickness, closed-grain, hardwood face veneers. 2.02BI-FOLDDOOR HARDWARE A.Bi-fold Door Hardware Set: Provide heavy duty folding door sets HD 600 Series Sets for 13/8 inch thick wood doors manufactured by Lawrence Brothers, Inc., including the following: 1.Hinges: 3-1/2 x 3-1/2 inches 2.Brackets: Wrap-around design to eliminate stress on screws. 3.Pivot and Mounting Hardware: 14 gage cold rolled steel, carbonized where required for strength and durability. 4.Track: 6063-T6 extruded aluminum, 13/16" x 1-1/4", with "Delrin" track guides. 5.Pivot and Guide Pins: 3" removable compensating pins. 6.Pulls: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standards. 7.Door aligners 8.Miscellaneous accessories and fasteners required by manufacturer for complete set. 2.03PREPARATION FOR HARDWARE A.Prefit and premachine wood doors at factory. 1.Prefit for width and height. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGFLUSH WOOD DOORS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION081416-2 2.04SHOP-PRIMING A.Opaque Finished Doors: Before delivery of doors to project site, shop-prime opaque finished bi-folddoors as follows: 1.Primer: Prime exposed portion of wood doors shown or scheduled for paint finish with one coat of wood primer compatible with finish paint specified in Division 09 Section “Painting.” PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine doors and openingsbefore hanging doors. 1.Verify that openingscomply with indicated requirements for type,size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2.Reject doors with defects. B.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02INSTALLATION A.Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated. B.Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation areas prior to hanging. C.Fit and machine for hardware to whatever extent not previously worked at factory as required for proper fit and uniform clearance at each edge. 3.03ADJUSTING A.Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B.Provide protective measures recommended and accepted by door manufacturer to assure that wood doors will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGFLUSH WOOD DOORS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION081416-3 SECTION081700 MIRROR BI-PASS DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section includes interior mirror bi-pass closet doors. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.Mounting instructions. 2.Typical details. B.Shop Drawing: 1.Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product components, including anchorage, accessories, finish colors and textures. Indicate installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements. 2.Door Schedule matching door numbers indicated in the documents. C.Samples:Samples for each of the finishes, colors and textures. 1.03INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. 1.04CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance data. 1.05QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: Minimum of five years experience with installation of similar products. B.Accessible Doors: Comply with applicable provisions in the ICC/ANSIA117.1. 1.06DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B.Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGMIRROR BI-PASS DOORS APRIL 11, 2013 -DD081700-1 C.Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.07PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintainingdesigntemperature during the remainder of the construction period. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01BI-PASSINGMIRROR DOORS A.General: Provide full mirror glass doors with minimal polished metal frame. Closet side of door to be prefinished metal. B.Mirror: 1.Mirror to be 4.00mm with safety backing and polished pencil edge. 2.Mirror Quality Glass conforming to ASTM C1048, Type 1-clear, Quality q2-mirror. 3.Meet requirements of CPSC-16CFR1201 with ANSI Z97.1 testing. C.Door Frame, edges and back panel 1.Manufacturer’s standard prefinished smooth metal sections and panels. 2.Color: To be selected from the manufacturer’s full rangeof options. D.Tracks: 1.Manufacturers adjustable heavy duty top track with integral fascia a.Color: To be selected from the manufacturer’sfull range of options. b.Provide stops in track head to stop door at door jambs. 2.Manufacturer’sstandard bottom guides, compliant with accessible threshold requirements, and providing jump-proof bottom roller. E.Rollers: 1.Adjustable nylon ball-bearing bottom roller system with 1" minimumvertical adjustment. F.Door Pulls: 1.Manufacturer’s standard hardware compliant with the applicable accessibility requirements. 2.02ACCESSORIES A.Wall stops: Resilient wall stops. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGMIRROR BI-PASS DOORS APRIL 11, 2013 -DD081700-2 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting installation of door andaccessories. B.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02INSTALLATION A.Bi-Fold Bi-Passing Mirror Doors 1.Install mirrored units plumb and square, in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer’s instructions. Verify openingand dimensions with shop drawings 3.03PROTECTION, ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace damaged installedproducts.Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction. B.Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction. 1.Repair or replace damaged or defective mirrored units. 2.Touch up damaged areas of factory-applied finishes with aerosol spray cans of same paint as used in factory. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGMIRROR BI-PASS DOORS APRIL 11, 2013 -DD081700-3 SECTION083113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings. B.Related Requirements: 1.Section233300"Air Duct Accessories" for heating and air-conditioning duct access doors. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. 1.Include construction details,fire ratings,materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes. B.Shop Drawings: 1.Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2.Detail fabrication and installation of access doors and frames for each type of substrate. C.Samples: For each door face material, at least 3 by 5 inches(75 by 125 mm)in size, in specified finish. D.Product Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, includingtypes, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA80 that are identical to access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics according to the following test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1.NFPA252 or UL10B for fire-rated access door assemblies installed vertically. 2.NFPA288 for fire-rated access door assemblies installed horizontally. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION083113-1 2.02ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.AccessPanel Solutions. 2.Babcock-Davis. 3.J. L. Industries, Inc.; Div. of Activar Construction Products Group. 4.Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 5.MIFAB, Inc. 6.Milcor Inc. 7.Nystrom, Inc. B.Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source from single manufacturer. C.Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges 1.Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide frame with gypsum boardandplasterbeads for concealed flange installation. 2.Locations:Wall and ceilingtypical. 3.Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door:Nominal0.060 inch, 16 gage. a.Finish:Factory primeand field finish. 4.Frame Material:Same material and thickness as door. 5.Hinges:Manufacturer's standard. 6.Hardware:Latch. D.Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges: 1.Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide manufacturer's standard-width exposed flange, proportional to door size. 2.Locations:Wallat tiled areas. 3.Stainless-Steel Sheet for Door:Nominal0.062 inch, 16 gage. a.Finish:No.4. 4.Frame Material:Same material and thickness as door. 5.Hinges:Manufacturer's standard. 6.Hardware:Latch. 7.Gasketing: At wet areas only. E.Fire-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges : 1.Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame, with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal. Provide self-latching door with automatic closer and interior latch release. Provide frame with gypsum boardandplasterbeads for concealed flange installation. 2.Locations:Walls,typical at fire rated walls. 3.Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less thanthat of adjacent construction. 4.Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door:Nominal0.036 inch, 20 gage. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION083113-2 a.Finish:Factory primeand field finish. 5.Frame Material:Same material, thickness, and finish as door. 6.Hinges:Manufacturer's standard. 7.Hardware:Lock. 8.Gasketing: At wet areas only. F.Fire-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges: 1.Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame, with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal. Provide self-latching door with automatic closer and interior latch release. Provide manufacturer's standard-width exposed flange, proportional to door size. 2.Locations: Fire rated walls at tiled areas. 3.Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction. 4.Stainless-Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal0.038 inch, 20 gageminimum, increase thickness as required for fire rating. a.Finish:No.4. 5.Frame Material:Same material, thickness, and finish as door. 6.Hinges:Manufacturer's standard. 7.Hardware:Lock. 8.Gasketing: At wet areas only. G.Hardware: 1.Non Fire-Rated Doors a.Latch: Cam latch operated by by screwdriver 2.Fire-Rated Doors a.Lock: Self-latch bolt operated cylinder lock. 1)Lock Preparation: Prepare door panel to accept cylinder specified in Division08 Section "Door Hardware." 2.03MATERIALS A.Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTMA36/A36M. B.Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTMA786/A786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTMA36/A36M or ASTMA283/A283M, GradeC or D. C.Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTMA879/A879M, with cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTMA1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed. D.Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTMA653/A653M, Commercial Steel (CS), TypeB; with minimumG60(Z180)orA60(ZF180)metallic coating. E.Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTMA666,Type304. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. F.Frame Anchors: Same type as door face. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION083113-3 G.Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTMA153/A153M or ASTMF2329. 2.04FABRICATION A.General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. B.Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. C.Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type requiredto secure access doors to types of supports indicated. 1.For concealed flanges with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum boardsecurely attached to perimeter of frames. 2.For concealed flanges with plaster bead for full-bed plaster applications, providezinc- coated expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead welded to perimeter of frames. 3.Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal framing. 4.Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors. D.Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. 1.For cylinder locks, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike. 2.For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device. Furnish plastic grommets and install in holes cut through finish. 2.05FINISHES A.Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B.Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C.Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range ofapproved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. D.Steel and Metallic-Coated-Steel Finishes: 1.Factory Prime: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead-and chromate-free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. 2.FactoryFinish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry-film thickness of 1 mil(0.025 mm)for topcoat. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION083113-4 E.Stainless-Steel Finishes: 1.Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. 2.Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. a.Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece. b.When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. c.Directional Satin Finish: No.4. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02INSTALLATION A.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. B.Installdoors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material. 3.03ADJUSTING A.Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation. B.Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION083113-5 SECTION083613 SECTIONAL DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section includes electricallyoperated sectional doors. B.Related Requirements: 1.Section055000"Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type and size of sectional door and accessory. B.Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. C.Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.03INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 1.04CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance data. B.Warranty. 1.05QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. 1.06WARRANTY A.Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sectional doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Warranty Period:Fiveyears from date of Substantial Completion. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSECTIONAL DOORS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION083613-1 B.Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1.Warranty Period:10years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.General Performance: Sectional doors shall comply with performance requirements specified without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction and without requiring temporary installation of reinforcing components. B.Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Capable of withstanding the design wind loads. 1.Design Wind Load:Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 25lbf/sq. ft., acting inward and outward. 2.Testing: According to ASTME330or DASMA108 for garage doors and complying with the acceptance criteria of DASMA108. 2.02DOOR ASSEMBLY A.SteelSectional Door: Sectional door formed with hinged sections and fabricated according to DASMA102 unless otherwise indicated. 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.Amarr Garage Doors. b.Arm-R-Lite. c.C.H.I. Overhead Doors. d.Clopay Building Products. e.Martin Door Manufacturing. f.Overhead Door Corporation. g.Raynor. h.Rite-Hite Corporation. i.Wayne-Dalton Corp. j.Windsor Door. B.Operation Cycles: Door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 100,000. C.Air Infiltration: Maximum rate of 0.08 cfm/sq. ft.(0.406L/s per sq.m)at15 and 25 mph(24.1 and 40.2 km/h)when tested according to ASTME283orDASMA105. D.R-Value:6.0 degF x h x sq. ft./Btu(1.057K x sq.m/W). E.Steel Sections: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet with G60(Z180)zinc coating. 1.Exterior-Face Surface:Flat. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSECTIONAL DOORS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION083613-2 2.Interior Facing Material:Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet. F.Track Configuration:Standard-lifttrack unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. G.Weatherseals: Fitted to bottom and topand around entire perimeterof door.Provide combination bottom weatherseal and sensor edge. H.Electric Door Operator: 1.Usage Classification:Heavy duty, 25 or more cycles per hour and more than 90 cycles per day. 2.Operator Type:Manufacturer's standard for door requirements. 3.Safety: Listed according to UL325 by a qualified testing agency for commercial or industrial use; moving parts of operator enclosed or guarded if exposed and mounted at 8 feet(2.4m)or lower. 4.Motor Exposure:Exterior, dusty, wet, or humid. 5.Emergency Manual Operation:Push-uptype. 6.Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic electric sensor edge on bottom section. 7.Control Station:Interior-side mounted. 8.Other Equipment:Portable, radio-control system. I.Door Finish: 1.Factory Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard color. 2.Finish of Interior Facing Material:Finish as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.03STEEL DOOR SECTIONS A.Exterior Section Faces and Frames: Zinc-coated(galvanized), cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet. 1.Roll horizontal meeting edges to a continuous, interlocking, keyed, rabbeted, shiplap, or tongue-in-groove weather-resistant seal, with a reinforcing flange return. 2.For insulated doors, provide sections with continuous thermal-break construction, separating the exterior and interior faces of door. B.Section Ends and Intermediate Stiles: Enclose open ends of sections with channel end stiles formed from galvanized-steel sheet welded to door section. Provide intermediate stiles formed from galvanized-steel sheet, cut to door section profile, and welded in place. Space stiles not more than 48 inches(1219 mm)apart. C.Reinforce bottom section with a continuous channel or angle conforming to bottom-section profile and allowing installation of astragal. D.Provide reinforcement for hardware attachment. E.Thermal Insulation: Insulate interior of steel sections with door manufacturer's standard CFC- free insulation, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTME84. Enclose insulation completely within steel sections and the interior facing material, with no exposed insulation. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSECTIONAL DOORS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION083613-3 2.04TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES A.Tracks: Manufacturer's standard, galvanized-steeltrack system of configuration indicated, sized for door size and weight, designed for lift type indicated and clearances indicated on Drawings, Provide complete system including brackets, bracing, and reinforcement to ensure rigid support of ball-bearing roller guides for required door type, size, weight, and loading. 1.Track Reinforcement and Supports: Galvanized-steel members to support track without sag, sway, and vibration during opening and closing of doors. Slot vertical sections of track spaced 2 inches(51 mm)apart for door-drop safety device. B.Weatherseals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets offlexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene fitted to bottom and top of sectional door unless otherwise indicated. 2.05HARDWARE A.General: Heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware, with hot-dip galvanized, stainless-steel, or other corrosion-resistant fasteners, to suit door type. B.Hinges: Heavy-duty, galvanized-steel hinges at each end stile and at each intermediate stile, according to manufacturer's written recommendations for door size. Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and rails. C.Rollers: Heavy-duty rollers with steel ball-bearings in case-hardened steel races, mounted with varying projections to suit slope of track. Provide 3-inch-(76-mm-)diameter roller tires for 3-inch-(76-mm-)wide track and 2-inch-(51-mm-)diameter roller tires for 2-inch-(51-mm-) wide track. 2.06COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM A.Torsion Spring: Counterbalance mechanism consisting of adjustable-tension torsion springs fabricated from steel-spring wire complying with ASTMA229/A229M, mounted on torsion shaft made of steel tube or solid steel. Provide springs designed for number of operation cycles indicated. B.Cable Drums and Shaft for Doors: Cast-aluminum or gray-iron casting cable drums mounted on torsion shaft and grooved to receive door-lifting cables as door is raised. Mount counterbalance mechanism with manufacturer's standard ball-bearing brackets at each end of torsion shaft. C.Cables: Galvanized-steel, multistrand, lifting cables. D.Cable Safety Device: Include a spring-loaded steel or spring-loaded bronze cam mounted to bottom door roller assembly on each side and designed to automatically stop door if either lifting cable breaks. E.Bracket: Provide anchor support bracket as required to connect stationary end of spring to the wall and to level the shaft and prevent sag. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSECTIONAL DOORS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION083613-4 F.Bumper: Provide spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation. 2.07ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS A.General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and "operation cycles" requirement specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation. 1.Comply with NFPA70. 2.Control equipment complying with NEMAICS1, NEMAICS2, and NEMAICS6; with NFPA70, Class2 control circuit, maximum 24-Vac or dc. B.Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door. C.Door-Operator Type: Unit consisting of electric motor, gears, pulleys, belts, sprockets, chains, and controls needed to operate door and meet required usage classification. D.Motors: Reversible-type motor with controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure indicated. 1.Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than8 in./sec.(203 mm/s)and not more than 12 in./sec.(305 mm/s), without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor. E.Obstruction Detection Device: External entrapment protection consisting of indicated automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. Activation of device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. 1.Electric Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom section. Contact with sensor activates device. Connect to control circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable. a.Self-Monitoring Type: Four-wireconfigured device designed to interface with door- operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensor edge. F.Control Station: Three-button control station in fixed location with momentary-contact push- button controls labeled "Open" and "Stop" and sustained-or constant-pressure, push-button control labeled "Close." 1.Interior-Mounted Units: Full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general- purpose NEMAICS6, Type1 enclosure. 2.Exterior-Mounted Units: Full-guarded, standard-duty, surface-mounted, weatherproof type, NEMAICS6, Type4 enclosure, key operated. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSECTIONAL DOORS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION083613-5 G.Emergency Manual Operation: Equip electrically powered door with capability for emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation does not exceed25 lbf(111N). H.Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged. I.Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation. J.Portable, Radio-Control System: Consisting of twoof the following: 1.Three-channel universal coaxial receiver to open, close, and stop door. 2.Portable control device to open and stop door may be momentary-contact type; control to close door shall be sustained-or constant-pressure type. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION A.Install sectional doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified. B.Tracks: Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required for rigid installation of track and door-operating equipment. C.Accessibility: Install sectional doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility. D.Power-Operated Doors: Install according to UL325. E.Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion. F.Touch-up Painting: Immediately after welding galvanized materials, clean welds and abraded galvanized surfaces and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTMA780/A780M. 3.02DEMONSTRATION A.Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain sectional doors. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSECTIONAL DOORS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION083613-6 SECTION084113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Interiorstorefront framing. 2.Exterior and interiormanual-swing entrance doorsand door-frame units. 1.02PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A.Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.03ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. B.Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work. 1.Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers. C.Samples: For each exposed finish required. D.Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. 1.04INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. B.Energy Performance Certificates: NFRC-certified energy performance values from manufacturer. C.Product test reports. D.Field quality-control reports. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURTALUMINUM-FRAMED STUDENT HOUSINGENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION084113-1 1.05CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance data. B.Warranty. 1.06QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. B.Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTME699 for testing indicated. C.Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. 1.Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. 1.07WARRANTY A.Special Warranty:Installeragrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Warranty Period:Twoyears from date of Substantial Completion. B.Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1.Warranty Period:20years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Delegated Design: Engage a qualified structuralengineer, as defined in Section014000 "Quality Requirements," to design aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. B.General Performance: Complywith performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURTALUMINUM-FRAMED STUDENT HOUSINGENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION084113-2 1.Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2.Failure also includes the following: a.Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b.Glass breakage. c.Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d.Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. e.Failure of operating units. C.Structural Loads: 1.Wind Loads:25 psf positive and negative. D.Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows: 1.Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches(4.1m)and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch(6.35 mm)for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches(4.1m)or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch(19.1 mm), whichever is less. 2.Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane:Limited to amount not exceeding that which reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components to less than 1/8 inch(3.2 mm). 3.Cantilever Deflection: Where framing members overhang an anchor point, as follows: a.Perpendicular to Plane of Wall: No greater than 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch (6.35 mm)for spans greater than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches(3.6m)or 1/175 times span, for spans less than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches(3.6m). E.Structural: Test according to ASTME330 as follows: 1.When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2.When tested at 150percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2percent of span. 3.Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10seconds. F.Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTME283 for infiltration as follows: 1.Fixed Framing and Glass Area: a.Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft.(0.30L/s per sq.m)at a static-air-pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.(300 Pa). 2.Entrance Doors: UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURTALUMINUM-FRAMED STUDENT HOUSINGENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION084113-3 a.Pair of Doors: Maximum air leakage of 1.0 cfm/sq. ft.(5.08L/s per sq.m)at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.(75 Pa). b.Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of 0.5 cfm/sq. ft.(2.54L/s per sq.m)at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.(75 Pa). G.Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTME331 as follows: 1.No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 10 lbf/sq. ft.(480 Pa). H.Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows: 1.Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor ofnot more than 0.69Btu/sq. ft. xh x degFas determined according to NFRC100. 2.Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat gain coefficient of no greater than 0.40asdetermined according to NFRC200. I.Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes: 1.Temperature Change:120 degF(67 degC), ambient; 180 degF(100 degC), material surfaces. 2.02MANUFACTURERS A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.Arcadia, Inc. 2.Kawneer North America. 3.Leed Himmel Industries, Inc. 4.Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope. 5.Pittco Architectural Metals, Inc. 6.TRACO. 7.Tubelite. 8.YKK AP America Inc. 2.03FRAMING A.Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded-or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1.Construction:Thermally broken. 2.Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 3.Glazing Plane:Front. 4.Finish:High-performance organic finish. 5.Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURTALUMINUM-FRAMED STUDENT HOUSINGENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION084113-4 B.Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction. C.Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. D.Materials: 1.Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. a.Sheet and Plate:ASTMB209(ASTMB209M). b.Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes:ASTMB221(ASTMB221M). c.Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTMB429/B429M. d.Structural Profiles: ASTMB308/B308M. 2.Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PSGuideNo.12.00; applied immediately after surface preparationand pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SPCOM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. a.Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTMA36/A36M. b.Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTMA1008/A1008M. c.Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTMA1011/A1011M. 2.04ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS A.Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation. 1.Door Construction:2-to 2-1/4-inch(50.8-to 57.2-mm)overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch-(3.2-mm-)thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. a.Thermal Construction:High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior. 2.Door Design:Widestile;5-inch(88.9-mm)nominal width.Bottom rail to be 10 inches high. 3.Glazing Stops and Gaskets:Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. a.Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door. 2.05ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE A.Entrance Door Hardware: Hardware not specified in this Section is specified in Section087100"Door Hardware." UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURTALUMINUM-FRAMED STUDENT HOUSINGENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION084113-5 2.06GLAZING A.Glazing: Comply with Section088000"Glazing." B.Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers. C.Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer. 2.07FABRICATION A.Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B.Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration offinish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C.Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1.Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2.Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3.Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4.Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5.Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior. 6.Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. D.Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. E.Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware. F.Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. G.Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes. H.After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.08ALUMINUM FINISHES A.High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA2605 and containing not less than 70percentPVDFresin by weight in color coat. 1.Color and Gloss:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURTALUMINUM-FRAMED STUDENT HOUSINGENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION084113-6 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION A.General: 1.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2.Do not install damaged components. 3.Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4.Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5.Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6.Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. B.Metal Protection: 1.Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers. 2.Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C.Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section079200 "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. D.Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. E.Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation. F.Install glazing as specified in Section088000"Glazing." G.Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1.Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping. 2.Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURTALUMINUM-FRAMED STUDENT HOUSINGENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION084113-7 SECTION085200 ALUMINUM CLADWOOD WINDOWS-ALTERNATE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section includes aluminum-cladwood windowsand associated glazing. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. B.Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens, operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant installation. C.Product Schedule: For wood windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.03INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Product test reports. B.Manufacturer Certification: 1.Windows in required accessible locations meet the requirements of the 2010 ADA. 1.04QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1.05WARRANTY A.Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace wood windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Warranty Period: a.Window:10years from date of Substantial Completion. b.Glazing Units:10years from date of Substantial Completion. c.Aluminum-Cladding Finish:20years from date of Substantial Completion. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS APRIL 11, 2013 -DD085200-1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01MANUFACTURERS A.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provideMarvin Windows or comparable product by one of the following: 1.Aluminum-Clad Wood Windows: a.Crestline Windows and Doors; SNE Enterprises, Inc. b.EAGLE Window & Door, Inc.; an Andersen Window & Door company. c.Jeld-Wen Inc. d.Kolbe & Kolbe Millwork Co., Inc. e.Lincoln Wood Products Inc. f.Marvin Windows and Doors. g.Peachtree Doors and Windows. h.Weather Shield Mfg., Inc. i.Windsor Windows and Doors. 2.02WINDOWPERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Product Standard: AAMA/WDMA/CSA101/I.S.2/A440. 1.Minimum Performance Class:LC. 2.Minimum Performance Grade:35. B.Thermal Transmittance: NFRC100 maximum whole-window U-factor of 0.32Btu/sq. ft. xh x degF(1.71W/sq.m xK). C.Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): NFRC200 maximum whole-window SHGC of 0.25. D.Thermal Movements: Provide windows, including anchorage, that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1.Temperature Change:120 degF(67 degC), ambient;180 degF(100 degC)material surfaces. E.Operable windows in the common areas and in the Type A residential units are to comply with the requirements of the 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design. These requirements include: a.Force required to activate operable parts shall be 5 pounds maximum. b.Force to operate the window shall be 5 pounds maximum. c.Operable parts shall be operable with one hand and shall not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist. d.Operable parts to be within 48 inches of the finished floor. F.Forced Entry Resistant: Provide windows that conform to ASTM F588, grade 10 minimum unless a higher grade is required by the local authorities having jurisdiction. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS APRIL 11, 2013 -DD085200-2 2.03WOOD WINDOWS A.Operating Types:As indicated on Drawings. 1.Basis of Design Types: a.Common areas and accessible residential units: Fixed over awning with the exterior appearance of a singlehung window. b.Residential units that are not required to comply with accessible requirements: Singlehung windows. 2.Alternate Types: a.Common areas and accessible residential units: Single hung windows with additional hardware to allow the window to comply with the accessibility requirements including the “Window Ease” product listed in Accessories. B.Frames and Sashes: Fine-grained wood lumber complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA101/I.S.2/A440; kiln dried to a moisture content of not more than 12 percent at time of fabrication; free of visible finger joints, blue stain, knots, pitch pockets, and surface checks larger than 1/32 inch(0.8 mm)deep by2 inches(51 mm)wide; water-repellent preservative treated. 1.Exterior Finish:Aluminum-cladwood. a.Aluminum Finish:Manufacturer's standard fluoropolymer two-coat system with fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight and complying with AAMA2605. b.Color:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.Interior Finish:Factory primed for paint. C.Insulating-Glass Units: ASTME2190. 1.Glass: ASTMC1036, Type1, Class1, q3. a.Tint:Clear. b.Safety Glass: Provide KindFT, fully tempered, labeled safety glass at locations indicated in the 2006 IBC. 2.Lites:Two. 3.Filling: Fill space between glass lites with argon. 4.Low-E Coating: LoE 366. D.Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal. E.Hardware, General: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant hardware sized to accommodate sash weight and dimensions. 1.Exposed Hardware Color and Finish:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. F.Hung Window Hardware: 1.Counterbalancing Mechanism: AAMA902. 2.Locks and Latches: Operated from the inside only. 3.Tilt Hardware: Releasing tilt latch allows sash to pivot about horizontal axis. G.Projected Window Hardware: 1.Gear-Type Rotary Operators: Complying with AAMA901 when tested according to ASTME405, MethodA. Provide crank that complies with accessibility requirements. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS APRIL 11, 2013 -DD085200-3 Provide operators that function without requiring the removal of interior screens or using screen wickets. a.Type and Style: Provide crank that complies with accessibility requirements with a finish that will be selected from the manufacturer’s full range of options. 2.Hinges: Manufacturer's standard type for sash weight and size indicated. 3.Single-Handle Locking System: Operates positive-acting arms that pull sash into locked position. Provide one arm on sashes up to 29 inches(735 mm)tall and two arms on taller sashes. 4.Limit Devices: Limit clear opening to 4 inches(100 mm)for ventilation; with custodial key release. H.Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash unless otherwise indicated. I.Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components. 1.Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to the greatest extent possible. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened. 2.04INSECT SCREENS A.General: Fabricate insect screens to integrate with window frame. Provide screen for each operable exterior sash. Screen wickets are not permitted. 1.Type and Location:Full, inside for project-outand outside for project-insashes. B.Aluminum Frames: Complying with SMA1004 or SMA1201. 1.Finish for Interior Screens: Baked-on organic coating in color selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.Finish for Exterior Screens:Matching color and finish of cladding. C.Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric:18-by-14(1.1-by-1.4-mm)or18-by-16(1.0-by-1.1-mm)mesh complying with ASTMD3656. 1.Mesh Color:Manufacturer's standard. 2.05ACCESSORIES–ALTERNATE HARDWARE A.Additional hardware as required to comply with ADA 2010 Standards for Accessible Design. 1.Subject to compliance with the requirements, an acceptable additional hardware device is Southwest Home Products, LLC., Window Ease manual window actuator. 2.06FABRICATION A.Fabricate wood windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for installing and anchoring windows. B.Glaze wood windows in the factory. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS APRIL 11, 2013 -DD085200-4 C.Weather strip each operable sash to provide weathertight installation. D.Provide mullions and cover plates, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design wind loads of window units. E.Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure weathertight window installation. B.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02INSTALLATION A.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTME2112. B.Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weathertight construction. C.Provide continuous connection of the vapor retarder to the perimeter of the window to provide a continuous seal. D.Adjust operating sashes and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. E.Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. F.Remove and replace sashes if glass has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. 3.03FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Testing Agency: Engagea qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 1.Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work complies with or deviates from requirements. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS APRIL 11, 2013 -DD085200-5 B.Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of installed windows shall take place as follows: 1.Testing Extent: Fixed and operable window units shall receive a minimum of three (3) staticwater tests and air infiltration tests per building in the field during construction as selected by Architect and a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. Windows shall be tested after perimeter sealants have cured. Tests to be conducted at 10 percent, 50 percent and 90 percent completion of the window installation. 2.Contractor to build chamber to allow for testing, per the requirements of the testing company. Contractor to provide powered scaffold, hose with AAMA approved nozzles and pressure gauges, water supply, communications system and manpower to perform tests. 3.Testing Methodology: Testing of windows for air infiltration and water resistance shall be performed according to AAMA502, test method B. 4.Air-Infiltration Testing: a.Test Pressure: That required to determine compliance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA101/I.S.2/A440 performance ratings indicated. b.Allowable Air-Leakage Rate: 1.0 times the applicable AAMA/WDMA/CSA101/I.S.2/A440 rate for product type and performance rating rounded down to one decimal place. 5.Water-Resistance Testing: a.Test Pressure: 1.0 times test pressure required to determine compliance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA101/I.S.2/A440 performance rating indicated. b.Allowable Water Infiltration: No water penetration. 6.Test Reports: Prepared according to AAMA502. C.Remove and replace noncomplying windows and retest as specified above. D.Depending upon the prevalence of leakage in air leakage and water penetration tests, and upon measures adopted to eliminate source of leakage, the Architect will determine necessity for and scope of additional tests and test methods. However, in no case, will the total of tested area amount to less than 2 percent of the total window area or more than 10 percent of the total area. Remedial measures shall maintain standards of quality and durability and are subject to approval. E.Additional testing and inspecting shall be at the Contractor's expense and will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. F.Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS APRIL 11, 2013 -DD085200-6 SECTION085313 VINYL WINDOWS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section includes vinyl-framed windows. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. B.Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens, operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant installation. C.Product Schedule: For vinyl windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.03INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Product test reports. B.Manufacturer Certification: 1.Manufacturer’s certification letter stating the windows being provided for the project are applicable for the proposed usage. 2.Windows in required accessible locations meet the requirements of the 2010 ADA. 1.04WARRANTY A.Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees torepair or replace vinyl windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Warranty Period: a.Window:10years from date of Substantial Completion. b.Glazing Units:20years from date of Substantial Completion. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGVINYL WINDOWS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION085313-1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01MANUFACTURERS A.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide as indicated below or comparable product by one of the following: 1.Alside Window Co. 2.Amsco Windows 3.Milgard Windows, Inc. 4.Serious Materials Inc. 5.Silver Line Windows, an AndersenCompany 6.Simonton Windows 7.Thermal Windows, Inc. 8.VPI Quality Windows. 9.Windsor Window Company 2.02WINDOWPERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Product Standard: AAMA/WDMA/CSA101/I.S.2/A440. 1.Minimum Performance Class: R. 2.Minimum Performance Grade:35. B.Water Penetration Resistance: No evidence of water penetration through window unitwhen tested according to ASTME547at a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 15percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 5.25lbf/sq. ft.(260 Pa). C.Air Infiltration: 1.Maximum air leakage through operable window units shall be no more than 0.30 cfm per square foot of operable sash as determined according to ASTME283 at a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 1.57lbf/sq. ft.(75Pa). 2.Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.30cfmper square footoffixed wall area as determined according to ASTME283 at a minimum static-air- pressure differential of 1.57lbf/sq. ft.(75Pa). D.Thermal Transmittance: NFRC100 maximum whole-window U-factor of 0.32Btu/sq. ft. xh x degF(1.71W/sq.m xK). E.Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): NFRC200 maximum whole-window SHGC of 0.25. F.Thermal Movements: Provide windows, including anchorage, that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGVINYL WINDOWS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION085313-2 1.Temperature Change:120 degF(67 degC), ambient; 180 degF(100 degC)material surfaces. G.Operable windows in the common areas and in the Type A residential units are to comply with the requirements of the 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design. These requirements include: a.Force required to activate operable parts shall be 5 pounds maximum. b.Force to operate the window shall be 5 pounds maximum. c.Operable parts shall be operable with one hand and shall not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist. d.Operable parts to be within 48 inches of the finished floor. H.Forced Entry Resistant: Provide windows that conform to ASTM F588, grade 10 minimum unless a higher grade is required by the local authorities having jurisdiction. 2.03VINYL WINDOWS A.Operating Types: 1.Residential Building: a.Fixed Windows. b.Single Hung Windows. 2.Community Center: a.Fixed Windows. b.Casement Windows. 3.Provide alternate operating types, if required, at accessible rooms to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements for light and ventilation. B.Basis-of-Design Product for Fixed and Single-Hung Windows: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Silver Line Building Products, Series 2900 series. C.Basis-of-Design Product for Casement Windows: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Silver Line Building Products, Series 70 Casement. D.Frames and Sashes: Impact-resistant, UV-stabilized PVC complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA101/I.S.2/A440. 1.Finish: Integral color, white, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 2.Gypsum Board Returns: Provide at interior face of frame. 3.Integral pre-punched nailing fin on all four sides. E.Insulating-Glass Units: ASTME2190 and comply with ASTM E 1300. 1.Glass: ASTMC1036, Type1, Class1, q3. a.Tint:Clear. 1)Provide manufacturer’s standard obscure glass at locations noted. b.Kind: Fully tempered in locations noted and as required by the building code. 2.Lites:Two. 3.Filling: Fill space between glass lites withargon. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGVINYL WINDOWS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION085313-3 4.Low-E Coating:Sputtered on second surface. F.Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal. G.Hardware, General: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant material sized to accommodate sash weightand dimensions. 1.Exposed Hardware Color and Finish:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. H.Hung Window Hardware: 1.Counterbalancing Mechanism: AAMA902. 2.Locks and Latches: Operated from the inside only. 3.Limit Devices: Limit clear opening to 4 inches(100 mm)for ventilation; with custodial release. I.Projected Window Hardware: 1.Gear-Type Rotary Operators: Complying with AAMA901 when tested according to ASTME405, MethodA. Provide operators that function without requiring the removal of interior screens or using screen wickets. a.Type and Style:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of types and styles. 2.Hinges: Manufacturer's standard type for sash weight and size indicated. 3.Single-Handle Locking System: Operates positive-acting arms that pull sash into locked position. Provide one arm on sashes up to 29 inches(735 mm)tall and two arms on taller sashes. 4.Limit Devices: Limit clear opening to 4 inches(100 mm)for ventilation; with custodial release. J.Weather Stripping:Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash unless otherwise indicated. K.Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components. 1.Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to the greatest extent possible. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened. 2.04INSECT SCREENS A.General: Fabricate insect screens to fully integrate with window frame. Provide screen for each operable exterior sash. Screen wickets are not permitted. 1.Type and Location: a.Half, outside for single-hungsashes. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGVINYL WINDOWS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION085313-4 b.Full, inside for project out. B.ScreenFrames:Manufacturer’s standard frames. 1.Finish for Exterior Screens:Matching color and finish of cladding. C.Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric:18-by-14(1.1-by-1.4-mm)or18-by-16(1.0-by-1.1-mm)mesh complying with ASTMD3656. 1.Mesh Color:Manufacturer's standard. 2.05FABRICATION A.Fabricate vinyl windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows. B.Glaze vinyl windows in the factory. C.Weather strip each operable sash to provide weathertight installation. D.Provide mullions and cover plates, compatible with window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design wind loads of window units. Provide manufacturer's standard finish to match window units. E.Mount hardware through double walls of vinyl extrusions or provide corrosion-resistant reinforcement. F.Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure weathertight window installation. B.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02INSTALLATION A.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTME2112. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGVINYL WINDOWS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION085313-5 B.Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weathertight construction. C.Provide continuous connection of the vapor retarder to the perimeter of the window to provide a continuous seal. D.Adjust operatingsashes and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. E.Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. F.Remove and replace sashes if glass has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGVINYL WINDOWS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION085313-6 SECTION 08 54 13 FIBERGLASS WINDOWS - ALTERNATE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes fiberglass-framed windows. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, inse operational clearances, and details of installation, including a installation. C. Product Schedule: For fiberglass windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product test reports. B. Manufacturer Certification: 1. Manufacturers certification letter stating the windows being pr applicable for the proposed usage. 2. Windows in required accessible locations meet the requirements o 1.04 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fiberglass windows that in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: a. Window: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing Units: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIBERGLASS WINDOWS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 08 54 13 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Fibertec Window and Door Manufacturing. 2. Inline Fiberglass Ltd. 3. Integrity Windows and Doors from Marvin. 4. Milgard Windows, Inc. 5. Pella Corporation. 6. Serious Materials Inc. 2.02 WINDOW PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Product Standard: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440. 1. Minimum Performance Class: LC. 2. Minimum Performance Grade: 35. B. Thermal Transmittance: NFRC 100 maximum whole-window U-factor of 0.32 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. C. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): NFRC 200 maximum whole-window SHGC of 0.25. D. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through operable and fixed window units shall more than 0.30 cfm per square foot of operable sash as determine E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa). E. Thermal Movements: Provide windows, including anchorage, that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstre joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base eng calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both sol-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C) material surfaces. F. Operable windows in the common areas and in the Type A residenti the requirements of the 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design include: a. Force required to activate operable parts shall be 5 pounds maximum. b. Force to operate the window shall be 5 pounds maximum. c. Operable parts shall be operable with one hand and shall not req grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist. d. Operable parts to be within 48 inches of the finished floor. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIBERGLASS WINDOWS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 08 54 13 - 2 G. Forced Entry Resistant: Provide windows that conform to ASTM F588 unless a higher grade is required by the local authorities havin 2.03 FIBERGLASS WINDOWS A. Operating Types: 1. Residential Building: a. Fixed Windows. b. Single Hung Windows. 2. Community Center: a. Fixed Windows. b. Casement Windows. 3. Provide alternate operating types, if required, at accessible ro accessibility requirements and requirements for light and ventil B. Frames and Sashes: Pultruded fiberglass complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 and with exposed exterior fiberglass surfaces finished with manu coating complying with AAMA 613 or AAMA 623. 1. Exterior Color: Color selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Interior Finish: Color selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C. Insulating-Glass Units: ASTM E 2190 and ASTM E 1300. 1. Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3. a. Tint: Clear. b. Kind: Fully tempered where indicated on Drawings and where required by code. 2. Filling: Fill space between glass lites with argon. 3. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface. D. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal. E. Hardware, General: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant hardware sized to accommodate sash weight and dimensions. 1. Exposed Hardware Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. F. Projected Window Hardware: 1. Gear-Type Rotary Operators: Complying with AAMA 901 when tested according to ASTM E 405, Method A. Provide operators that function without requiring the removal of interior screens or using screen wickets. 2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard type for sash weight and size indicated. 3. Single-Handle Locking System: Operates positive-acting arms that pull sash into locked position. Provide one arm on sashes up to 27-1/2 inches (700 mm) tall and two arms on taller sashes. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIBERGLASS WINDOWS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 08 54 13 - 3 4. Limit Devices: Limit clear opening to 4 inches (100 mm) for ventilation; with custodial key release. G. Hung Window Hardware: 1. Counterbalancing Mechanism: AAMA 902. 2. Locks and Latches: Operated from the inside only. 3. Tilt Hardware: Releasing tilt latch allows sash to pivot about horizontal axis. 4. Limit Devices: Limit clear opening to 4 inches (100 mm) for ventilation; with custodial release. H. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash unless otherwise indicated. I. Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, other components. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to the greatest extent possible. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardwar 2.04 INSECT SCREENS A. General: Fabricate insect screens to integrate with window frame. Provide screen for each operable exterior sash. Screen wickets are not permitted. 1. Type and Location: a. Full, inside for project-out. b. Half, outside for single-hung sashes. B. Aluminum Frames: Complying with SMA 1004 or SMA 1201. 1. Finish for Interior Screens: Matching color and finish of the window. 2. Finish for Exterior Screens: Matching color and finish of window. C. Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: 18-by-14 (1.1-by-1.4-mm) or 18-by-16 (1.0-by-1.1-mm) mesh complying with ASTM D 3656. 1. Mesh Color: Manufacturer's standard. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Fabricate fiberglass windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for installing and anchoring windows. B. Glaze fiberglass windows in the factory. C. Weather strip each operable sash to provide weathertight install D. Provide mullions and cover plates, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIBERGLASS WINDOWS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 08 54 13 - 4 movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building d Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design wind loads of window units. E. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barri-in components to ensure weathertight window installation. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing w and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E 2112. B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without dist to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing ao produce weathertight construction. C. Provide continuous connection of the vapor retarder to the perim a continuous seal. D. Adjust operating sashes and hardware for a tight fit at contact smooth operation and weathertight closure. E. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. F. Remove and replace sashes if glass has been broken, chipped, cra damaged during construction period. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in work complies with or deviates from requirements. B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of installed windows s UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIBERGLASS WINDOWS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 08 54 13 - 5 1. Testing Extent: Fixed and operable window units shall receive a static water tests and air infiltration tests per building in the field during construction as selected by Architect and a qualified independent testing and in Windows shall be tested after perimeter sealants have cured. Te 10 percent, 50 percent and 90 percent completion of the window installation. 2. Contractor to build chamber to allow for testing, per the requir company. Contractor to provide powered scaffold, hose with AAMA and pressure gauges, water supply, communications system and manpower to perform tests. 3. Testing Methodology: Testing of windows for air infiltration an performed according to AAMA 502, test method B. 4. Air-Infiltration Testing: a. Test Pressure: That required to determine compliance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 performance ratings indicated. b. Allowable Air-Leakage Rate: 1.0 times the applicable AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 rate for product type and performance rating rounded down to one decimal place. 5. Water-Resistance Testing: a. Test Pressure: 1.0 times test pressure required to determine compliance w AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 performance rating indicated. b. Allowable Water Infiltration: No water penetration. 6. Test Reports: Prepared according to AAMA 502. C. Remove and replace noncomplying windows and retest as specified above. D. Depending upon the prevalence of leakage in air leakage and wate upon measures adopted to eliminate source of leakage, the Archit for and scope of additional tests and test methods. However, in no case, will the total of test area amount to less than 2 percent of the total window area or m total area. Remedial measures shall maintain standards of quali subject to approval. E. Additional testing and inspecting shall be at the Contractor's e determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specifi F. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIBERGLASS WINDOWS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 08 54 13 - 6 SECTION 087100 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Gener Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following: A. Swinging doors. 1. Sliding Doors 2. Other doors to the extent indicated. 3. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the f B. Mechanical door hardware. 1. Electromechanical door hardware, power supplies, back-ups and surge 2. protection. Automatic operators. 3. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections. 4. Related Sections: C. Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry. 1. Section 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry. 2. Section 08 01 00 Operations and Maintenance. 3. Section 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 4. Section 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors. 5. Section 08 41 13 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts. 6. Section 08 42 29 Automatic Entrances. 7. Section 08 71 13 Automatic Door Operators. 8. Section 08 81 00 Glass and Glazing. 9. Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coating. 10. Section 28 13 00 Access Control. 11. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by th D. Jurisdiction. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 1. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. 2. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 3. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 08 71 00 - 1 NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 4. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 5. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 6. State Building Codes, Local Amendments. 7. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry E. standards: ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series 1. UL10C Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 2. 1.3 SUBMITTALS Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including insta A. descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of B. fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of doo Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in D 1. "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hard 2. indicating complete designations of every item required for each Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardwar end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as th Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission. Content: Include the following information: 3. a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each doore item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at e 4. possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordin the Door Hardware Schedule. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 08 71 00 - 2 Proof of Certification: Provide copy of manufacturer(s) official certification C. accreditation document indicating proof of status as a qualified of the primary Access Control Products. Keying Schedule: Prepared under the supervision of the Owner, separate schedule D. detailing final keying instructions for locksets and cylinders i system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set special instructions. Owner to approve submitted keying schedule to the ordering of permanent cylinders. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operati E. maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door h installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Su. The manual to include the name, address, and contact information of the manufa hardware and their nearest service representatives. The final co completion of the installation test to include "as built" modifins made during installation, checkout, and acceptance. Warranties and Maintenance: Special warranties and maintenance a F. specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers wits A. of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment sim indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of succ-service performance. Installer Qualifications: Installers, trained by the primary pro, with a B. minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard a builders hardware similar in material, design, and extent to tha Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a recor- service performance. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial do C. distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supply mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparab design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recogn direct distributor in good standing by the manufacturers of the warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both st electromechanical door hardware and keying. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules in 1. vertical format only; horizontal schedules are not acceptable an Automatic Operator Supplier Qualifications: Power operator produ D. are required to be supplied and installed through current member of the manufacturer's "Power Operator Preferred Installer" program. Su UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 08 71 00 - 3 factory trained, certified, and a direct purchaser of the specif be responsible for the installation and maintenance of the unitses indicated for the Project. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of Door Hardwar E. Section from a single source, qualified supplier unless otherwis Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufcturer's 1. product line by a secondary or third party source will not be ac Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufactur 2. mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with NFPA 70, NFPA 80, NFPA 101 and ANSI F. A117.1 requirements and guidelines as directed in the model buil but not limited to, the following: NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code", including electrical compone 1. and accessories listed and labeled as defined in Article 100 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for in Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, compl 2. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)," ANSI A117.1 as follows: a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Sha easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist. b. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements indicated: 1) Interior Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. 2) Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities havin jurisdiction. c. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors: 3. a. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. b. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies comp 4. with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agenc acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 (neutral pressure at 40" above sill) or UL-10C. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 08 71 00 - 4 a. Test Pressure: Positive pressure labeling. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating comp G. referenced standards. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirement 01 H. Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the the final keying schedule document: Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required. 1. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. 2. Requirements for key control storage and software. 3. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software. 4. Address and requirements for delivery of keys. 5. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in complia I. requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with atte representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware. Prior to installation of door hardware, arrange for manufacturer 1. to hold a project specific training meeting to instruct the inst personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware ( electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other 2. preparatory work performed by other trades. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access clled 3. opening. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availabilit 4. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demo 5. procedures. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door A. hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic acce software or accessories at Project site without prior authorizat Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door B. Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions w package. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access C. software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be "Keying Conference". UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 08 71 00 - 5 1.6 COORDINATION Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templat A. and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adeq made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicat Door Hardware and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of B. scheduled electrified door hardware and related access control e required connections to source power junction boxes, low voltage detection and monitoring hardware, and fire and detection alarm systems. Door and Frame Preparation: Related Division 08 Sections (Steel, C. Wood) doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinfor-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified eleified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications. 1.7 WARRANTY General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. S A. specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addit concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requi Contract Documents. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or B. replace components of standard and electrified door hardware tha workmanship within specified warranty period after final accepta Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or 1. Faulty operation of the hardware. 2. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials bey 3. weathering. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation. 4. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Comp C. otherwise indicated. Special Warranty Periods: D. Ten years for mortise locks and latches. 1. Ten years for extra heavy duty cylindrical (bored) locks and lats. 2. Seven years for heavy duty cylindrical (bored) locks and latches 3. Five years for standard duty cylindrical (bored) locks and latch 4. Five years for exit hardware. 5. Ten years for manual door closers. 6. Two years for electromechanical door hardware. 7. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 08 71 00 - 6 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of sp A. maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustm and removal and replacement of door hardware. Continuing Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, and running concurrent with B. the specified warranty period, provide continuous (6) months ful repair and replacement of worn or defective components, lubricat adjusting as required for proper door opening operation. Provide parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original products. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requ A. Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or c 1. function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door h indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: a. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufactu are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section includ 2. Coordinating, purchasing, delivering, and scheduling remain requ Section. a. Permanent cylinders, cores, and keys to be installed by Owner. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval fo B. and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the speci submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01, Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at architect, owner, and their designated consultants. 2.2 HANGING DEVICES Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles as A. specified in the Door Hardware Sets. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity, unless otherwise 1. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 08 71 00 - 7 a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, w 2. sized for door thickness and clearances required: a. Widths up to 30 : 4-1/2 standard or heavy weight as specified. b. Sizes from 31 to 40 : 5 standard or heavy weight as specifie Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, prov 3. following: a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight. b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing hinges unle Sets indicate heavy weight. Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Hardware Sets 4. or on Drawings: a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin wh closed; for the following applications: 1) Out-swinging exterior doors. 2) Out-swinging access controlled doors. Acceptable Manufacturers: 5. a. Bommer Industries (BO). b. McKinney Products (MK). c. Stanley Hardware (ST). Continuous Geared Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.26 certified continuous B. with minimum 0.120-inch thick extruded 6060 T6 aluminum alloy hinge leaves and a minimum overall width of 4 inches. Hinges are non-handed, reversible and fabricated to template screw locations. Provide concealed flush mount (with surface, or half surface, in standard and heavy duty models, as specified in the Hardware Sets. Concealed continuous hinges to be U.L. listed for including 90 minute rated door installations and U.L. listed for where applicable. Factory cut hinges for door size and provide with removable service power transfer panel where indicated at electrified openings. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. a. Select (SE). b. Pemko (PE) c. McKinney (MK). UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 08 71 00 - 8 Pin and Barrel Continuous Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.26 certified pi C. continuous hinges with minimum 12 gauge (.105) Type 304 stainless steel leaves, concealed teflon-coated stainless pin, and twin self-lubricated nylon bearings at each knuckle separation. Fabricate hinges non-handed and U.L. listed for use on up to and including 3 hour rated doors and U.L. listed for windstorm components applicable. Provide hinges with power transfer cutouts where ind openings. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. a. Markar Products (MA). b. McKinney Products (MK). c. Pemko Manufacturing (PE). d. Stanley Hardware (ST). Sliding Door Hardware: Sliding door hardware is to be of type an D. and should comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.14. Sliding Bi-Passing Pocket Door Hardware: Provide complete sets consisting o 1. track, hangers, stops, bumpers, floor channel, guides, and accessories indicated. Bi-folding Door Hardware: Rated for door panels weighing up to 125 lb. 2. Pocket Sliding Door Hardware: Rated for doors weighing up to 200 lb. 3. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Pemko Manufacturing (PE). 2) Hager. (HA). 2.3 POWER TRANSFER DEVICES Provide mortar guard enclosure on steel frames installed at maso A. electrical hinge specified. 2.4 DOOR OPERATING TRIM Flush Bolts and Surface Bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 and A156.16, Gra A. automatic, self-latching, and manual flush bolts and surface bolts. Manual flush be furnished with top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt loc from the floor. Furnish dust proof strikes for bottom bolts. Sur minimum 8 in length and U.L. listed for labeled fire doors and U.L. lis components where applicable. Provide related accessories (mounti coordinators, etc.) as required for appropriate installation and Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. a. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). b. Trimco (BU). c. Hiawatha (HI) UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 08 71 00 - 9 Coordinators: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 certified door coordinators consi-leaf, B. hold-open lever and inactive-leaf release trigger. Coordinators fabricated from steel with nylon-coated strike plates and built-in adjustable safety release. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. a. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). b. Trimco (TC). c. Hiawatha (HI) Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANS/BHMA A156.6 certified door pushe C. and design specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, 4-inches wide by 16-inches high, with 1. square corners and beveled edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated. Straight Pull Design: Minimum 1-inch round diameter stainless steel bar or tube 2. stock pulls with 2 1/2-inch projection from face of door unless otherwise indicated. See hardware sets for model. Push Bars: Minimum 1-inch round diameter horizontal push bars with minimum 3. clearance of 2 1/2-inch projection from face of door unless otherwise indicated. See hardware sets for model. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as in 4. Hardware Sets. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Burns (BU). 2) Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). 3) Trimco (TC). 2.5 CYLINDERS AND KEYING General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experi A. secured master key systems and have on record a published securiem policy. Patented Cylinders: ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1, certified cylinde B. utility patented and restricted keyway requiring the use of pate Provide bump resistant cylinders as standard with solid recessed cylinder collars. Cylinders are to be factory keyed where permanent keying records will be established and maintained. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the fo C. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight- or clover-type cam. 1. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and 2. raised trim ring. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks. 3. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 08 71 00 - 10 Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to all 4. face to be flush and be free spinning with matching finishes. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match l D. with the following: Removable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key, 1. with only the core manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware. Provide removable core (small format) as specified in Hardware Sets. Cylinders: ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1. E. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU). b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA). c. Schlage (SC). d. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA). Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory key F. "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instruc requirements. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by Owner. Incorporate deci conference, and as follows: Great-Grand Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key, 1. master key, a grand master key, and a great-grand master key. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys: G. Top Master Key: One (1) 1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2) 2. Master Keys (per Master Key Group): Two (2) 3. Grand Master Keys (per Grand Master Key Group): Two (2) 4. Construction Control Keys: Ten (10) 5. Permanent Control Keys: Ten (10) 6. Construction Keying: Provide temporary keyed construction cores for use during the H. construction period. Provide construction master keys in quantity as shown. General Contractor to replace construction cores with permanent cores. Furnish permanent cores for installation as directed under specified "Keying Confe Key Control Cabinet: System shall be as manufactured by Key Systems, Inc. and I. distributed by Stanley Security Systems. Provide Chit-Key Vault. 2.6 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Serie A. Operational Grade 1 certified mortise locksets furnished in the UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 08 71 00 - 11 the Hardware Sets. Locksets to be manufactured with a corrosion tamped 12 gauge minimum formed steel case and be field-reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body. Lockset trim (including knobs, lev roses) to be the product of a single manufacturer. Furnish with 3/4" throw anti-friction stainless steel latch bolt, and a full 1" throw stainless steel bolt for deadbolt functions. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) 8200 Series. b. Schlage (SC) L9000 Series. c. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) 8800FL Series. d. Corbin Russwin (RU) ML2000 Series Cylindrical Locksets, Grade 2 (Standard Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.2, B. Grade 2 certified cylindrical (bored) locksets furnished in the the Hardware Sets. Lock chassis fabricated of heavy gauge steel, zinc dichromate plated, with through-bolted application. Furnish with standard 2 3/4 backset and 1/2 throw brass or hardened steel latchbolt. Locks are to be non-handed and fully field reversible. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - CL3800 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 7-Line. c. Schlage (SC) - AL Series. d. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 5300LN Series. Lock Trim Design: As specified in Hardware Sets. C. Knurling: Where specified provide knurling or abrasive coating all levers on doors D. leading to hazardous areas such as mechanical rooms, boiler and janitor closets, and as otherwise required by the Indiana Accessibility Code. 2.7 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock A. bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to mat unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as 1. recommended by manufacturer. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing t 2. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabr 3. for aluminum framing. Standards: Comply with the following: B. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. 1. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 2. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 08 71 00 - 12 Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.5. 3. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16. 4. 2.8 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156 A. certified panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the Hardware Sets. Mounting rails to be formed from smooth stainless bronze architectural materials no less than 0.072" thick, with pof 0.062" thickness. Painted or aluminum metal rails are not accept to be investment cast stainless steel, pullman type, with deadlo Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. a. Von Duprin (VD) 35/98 Series. b. Sargent (SA) 80 Series c. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) 7000 Series d. Corbin Russwin (RU) ED4000/ED5000 Series 2.9 DOOR CLOSERS Door Closers, Surface Mounted ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface A. duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and op Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece aluminum or cast iron body construction, with adjustable back-check and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control. Provide high impact, non-corrosive plastic covers standard. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. a. LCN Closers (LC) - 4040XP Series. b. Norton Door Controls (NO) 7500 Series c. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) 4400 Series d. Corbin Russwin (RU) DC8000 Series Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Commercial Duty): ANSI/BHMA 156.4, Grade 1 B. certified surface mounted, institutional grade door closers with adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable acc frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable b sweep, and latch speed control valves. Provide non-handed units with high impact, non-corrosive plastic covers standard. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. a. LCN Closers (LC) - 1460FC Series. b. Norton Door Controls (NO) 8501 Series c. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) 3501 Series d. Corbin Russwin (RU) DC4000 Series UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 08 71 00 - 13 2.10 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS General: Provide operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, A. weight, and movement; for condition of exposure; and for complia 325. Coordinate operator mechanisms with door operation, hinges, and Fire-Rated Doors: Provide door operators for fire-rated door assemblies that 1. comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated door components and are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard, fabricated B. nonferrous shims for aligning system components. Standard: Certified ANSI/BHMA A156.19. C. Performance Requirements: 1. a. Opening Force if Power Fails: Not more than 15 lbf required to release a latch if provided, not more than 30 lbf required to manually set door in motion, and not more than 15 lbf required to fully open door. b. Entrapment Protection: Not more than 15 lbf required to prevent stopped door from closing or opening. Configuration: Surface mounted. Door operators to control single D. swinging doors. Operation: Power opening and spring closing operation capable of meeting ANSI E. A117.1 accessibility guideline. Provide time delay for door to r initiating closing cycle as required by ANSI/BHMA A156.19. When not in automatic mode, door operator to function as manual door closer with fully adjustable opening and closing forces, with or without electrical power. On-off switch to control power to be key switch operated. 1. Features: Operator units to have full feature adjustments for door opening and closing F. force and speed, backcheck, motor assist acceleration from 0 to 30 seconds, time delay, vestibule interface delay, obstruction recycle, and hold 30 seconds. Provide outputs and relays on board the operator to allow for co G. device latch retraction, electric strikes, magnetic locks, card readers, safe sensors and specified auxiliary contacts. Activation Devices: Provide activation devices in accordance wit H. A156.19 standard, for condition of exposure indicated and for long term, maintenance free operation under normal traffic load operation. Coordinate a electrified hardware and access control interfaces. Activation s SPST, with optional DPDT availability. Signage: As required by cited ANSI/BHMA A156.19 standard for the type of operator. I. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 08 71 00 - 14 Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. a. LCN Closers (LC) 4640Series. b. Norton Door Controls (NO) 6000 Series 2.11 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM Door Protective Trim A. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or 1. in the Hardware Sets. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more 2. door width (LDW) on stop side and not more than 1" less than doo side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Metal Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified metal protec 3. (kick, armor, or mop), beveled on four edges (B4E), fabricated flowing. a. Stainless Steel: 050-inch thick, with countersunk screw holes (CSK). b. Brass or Bronze: 050-inch thick, with countersunk screw holes (CSK). Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as sp 4. Hardware Sets. Metal Door Edging: Door protection edging fabricated from a minimum .050-inch 5. thick metal sheet, formed into an angle or "U" cap shapes, surfa mounted onto edge of door. Provide appropriate leg overlap to ac protection plates as required. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets. Acceptable Manufacturers: 6. a. Burns Manufacturing (BU) b. Hiawatha (HI). c. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). 2.12 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as spec A. Hardware Sets. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified doo B. bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types wi indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specifi not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 08 71 00 - 15 a. Burns (BU). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Trimco (TR) 2.13 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design A. specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weat exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on i indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and B. labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authori for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled o 1. Fire Labeled Gasketing: :Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and C. labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard fo 1. Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and UBC 7-2, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a tes D. inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated, based on testing ASTM E 1408. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips E. are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintai Acceptable Manufacturers: F. National Guard (NG). 1. Pemko Manufacturing (PE). 2. Reese (RE) 3. 2.14 FABRICATION Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates A. generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Pr according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 08 71 00 - 16 2.15 FINISHES Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware A. finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordinatio U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their produ Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coaif any), composition, B. hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's stan less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable u Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by alying a C. strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for complian A. for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construcor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the d B. types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such conflicts have been resolved in writing. 3.2 PREPARATION Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series. A. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series. B. 3.3 INSTALLATION Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware a A. equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer o 1. installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security p hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated B. applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or requir governing regulations: Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for 1. Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 08 71 00 - 17 Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural 2. Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, complh ANSI 3. A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other 4. hardware is located. Power Operator products and accessories are required to be insta C. members of the manufacturer's "Power Operator Preferred Installer Door closers installed on frames with applied wood trim shall ha to D. accommodate thickness in wood trim to allow screws to pass through wood trim without causing deflecting or movement of wood trim. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer' E. and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in F. complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the G. installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware ite of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and af 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and A. state in report whether work complies with or deviates from requ whether door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjus 3.5 ADJUSTING Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each A. door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Repla adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered an A. exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phas hardware at the latest possible time frame. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 08 71 00 - 18 Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. and C. protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is deterioration at time of owner occupancy. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and m A. and electromechanical door hardware. 3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of te owner and architect. A. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detaile Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bi process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with th additional hardware required for proper application and function Refer to Section 080671, Door Hardware Schedule, for hardware se B. Manufacturers Abbreviations: C. 1. PE - Pemko 2. MK - McKinney 3. RO - Rockwood 4. AD - Adams Rite 5. SA - Sargent 6. NO - Norton 7. RF - Rixson 8. SU - Securitron Hardware Schedule Set: 1.0 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Exit Device (Rim, passage) 12 8815 ETB US32D SA 1 Surface Closer 8501 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Gasketing S773D PE 1 Wall magnet FM998 689 RF Notes: Door(s) electrically held open with wall/floor magnet. Upon loss of power, magnet(s) release and door(s) close. FAIL SAFE UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 08 71 00 - 19 Set: 1.1 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Exit Device (Rim, passage) 12 8815 ETB US32D SA 1 Surface Closer PR8501 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Gasketing S773D PE 1 Wall magnet FM998 689 RF Notes: Door(s) electrically held open with wall/floor magnet. Up release and door(s) close. FAIL SAFE Set: 2.0 3 Hinge MPB79 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Mortise Dormitory Lock DG1 63 64 8225 LNB US26D SA 1 Surface Closer 8501 689 NO 1 Door Stop 508 US26D RO 1 Knocker w/ viewer 614V US26D RO 1 Half saddle threshold 253A PE 1 Gasketing S773D PE Set: 3.0 3 Hinge Hinges by prehanger 1 Cylindrical Privacy Set 7U65 LB US26D SA 1 Door Stop 508 US26D RO Notes: Use hinge pin stop at doors where door does not open agai Set: 3.1 3 Hinge Hinges by prehanger 1 Cylindrical Office Lock DG1 63 64 7G05 LB US26D SA 1 Door Stop 508 US26D RO Notes: Use hinge pin stop at doors where door does not open agai Set: 4.0 3 Hinge Hinges by prehanger 1 Cylindrical Passage Set 7U15 LB US26D SA 1 Door Stop 508 US26D RO Notes: Use hinge pin stop at doors where door does not open against an adjacent wall Set: 5.0 1 Bifold Door Hdwe HF4/100A series PE 2 Pull RM710-4 Mtg-Type 1 US32D RO UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 08 71 00 - 20 Set: 5.1 1 Hardware All hardware by door vendor CO Set: 6.0 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Mortise Storeroom Lock DG1 63 64 76 8204 LNL US26D SA 1 Surface Closer 8501 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Gasketing S773D PE Set: 6.1 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Mortise Storeroom Lock DG1 63 64 76 8204 LNB US26D SA 1 Surface Closer 8501 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Gasketing S773D PE Set: 7.0 3 Hinge TA2314 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D MK 1 Electric Hinge TA2314-QC8 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D MK 1 Electric Rim Exit Device (NL) DG1 56 63 64 AD8504 US32D SA 1 Pull RM3640-11" CTC x Mtg-Type 1 US32D RO 1 Automatic Operator 6060R D 689 NO 2 Operator push plate 501 NO 1 Concealed Overhead Stop 6-X36 630 RF 1 Threshold 252x3AFG PE 1 Sweep 345ANB PE 1 Wiring Diagram WD-SYSPK 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C006 (hinge to panic) MK 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C1500P (hinge to power) MK 1 Power Supply BPS-12/24-1 SU Notes: Operation: Electrically controlled door opening. Doors normally closed latched and locked. Doors can be dogged to allow for push/pull operation at Egress allowed at all times. Entry by mechanical key or by depre which will retract the latchbolt of the electrified exit device momentarily allowing the auto operator to open the door only when the operator is enabled. Weather-stripping by door vendor UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 08 71 00 - 21 Set: 7.1 4 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Push / Pull Set RM3645-11" CTC pull x Mtg-Type 1 US32D RO 1 Automatic Operator 6060R D 689 NO 2 Operator push plate 501 NO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Sweep 18061CNB PE Notes: Auto Operation: Door normally closed and unlocked. Egress Depressing automatic operator actuator switches located on either side of the door will open th door when the operator is enabled. Set: 7.2 4 Hinge TA2314 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D MK 1 Rim Exit Device (NL) DG1 63 64 AD8504 US32D SA 1 Pull RM3640-11" CTC x Mtg-Type 1 US32D RO 1 Door Closer PR7500 x 7788 689 NO 1 Concealed Overhead Stop 6-X36 630 RF 1 Threshold 252x3AFG PE 1 Sweep 345ANB PE Notes: Weather-stripping by door vendor Set: 8.0 7 Hinge TA2314 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D MK 1 Electric Hinge TA2314-QC8 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D MK 1 Electric Exit Device (CVR, NL) DG1 56 63 64 AD8410 106 US32D SA 1 Exit Device (CVR, EO) AD8410 US32D SA 2 Pull RM3640-11" CTC x Mtg-Type 1 US32D RO 1 Door Closer PR7500 x 7788 689 NO 1 Automatic Operator 6060R D 689 NO 2 Operator push plate 501 NO 2 Concealed Overhead Stop 6-X36 630 RF 1 Threshold 252x3AFG PE 2 Sweep 345ANB PE 1 Card reader By Security contractor 1 Wiring Diagram WD-SYSPK 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C006 (hinge to panic) MK 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C1500P (hinge to power) MK 1 Power Supply BPS-12/24-1 SU Notes: Operation: Electrically controlled door opening. Doors no can be dogged to allow for push/pull operation at selected timesat all times. Entry by mechanical key or on the door with the electrifi card. Depressing actuator switch on the exterior after swiping p latchbolt(s) of the electrified exit device momentarily allowing the auto operator to open the door when the operator is enabled. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 08 71 00 - 22 Weather-stripping by door vendor Set: 8.1 8 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 2 Push / Pull Set RM3645-11" CTC pull x Mtg-Type 1 US32D RO 1 Door Closer PR7500 x 7788 689 NO 1 Automatic Operator 6060R D 689 NO 2 Operator push plate 501 NO 2 Concealed Overhead Stop 6-X36 630 RF 2 Sweep 18061CNB PE Notes: Auto Operation: Door(s) normally closed and unlocked. Egr Depressing automatic operator actuator switches located on either side of the door will op active door when the operator is enabled. Weather-stripping by door vendor Set: 8.2 7 Hinge TA2314 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D MK 1 Electric Hinge TA2314-QC8 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D MK 1 Electric Exit Device (CVR, NL) DG1 56 63 64 AD8410 106 US32D SA 1 Exit Device (CVR, EO) AD8410 US32D SA 2 Pull RM3640-11" CTC x Mtg-Type 1 US32D RO 1 Door Closer PR7500 x 7788 689 NO 1 Automatic Operator 6060R D 689 NO 2 Operator push plate 501 NO 2 Concealed Overhead Stop 6-X36 630 RF 1 Threshold 252x3AFG PE 2 Sweep 345ANB PE 1 Wiring Diagram WD-SYSPK 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C006 (hinge to panic) MK 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C1500P (hinge to power) MK 1 Power Supply BPS-12/24-1 SU Notes: Operation: Electrically controlled door opening. Doors no can be dogged to allow for push/pull operation at selected times times. Entry by mechanical key or by depressing actuator switch which will retract the latchbolt(s) of the electrified exit device momentarily allowing active door only when the operator is enabled. Weather-stripping by door vendor Set: 9.0 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Mortise Office Lock DG1 63 64 8205 LNL US26D SA 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 08 71 00 - 23 Set: 9.1 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Mortise Office Lock DG1 63 64 8205 LNL US26D SA 1 Surface Closer 8501 689 NO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO Set: 10.0 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Push Plate 70F US32D RO 1 Pull Plate 110x70C US32D RO 1 Surface Closer 8501 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Mop Plate K1050 4" x 1" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO Set: 11.0 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Mortise Storeroom Lock 8204 LNL LC US26D SA 1 Mortise cylinder Cylinder by USPS US26D CO 1 Surface Closer 8501 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO Set: 12.0 6 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 2 Exit Device (SVR, CR) DG1 63 64 NB8713 ETL US32D SA 2 Surface Closer w/ stop CPS8501 689 NO 2 Kickplate K1050 10" x 1" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Gasketing S773D PE 1 Astragal S772D PE Set: 13.0 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Exit Device (Rim, CR) DG1 63 64 8813 ETL US32D SA 1 Surface Closer w/ stop CPS8501 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Gasketing S773D PE UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 08 71 00 - 24 Set: 14.0 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Narrow stile deadlock MS1850S 628 AD 1 Thumbturn Cylinder 4066 628 AD 1 Mortise Cylinder DG1 63 64 42 US26D SA 1 Push / Pull Set RM3645-11" CTC pull x Mtg-Type 1 US32D RO 1 Surface Closer 8501 x 8146 689 NO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO Set: 15.0 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Mortise Classroom Lock DG1 63 64 8237 LNL US26D SA 1 Surface Closer 8501 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Gasketing S773D PE Set: 16.0 6 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Manual Flushbolt set 555 US26D RO 1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO 1 Mortise Storeroom Lock DG1 63 64 8204 LNL US26D SA 1 Surface Closer 8501 689 NO 2 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 2 Silencer 608 RO Set: 17.0 4 Hinge TA2314 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D MK 1 Narrow stile deadlatch 4900 01 628 AD 1 Paddle Operator 4591-01 US26D AD 1 Mortise Cylinder DG1 63 64 42 US26D SA 1 Push / Pull Set RM3645-11" CTC pull x Mtg-Type 1 US32D RO 1 Door Closer PR7500 x 7788 689 NO 1 Concealed Overhead Stop 6-X36 630 RF 1 Threshold 252x3AFG PE 1 Sweep 345ANB PE Notes: Weather-stripping by door vendor Set: 18.0 1 Hardware All hardware by door vendor CO UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 08 71 00 - 25 Set: 19.0 Description: Electrified hardware support equipment 1 Electrical connecting kit QC-R001 MK 1 Crimp Tool QC-R003 MK Set: 20.0 1 Hinge MPB79 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 2 Spring Hinge MPS60 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Mortise Storeroom Lock (no o/s lever) DG1 63 64 8206 LNB US26D SA 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Gasketing S773D PE Set: 21.0 4 Hinge TA2314 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D MK 1 Mortise Storeroom Lock DG1 63 64 8204 LNL US26D SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Door Closer PRO 7500 689 NO 1 Surface Overhead Stop 9-X36 630 RF 1 Threshold 253x3AFG PE 1 Sweep 345ANB PE 1 Gasketing 303AS PE 1 Rain Guard 346C PE Set: 22.0 1 Pocket Door Hdwe PF28200A6080 PE 1 Semi privacy latch 1069L US32D TC END OF SECTION 087100 UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 08 71 00 - 26 SECTION 087100 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Gener A. Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following: A. Swinging doors. 1. Sliding Doors 2. Other doors to the extent indicated. 3. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the f B. Mechanical door hardware. 1. Electromechanical door hardware, power supplies, back-ups and surge 2. protection. Automatic operators. 3. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections. 4. Related Sections: C. Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry. 1. Section 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry. 2. Section 08 01 00 Operations and Maintenance. 3. Section 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 4. Section 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors. 5. Section 08 41 13 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts. 6. Section 08 42 29 Automatic Entrances. 7. Section 08 71 13 Automatic Door Operators. 8. Section 08 81 00 Glass and Glazing. 9. Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coating. 10. Section 28 13 00 Access Control. 11. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by th D. Jurisdiction. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 1. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. 2. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 3. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE JUNE 7, 2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 087100 - 1 NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 4. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 5. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 6. State Building Codes, Local Amendments. 7. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry E. standards: ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series 1. UL10C Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 2. 1.3 SUBMITTALS Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including insta A. descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of B. fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of doo Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in D 1. "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hard 2. indicating complete designations of every item required for each Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardwar end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as th Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission. Content: Include the following information: 3. a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each doore item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at e 4. possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordin the Door Hardware Schedule. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE JUNE 7, 2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 087100 - 2 Proof of Certification: Provide copy of manufacturer(s) official certification C. accreditation document indicating proof of status as a qualified of the primary Access Control Products. Keying Schedule: Prepared under the supervision of the Owner, separate schedule D. detailing final keying instructions for locksets and cylinders i system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set special instructions. Owner to approve submitted keying schedule to the ordering of permanent cylinders. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operati E. maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door h installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Su. The manual to include the name, address, and contact information of the manufa hardware and their nearest service representatives. The final co completion of the installation test to include "as built" modifins made during installation, checkout, and acceptance. Warranties and Maintenance: Special warranties and maintenance a F. specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers wits A. of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment sim indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of succ-service performance. Installer Qualifications: Installers, trained by the primary pro, with a B. minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard a builders hardware similar in material, design, and extent to tha Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a recor- service performance. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial do C. distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supply mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparab design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recogn direct distributor in good standing by the manufacturers of the warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both st electromechanical door hardware and keying. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules in 1. vertical format only; horizontal schedules are not acceptable an Automatic Operator Supplier Qualifications: Power operator produ D. are required to be supplied and installed through current member of the manufacturer's "Power Operator Preferred Installer" program. Su UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE JUNE 7, 2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 087100 - 3 factory trained, certified, and a direct purchaser of the specif be responsible for the installation and maintenance of the unitses indicated for the Project. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of Door Hardwar E. Section from a single source, qualified supplier unless otherwis Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufcturer's 1. product line by a secondary or third party source will not be ac Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufactur 2. mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with NFPA 70, NFPA 80, NFPA 101 and ANSI F. A117.1 requirements and guidelines as directed in the model buil but not limited to, the following: NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code", including electrical compone 1. and accessories listed and labeled as defined in Article 100 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for in Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, compl 2. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)," ANSI A117.1 as follows: a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Sha easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist. b. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements indicated: 1) Interior Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. 2) Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities havin jurisdiction. c. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors: 3. a. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. b. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies comp 4. with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agenc acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 (neutral pressure at 40" above sill) or UL-10C. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE JUNE 7, 2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 087100 - 4 a. Test Pressure: Positive pressure labeling. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating comp G. referenced standards. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirement 01 H. Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the the final keying schedule document: Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required. 1. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. 2. Requirements for key control storage and software. 3. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software. 4. Address and requirements for delivery of keys. 5. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in complia I. requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with atte representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware. Prior to installation of door hardware, arrange for manufacturer 1. to hold a project specific training meeting to instruct the inst personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware ( electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other 2. preparatory work performed by other trades. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access clled 3. opening. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availabilit 4. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demo 5. procedures. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door A. hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic acce software or accessories at Project site without prior authorizat Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door B. Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions w package. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access C. software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be "Keying Conference". UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE JUNE 7, 2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 087100 - 5 1.6 COORDINATION Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templat A. and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adeq made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicat Door Hardware and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of B. scheduled electrified door hardware and related access control e required connections to source power junction boxes, low voltage detection and monitoring hardware, and fire and detection alarm systems. Door and Frame Preparation: Related Division 08 Sections (Steel, C. Wood) doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinfor-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified eleified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications. 1.7 WARRANTY General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. S A. specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addit concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requi Contract Documents. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or B. replace components of standard and electrified door hardware tha workmanship within specified warranty period after final accepta Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or 1. Faulty operation of the hardware. 2. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials bey 3. weathering. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation. 4. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Comp C. otherwise indicated. Special Warranty Periods: D. Ten years for mortise locks and latches. 1. Ten years for extra heavy duty cylindrical (bored) locks and lats. 2. Seven years for heavy duty cylindrical (bored) locks and latches 3. Five years for standard duty cylindrical (bored) locks and latch 4. Five years for exit hardware. 5. Ten years for manual door closers. 6. Two years for electromechanical door hardware. 7. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE JUNE 7, 2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 087100 - 6 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of sp A. maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustm and removal and replacement of door hardware. Continuing Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, and running concurrent with B. the specified warranty period, provide continuous (6) months ful repair and replacement of worn or defective components, lubricat adjusting as required for proper door opening operation. Provide parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original products. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requ A. Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or c 1. function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door h indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: a. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufactu are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section includ 2. Coordinating, purchasing, delivering, and scheduling remain requ Section. a. Permanent cylinders, cores, and keys to be installed by Owner. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval fo B. and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the speci submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01, Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at architect, owner, and their designated consultants. 2.2 HANGING DEVICES Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles as A. specified in the Door Hardware Sets. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity, unless otherwise 1. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE JUNE 7, 2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 087100 - 7 a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, w 2. sized for door thickness and clearances required: a. Widths up to 30 : 4-1/2 standard or heavy weight as specified. b. Sizes from 31 to 40 : 5 standard or heavy weight as specifie Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, prov 3. following: a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight. b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing hinges unle Sets indicate heavy weight. Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Hardware Sets 4. or on Drawings: a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin wh closed; for the following applications: 1) Out-swinging exterior doors. 2) Out-swinging access controlled doors. Acceptable Manufacturers: 5. a. Bommer Industries (BO). b. McKinney Products (MK). c. Stanley Hardware (ST). Continuous Geared Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.26 certified continuous B. with minimum 0.120-inch thick extruded 6060 T6 aluminum alloy hinge leaves and a minimum overall width of 4 inches. Hinges are non-handed, reversible and fabricated to template screw locations. Provide concealed flush mount (with surface, or half surface, in standard and heavy duty models, as specified in the Hardware Sets. Concealed continuous hinges to be U.L. listed for including 90 minute rated door installations and U.L. listed for where applicable. Factory cut hinges for door size and provide with removable service power transfer panel where indicated at electrified openings. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. a. Select (SE). b. Pemko (PE) c. McKinney (MK). UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE JUNE 7, 2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 087100 - 8 Pin and Barrel Continuous Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.26 certified pi C. continuous hinges with minimum 12 gauge (.105) Type 304 stainless steel leaves, concealed teflon-coated stainless pin, and twin self-lubricated nylon bearings at each knuckle separation. Fabricate hinges non-handed and U.L. listed for use on up to and including 3 hour rated doors and U.L. listed for windstorm components applicable. Provide hinges with power transfer cutouts where ind openings. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. a. Markar Products (MA). b. McKinney Products (MK). c. Pemko Manufacturing (PE). d. Stanley Hardware (ST). Sliding Door Hardware: Sliding door hardware is to be of type an D. and should comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.14. Sliding Bi-Passing Pocket Door Hardware: Provide complete sets consisting o 1. track, hangers, stops, bumpers, floor channel, guides, and accessories indicated. Bi-folding Door Hardware: Rated for door panels weighing up to 125 lb. 2. Pocket Sliding Door Hardware: Rated for doors weighing up to 200 lb. 3. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Pemko Manufacturing (PE). 2) Hager. (HA). 2.3 POWER TRANSFER DEVICES Provide mortar guard enclosure on steel frames installed at maso A. electrical hinge specified. 2.4 DOOR OPERATING TRIM Flush Bolts and Surface Bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 and A156.16, Gra A. automatic, self-latching, and manual flush bolts and surface bolts. Manual flush be furnished with top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt loc from the floor. Furnish dust proof strikes for bottom bolts. Sur minimum 8 in length and U.L. listed for labeled fire doors and U.L. lis components where applicable. Provide related accessories (mounti coordinators, etc.) as required for appropriate installation and Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. a. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). b. Trimco (BU). c. Hiawatha (HI) UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE JUNE 7, 2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 087100 - 9 Coordinators: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 certified door coordinators consi-leaf, B. hold-open lever and inactive-leaf release trigger. Coordinators fabricated from steel with nylon-coated strike plates and built-in adjustable safety release. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. a. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). b. Trimco (TC). c. Hiawatha (HI) Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANS/BHMA A156.6 certified door pushe C. and design specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, 4-inches wide by 16-inches high, with 1. square corners and beveled edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated. Straight Pull Design: Minimum 1-inch round diameter stainless steel bar or tube 2. stock pulls with 2 1/2-inch projection from face of door unless otherwise indicated. See hardware sets for model. Push Bars: Minimum 1-inch round diameter horizontal push bars with minimum 3. clearance of 2 1/2-inch projection from face of door unless otherwise indicated. See hardware sets for model. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as in 4. Hardware Sets. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Burns (BU). 2) Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). 3) Trimco (TC). 2.5 CYLINDERS AND KEYING General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experi A. secured master key systems and have on record a published securiem policy. Patented Cylinders: ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1, certified cylinde B. utility patented and restricted keyway requiring the use of pate Provide bump resistant cylinders as standard with solid recessed cylinder collars. Cylinders are to be factory keyed where permanent keying records will be established and maintained. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the fo C. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight- or clover-type cam. 1. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and 2. raised trim ring. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks. 3. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE JUNE 7, 2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 087100 - 10 Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to all 4. face to be flush and be free spinning with matching finishes. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match l D. with the following: Removable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key, 1. with only the core manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware. Provide removable core (small format) as specified in Hardware Sets. Cylinders: ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1. E. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU). b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA). c. Schlage (SC). d. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA). Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory key F. "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instruc requirements. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by Owner. Incorporate deci conference, and as follows: Great-Grand Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key, 1. master key, a grand master key, and a great-grand master key. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys: G. Top Master Key: One (1) 1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2) 2. Master Keys (per Master Key Group): Two (2) 3. Grand Master Keys (per Grand Master Key Group): Two (2) 4. Construction Control Keys: Ten (10) 5. Permanent Control Keys: Ten (10) 6. Construction Keying: Provide temporary keyed construction cores for use during the H. construction period. Provide construction master keys in quantity as shown. General Contractor to replace construction cores with permanent cores. Furnish permanent cores for installation as directed under specified "Keying Confe Key Control Cabinet: System shall be as manufactured by Key Systems, Inc. and I. distributed by Stanley Security Systems. Provide Chit-Key Vault. 2.6 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Serie A. Operational Grade 1 certified mortise locksets furnished in the UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE JUNE 7, 2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 087100 - 11 the Hardware Sets. Locksets to be manufactured with a corrosion tamped 12 gauge minimum formed steel case and be field-reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body. Lockset trim (including knobs, lev roses) to be the product of a single manufacturer. Furnish with 3/4" throw anti-friction stainless steel latch bolt, and a full 1" throw stainless steel bolt for deadbolt functions. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) 8200 Series. b. Schlage (SC) L9000 Series. c. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) 8800FL Series. d. Corbin Russwin (RU) ML2000 Series Cylindrical Locksets, Grade 2 (Standard Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.2, B. Grade 2 certified cylindrical (bored) locksets furnished in the the Hardware Sets. Lock chassis fabricated of heavy gauge steel, zinc dichromate plated, with through-bolted application. Furnish with standard 2 3/4 backset and 1/2 throw brass or hardened steel latchbolt. Locks are to be non-handed and fully field reversible. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - CL3800 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 7-Line. c. Schlage (SC) - AL Series. d. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 5300LN Series. Lock Trim Design: As specified in Hardware Sets. C. Knurling: Where specified provide knurling or abrasive coating all levers on doors D. leading to hazardous areas such as mechanical rooms, boiler and janitor closets, and as otherwise required by the Indiana Accessibility Code. 2.7 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock A. bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to mat unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as 1. recommended by manufacturer. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing t 2. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabr 3. for aluminum framing. Standards: Comply with the following: B. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. 1. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 2. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE JUNE 7, 2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 087100 - 12 Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.5. 3. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16. 4. 2.8 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156 A. certified panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the Hardware Sets. Mounting rails to be formed from smooth stainless bronze architectural materials no less than 0.072" thick, with pof 0.062" thickness. Painted or aluminum metal rails are not accept to be investment cast stainless steel, pullman type, with deadlo Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. a. Von Duprin (VD) 35/98 Series. b. Sargent (SA) 80 Series c. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) 7000 Series d. Corbin Russwin (RU) ED4000/ED5000 Series 2.9 DOOR CLOSERS Door Closers, Surface Mounted ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface A. duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and op Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece aluminum or cast iron body construction, with adjustable back-check and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control. Provide high impact, non-corrosive plastic covers standard. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. a. LCN Closers (LC) - 4040XP Series. b. Norton Door Controls (NO) 7500 Series c. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) 4400 Series d. Corbin Russwin (RU) DC8000 Series Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Commercial Duty): ANSI/BHMA 156.4, Grade 1 B. certified surface mounted, institutional grade door closers with adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable acc frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable b sweep, and latch speed control valves. Provide non-handed units with high impact, non-corrosive plastic covers standard. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. a. LCN Closers (LC) - 1460FC Series. b. Norton Door Controls (NO) 8501 Series c. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) 3501 Series d. Corbin Russwin (RU) DC4000 Series UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE JUNE 7, 2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 087100 - 13 2.10 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS General: Provide operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, A. weight, and movement; for condition of exposure; and for complia 325. Coordinate operator mechanisms with door operation, hinges, and Fire-Rated Doors: Provide door operators for fire-rated door assemblies that 1. comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated door components and are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard, fabricated B. nonferrous shims for aligning system components. Standard: Certified ANSI/BHMA A156.19. C. Performance Requirements: 1. a. Opening Force if Power Fails: Not more than 15 lbf required to release a latch if provided, not more than 30 lbf required to manually set door in motion, and not more than 15 lbf required to fully open door. b. Entrapment Protection: Not more than 15 lbf required to prevent stopped door from closing or opening. Configuration: Surface mounted. Door operators to control single D. swinging doors. Operation: Power opening and spring closing operation capable of meeting ANSI E. A117.1 accessibility guideline. Provide time delay for door to r initiating closing cycle as required by ANSI/BHMA A156.19. When not in automatic mode, door operator to function as manual door closer with fully adjustable opening and closing forces, with or without electrical power. On-off switch to control power to be key switch operated. 1. Features: Operator units to have full feature adjustments for door opening and closing F. force and speed, backcheck, motor assist acceleration from 0 to 30 seconds, time delay, vestibule interface delay, obstruction recycle, and hold 30 seconds. Provide outputs and relays on board the operator to allow for co G. device latch retraction, electric strikes, magnetic locks, card readers, safe sensors and specified auxiliary contacts. Activation Devices: Provide activation devices in accordance wit H. A156.19 standard, for condition of exposure indicated and for long term, maintenance free operation under normal traffic load operation. Coordinate a electrified hardware and access control interfaces. Activation s SPST, with optional DPDT availability. Signage: As required by cited ANSI/BHMA A156.19 standard for the type of operator. I. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE JUNE 7, 2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 087100 - 14 Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. a. LCN Closers (LC) 4640Series. b. Norton Door Controls (NO) 6000 Series 2.11 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM Door Protective Trim A. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or 1. in the Hardware Sets. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more 2. door width (LDW) on stop side and not more than 1" less than doo side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Metal Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified metal protec 3. (kick, armor, or mop), beveled on four edges (B4E), fabricated flowing. a. Stainless Steel: 050-inch thick, with countersunk screw holes (CSK). b. Brass or Bronze: 050-inch thick, with countersunk screw holes (CSK). Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as sp 4. Hardware Sets. Metal Door Edging: Door protection edging fabricated from a minimum .050-inch 5. thick metal sheet, formed into an angle or "U" cap shapes, surfa mounted onto edge of door. Provide appropriate leg overlap to ac protection plates as required. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets. Acceptable Manufacturers: 6. a. Burns Manufacturing (BU) b. Hiawatha (HI). c. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). 2.12 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as spec A. Hardware Sets. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified doo B. bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types wi indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specifi not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE JUNE 7, 2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 087100 - 15 a. Burns (BU). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Trimco (TR) 2.13 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design A. specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weat exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on i indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and B. labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authori for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled o 1. Fire Labeled Gasketing: :Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and C. labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard fo 1. Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and UBC 7-2, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a tes D. inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated, based on testing ASTM E 1408. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips E. are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintai Acceptable Manufacturers: F. National Guard (NG). 1. Pemko Manufacturing (PE). 2. Reese (RE) 3. 2.14 FABRICATION Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates A. generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Pr according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE JUNE 7, 2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 087100 - 16 2.15 FINISHES Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware A. finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordinatio U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their produ Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coaif any), composition, B. hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's stan less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable u Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by alying a C. strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for complian A. for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construcor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the d B. types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such conflicts have been resolved in writing. 3.2 PREPARATION Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series. A. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series. B. 3.3 INSTALLATION Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware a A. equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer o 1. installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security p hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated B. applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or requir governing regulations: Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for 1. Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE JUNE 7, 2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 087100 - 17 Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural 2. Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, complh ANSI 3. A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other 4. hardware is located. Power Operator products and accessories are required to be insta C. members of the manufacturer's "Power Operator Preferred Installer Door closers installed on frames with applied wood trim shall ha to D. accommodate thickness in wood trim to allow screws to pass through wood trim without causing deflecting or movement of wood trim. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer' E. and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in F. complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the G. installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware ite of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and af 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and A. state in report whether work complies with or deviates from requ whether door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjus 3.5 ADJUSTING Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each A. door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Repla adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered an A. exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phas hardware at the latest possible time frame. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE JUNE 7, 2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 087100 - 18 Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. and C. protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is deterioration at time of owner occupancy. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and m A. and electromechanical door hardware. 3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of te owner and architect. A. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detaile Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bi process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with th additional hardware required for proper application and function Refer to Section 080671, Door Hardware Schedule, for hardware se B. Manufacturers Abbreviations: C. 1. PE - Pemko 2. MK - McKinney 3. RO - Rockwood 4. AD - Adams Rite 5. SA - Sargent 6. NO - Norton 7. RF - Rixson 8. SU - Securitron Hardware Schedule Set: 1.0 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Exit Device (Rim, passage) 12 8815 ETB US32D SA 1 Surface Closer 8501 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Gasketing S773D PE 1 Wall magnet FM998 689 RF Notes: Door(s) electrically held open with wall/floor magnet. Upon loss of power, magnet(s) release and door(s) close. FAIL SAFE UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE JUNE 7, 2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 087100 - 19 Set: 1.1 NOT USED Set: 2.0 3 Hinge MPB79 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Mortise Dormitory Lock DG1 63 64 8225 LNB US26D SA 1 Surface Closer 8501 689 NO 1 Door Stop 508 US26D RO 1 Knocker w/ viewer 614V US26D RO 1 Half saddle threshold 253A PE 1 Gasketing S773D PE Set: 3.0 3 Hinge Hinges by prehanger 1 Cylindrical Privacy Set 7U65 LB US26D SA 1 Door Stop 508 US26D RO Notes: Use hinge pin stop at doors where door does not open against an adjacent wa Set: 3.1 3 Hinge Hinges by prehanger 1 Cylindrical Office Lock DG1 63 64 7G05 LB US26D SA 1 Door Stop 508 US26D RO Notes: Use hinge pin stop at doors where door does not open against an adjacent wall Set: 4.0 3 Hinge Hinges by prehanger 1 Cylindrical Passage Set 7U15 LB US26D SA 1 Door Stop 508 US26D RO Notes: Use hinge pin stop at doors where door does not open agai Set: 5.0 1 Bifold Door Hdwe HF4/100A series PE 2 Pull RM710-4 Mtg-Type 1 US32D RO Set: 5.1 NOT USED Set: 6.0 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Mortise Storeroom Lock DG1 63 64 76 8204 LNL US26D SA 1 Surface Closer 8501 689 NO UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE JUNE 7, 2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 087100 - 20 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Gasketing S773D PE Set: 6.1 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Mortise Storeroom Lock DG1 63 64 76 8204 LNB US26D SA 1 Surface Closer 8501 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Gasketing S773D PE Set: 7.0 4 Hinge TA2314 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D MK 1 Rim Exit Device (NL) DG1 63 64 AD8504 US32D SA 1 Pull RM3640-11" CTC x Mtg-Type 1 US32D RO 1 Closer PR7500 689 NO 1 Concealed Overhead Stop 6-X36 630 RF 1 Threshold 252x3AFG PE 1 Sweep 345ANB PE Weather-stripping by door vendor Set: 7.1 4 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Push / Pull Set RM3645-11" CTC pull x Mtg-Type 1 US32D RO 1 Automatic Operator 6060R D 689 NO 2 Operator push plate 501 NO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Sweep 18061CNB PE Notes: Auto Operation: Door normally closed and unlocked. Egress Depressing automatic operator actuator switches located on eithe door when the operator is enabled. Set: 7.2 4 Hinge TA2314 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D MK 1 Rim Exit Device (NL) DG1 63 64 AD8504 US32D SA 1 Pull RM3640-11" CTC x Mtg-Type 1 US32D RO 1 Door Closer PR7500 x 7788 689 NO 1 Concealed Overhead Stop 6-X36 630 RF 1 Threshold 252x3AFG PE 1 Sweep 345ANB PE Notes: Weather-stripping by door vendor UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE JUNE 7, 2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 087100 - 21 Set: 8.0 NOT USED Set: 8.1 8 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 2 Push / Pull Set RM3645-11" CTC pull x Mtg-Type 1 US32D RO 1 Door Closer PR7500 x 7788 689 NO 1 Automatic Operator 6060R D 689 NO 2 Operator push plate 501 NO 2 Concealed Overhead Stop 6-X36 630 RF 1 Threshold 252x3AFG PE 2 Sweep 345ANB PE Notes: Auto Operation: Door(s) normally closed and unlocked. Egrat all times. Depressing automatic operator actuator switches located on eithe active door when the operator is enabled. Weather-stripping by door vendor Set: 8.2 7 Hinge TA2314 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D MK 1 Electric Hinge TA2314-QC8 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D MK 1 Electric Exit Device (CVR, NL) DG1 56 63 64 AD8410 106 US32D SA 1 Exit Device (CVR, EO) AD8410 US32D SA 2 Pull RM3640-11" CTC x Mtg-Type 1 US32D RO 1 Door Closer PR7500 x 7788 689 NO 1 Automatic Operator 6060R D 689 NO 2 Operator push plate 501 NO 2 Concealed Overhead Stop 6-X36 630 RF 2 Sweep 18061CNB PE 1 Wiring Diagram WD-SYSPK 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C006 (hinge to panic) MK 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C1500P (hinge to power) MK 1 Power Supply BPS-12/24-1 SU Notes: Operation: Electrically controlled door opening. Doors no can be dogged to allow for push/pull operation at selected times times. Entry by mechanical key or by depressing actuator switch which will retract the latchbolt(s) of the electrified exit device momentarily allowing active door only when the operator is enabled. Weather-stripping by door vendor UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE JUNE 7, 2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 087100 - 22 Set: 8.3 8 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 2 Push / Pull Set RM3645-11" CTC pull x Mtg-Type 1 US32D RO 1 Door Closer PR7500 x 7788 689 NO 1 Automatic Operator 6060R D 689 NO 2 Operator push plate 501 NO 2 Concealed Overhead Stop 6-X36 630 RF 1 Threshold 252x226 modified per sketch PE 2 Sweep 345ANB PE Notes: Auto Operation: Door(s) normally closed and unlocked. Egr Depressing automatic operator actuator switches located on eithe active door when the operator is enabled. Weather-stripping by door vendor Set: 9.0 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Mortise Office Lock DG1 63 64 8205 LNL US26D SA 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO Set: 9.1 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Mortise Office Lock DG1 63 64 8205 LNL US26D SA 1 Surface Closer 8501 689 NO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO Set: 10.0 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Push Plate 70F US32D RO 1 Pull Plate 110x70C US32D RO 1 Surface Closer 8501 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Mop Plate K1050 4" x 1" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO Set: 11.0 NOT USED UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE JUNE 7, 2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 087100 - 23 Set: 12.0 6 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 2 Exit Device (SVR, CR) DG1 63 64 NB8713 ETL US32D SA 2 Surface Closer w/ stop CPS8501 689 NO 2 Kickplate K1050 10" x 1" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Gasketing S773D PE 1 Astragal S772D PE Set: 13.0 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Exit Device (Rim, CR) DG1 63 64 8813 ETL US32D SA 1 Surface Closer w/ stop CPS8501 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Gasketing S773D PE Set: 14.0 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Narrow stile deadlock MS1850S 628 AD 1 Thumbturn Cylinder 4066 628 AD 1 Mortise Cylinder DG1 63 64 42 US26D SA 1 Push / Pull Set RM3645-11" CTC pull x Mtg-Type 1 US32D RO 1 Surface Closer 8501 x 8146 689 NO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO Set: 15.0 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Mortise Classroom Lock DG1 63 64 8237 LNL US26D SA 1 Surface Closer 8501 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Gasketing S773D PE Set: 16.0 6 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Manual Flushbolt set 555 US26D RO 1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO 1 Mortise Storeroom Lock DG1 63 64 8204 LNL US26D SA 1 Surface Closer 8501 689 NO 2 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 2 Silencer 608 RO UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE JUNE 7, 2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 087100 - 24 Set: 17.0 4 Hinge TA2314 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D MK 1 Narrow stile deadlatch 4900 01 628 AD 1 Paddle Operator 4591-01 US26D AD 1 Mortise Cylinder DG1 63 64 42 US26D SA 1 Push / Pull Set RM3645-11" CTC pull x Mtg-Type 1 US32D RO 1 Door Closer PR7500 x 7788 689 NO 1 Concealed Overhead Stop 6-X36 630 RF 1 Threshold 252x3AFG PE 1 Sweep 345ANB PE Notes: Weather-stripping by door vendor Set: 18.0 All hardware by door vendor CO Set: 19.0 Description: Electrified hardware support equipment 1 Electrical connecting kit QC-R001 MK 1 Crimp Tool QC-R003 MK Set: 20.0 1 Hinge MPB79 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 2 Spring Hinge MPS60 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Mortise Storeroom Lock (no o/s lever) DG1 63 64 8206 LNB US26D SA 1 Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Gasketing S773D PE Set: 21.0 4 Hinge TA2314 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D MK 1 Mortise Storeroom Lock DG1 63 64 8204 LNL US26D SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Door Closer PRO 7500 689 NO 1 Surface Overhead Stop 9-X36 630 RF 1 Threshold 253x3AFG PE 1 Sweep 345ANB PE 1 Gasketing 303AS PE 1 Rain Guard 346C PE UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE JUNE 7, 2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 087100 - 25 Set: 22.0 1 Pocket Door Hdwe PF28200A6080 PE 1 Semi privacy latch 1069L US32D TC Set: 22.1 2 Pocket Door Hdwe PF28200A6080 PE 2 Pocket door latch 1069 US32D TC Set: 23.0 4 Hinge TA2314 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D MK 1 Rim Exit Device (NL) 8810 US32D SA 1 Door Closer CLP7500 689 NO 1 Threshold 252x3AFG PE 1 Gasketing 303AS PE 1 Sweep 345ANB PE END OF SECTION 087100 UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING DOOR HARDWARE JUNE 7, 2013 PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 087100 - 26 SECTION088000 GLAZING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1.Windows. 2.Doors. 3.Glazed entrances. 4.Interior borrowed lites. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B.Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches(300 mm)square. C.Glazing Schedule: Listglass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.03INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. B.Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report. 1.04QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain ultraclear float glass,tinted float glass,coated float glass andlaminated glassfrom single source from single manufacturer for each glass type. B.Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1.GANA Publications:GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" andGANA's "Glazing Manual." UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGGLAZING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION088000-1 2.AAMA Publications: AAMAGDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and AAMATIR-A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." 3.IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMATB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped Glazing." 4.IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMATM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." C.Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. D.Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. 1.05WARRANTY A.Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. 1.Warranty Period:10years from date of Substantial Completion. B.Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1.Warranty Period:10years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01GLASSPRODUCTS, GENERAL A.Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. B.Strength:Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, KindHS heat-treated float glass, or KindFT heat-treated float glassas needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide KindHS heat- treated float glass or KindFT heat-treated float glassas needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide KindFT heat-treated float glass. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGGLAZING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION088000-2 C.Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer'spublished test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1.U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC100 and based on LBL's WINDOW5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. xh x degF(W/sq.m xK). 2.Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC200 and based on LBL's WINDOW5.2 computer program. 3.Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC300. 2.02PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to ASTME1300by a qualified professional engineer, using the following design criteria: 1.Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings. 2.Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load. 3.Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites. B.Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. 1.Temperature Change:120 degF(67 degC), ambient; 180 degF(100 degC), material surfaces. C.Safety Glazing: Provide safety glazing in locations indicated on the drawings and in locations as required by International Building Code-2009. 2.03GLASS PRODUCTS A.Float Glass: ASTMC1036, TypeI, Quality-Q3, ClassI (clear) unless otherwise indicated. B.Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTMC1048; TypeI; Quality-Q3; ClassI (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated. 1.Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. 2.Foruncoated glass, comply with requirements for ConditionA. 3.For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for ConditionC (other coated glass). 4.Heat soak all fully tempered glass per EN-14179-1:2005 European Standard. C.Uncoated Tinted Float Glass: Class2, complying with other requirements specified. D.Ceramic-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTMC1048, ConditionB, TypeI, Quality-Q3, and complying with other requirements specified. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGGLAZING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION088000-3 E.Silicone-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTMC1048, ConditionC, TypeI, Quality-Q3,and complying with other requirements specified. 2.04INSULATING GLASS A.Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTME2190, and complying with other requirements specified. 1.Sealing System: Dual seal. 2.Spacer:Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 2.05GLAZING GASKETS A.Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made fromone ofthe following: 1.EPDM complying with ASTMC864. 2.Silicone complying with ASTMC1115. 3.Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTMC1115. B.Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinnedEPDMsilicone orthermoplastic polyolefin rubbergaskets complying with ASTMC509, TypeII, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. 1.Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing. 2.06GLAZING SEALANTS A.General: 1.Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2.Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3.Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.07GLAZING TAPES A.Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGGLAZING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION088000-4 rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTMC1281 and AAMA800 for products indicated below: 1.AAMA806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 2.AAMA807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject tocontinuous pressure. 2.08MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A.Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. B.Setting Blocks:Dense cured silicone with a Shore, TypeA durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. C.Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. D.Edge Blocks:Dense cured silicone ofhardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). E.Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTMC1330, TypeO (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. 2.09MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES A.Glass TypeGL-01: Clear fully tempered float glass. 1.Thickness:6.0 mm. 2.Provide safety glazing labeling. 2.10INSULATING-GLASS TYPES A.Glass TypeE-GL-01: Low-e-coated, clear insulating glass. 1.Overall Unit Thickness:1 inch(25 mm). 2.Thickness of Each Glass Lite:6.0 mm. 3.Outdoor Lite:Fully tempered float glass. 4.Interspace Content:Air. 5.Indoor Lite:Fully tempered float glass. 6.Low-E Coating:Sputtered on secondsurface. 7.Visible Light Transmittance: 48percent minimum. 8.Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.35maximum. 9.Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.35maximum. 10.Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.40maximum. 11.Provide safety glazing labeling. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGGLAZING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION088000-5 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01GLAZING, GENERAL A.Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B.Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. C.Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D.Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. E.Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F.Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G.Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches(1270 mm). H.Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. 3.02TAPE GLAZING A.Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B.Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C.Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D.Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E.Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGGLAZING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION088000-6 F.Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks andpress firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. G.Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.03GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A.Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B.Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C.Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D.Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazingstops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. E.Install gaskets so they protrudepast face of glazing stops. 3.04SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A.Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B.Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C.Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.05CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGGLAZING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION088000-7 B.Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. C.Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D.Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGGLAZING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION088000-8 SECTION088300 MIRRORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors: 1.Annealed monolithic glass mirrors. 2.Film-backedglass mirrors qualifying as safety glazing. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B.Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachments to other work. C.Samples: 1.Mirrors:12 inches(300 mm)square, including edge treatment on two adjoining edges. 2.Mirror Clips: Full size. 3.Mirror Trim:12inches(300 mm)long. 1.03INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Preconstruction test reports. B.Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.04CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance data. 1.05QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Glazing Publications: Comply with GANA's "Glazing Manual" and "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors." B.Safety Glazing Products: For film-backedmirrors, provide products complying with testing requirements in 16CFR1201 for CategoryII materials. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGMIRRORS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION088300-1 C.Preconstruction Mirror MasticCompatibility Test: Submit mirror mastic products to mirror manufacturer for testing to determine compatibility of mastic with mirror backing and substrates on which mirrors are installed. 1.06WARRANTY A.Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in whichmirror manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of mirrors is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to mirror breakage or to maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film. 1.Warranty Period:Fiveyears from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRRORS A.Glass Mirrors, General: ASTMC1503. 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.American Mirror Company, Inc. b.Carolina Mirror Company. c.Gardner Glass, Inc. d.Gilded Mirrors, Inc. e.Guardian Industries. f.Lenoir Mirror Company. g.Stroupe Mirror Co., Inc. h.Virginia Mirror Company, Inc. B.Clear Glass: Mirror SelectQuality. 1.Nominal Thickness:6.0 mm. 2.02MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, TypeA durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. B.Edge Sealer: Approved by mirror manufacturer. C.Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for setting mirrors. D.Film Backing for Safety Mirrors: Film backing and pressure-sensitive adhesive; both compatiblewith mirror backing paint as certified by mirror manufacturer. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGMIRRORS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION088300-2 2.03MIRROR HARDWARE A.Top and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep enough to produce a glazing channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in lengths required to cover bottom and top edges of each mirror in a single piece. 1.Finish:Clearbright anodized. B.Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed. C.Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. 2.04FABRICATION A.Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible surfaces. Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors. B.Mirror Edge Treatment:Flat polished. Seal edges of mirrors with edge sealer. C.Film-Backed Safety Mirrors: Apply film backing with adhesive coating over mirror backing paint as recommended in writing by film-backing manufacturer. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION A.Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1.Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of mirror mastic with existing finishes or primers. 2.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. B.Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of substrates, including coating substrates with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where applicable. C.General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images. D.Wall-Mounted Mirrors: Install mirrors with mastic andmirror hardware. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGMIRRORS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION088300-3 mirrors.Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for coverage and to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface. E.Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. F.Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water. G.Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent mirrors from being exposedto moisture from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time. H.Wash exposed surface of mirrors not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion.Wash mirrors as recommended in writing by mirror manufacturer. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGMIRRORS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION088300-4 SECTION09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.This Section includes gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies for the following: 1.Chase enclosures. B.Related Sections include the following: 1.Division07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" forhead-of-wall assemblies that incorporate gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies. 2.Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board” for gypsum board products beyond the liner boards within this section. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. B.Product Schedule: Coordinate with the non-structural framing manufacturer and provide a table listing the partition type, submitted metal framing, submitted gypsum board products, UL number matching required fire rating, and limiting height of the partition with the submitted products. Include a statement indicating that the submitted products and the installation will conform to the requirements of the UL test number. 1.03INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.The Contractor shall submit a letter to the architect stating that all of the materials he is providing for this work are manufactured by one of the manufacturers listed in this Section. The letter shall further state that the protection and installation of these materials will be done in strict conformance with the recommendations and requirements of the manufacturer. 1.04QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Fire-Resistance Ratings: Provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined according to ASTME119 by a testing and inspecting agency. B.STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested according to ASTME90 and classified according to ASTME413 by a testing and inspecting agency. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGGYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION092116-1 C.Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures for installing gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies including, but not limited to, the following: 1.Fasteners proposed for anchoring nonstructural steel framing to building structure. 2.Sprayed fire-resistive materials applied to structural steel framing. 3.Elevator equipment, including hoistway doors, elevator call buttons, and elevator floor indicators. 4.Wiring devices in shaft-wall assemblies. 5.Doors and other items penetrating shaft-wall assemblies. 6.Items supported by shaft-wall-assembly framing. 7.Mechanical work enclosed within shaft-wall assemblies. 1.05DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver materials in original packages, containers, and bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B.Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. C.Stack panels flat on leveled supports off floor or slab to prevent sagging. 1.06PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTMC840 requirements or with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B.When schedule permits do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. Provide mold resistant products when stocking and/or installation must commence prior to the building being made permanently weathertight. C.Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1.Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape. 2.Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01MANUFACTURERS A.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers: 1.CertainTeed UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGGYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION092116-2 2.G-P Gypsum. 3.National Gypsum Company. 4.USG Corporation. 2.02GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES, GENERAL A.Provide materials and components complying with requirements of fire-resistance- rated assemblies indicated. 1.Provide panels in maximum lengths available to eliminate or minimize end-to-end butt joints. 2.Provide auxiliary materials complying with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations. 2.03PANEL PRODUCTS A.Gypsum Shaftliner Board, TypeX: ASTMC1396/C1396M; manufacturer's proprietary fire-resistive liner panels with paper faces. 1.TypeX: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels with moisture-resistant paper faces. a.Core:1 inch(25.4 mm)thick. b.Long Edges: Double bevel. B.Gypsum Board: As specified in Division09 Section "Gypsum Board." 2.04NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING A.Framing Members: Comply with ASTMC754 for conditions indicated. B.Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTMC645 requirements for metal. 1.Protective Coating: ASTMA653/A653M,G60(Z180). 2.05AUXILIARY MATERIALS A.General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced product standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B.Trim Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes specified in Division09 Section " Gypsum Board" that comply with gypsum board shaft- wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations for application indicated. C.Gypsum Board Joint-Treatment Materials: As specified in Division09 Section "Gypsum Board." D.Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended by manufacturer for directly adhering gypsum face-layer panels to backing-layer panels in multilayer construction. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGGYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION092116-3 1.Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50g/L or less when calculated according to 40CFR59, SubpartD (EPA Method24). E.Steel Drill Screws: ASTMC1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1.For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. F.Track Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading conditions imposed on shaft-wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded. 1.Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTME488 conducted by a qualified testing agency. 2.Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTME1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency. G.Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTMC665, TypeI (blankets without membrane facing), produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1.Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. H.Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division07 Section "Joint Sealants." I.Galvanizedsteel reinforcing strips: Minimum 20 gauge, 5” wide. 2.06GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES A.Basis-of-Design Product: As indicated on Drawings by design designation of a qualified testing agency. B.Fire-Resistance Rating: As indicated. C.STC Rating: As indicated. D.Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members, corner and end members, and fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. 1.Depth: As indicated. 2.Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As recommended by Manufacturer for span and loading based on L/240 deflection.For walls with ceramic tile, plaster or wall hung cabinets, limit the deflection to L/360. E.Runner Tracks: Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with long-leg length as standard with manufacturer and to allow for indicated deflections, butat least 2 inches (51 mm)long and in depth matching studs. 1.Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As recommended by Manufacturer for anticipated loading. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGGYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION092116-4 F.Firestop Tracks: Toprunner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1)Cemco; FAS track. 2)ClarkDietrich Building Systems: Blazeframe 3)Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak. 4)Marino\Ware; FAS track. G.Jamb Struts: Manufacturer's standard J-profile strut with long-leg length of 3 inches (76 mm), in depth matching studs, and not less than 0.0329 inch(0.84 mm)thick. H.Room-Side Finish: As indicated. I.Shaft-Side Finish:As indicated. J.Insulation: Sound attenuation blankets. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates to which gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies attach or abut, with Installer present, including hollow-metal frames, elevator hoistway door frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing. Examine for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B.Examine panels before installation.Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02INSTALLATION A.General: Install gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and the following: 1.ASTMC754 for installing steel framing except comply with framing spacing indicated. 2.Division09 Section " Gypsum Board" for applying and finishing panels. B.Do not bridge architectural or building expansion joints with shaft-wall assemblies; frame both sides of expansion joints with furring and other support. C.Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies around openings and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGGYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION092116-5 fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by shaft-wall assembly framing. D.At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft-wall assembly by installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items. E.Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure to prevent cracking of panels, while maintaining continuity of fire-rated construction. F.Firestop Tracks:Install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. G.Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings and according to ASTMC840 and in specific locations approved by Architect, while maintaining fire- resistance rating of gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies. H.Seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical sealantat perimeter of each assembly where it abuts other work and at joints and penetrations within each assembly. Install acoustical sealant to withstand dislocation by air-pressure differential between shaft and external spaces; maintain an airtight and smoke-tight seal; and comply with ASTMC919 requirements or with manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent. I.Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch(3mm)from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.03PROTECTION A.Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B.Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1.Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape. 2.Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGGYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION092116-6 SECTION092900 GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Interior gypsum board. 2.Tile backing panels. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. B.Product Schedule: Coordinate with the gypsum board manufacturer and provide a table listing the partition type, submitted metal framing, submitted gypsum board products, UL number matching required fire rating, and limiting height of the partition with the submitted products. Include a statement indicating that the submitted products and theinstallation will conform to the requirements of the UL test number. 1.03INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.The Contractor shall submit a letter to the Architect stating that all of the materials he is providing for this work are manufactured by one of the manufacturers listed in this Section. The letter shall further state that the protection and installation of these materials will be done in strict conformance with the recommendations and requirements of the manufacturer. 1.04STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging. 1.05PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTMC840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B.Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGGYPSUM BOARD JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION092900-1 1.Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2.Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTME119 by an independent testing agency. B.STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTME90 and classified according to ASTME413 by an independent testing agency. 2.02INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.CertainTeed Corp. 2.Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 3.Lafarge North America Inc. 4.National Gypsum Company. 5.USG Corporation. B.Gypsum Board, TypeX: ASTMC1396/C1396M. 1.Locations: Typical locations except as noted otherwise. 2.Thickness:5/8 inch(15.9 mm). 3.Long Edges:Tapered. C.Flexible Gypsum Board: ASTMC1396/C1396M. Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be more flexible than standard regular-type gypsum board of same thickness. 1.Thickness:1/4 inch(6.4 mm). 2.Long Edges: Tapered. D.Gypsum Board, TypeC: ASTMC1396/C1396M. Manufactured to have increased fire- resistive capability. 1.Thickness: As required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated on Drawings. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGGYPSUM BOARD JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION092900-2 2.Long Edges: Tapered. 2.03TILE BACKING PANELS A.Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTMC1178/C1178M, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a.CertainTeed Corp.; GlasRoc Tile Backer. b.Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensShield Tile Backer. c.National Gypsum; eXP TileBacker. 2.Core:5/8 inch(15.9 mm), TypeX. 3.Mold Resistance: ASTMD3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTMD3274. B.Cementitious Backer Units: ANSIA118.9 and ASTMC1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a.CertainTeed Corp.; FiberCement BackerBoard. b.Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. c.FinPan; Uti-A-Crete d.National Gypsum Company, Permabase Cement Board. e.USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. 2.Thickness:As indicatedbut no less than ½ inch 3.Mold Resistance: ASTMD3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTMD3274. 2.04TRIM ACCESSORIES A.Interior Trim: ASTMC1047. 1.Material:Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet. B.Exterior Trim: ASTMC1047. 1.Material:Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc. C.Aluminum Trim:ASTMB221(ASTMB221M), Alloy6063-T5. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGGYPSUM BOARD JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION092900-3 2.05JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A.General: Comply with ASTMC475/C475M. B.Joint Tape: 1.Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2.Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C.Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 2.06AUXILIARY MATERIALS A.Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or jointcompound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 1.Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50g/L or less when calculated according to 40CFR59, SubpartD (EPA Method24). B.Steel Drill Screws: ASTMC1002, unless otherwise indicated. C.Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTMC665, TypeI (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from slag wool, or rock woolor produced with glass-fibers with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTME84; passing ASTME136 for combustion characteristics. 1.Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. D.Outlet Box Pads: Provide Lowry's OutletBox Pads, as manufactured by Harry A. Lowry and Associates, Sun Valley, CA to seal the backsides of all electrical boxes, TV jacks and telephone outlet boxes to reduce air transmitted sound in all acoustically rated partitions. Outlet pads shall be made of grey polybutene-butyl, and inert fillers. E.Outlet Box Protection: Wall opening protective materials for use with U.L. listed metallic and specified nonmetallic outlet boxes, the following products by one of the following: 1.Hilti 2.3M F.Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division07 Section "Joint Sealants." G.Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section072100"Thermal Insulation." H.Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section072100"Thermal Insulation." UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGGYPSUM BOARD JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION092900-4 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS A.Comply with ASTMC840. B.Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C.Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. D.Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch(1.5 mm)of open space between panels. Do notforce into place. E.Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. F.Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. G.Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panelsin concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1.Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft.(0.7 sq.m) in area. 2.Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3.Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4-to 3/8-inch-(6.4-to 9.5-mm-)wide joints to install sealant. H.Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4-to 1/2-inch-(6.4-to 12.7-mm-)wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges withedge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. I.STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer’s written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. J.Installation Of Outlet Pads: 1.Install the outlet box pads on the backsides of all electrical boxes, TV jack boxes and telephone outlet boxes in party walls and partitions indicated to be acoustically rated UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGGYPSUM BOARD JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION092900-5 2.Brush or wipe construction dust and dirt from the box surfaces. 3.If surfaces are contaminated with oil, etc wipe with xylene or toloulene to remove oily residue. 4.Place pads centered on the back of the boxes. Carefully mold and fold around conduit cable entering into the box. 5.After gypsum drywall panels are in place, apply acoustical sealant round outlets to effect the seal of the box to the wall. K.Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4-to 1/2-inch-(6.4-to 12.7-mm-)wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. L.Install trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1.Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings. 2.Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawingsandaccording to ASTMC840,which are to be approved by Architect for visual effect. M.Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. N.Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. O.Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTMC840: 1.Level1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2.Level2:Panels that are substrate for tile. 3.Level3:Where indicated on Drawings. 4.Level4:At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. a.Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section099123"Interior Painting." 5.Level5:Where indicated on Drawings. a.Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section099123"Interior Painting." P.Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywallsurfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. Q.Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGGYPSUM BOARD JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION092900-6 SECTION093000 TILING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Stone and porcelaintile. 2.Stone Thresholds. 3.Waterproof membrane. 4.Crack isolation membrane. 5.Metal edge strips. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B.Samples: Each typeand composition of tile and for each color and finish required. C.Stone thresholds in 6-inch(150-mm)lengths. 1.03CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance Data: For dimension stone tile to include in maintenance manuals. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01TILE PRODUCTS A.ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSIA137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. B.FloorScore Compliance: Tile for floors shall comply with requirements of FloorScore Standard. C.Tile Type:As indicated on the drawings and compliant with requirements including: 1.Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as determined by testing identical products per the following tests: a.Static Coefficient of Friction (SCOF) per ASTMC1028: 1)Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6. b.Dynamic Coefficient of Friction (DCOF) per ANSI A137.1. 1)Level Surfaces: Minimum of 0.42. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGTILING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION093000-1 2)Sloped and Wet Surfaces: Minimum of 0.45. 2.02THRESHOLDS A.General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. 1.Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch(1.5 mm)above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch(12.7 mm)or less above adjacent floor surface. B.Granite Thresholds: ASTMC615, with honedfinish. C.Marble Thresholds: ASTMC503, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10per ASTMC1353 or ASTMC241 and with honed finish. 2.03WATERPROOFING AND CRACK-SUPPRESSION MEMBRANE A.General: Manufacturer's standard product,selected from the following,that complies with ANSIA118.10 and ANSI A118.12 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. B.Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer and continuous fabric reinforcement. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a.Custom Building Products; 9240Waterproofing and Anti-Fracture Membrane. b.Laticrete International, Inc.; Laticrete9235 Waterproof Membrane. c.MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic AquaDefense or MapelasticHPG with MAPEI Fiberglass Mesh. d.TEC; a subsidiary ofH. B. Fuller Company; HydraFlex -Waterproofing Crack Isolation Membrane. 2.04SETTING MATERIALS A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.Custom Building Products. 2.Laticrete International, Inc. 3.MAPEI Corporation. 4.TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. B.Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSIA118.4. 1.Prepackaged, dry-mortar mix to which only water must be addedor combined with liquid-latex additive. 2.For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGTILING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION093000-2 2.05GROUT MATERIALS A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.Custom Building Products. 2.Laticrete International, Inc. 3.MAPEI Corporation. 4.TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. B.Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSIA118.7. 1.Polymer Type: Dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredientsorliquid- latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix. 2.06MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated. B.Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape,stainless steel, ASTMA666, 300Seriesexposed-edge material. C.Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or appearance of grout. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 3.02PREPARATION A.Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortarwith trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile- setting material manufacturer. B.Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSIA108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot(1:50)toward drains. C.Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project site before installing. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGTILING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION093000-3 3.03INSTALLATION A.Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSIA108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. B.Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. C.Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. D.Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges. E.Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. F.Joint Widths:1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated. G.Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. H.Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1.Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. I.Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise indicated. J.Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated. K.Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to grout joints according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. L.Install waterproofing to comply with ANSIA108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate. M.Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSIA108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGTILING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION093000-4 3.04INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A.Interior Floor Installations 1.Tile Installation F113A&F125 Full/F122A: Thin-set mortar on waterproofing and crack isolationmembrane; TCAF113A,TCA F125 Full& TCA F122A. a.Thin-Set Mortar for Cured-Bed Method:Latex-portland cement mortar. b.Grout:Polymer-modified sanded grout. B.Interior Wall Installations, WoodStuds or Furring: 1.Tile Installation W243: Thin-set mortar on gypsum board; TCAW243. a.Locations: For use in dry areas only except as noted below. b.Thin-Set Mortar:Latex-portland cement mortar. c.Grout: Polymer-modified unsanded grout. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGTILING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION093000-5 SECTION095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. B.Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.03INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Product test reports. B.Evaluation reports. 1.04CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance data. 1.05QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to NVLAP. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTME84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1.Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTME1264 for ClassAmaterials. 2.Smoke-Developed Index:450or less. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION095113-1 2.02ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS, GENERAL A.Glass-Fiber-Based Panels: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. B.Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTME1264. C.Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTMC635. D.Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTMC635, Table1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 2.03ACOUSTICAL PANELS A.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1.Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2.CertainTeed Corp. 3.Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4.Tectum Inc. 5.USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. B.Modular Size:As indicated on Drawings. 2.04METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A.Basis-of-Design Product:Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1.Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2.CertainTeed Corp. 3.Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4.USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. B.Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty or Heavy-duty system. C.Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION095113-2 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION A.Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTMC636/C636M, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B.Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 1.Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as indicated on reflected ceiling plans. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION095113-3 SECTION096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Resilient base. 2.Resilient stair accessories. 3.Resilient molding accessories. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. B.Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inches(300 mm)long. 1.03CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance data. 1.04PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 degF(21 degC)or more than95 degF(35 degC), in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1.48 hours before installation. 2.During installation. 3.48 hours after installation. B.Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 degF(13 degC)or more than 95 degF(35 degC). PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.FloorScore Compliance: Resilient baseand stair accessoriesshall comply with requirements ofFloorScore certification. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGRESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION096513-1 2.02RESILIENTBASE A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.AB; American Biltrite. 2.Allstate Rubber Corp. 3.Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 4.Burke Mercer Flooring Products, Division of Burke Industries Inc. 5.Flexco. 6.Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company. 7.Mondo Rubber International, Inc. 8.Nora Systems, Inc. 9.Roppe Corporation, USA. 10.VPI, LLC, Floor Products Division. B.Product Standard:Provide as indicated on the drawings, if not indicated, provide per one of the following product standards: 1.ASTMF1861, TypeTS(rubber, vulcanized thermoset), GroupI (solid, homogeneous). a.Thickness:0.125 inch(3.2 mm). 2.ASTMF1861, TypeTP(rubber, thermoplastic), Group:I (solid, homogeneous). a.Thickness:0.125 inch(3.2 mm). 3.Product Standard: ASTMF1861, TypeTV (vinyl, thermoplastic), Group:I (solid, homogeneous). a.Minimum Thickness:0.080 inch(2.0 mm). C.Style and Location: 1.StyleA, Straight:Provide in areas with carpet. 2.StyleB, Cove:Provide in areas with resilient flooring. D.Height:As indicated on Drawings, if not indicated, provide 4 inch high. E.Lengths:Cut lengths 48 inches(1219 mm)long or coils in manufacturer's standard length. F.Outside Corners:Preformed. G.Inside Corners:Job formed or preformed. H.Colors:Custom color to match Architect’s sample, unless otherwise noted. 2.03RUBBERSTAIR ACCESSORIES A.Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTME648 or NFPA253 by a qualified testing agency. 1.Critical Radiant Flux Classification: ClassI, not less than 0.45W/sq. cm. B.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.AB; American Biltrite. 2.Allstate Rubber Corp. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGRESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION096513-2 3.Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 4.Burke Mercer Flooring Products, Division of Burke Industries Inc. 5.Flexco. 6.Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company. 7.Mondo Rubber International, Inc. 8.Musson Rubber Company. 9.Nora Systems, Inc. 10.PRF USA, Inc. 11.R.C.A. Rubber Company (The). 12.Roppe Corporation, USA. 13.VPI, LLC, Floor Products Division. C.Stair Treads: ASTMF2169. 1.Type:TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset)orTP (rubber, thermoplastic). 2.Class:2 (pattern; embossed, grooved, or ribbed). a.Square pattern. 3.Nosing Style:Square, adjustable to cover angles between 60 and 90 degrees. 4.Nosing Height:1-1/2 inches(38 mm). 5.Thickness:1/4 inch(6 mm)and tapered to back edge. 6.Size: Lengths and depths to fit each stair tread in one piece or, for treads exceeding maximum lengths manufactured, in equal-length units. 7.Integral Risers: Smooth, flat; in height that fully covers substrate. D.Stringers: Height and length after cutting to fit risers and treads and to cover stair stringers; produced by same manufacturer as treads and recommended by manufacturer for installation with treads. 1.Thickness:Manufacturer's standard. E.Landing Tile:Matching treads; produced by same manufacturer as treads and recommended by manufacturer for installation with treads. F.Locations:Provide rubber stair accessories in areas indicated. G.Colors and Patterns:As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.04RESILIENTMOLDING ACCESSORY A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2.Burke Mercer Flooring Products, Division of Burke Industries Inc. 3.Flexco. 4.Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company. 5.Musson Rubber Company. 6.Roppe Corporation, USA. 7.VPI, LLC, Floor Products Division. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGRESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION096513-3 B.Material:VinylorRubber. C.Description: Resilientfloor trim and transition pieces as indicated. D.Profile and Dimensions:As indicated. Comply with applicable accessibility requirements. . E.Colors and Patterns:As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors 2.05INSTALLATION MATERIALS A.Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated. B.Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. C.Stair-Tread Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient stair-tread manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. D.Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by resilient stair- tread manufacturer. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01PREPARATION A.Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B.Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Accessories: Prepare horizontal surfaces according to ASTMF710. 1.Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2.Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3.Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 10pH. 4.Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following: a.Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTMF1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb ofwater/1000 sq. ft.(1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq.m)in 24 hours. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGRESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION096513-4 C.Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D.Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. E.Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products. 3.02RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions forinstalling resilient base. B.Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C.Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D.Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E.Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F.On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. G.Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. H.Job-Formed Corners: 1.Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. a.Miter or copecorners to minimize open joints. 3.03RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. B.Resilient Stair Accessories: 1.Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. 2.Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. C.Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGRESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION096513-5 3.04CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products. B.Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient stair treads before applying liquid floor polish. 1.Applytwocoat(s). C.Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGRESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION096513-6 SECTION096516 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Vinyl sheet floor covering. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B.Shop Drawings: For each type of floor covering. Include floor covering layouts, locations of seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts. 1.Show details of special patterns. C.Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch(150- by-230-mm)sections of each different color and pattern of floor covering required. D.Product Schedule: For floor coverings.Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.03CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance Data: For each type of floor covering to include in maintenance manuals. 1.04MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A.Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.Floor Covering: Furnish quantity not less than 10 linear feet(3 linearm)for every 500 linear feet(150 linearm)or fraction thereof, in roll form and in full roll width for each color, pattern, and type of floor covering installed. 1.05QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation indicated. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGRESILIENT SHEET FLOORING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION096516-1 1.Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by floor covering manufacturer for installation techniques required. B.Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTME648 or NFPA253 by a qualified testing agency. 1.Critical Radiant Flux Classification: ClassI, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 1.06DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Store floor coverings and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than50 degF(10 degC)or more than 90 degF(32 degC). Store rolls upright. 1.07PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 degF(21 degC)or more than 85 degF(29 degC), in spaces to receive floor coverings during the following time periods: 1.48 hours before installation. 2.During installation. 3.48 hours after installation. B.Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 degF(13 degC)or more than 95 degF(35 degC). C.Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. D.Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation. E.Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.FloorScore Compliance: Resilient sheet flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore Standard. 2.02VINYL SHEET FLOOR COVERING A.BasisofDesign: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product listed on the drawings or approved equal from one of the following: 1.Armstrong World Industries, Inc.;. 2.Congoleum Corporation;. 3.Forbo Flooring, Inc.;. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGRESILIENT SHEET FLOORING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION096516-2 4.Lonseal, Inc.;. 5.Mannington Mills, Inc.;. 6.Tarkett, Inc.;. 7.TOLI International;. B.Unbacked Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering: ASTMF1913,0.080 inch(2.0 mm)thick. C.Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering with Backing: ASTMF1303. 1.Type (Binder Content):Type I, minimum binder content of 90 percent. 2.Wear-Layer Thickness: Grade1. 3.Overall Thickness:As standard with manufacturer. D.Sheet Width:As standard with manufacturer. E.Colors and Patterns:As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.03INSTALLATION MATERIALS A.Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B.Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor covering and substrate conditions indicated. C.Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B.Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor coverings. C.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02PREPARATION A.Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of floor coverings. B.Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTMF710. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGRESILIENT SHEET FLOORING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION096516-3 1.Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2.Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3.Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 4.Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturerand as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. a.Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTMF1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft.(1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq.m)in 24 hoursand as required by the manufacturer. C.Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform andsmooth substrate. D.Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1.Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. E.Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before installation. 3.03FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION A.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor coverings. B.Unroll floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting. C.Lay out floor coverings as follows: 1.Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction. 2.Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 inches(152 mm)away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates. 3.Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams. 4.Avoid cross seams. D.Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. E.Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. F.Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor coverings as marked on substrates.Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGRESILIENT SHEET FLOORING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION096516-4 G.Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 3.04CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor coverings. B.Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation: 1.Remove adhesive and other blemishes from floor covering surfaces. 2.Sweep and vacuum floor coverings thoroughly. 3.Damp-mop floor coverings to remove marks and soil. C.Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D.Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor covering before applying liquid floor polish. 1.Applytwocoat(s). E.Cover floor coverings until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGRESILIENT SHEET FLOORING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION096516-5 SECTION096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Solid vinyl plankfloor tile. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. B.Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required. 1.03CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance data. 1.04WARRANTY A.Provide manufacturer’s standard warranties. 1.Solid vinyl plankfloor tile: 5 year minimum. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient tile flooring, as determined by testing identicalproducts according to ASTME648 or NFPA253 by a qualified testing agency. 1.Critical Radiant Flux Classification: ClassI, not less than 0.45W/sq. cm. B.FloorScore Compliance: Resilient tile flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore certification. 2.02SOLID VINYL FLOOR TILE A.Products:Subject to compliance with requirements, products listed on the drawingsor approved equal. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGRESILIENT TILE FLOORING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION096519-1 B.Tile Standard: ASTMF1700. 1.Class:As indicated by product designations. C.Colors and Patterns:As indicated by manufacturer's designations, if not indicated,as selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.03INSTALLATION MATERIALS A.Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds:Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufacturer for applications indicated. B.Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated. 1.Adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content: a.Vinyl Composition Tile Adhesives: 50g/L or less. b.Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60g/L or less. C.Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by floor tile manufacturer. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01PREPARATION A.Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B.Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTMF710. 1.Verifythat substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2.Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3.Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing,but not less than 5 or more than 10pH. 4.Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to floor tile manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following: a.Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTMF1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb ofwater/1000 sq. ft.(1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq.m)in 24 hours. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGRESILIENT TILE FLOORING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION096519-2 C.Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates withtrowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D.Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. E.Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient floor tile. 3.02FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile. B.Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1.Lay tiles square with room axisunless indicated otherwise. C.Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. D.Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. E.Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings. F.Maintain reference markers, holes, and openingsthat are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. 3.03CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile. B.Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish. 1.Applytwocoat(s). C.Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGRESILIENT TILE FLOORING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION096519-3 SECTION096566 RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Rubber floor tile. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B.Samples: For each type of flooring indicated. 1.03CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance data. 1.04FIELD CONDITIONS A.Adhesively Applied Products: 1.Maintain temperatures during installation within range recommended in writing by manufacturer, but not less than 70 degF(21 degC)or more than 95 degF(35 degC), in spaces to receive flooring 48 hours before installation, during installation, and 48 hours after installation unless longer period is recommended in writing by manufacturer. 2.After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended in writing by manufacturer, but not less than 55degF(13 degC)or more than 95 degF(35 degC). 3.Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation. 4.Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after flooring installation unless manufacturer recommends longer period in writing. B.Install flooring after otherfinishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.FloorScore Compliance: Resilient athletic flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore Standard. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGRESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION096566-1 2.02RUBBER FLOOR TILE A.Basis-of-Design Product:Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1.Amarco Products. 2.Flexco. 3.Horner Flooring Company, Inc. 4.Johnsonite; a Tarkett company. 5.Robbins Sports Surfaces. 6.Roppe Corporation. 7.Sport Court; Subsidiary of Connor Sport Court International. 8.Surface America Incorporated. 9.Tuflex Rubber Flooring; a division of Tuflex Rubber Products, Inc. B.Description: Athletic flooring consisting of modular rubber tiles with smooth edges for adhered application. C.Material:Rubber,Recycled-rubber compound, or Rubber wear layer and rubber shock- absorbent layer, vulcanized together. D.Traffic-Surface Texture:As selected by the Architect. E.Size:Manufacturer's standard-size square tile. F.Thickness:1/2inch. G.Color and Pattern:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.03ACCESSORIES A.Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compound: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation approved by flooring manufacturer. B.Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended in writing by manufacturer for substrate and conditions indicated. 1.Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50g/L or less when calculated according to 40CFR59, SubpartD (EPA Method24). PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01PREPARATION A.Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion offlooring. B.Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTMF710. 1.Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGRESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION096566-2 2.Alkalinity Testing: Perform pH testing according to ASTMF710. Proceed with installation only if pH readings are not less than 7.0 and not greater than 8.5. 3.Moisture Testing, one of the following, acceptable to the flooring manufacturer. a.Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTMF1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft.(1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq.m)in 24 hours. 1)Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft.(18.6 sq.m), and perform no fewer thantwo tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas. b.Perform relative humidity test using in-situ probes, ASTMF2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75percent relative humidity level measurement. C.Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D.Use trowelable levelingand patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. E.Move flooring and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation unless manufacturer recommends a longer period in writing. 1.Do not install flooring until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. F.Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by flooring immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. G.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02FLOORING INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. B.Scribe, cut, and fit flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, equipment anchors, floor outlets, and other interruptions of floor surface. C.Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings unless otherwise indicated. D.Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating subfloor markings on flooring. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGRESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION096566-3 3.03FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A.Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. B.Adhered Flooring: Adhere products to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to comply with adhesive and flooring manufacturers' written instructions. 3.04CLEANING AND PROTECTING A.Perform the following operations immediately after completing flooring installation: 1.Remove adhesive and other blemishes from flooring surfaces. 2.Sweep and vacuum flooring thoroughly. 3.Damp-mop flooring to remove marks and soil after time period recommended in writing by manufacturer. B.Protect flooring from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGRESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION096566-4 SECTION096816 SHEET CARPETING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section includes carpetand carpet cushion. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. B.Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1.Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets,and locations where cutouts are required in carpet. 2.Carpet type, color, and dye lot. 3.Seam locations, types, and methods. 4.Pile direction. C.Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.03INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Product test reports. 1.04CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance data. 1.05QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: An experienced Installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the CommercialIIcertification level. B.Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpetand carpet cushionidentical to those of assemblies tested for fire response per NFPA253 by a qualified testing agency. 1.06DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Comply with CRI104. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSHEET CARPETING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION096816-1 1.07FIELD CONDITIONS A.Comply with CRI104for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. 1.08WARRANTY A.Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Warranty doesnot include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure ofsubstrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2.Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength,excess static discharge,and delamination. 3.Warranty Period:10years from date of Substantial Completion. B.Special Warranty for Carpet Cushion: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet cushion installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Warranty includes consequent removal and replacement of carpet and accessories. 2.Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet cushion due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 3.Failure includes, but is not limited to, permanent indentation or compression. 4.Warranty Period:10years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01TUFTED CARPET A.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings. B.Pattern:Match Architect's samples. 2.02WOVEN CARPET A.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings. B.Pattern:Match Architect's samples. 2.03CARPET CUSHION A.Products:Provide products incompliance with requirementsindicatedbelow: B.Traffic Classification: 1.Residential Units: CCC Class 1, light to moderate traffic, 0.375 inch thick, 6 lb/cu.ft. min. density. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSHEET CARPETING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION096816-2 2.Community Center: CCC Class III, Extra-Heavy Traffic: 0.25 inch thick, 10 lb/cu.ft. min. density. a.Compression Load Deflection (CFD): 10 psi min. at 65 percent deflection per ASTM D 3574 C.Bonded Polyurethane Foam D.Performance Characteristics: As follows: 1.Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.22W/sq. cm. 2.Emissions:Provide carpet cushion that complies with testing and product requirements ofCRI's "Green Label" program. 2.04INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A.Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended bycarpetand carpetcushionmanufacturer. B.Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is recommended or provided bycarpet and carpet cushion manufacturers. 1.Use adhesives with VOC content not more than 50g/L when calculated according to 40CFR59, SubpartD (EPA Method24). C.Tackless Carpet Stripping: Water-resistant plywood, in strips as required to match cushion thickness and that comply with CRI104, Section12.2. D.Seam Adhesive: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION A.Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B.Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTMF710. C.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D.Preparation: Comply with CRI104, Section7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSHEET CARPETING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION096816-3 E.Installation: Comply with CRI104 and carpet and carpet cushion manufacturers'written installation instructions forthe following: 1.Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI104, Section9, "Direct Glue-Down Installation." 2.Double-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI104, Section10, "Double-Glue-Down Installation." 3.Carpet with Attached-Cushion Installation: Comply with CRI104, Section11, "Attached- Cushion Installations." 4.Preapplied Adhesive Installation: Comply with CRI104, Section11.4, "Pre-Applied Adhesive Systems (Peel and Stick)." 5.Hook-and-Loop Installation: Comply with CRI104, Section11.5, "Hook and Loop Technology." 6.Stretch-in Installation: Comply with CRI104, Section12, "Stretch-in Installations." F.Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. G.Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet. H.Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. I.Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. J.Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. K.Install pattern parallel to walls and borders to comply with CRI104, Section15, "Patterned Carpet Installations" and with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations. L.Comply with carpet cushion manufacturer's written recommendations.Install carpet cushion seams at 90-degree angle with carpet seams. M.Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1.Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2.Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3.Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element. N.Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI104, Section16, "Protecting Indoor Installations." END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSHEET CARPETING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION096816-4 SECTION099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates. 1.Galvanized metal. 2.Exteriorfibercement siding. 1.02DEFINITIONS A.Gloss Level1(flat): Not more than 5 units at60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTMD523. B.Gloss Level3(eggshell): 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTMD523. C.Gloss Level4(satin): 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTMD523. D.Gloss Level5(semigloss): 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTMD523. E.Gloss Level6(gloss): 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTMD523. F.Gloss Level7(high gloss): More than 85 units at60 degrees, according to ASTMD523. 1.03ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B.Samples: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat. C.Product List: Foreach product indicated. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. 1.04MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A.Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.Paint:5percent, but not less than 1 gal.(3.8L)of each material and color applied. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGEXTERIOR PAINTING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION099113-1 1.05QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicatedand each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1.Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part3. a.Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.(9 sq.m). b.Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2.Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a.If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01MANUFACTURERS A.Basis of Design Product: The design for each paint product is based upon the product named. Subject to complliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the manufacturers listed below: 1.Benjamin Moore & Co. 2.Glidden Professional. 3.PPG Architectual Finishes, Inc. 4.Sherwin-WilliamsCo. 2.02PAINT, GENERAL A.MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B.Material Compatibility: 1.Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2.For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C.VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. D.Colors:Provide color as indicated on the drawings. If color is not listed, color will be as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full rangewith20percent of surface area being painted with deep tones. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGEXTERIOR PAINTING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION099113-2 2.03PRIMERS/SEALERS A.Primer, Alkali Resistant, Water Based:MPI#3. 1.Benjamin Moore; Super spec masonry 100% Acrylic High Build Primer 068/N068 (E1) 2.Glidden Professional;\Concrete Coating Bond-Prep Pigmented Bonding Primer 3030 (E2) 3.PPG Architectural Finishes; Perma-Crete Int/Ext Alkali Resistant Latex Primer 4-603 (E2) 4.Sherwin-Williams; Loxon Concrete & masonry Primer A24W8300 (E2) 5.Primer as recommended by sidingmanufacturer. 2.04METAL PRIMERS A.Primer, Galvanized: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. 2.05WATER-BASED PAINTS A.Latex, Exterior Low Sheen (Gloss Level 3-4). MPI #15. 1.Benjamin Moore; SuperSpec Exterior 100% Acrylic Satin184/K184 (E1). 2.Glidden Professional; Fortis 450 Exterior Premium 100% Acrylic Satin 6403 (E3). 3.PPG Architectural Finishes; Sun-Proof Exterior Satin 76-45/76-110 (E1) 4.Sherwin-Williams; Weatherclad 100% Acrylic Ext. Satin Latex B12 (E3) B.Latex, Exterior Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level5):MPI#11. 1.Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec Exterior Gloss Finish N449.(E3) 2.Glidden Professional;Fortis 450 Exterior Premium 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss 6407 (E3). 3.PPG Architectural Finishes;Speedhide Exterior 100% Acrylic Semi Gloss 6-900XI (E3) 4.Sherwin-Williams;A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss A08W00151 (E3) C.Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level5):MPI#163. 1.Benjamin Moore; Super Spec High Performance DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss P29/KP29. (E2) 2.Glidden Professional;Devoe Coatings Devflex 4206 QD Waterborne Semi-Gloss (E3) 3.PPG Architectural Finishes;Pitt-Tech Plus Int./Ext. DTM Semi Gloss 90-1210 (E3) 4.Sherwin-Williams;Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic Semi-Gloss B66W00651 (E3) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGEXTERIOR PAINTING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION099113-3 B.Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1.Concrete: 12 percent. 2.Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3.Wood: 15 percent. C.Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D.Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1.Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.02PREPARATION A.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B.Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1.Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. 3.03APPLICATION A.Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual." B.Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. 3.04CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work ofother trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. B.At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.05EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A.Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1.Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System: UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGEXTERIOR PAINTING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION099113-4 a.Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized metal,as recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use on galvanized-metal substrates with topcoat indicated. b.Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching topcoat. c.Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss Level5),MPI#163. B.Fibercement siding: 1.Latex over Primer System: a.Prime Coat:Acylic Primer. b.Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c.Topcoat: Latex,exterior, low sheen (Gloss Level3-4),MPI#15. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGEXTERIOR PAINTING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION099113-5 SECTION099123 INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates. 1.02DEFINITIONS A.Gloss Level1(flat): Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTMD523. B.Gloss Level2(velvetine): Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTMD523. C.Gloss Level3(eggshell): 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTMD523. D.Gloss Level4(satin): 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTMD523. E.Gloss Level5(semigloss): 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTMD523. F.Gloss Level6(gloss): 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees,according to ASTMD523. G.Gloss Level7(high gloss): More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTMD523. 1.03ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B.Samples: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. C.Product List: For each product indicated. 1.04MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A.Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.Paint:3percent, but not less than 1 gal.(3.8L)of each material and color applied. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGINTERIOR PAINTING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION099123-1 1.05QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1.Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part3. a.Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.(9 sq.m). b.Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2.Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a.If preliminary color selections arenot approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01MANUFACTURERS A.Basis of Design Product: The design for each paint product is based upon the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product byone of the manufacturers listed below: 1.Benjamin Moore & Co. 2.Coronado Paint Company 3.Glidden Professional. 4.PPG Architectual Finishes, Inc. 5.Pratt and Lambert Paints 6.Sherwin-Williams Co. 2.02PAINT, GENERAL A.MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List"or as listed. B.Material Compatibility: 1.Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2.For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C.Colors: As indicated on the drawings.If color is not listed, architect will select from the full range of manufactured colors with 20percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGINTERIOR PAINTING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION099123-2 2.03PRIMERS/SEALERS A.Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior:MPI#50. 1.Benjamin Moore; Regal Select 546/K546(E3). 2.Glidden Professional; PVA Wall Interior Primer Sealer 1030-1200 (E2). 3.PPG; Speedhide Interior Latex Sealer Quick-drying 6-2 (E3). 4.Sherwin-Williams;ProMar 200 ZeroVOC Interior Latex Primer, B28W2600(E3). B.Primer, Latex, for Interior Wood:MPI#39. 1.Benjamin Moore; Fresh Start 023/N023(E3). 2.Glidden Professional; Gripper Stain Killer Primer 3210 (E2). 3.PPG; Seal Grip Int/Ext Stain Blocking Primer 17-921 (E2). 4.Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite ProBlock Int/Ext Latex Primer Sealer B51W20 (E2). 2.04METAL PRIMERS A.Primer, Rust-Inhibitive, Water Based:MPI#107. 1.Benjamin Moore; Super Spec High Performance; P04/KP04(E3). 2.Glidden Professional; Devflex 4020 DTM Primer & Flat Finish (E3). 3.PPG; Pitt-Tec Plush Int/Ext DTM Industrial Primer 90-912Series (E3). 4.Sherwin-Williams; Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer B66W310 (E3). B.Primer, Galvanized, Water Based:MPI#134. 1.Benjamin Moore; Super Spec High PerformanceAcrylic Metal Primer;P04/KP04(E3). 2.Glidden Professional; Devflex 4020 DTM Primer & Flat Finish (E3). 3.PPG; Pitt-Tec Plush Int/Ext DTM Industrial Primer 90-912Series (E3). 4.Sherwin-Williams; Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer B66W310 (E3). 2.05WATER-BASED PAINTS A.Latex, Interior, Flat, (Gloss Level1):MPI#53. 1.Benjamin Moore; Regal Select, 547/K547(E3). 2.Glidden Professional; Ultra-Hide 250 Interior Acrylic Flat 1200 (E3). 3.PPG; Speedhide Interior Latex Flat 6-70 (E3). 4.Sherwin-Williams; ProMar200Zero VOC Interior Latex Flat B30W2651 (E3) B.Latex, Interior, Eggshell(Gloss Level2):MPI#44. 1.Benjamin Moore; Regal Select, 549/K549(E3). 2.Glidden Professional; Ultra-Hide 150 Int. Latex 1412 (E3). 3.PPG; Speedhide Interior Enamel Eggshell Latex 6-411 Series (E3) 4.Sherwin-Williams;ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex EgShel B20W2651(E3) C.Latex, Interior, Semi-Gloss, (Gloss Level5):MPI#54. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGINTERIOR PAINTING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION099123-3 1.Benjamin Moore; Regal Select 551/K551(E3) 2.Glidden Professional; Ultra-Hide 150 Int. Latex 1416 (E3). 3.PPG; Speedhide Interior Enamel Latex Semi-Gloss 6-500 Series (E3) 4.Sherwin-Williams;ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi-Gloss B31W2651(E3) D.Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level5):MPI#147. 1.Benjamin Moore; Natura: 514/K514(E3) 2.Glidden Professional; Ultra-Hide NoVOC Semi-Gloss Paint 1415 (E3). 3.PPG; Pure Performance Int. Semi-Gloss Latex 9-500 Series (E3) 4.Sherwin-Williams; Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic Semi-Gloss B66W00651 (E3) E.Water Based Alkyd, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #169 and as listed below. 1.Benjamin Moore; 2.Glidden Professional; Lifemaster Oil 1506 (E3) 3.PPG; Speedhide; 6-1410 (VOC <50 g/L) 4.Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 WB Alkyd-Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B34W8251 2.06DRY FOG/FALL COATINGS A.Dry Fall, Latex, Flat:MPI#118. 1.Benjamin Moore; Super Spec Sweep Up Latex Flat 153/K153 (E3) 2.Glidden Professional; Devoe Paint Multi-Plex WB Acrylic Dry Fog Primer and Finish, DP318XX (E3) 3.PPG; Speedhide; Int. Dry-Fog Spray Paint 6-715XI (E3) 4.Sherwin-Williams; Dryfall Low VOC Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall B42W81 (E3) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B.Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1.Concrete: 12 percent. 2.Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3.Wood: 15 percent. 4.Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 5.Plaster: 12 percent. C.Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGINTERIOR PAINTING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION099123-4 D.Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1.Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.02PREPARATION A.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B.Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1.After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C.Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1.Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. 3.03APPLICATION A.Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." B.Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, orother surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. 3.04CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work ofother trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. B.At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.05INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A.Steel Substrates: 1.Doors, door frames, guardrails, handrails and decorative trim:Water Based Alkyd System: a.Prime Coat: Primer, rust-inhibitive, water basedMPI#107. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGINTERIOR PAINTING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION099123-5 b.Intermediate Coat: Water Based Alkyd, matching topcoat. c.Topcoat:Water Based Alkyd, semi-gloss (Gloss Level5),MPI#169 or as listed. B.Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1.Doors, door frames, guardrails, handrails and decorative trim:Water Based Alkyd System: a.Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based,MPI#134. b.Intermediate Coat: Water Based Alkyd, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat:Water Based Alkyd,semi-gloss (Gloss Level5),MPI#169 or as listed. C.Wood Substrates: Including wood trim,architectural woodwork,doors, andwindows. 1.Latex System: a.Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood,MPI#39. b.Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c.Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level5),MPI#54. D.Gypsum BoardandPlasterSubstrates: 1.Latex System: a.Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior,MPI#50. b.Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c.Topcoatfor ceilings: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level1),MPI#53. d.Topcoatfor walls: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level2),MPI#44. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGINTERIOR PAINTING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION099123-6 SECTION101400 SIGNAGE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.This Section includes the following: 1.Interior Panel Signs B.Related Sections include the following: 1.Division 10 Section “Fire Extinguisher Cabinets” for requirements for directional acrylic signage to fire extinguisher locationsas specified in this section. 2.Division22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for labels, tags, and nameplates for plumbing systems and equipment. 3.Division23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for labels, tags, and nameplates for HVAC systems and equipment. 4.Division26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" for labels, tags, and nameplates for electrical equipment. 1.02ACTIONSUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B.Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs. 1.Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories. 2.Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements,including tactile characters and Braille,and layout for each sign. C.Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections ofunits showing the full range of colors available for the following: 1.Acrylic sheet. D.Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for the full range of color, texture, and sign material indicated, of sizes indicated: 1.Acrylic Sheet:8 by 10 inches(200 by 250 mm)for each color required. 2.Accessories: Manufacturer's full-size unit. E.Sign Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.03INFORMATIONS SUBMITTALS A.Qualification Data: For Installerandfabricator. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSIGNAGE JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION101400-1 1.04CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals. 1.05QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications:An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. B.Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. C.SourceLimitations for Signs: Obtain each sign type indicated from one source from a single manufacturer. D.Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, Illinois Accessibility Code,andICC/ANSIA117.1. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01MATERIALS A.Acrylic Sheet: ASTMD4802, CategoryA-1 (cell-cast sheet), TypeUVA (UV absorbing). 2.02PANEL SIGNS A.Interior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch(1.5 mm)measured diagonally from corner to corner, complying with the following requirements: 1.Acrylic Sheet:minimum of 0.080 inch(2.03 mm)thick. 2.Sign Design: Provide graphic services to incorporate the Owner’scustom design and graphics on the generic signs shown in the documents. Assume three colors on the signs. 3.Edge Condition: Square. 4.Corner Condition:As shown in drawings, where not shown, corners to be eased to a minimum of 1/16 inch radius. 5.Mounting:As shown by one of the methods below: a.Wallmounted with two-face tape. b.Manufacturer's standard anchors for substrates encountered. 6.Custom Paint Colors: Match Pantonecolor matching system. 7.Color:Match Architect’s custom color sample. 8.Tactile Characters: Characters and Grade2Braille raised 1/32 inch(0.8 mm)above surface with contrasting colors. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSIGNAGE JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION101400-2 B.Tactile and Braille Sign: Manufacturer's standard process for producing text and symbols complying with ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC/ANSIA117.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade2 Braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square-cut edges free from burrs and cut marks; Braille dots with domed or rounded shape. 1.Panel Material: Manufacturer’s standard 2.Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch(0.8 mm). 2.03ACCESSORIES A.Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. B.Adhesives: Provide adhesives and tapes as recommended by manufacturer for substrates indicated. 2.04FABRICATION A.General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated. 1.Mill joints to tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration. 2.Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be inconspicuous. 2.05FINISHES, GENERAL A.Protect mechanical finishes on exposedsurfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B.Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-halfof the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.06ACRYLIC SHEET FINISHES A.ColoredCoatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy backgroundand framecolors, provide colored coatings, including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and that are UV and water resistant for fiveyears for application intended. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSIGNAGE JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION101400-3 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B.Verify that items,including anchor inserts,are sized and located to accommodate signs. C.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02INSTALLATION A.Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions. 1.Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2.Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of doorwhere applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches(75 mm)of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door. B.Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply. 1.Two-Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces. 2.Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered surfaces. 3.03CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSIGNAGE JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION101400-4 SECTION102113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosuresandurinal screens. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B.Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design,andICC/ANSIA117.1for toilet compartments designatedas accessible. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01MATERIALS A.Steel Sheet: Commercial steel sheet for exposed applications; mill phosphatized and selected for smoothness. 1.Electrolytically Zinc Coated: ASTMA879/A879M,01Z(03G). B.Zamac: ASTMB86, commercial zinc-alloy die castings. 2.02STEEL UNITS . A.Toilet-Enclosure Style:Overhead braced B.Urinal-Screen Style:Wall hung, flat panel. C.Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Seamless, metal facing sheets pressure laminated to core material; with continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped-and-formed edge closures; corners secured by welding or clips and exposed welds ground smooth. Exposed surfaces UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGTOILET COMPARTMENTS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION102113-1 shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections. 1.Core Material: Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening honeycomb of resin- impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch(25 mm)for doors and panels and 1-1/4 inches(32 mm)for pilasters. 2.Grab-Bar Reinforcement: Provide concealed internal reinforcement for grab bars mounted on units. 3.Tapping Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement for tapping (threading) at locations where machine screws are used for attaching items to units. D.Facing Sheets and Closures:Metalwith nominal base-metal (uncoated) thicknesses standard with manufacturer. E.PilasterShoesandSleeves (Caps): Stainless-steel sheet, not less than 3 inches(76 mm) high, finished to match hardware. F.Finish 1.Steel-Sheet Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-on finish, with one colorin each room. a.Color:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.03ACCESSORIES A.Hardware, Brackets, Fittingsand Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories. 1.Material:Chrome-plated zamac. 2.Hinges: Manufacturer's standard paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees. 3.Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. 4.Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. 5.Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors. 6.Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. B.Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft- resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGTOILET COMPARTMENTS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION102113-2 2.04FABRICATION A.Toilet PartitionUnits: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment. Provide shoes and sleeves (caps) at pilasters to conceal anchorage. B.Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch-(610-mm-)wide, in- swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch-(914-mm-)wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch-(813-mm-)wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION A.General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. B.Clearances: Maximum 1/2 inch(13 mm)between pilasters and panels; 1 inch(25 mm) between panels and walls. C.Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than two brackets attachednear top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets atwalls. 3.02ADJUSTING A.Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGTOILET COMPARTMENTS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION102113-3 SECTION102238 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Manually operated, acoustical panel partitions. 1.02PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A.Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.03ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For eachtype of product. B.Shop Drawings: For operable panel partitions. 1.Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2.Indicate stacking and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation requirements for hardware and track, blocking, and direction of travel. 3.Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C.Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.04INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved. B.Setting Drawings: For embedded items and cutouts required in other work,including support- beam, mounting-hole template. 1.05CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Operation and maintenance data. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGOPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION102238-1 1.06QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.07WARRANTY A.Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of operable panel partitionsthat fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Warranty Periodfor overall partition system:Twoyears from date of Substantial Completion. 2.Warranty Period for suspension system: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Acoustical Performance: Provide operable panel partitions tested by a qualified testing agency for the following acoustical properties according to test methods indicated: 1.Sound-Transmission Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly tested for laboratory sound-transmission loss performance according to ASTME90, determined by ASTME413, and rated for not less than the STC indicated. B.Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide panels with finishes complying with oneof the following as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1.Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTME84 or UL723; testing by a qualified testing agency. a.Flame-Spread Index:25or less. b.Smoke-Developed Index:450or less. 2.Fire Growth Contribution: Complying with acceptance criteria of local code and authorities having jurisdiction when tested according to NFPA265 MethodB Protocolor NFPA286. 2.02OPERABLE ACOUSTICAL PANELS A.Operable Acoustical Panels: Partition system, including panels, seals, finish facing, suspension system, operators, and accessories. 1.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Modernfold, Inc; A DORMA Group company; Acousti-Seal 931or comparable product by one of the following: UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGOPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION102238-2 a.FolDoor; Holcomb & Hoke Mfg. Co., Inc. b.Hufcor, Inc. c.KWIK-WALL Company. d.Modernfold, Inc.; a DORMA Group company. B.Panel Operation:Manually operated, individualor manually operated, pairedpanels. C.Panel Construction: As required to support panel from suspension components and with reinforcement for hardware attachment. Fabricate panels with tight hairline joints and concealed fasteners. Fabricate panels so finished in-placepartition is rigid; level; plumb; aligned, with tight joints and uniform appearance; and free of bow, warp, twist, deformation, and surface and finish irregularities. D.Dimensions: Fabricate operable acoustical panel partitions to form an assembled system of dimensions indicated and verified by field measurements. E.STC at Bar/TV Area: Not less than 50. F.STCat Entry: Not less than 28. G.Panel Materials: 1.Steel Frame: Steel sheet, manufacturer's standard thickness. 2.Steel Face/Liner Sheets: Tension-leveled steel sheet, manufacturer's standard thickness. 3.Gypsum Board: ASTMC1396/C1396M. H.Panel Closure: Manufacturer's standard. I.Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to operate operable panel partition and accessories; with decorative, protective finish. 2.03SEALS A.General: Provide seals that produce operable panel partitions complying with performance requirements and the following: 1.Seals made from materials and in profiles that minimize sound leakage. 2.Seals fitting tight at contact surfaces and sealing continuously between adjacent panels and between operable panel partition perimeter and adjacent surfaces, when operable panel partition is extended and closed. B.Horizontal Bottom Seals: Manufacturer's standard continuous-contact seal exerting uniform constantpressure on floor. C.Horizontal Bottom Seals: PVC-faced, mechanical, retractable, constant-force-contact seal exerting uniform constant pressure on floor when extended, ensuring horizontal and vertical sealing and resisting panel movement. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGOPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION102238-3 1.Mechanically Operated for Acoustical Panelsat Bar/TV Area: Extension and retraction ofbottom seal by operating handle or built-in operating mechanism, with operating range not less than 2 inches(50 mm)between retracted seal and floor finish. 2.Automatically Operated for Acoustical Panelsat Entry: Extension and retraction of bottom seal automatically operated by movement of partition, with operating range not less than 2 inches(50 mm)between retracted seal and floor finish. 2.04PANEL FINISH FACINGS A.General: Provide finish facings for panels that comply with indicated fire-test-response characteristics and that are factory applied to operable panel partitions with appropriate backing, using mildew-resistant nonstaining adhesive as recommended by facing manufacturer's written instructions. 1.Color/Pattern:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B.Vinyl-Coated Fabric Wall Covering: Manufacturer's standard, mildew-resistant, washable, vinyl-coated fabric wall covering; complying with CFFA-W-101-D for type indicated; ClassA. C.Paint: Manufacturer's standard factory-painted finish. D.Trimless Edges: Fabricate exposed panel edges so finish facing wraps uninterrupted around panel, covering edge and resulting in an installed partition with facing visible on vertical panel edges, without trim, for minimal sightlines at panel-to-panel joints. 2.05SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A.Tracks: Steel or aluminum mounted to overhead structural support,designed for operation, size, and weight of operable panel partition indicated. Size track tosupport partition operation and storage without damage to suspension system, operable panel partitions, or adjacent construction. Limit track deflection to no more than 0.10 inch(2.54 mm)between bracket supports. Provide a continuous system of track sections and accessories to accommodate configuration and layout indicated for partition operation and storage. B.Carriers: Trolley system as required for configuration type, size, and weight of partition and for easy operation; with ball-bearing wheels. C.Track Intersections, Switches, and Accessories: As required for operation, storage, track configuration, and layout indicated for operable panel partitions, and compatible with partition assembly specified. Fabricate track intersections and switches from steel or aluminum. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION A.General: Comply with ASTME557 except as otherwise required by operable panel partition manufacturer's written installation instructions. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGOPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION102238-4 B.Install operable panel partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed in area of partition installation. C.Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels are not acceptable. D.Broken, cracked, deformed, or unmatched gasketing or gasketing with gaps at butted ends is not acceptable. E.Light-Leakage Test: Illuminate one side of partition installation and observe vertical joints and top and bottom seals for voids. Adjust partitions for alignment and full closure of vertical joints and full closure along top and bottom seals. 3.02ADJUSTING A.Adjustoperable panel partitionsto operate smoothly and easily, without binding or warping. B.Verify that safety devices are properly functioning. 3.03DEMONSTRATION A.Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain operable panel partitions. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGOPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION102238-5 SECTION102600 WALL PROTECTION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Corner guards. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B.Shop Drawings: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit. Include sections, details, and attachments to other work. C.Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches(300 mm)long. 1.03CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance data. B.Warranty. 1.04WARRANTY A.Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees torepair or replace components of impact-resistant wall protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Structural failures. b.Deterioration of plastic and othermaterials beyond normal use. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01MATERIALS A.Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTMA240/A240M. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENTHOUSINGWALL PROTECTION JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION102600-1 B.Fasteners:Nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts, and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fasteners where exposed to view. 2.02CORNER GUARDS A.Surface-Mounted, Metal Corner Guards: Fabricated from one-piece, formed or extruded metal with formed edges; with 90-or 135-degree turn to match wall condition. 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: a.Arden Architectural Specialties, Inc. b.Balco, Inc. c.Construction Specialties, Inc. d.IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems; Division of InPro Corporation. e.Pawling Corporation. f.WallGuard.com. 2.Material: Stainless steel, Type304. a.Thickness: Minimum 0.0500inch(1.3 mm). b.Finish:Directional satin, No.4. 3.Wing Size: Nominal 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches(38 by 38 mm). 4.Corner Radius:1/8 inch(3 mm). 5.Mounting:Double-faced, adhesive foam tape. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION A.Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard, ammonia-based, household cleaning agent. B.Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENTHOUSINGWALL PROTECTION JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION102600-2 SECTION102800 TOILETACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Public-use washroom accessories. 2.Underlavatory guards. 3.Custodial accessories. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B.Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1.03INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.04CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance data. 1.05QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the2010 ADA Standards for Accessible DesignandICC/ANSIA117.1for toilet compartments designated as accessible. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide productsfromone of the following: 1.A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2.American Specialties, Inc. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGTOILETACCESSORIES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION102800-1 3.Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4.Bradley Corporation. B.Washroom Accessories: Provide accessories as noted on the drawings. 2.02UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS A.Underlavatory Guard: 1.Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevent direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing coverings. 2.Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white. 2.03CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2.American Specialties, Inc. 3.Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4.Bradley Corporation. B.Utility Shelf: 1.Description:With exposed edges turned down not less than 1/2 inch(13 mm)and supported by two triangular brackets welded to shelf underside. 2.Size:16 inches(406 mm)long by 6 inches(152 mm)deep. 3.Material and Finish: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch-(1.3-mm-)thick stainless steel, No.4 finish (satin). C.Mop and Broom Holder: 1.Description:Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath shelf. 2.Length:36 inches(914 mm). 3.Hooks:Three. 4.Mop/Broom Holders:Four, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type. 5.Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No.4 finish (satin). a.Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch-(1.3-mm-)thick stainless steel. b.Rod: Approximately 1/4-inch-(6-mm-)diameter stainless steel. D.Paper Towel (Folded) Dispenserand waste receptacle: 1.Mounting:Surface mounted. 2.Minimum Capacity:600 C-fold or 800 multifold towels. 3.Material and Finish:Stainless steel, No.4 finish (satin). 4.Lockset: Tumbler type. E.Liquid-Soap Dispenser: 1.Description: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid or lotionform. 2.Mounting:Surface mounted. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGTOILETACCESSORIES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION102800-2 3.Lockset: Tumbler type. 4.Refill Indicator: Window type. 2.04FABRICATION A.Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of sixkeys to Owner's representative. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION A.Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B.Grab Bars: Install to withstand a force of 250 lbf applied in a vertical direction and horizontal direction, but not concurrently,when tested according to ASTMF446. Coordinate reinforcing at mounting locations. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGTOILETACCESSORIES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION102800-3 SECTION102813 RESIDENTIALTOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Residential-usebathroom accessories. B.Related Sections: 1.Division 10 Section “ToiletAccessories” for public washroom accessories. 1.02ACTIONSUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1.Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 2.Material and finish descriptions. B.Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1.Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2.Identify products using designations indicated. 1.03INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 1.04QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part2 articles, obtain products from single source from single manufacturerunless noted otherwise. B.Regulatory Requirements: Whereresidential unitsare indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply withICC/ANSIA117.1. 1.05COORDINATION A.Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGRESIDENTIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION102813-1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01MATERIALS A.Steel Sheet: ASTMA1008/A1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036- inch(0.9-mm)minimum nominal thickness. B.Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTMA653/A653M, withG60(Z180)hot-dip zinc coating. C.Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTMA153/A153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. D.Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper- and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. E.Chrome Plating: ASTMB456, Service Condition Number SC2 (moderate service). 2.02TOILETACCESSORIES A.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance withrequirements, provide products as indicated on the drawings or comparable product. 2.03FABRICATION A.General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION A.Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B.Shower Seats: Install to withstand a force of 250 lbfapplied in a vertical direction and horizontal direction, but not concurrently,when tested according to ASTMF446. Coordinate reinforcing at mounting locations. C.Grab Bars: Install to withstand a force of 250 lbf applied in a vertical direction and horizontal direction, but not concurrently,when tested according to ASTMF446. Coordinate reinforcing at mounting locations. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGRESIDENTIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION102813-2 3.02ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. B.Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C.Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGRESIDENTIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION102813-3 SECTION1041 13 EMERGENCY KEY CABINET PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Emergency key cabinet for fire department access to the building. 1.02RELATED SECITONS A.Section04–“Unit Masonry” for incorporation into brick veneer. 1.03ACTIONSUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of product. B.Shop Drawing: showing detail of connection to exterior wall construction. 1.04INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTAL A.Maintenance Manual: Provide maintenance manual. 1.05COORDINATION A.Coordinateinstallation location with fire department and owner. B.Coordinate recessed installation details with exterior enclosure contractors to maintain intact enclosure system. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01MANUFACTURERS A.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provideKnox Company; Knox-Vault 4100 Seriesor comparable product by other manufacturers. Model type and keying to beapproved by the City and the Owner. 1.Size:8-1/2inchhighby8-1/2inch wide by 4-1/2inch deep with a recessed mounting flange. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGEMERGENCY KEY CABINET JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMITAND CONSTRUCTION104116-1 2.02FABRICATION A.Compliant with UL 1037 Standard for Antitheft Alarms and Devices. B.Provide lock box constructed with 1/4 inch steel platehousing and 1/2 inch steel doorand powder coated finish. Stainless steel hinge for the door. 1.Lock:changeable cylinder to match the City Fire Department requirements. C.Provide gaskets at cabinet door opening. D.Include supports, anchorage, and accessories required for complete assembly. 2.03FINISHES A.Provide manufacturer’s standard finishes that are weather resistant powder coated finish. 1.Color: To be selected from standard finishes which include Black, Dark Bronze or Aluminum. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01PREPARATION A.Provide recessed mounting kit to beembedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. 3.02INSTALLATION A.Install key cabinet in recessed mounting kit and securely attach per manufacturers instructions. B.Seal joint between lock box and adjacent construction with silicone sealant. 3.03ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A.Coordinate installation of lock cylinder and review by Fire Department. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGEMERGENCY KEY CABINET JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMITAND CONSTRUCTION104116-2 SECTION104413 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section includes fire protection cabinets for fire extinguishers. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B.Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans,elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.03CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance data. 1.04QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTME814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed. B.Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. C.Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01MATERIALS A.Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTMA1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), TypeB. 2.02FIRE PROTECTION CABINET A.Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a.J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGFIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION104413-1 b.Larsen's Manufacturing Company. c.Potter Roemer LLC. B.Cabinet Construction:Nonrated,1-hour fire rated, and 2-hour fire rated, as required by the wall partition fire rating. 1.Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0428-inch-(1.1-mm-)thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch-(16- mm-)thick, fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. C.Cabinet Material:Steelsheet. D.Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated. 1.Trimless with Hidden Flange: Flange of same metal and finish as box overlaps surrounding wall finish and is concealed from view by an overlapping door. E.Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style oftrim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to accommodate semirecessed cabinet installation. 1.Rolled-Edge Trim:2-1/2-inch(64-mm)backbend depth. F.Cabinet Trim Material:Same material and finish as door. . G.Door Material:Steel sheet . H.Door Style:Vertical duo panel with frame . I.Door Glazing: Manufacturer’s standard material J.Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. K.Accessories: 1.Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. 2.Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect. a.Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER." L.Finishes: 1.Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the interior of cabinet. 2.Steel:Baked enamel or powder coat. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGFIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION104413-2 a.Color and Gloss:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.03FABRICATION A.Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Miter and weld joints and grind smooth. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION A.Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and semirecessedcabinets will be installed and prepare recesses as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. B.Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicatedor, ifnot indicated,as required to comply with the authorities having jurisdiction and not greater than 48 inches to all operable hardware including handles for the fire extinguisher. C.Install fire rated fire protection cabinets in rated walls, matching the fire rating. D.Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. E.Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. F.Replace fire protection cabinets that havebeen damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGFIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION104413-3 SECTION104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishersand mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.03CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Operationand maintenance data. 1.04QUALITY ASSURANCE A.NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." B.Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C.Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. 1.05WARRANTY A.Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA10. b.Faulty operation of valves or release levers. 2.Warranty Period:Sixyears from date of Substantial Completion. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGFIRE EXTINGUISHERS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION104416-1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A.Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting bracketindicated. 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd. b.J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. c.Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc. d.Larsen's Manufacturing Company. e.Potter Roemer LLC. f.Pyro-Chem; Tyco Safety Products. 2.Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA10, AppendixB. B.Typical Locations except as noted below: 1.Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated4-A:60-B:C, 10-lbnominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer’s standard enameled container. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION A.Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1.Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. B.Install fire extinguishers in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.Mounting Brackets:48 inchesabove finished floor to top of fire extinguisher. C.Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGFIRE EXTINGUISHERS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION104416-2 SECTION105500 POSTAL SPECIALTIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.USPS-approved horizontal mail receptacles. 2.USPS-approved collection boxes. 3.Trash receptacle matching collection box size. 1.02ACTIONSUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of postal specialty. B.Shop Drawings: For postal specialties. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.Include identification sequence for compartments. 2.Include layout of identification text. 3.Include setting drawings, templates, and installation instructions for anchor bolts and other anchorages installed as part of the work of other Sections. C.Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on 6-by-6-inch (150-by-150-mm)square Samples. 1.03INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Product Certificates: For each type of postal specialty required to comply with USPS regulations, signed by product manufacturer.Include written approval by Postmaster General. 1.04CLOSE-OUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance Data: For postal specialties and finishes to include in maintenance manuals. B.Other Informational Submittals: Final USPS local postmaster approval for installed postal specialties to be served by USPS. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGPOSTAL SPECIALTIES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION105500-1 1.05QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing postal specialties and whose installations have been given final approval by local postmasters authorizing use by USPS. B.Source Limitations for Each Type of Postal Specialty: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer.Useonlyproductsincluded on current lists of USPS manufacturers and models. 1.06DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver lock keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service with a record of each corresponding lock and key number. 1.07COORDINATION A.Coordinate layout and installation of recessedpostal specialties with wall construction. B.Templates: Obtain templates for installing postal specialties and distribute to parties involved. 1.08WARRANTY A.Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of postal specialties that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Structural failures. b.Faulty operation of hardware. c.Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2.Warranty Period:Fiveyears from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01MATERIALS A.Aluminum: Manufacturer's standard alloy and temper for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows: 1.Sheet and Plate:ASTMB209(ASTMB209M). 2.Extruded Shapes:ASTMB221(ASTMB221M). B.Steel Sheet: Cold rolled, ASTMA1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), TypeB, exposed matte finish where exposed. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGPOSTAL SPECIALTIES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION105500-2 C.Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTMA666, Type304. D.Die-Cast Aluminum: ASTMB85, manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy. E.Die-Cast Zinc: ASTMB86, manufacturer's standard zinc alloy. F.Steel Anchor Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTMF1554, Grade36 or 55, hot-dip galvanized. G.Stainless-Steel Anchor Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTMA193/A193M, GradeB8M, Type316. H.Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTMD1187. 2.02USPS-APPROVED HORIZONTAL MAIL RECEPTACLES A.Front-Loading, USPS-Approved Horizontal Mail Receptacles: Consisting of multiple compartments with fixed, solid compartment backs, enclosed within recessed wall box. Provide access to compartments for distributing incoming mail from front of unit by unlocking master lock and swinging side-hinged master door to provide accessibility to entire group of compartments. Provide access to each compartment for removing mail by swinging locked compartment door. Comply withUSPS-STD-4C. 1.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Auth- Florence Manufacturing Front Loading USPS approved products or comparable product by one of the following: a.American Eagle Mailboxes. b.American Postal Manufacturing Co.; Division of Postal Products Unlimited, Inc. c.Auth-Florence Manufacturing; a Florence company. d.Bommer Industries, Inc. e.Jensen Industries. f.Salsbury Industries. g.Security Manufacturing Corporation. 2.Mail Delivery:USPS. 3.Compartments:As indicated on Drawings, of the following sizes: a.TypeI: A group of mail receptacles in single-column configuration with single master door, with 9mail compartments not less than 3 inches high by 12 inches wide by 15 inches deep(76 mm high by 305 mm wide by 381 mm deep), one outgoing mail collection compartment prepared for master-door lock, and one parcel compartment 15 inches high by 12 inches wide by 15 inches deep(381 mm high by 305 mm wide by 381 mm deep). b.TypeIII: A group of mail receptacles in double-column configuration with single master door, with 20mail compartments not less than 3 inches high by 12 inches wide by 15 inches deep(76 mm high by 305 mm wide by 381 mm deep), one outgoing mail collection compartment prepared for master-door lock, and two parcel compartment(s):15 inches high by 12 inches wide by 15 inches deep(381 mm high by 305 mm wide by 381 mm deep). c.TypeVI (No Parcel Compartment): A group of mail receptacles in single-column configuration with single master door, ninemail compartments not less than 3 UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGPOSTAL SPECIALTIES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION105500-3 inches high by 12 inches wide by 15 inches deep(76 mm high by 305 mm wide by 381 mm deep), and one outgoing mail collection compartment prepared for master-door lock. d.TypeVIII (No Parcel Compartment): A group of mail receptacles in double-column configuration with double master door, 19mail compartments not less than 3 inches high by 12 inches wide by 15 inches deep(76 mm high by 305 mm wide by 381 mm deep), and one outgoing mail collection compartment prepared for master-door lock. 4.Compartment door to be engraved with a four digit identification number, coordinate number sequence with ownership and submit on shop drawings. 5.Compartment door locks are to be provided and compliant with USPS regulations. Provide three keys for each lock. 6.Front-Loading Master Door: Fabricated from extruded aluminum and braced and framed to hold compartment doors; prepared to receive master-door lock. a.Master-Door Lock: Door prepared to receive lock provided by local postmaster. 7.Frames: Fabricated from extruded aluminum or aluminum sheet; ganged and nested units, with cardholder and blank cards for tenant's identification within each compartment. 8.Snap-on Trim: Fabricated from same material and finish as compartment doors. 9.Concealed Components and Mounting Frames: Aluminum or steel sheet with manufacturer's standard finish. 10.Exposed Aluminum Finish: Finish surfaces exposed to view as follows: a.Anodic Finish:Clear. 2.03USPS-APPROVED COLLECTION BOXES A.USPS-Approved, Front-LoadingCollectionBoxes:Consisting of single compartment with fire- resistant cushion bottom, enclosed within wall box, with hopper doorto receive mail. Provide access to compartment for collecting mail from front of unit. Comply with USPSPublication16. 1.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Auth- Florence Manufacturing Collection Box, USPS approved products or comparable product by one of the following: a.Auth-Florence Manufacturing; a Florence company. b.Jayco Industries. c.Security Manufacturing Corporation. d.U.S. Chutes; Division of USC Group. 2.Mail Collection:USPS. 3.Mounting:Recessed. 4.Type:Collection box. 5.Height:As indicated on Drawings. 6.Compartment Door and Frame: Fabricated from 1/4-inch-(6-mm-)thick aluminum, with opening not less than 12 by 20 inches(305 by 508 mm)and not more than 18 by 30 inches(457 by 762 mm). Equip door with lock and concealed, full-length, flush hinge on one side. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGPOSTAL SPECIALTIES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION105500-4 a.Door Lock: Door prepared to receive lock provided by local postmaster. b.Identification: Engrave face of compartment door with 1-inch-(25-mm-)high letters as follows: "U.S. MAIL LETTER BOX" on two lines at top or bottom of unit. c.Door Style:Set door within face frame. 7.Hopper Door: Fabricated from 1/4-inch-(6-mm-)thick aluminum, with opening that allows a bundle measuring 6-1/2 inches wide by 11-1/2 inches long by 4 inches high (165 mm wide by 292 mm long by 102 mm high)to be deposited, and with inside baffle to prevent removal of mail from box. Equip door with door pull and concealed, full-length bottom hinge. a.Identification: Engrave face of hopper door with 1-inch-(25-mm-)high letters as follows: "LETTERS AND LETTER MAIL TIED IN BUNDLES." 8.Concealed Components and Mounting Frames: Aluminum or steel sheet with manufacturer's standard finish. 9.Schedule-Card Holder: Provide recessed or surface-mounted holder for pick-up schedule card in center of bottom front portion of unit. Fabricate of same material and finish as front of unit. 10.Mailbag Rack: Provide internal rack system for supporting mailbags within unit. B.Finish surfaces exposed to view as follows: 1.Aluminum Finish: Finish surfaces exposed to view as follows: a.Anodic Finish:Clear. 2.04TRASH RECEPTACLE A.Trash Receptacle: Match size and finish of the collection boxes. 1.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Auth- Florence Manufacturing Collection Box, USPS approved products or comparable product by one of the following: a.Auth-Florence Manufacturing; a Florence company. b.Jayco Industries. c.Security Manufacturing Corporation. d.U.S. Chutes; Division of USC Group. 2.Mounting:Recessed. 3.Height:As indicated on Drawings. 4.Compartment Door and Frame: Fabricated from 1/4-inch-(6-mm-)thick aluminum. a.Identification: Engrave face of compartment door with 1-inch-(25-mm-)high letters asstandard with the manufacturer. b.Door Style:Set door within face frame. 5.Door: Manufacturer’s standard door. 6.Concealed Components and Mounting Frames: Aluminum or steel sheet with manufacturer's standard finish. B.Finish surfaces exposed to view as follows: 1.Aluminum Finish: Finish surfaces exposed to view as follows: UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGPOSTAL SPECIALTIES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION105500-5 a.Anodic Finish:Clear. 2.05ACCESSORIES A.Directory for Mail Receptacles:Surface-mounted, front-opening unit, with clear glass or plastic window. 1.Fabricate directoriesas framed, horizontal unitwith modular sections having a; of same material and finish as adjacent mail receptacles; mounted above mail receptacles. 2.Provide a directory for each mail receptacle with space for a name for each of the compartments. 3.Provide name strips made of 1/4-inch-(6-mm-)high label tape. 2.06FABRICATION A.Form postal specialties to required shapes and sizes, with true lines and angles, square, rigid, and without warp, and with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges and corners free of sharp edges and burrs and safe to touch. Fabricate doors of postal specialties to preclude binding, warping, or misalignment. B.Preassemble postal specialties in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. C.Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration. D.Drill or punch holes required for fasteners and remove burrs. Use security fasteners where fasteners are exposed. If used, seal external rivets before finishing. E.Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible without distorting or discoloring exposed surfaces. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces. F.Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies with manufacturer's standard welded or mechanical joints. Provide subframes and reinforcement as required for a complete system to support loads. G.Where dissimilar metals will contact each other, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by applying other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturers of dissimilar metals. 2.07GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A.Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B.Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGPOSTAL SPECIALTIES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION105500-6 C.Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range ofapproved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for roughing-in openings, clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B.For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. C.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions havebeen corrected. 3.02INSTALLATION A.General: Install postal specialties level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions and roughing-in drawings. 1.Where dissimilar metals will be in permanent contact with each other, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by applying other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2.Where aluminum will contact grout, concrete, masonry, or wood, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating. 3.Final acceptance of postal specialties served by USPS depends on compliance with USPS requirements. B.Horizontal Mail Receptacles: Install horizontal mail receptacles with center of tenant-door lock cylinders and bottom of compartments at the maximum and minimum heights above finished floor established by USPS and manufacturer's written instructions. 1.Install removable-core and keyed-in door lock cylinders as required for each type of cylinder lock. C.Collection Boxes: Install collection boxes with centerline of mail slotsandhandle of hopper doorsnot more than 48 inches(1219 mm)above finished floor. 3.03FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Arrange for USPS personnel to examine and test postal specialties served by USPS after they have beeninstalled according to USPS regulations. B.Obtain written final approval of postal specialties to be served by USPS. Obtain this approval from USPS postmaster that authorizes mail collection for the served installation. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGPOSTAL SPECIALTIES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION105500-7 3.04ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A.Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as postal specialties are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. B.Adjust doors, hardware, and moving parts to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. C.Touch up marred finishes or replace postal specialties that cannot be restored to factory- finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by postal specialty manufacturer. D.Replace postal specialties that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. E.On completion of postal specialty installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGPOSTAL SPECIALTIES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION105500-8 SECTION105700 CLOSET FITTINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.PVC-coated wire clothes closet shelvingwithcontinuoushanging rod. 2.Accessories as required for a complete installation. B.Related Sections 1.Division09 Section "Gypsum Board" for gypsum board partitions. 1.02ACTIONSUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data, including information substantiating compliance with requirements. B.Samples: Submit sample of proposed shelving. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Coordination: During installation of partitions supporting closet fittings, assure that provisions for support of fittings are incorporated in partitions in accordance with closet fitting manufacturers' recommendations. B.Regulatory Requirements:Where closet fittings are indicated to comply withaccessibility requirements, comply with the2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, IllinoisAccessibility Code,andICC/ANSIA117.1. 1.04DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Deliver all material in original packages, containers or bundle bearing name of brand and manufacturer. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01MANUFACTURERS A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.Closet Maid. 2.Rubbermaid Home Products 3.Schulte Corporation UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION105700-1 2.02MATERIALS A.Materials: Grade C-1006 bright basic cold drawn steel wire, average tensile strength 100,000 psi. 1.Rod Sizes: Front rod minimum 0.306 in. diameter and back rods 0.243 in. diameter. B.Fabrication: Provide PVC coated steel rod ventilated shelving and rod. All rods resistance welded at intersections of cross deck wires. Deck rod spacing shall be on one-inch increments. 1.Hang Rod: Provide continuous hang rod to allow the clothes hanger to slide across the entire length of rod without support interruption. 2.Support Spacing: Provide shelf brackets at not over 3'-6" o.c. 3.Fasteners: As recommended by system manufacturer for substrate and loads to be supported; provide blocking between studs as required. C.Finish: Metal shall be cleaned, primed, and a given a coating of PVC (vinyl coating) applied at 9 to 11 mil thickness or a anti-marring hybrid epoxy that is non-porous and non-absorbent at 3 to 5 mils thickness. The coating is electrostatically applied and oven cured to provide continuous coverage on all surfaces. Elasticity of coating shall be sufficient to prevent chipping and cracking. D.Provide securely adhered rubber end caps on all cut ends. E.Provide closet systems complete with all fittings, brackets, and appurtenances required for installation. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01PREPARATION A.Do not proceed with installation until substrates have been properly prepared and deviations from manufacturer's recommended tolerances are corrected. Commencement of installation constitutes acceptance of conditions. 1.Prepared spaces are sized and located in accordance with shop drawings. 2.Framing, reinforcement and anchoring devices are correct type and are located in accordance with shop drawings. 3.Layout scheduled components prior to installation to verify wall to wall and floor to ceiling heights, widths, plumb and flatness of surfaces. 4.Prepare anchor locations and select anchor types using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.02INSTALLATION A.Secure brackets to wall for leveling shelving installation.Install systems securely to blocking or to metal studs as recommended by system manufacturer and applicable to construction indicated, to permanently support continuous loading without sagging or failure. Provide all fittings recommended by manufacturer for conditions of installation. B.Installation Heights: UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION105700-2 1.Single shelf and rod: a.Residential units complying with Type A accessible requirements: Top of shelf and rod at 68 inches above the floor for 90 percent of the shelving, and mount the top of shelf and rod at 46 inches above the floor for the remaining 10 percent of the shelving unless noted otherwise. b.Residential units complying with Type B accessible requirements: Top of all shelf and rod at 68 inches above the floor unless noted otherwise. 3.03PROTECTION A.Protect installed products until completion of project. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products prior to final completion. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION105700-3 SECTION113100 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Cooking appliances. 2.Kitchen exhaust ventilation. 3.Refrigeration appliances. 4.Cleaning appliances. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.03INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Product certificates. B.Field quality-control reports. 1.04CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Operation and maintenance data. 1.05COORDINATION A.Coordinate installation of gas lines, electrical receptacles, water lines, and duct connections with the appliances that have beensubmitted. 1.06WARRANTY A.Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Warranty Period:Twoyears from date of Substantial Completion. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGRESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION113100-1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01MANUFACTURERSAND PRODUCTS A.Basis-of-Design Product:Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated in the drawings. 2.02ACCESSORIES A.Provide accessories including power cords, gas lines, and duct work to connect the appliance to the built-in utility connections. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertopswith concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and that rough openings are completely concealed. B.Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment. C.Range Anti-Tip Device: Install at each range according to manufacturer's written instructions. D.Utilities: Comply with plumbing and electrical requirements. 3.02FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Tests and Inspections: 1.Perform visual, mechanical, and electrical inspection and testing for each appliance according to manufacturers' written recommendations. Certify compliance with each manufacturer's appliance-performance parameters. 2.Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3.Operational Test: After installation, start units to confirm proper operation. 4.Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and components. B.Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGRESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION113100-2 SECTION122113 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Horizontal louver blinds with vinylslats. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. B.Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for horizontal louver blinds. C.Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.03INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Product certificates. 1.04CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance data. 1.05QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1.Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 2.Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGHORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION122113-1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS A.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Lotus Blind; 1” Vinyl Plus or comparable product. B.VinylSlats: 1.Width:1 inch(25 mm). 2.Thickness:Manufacturer's standard. 3.Spacing:Manufacturer's standard. C.Headrail: 1.Manual Lift Mechanism:Manufacturer’s standard. 2.Manual Tilt Mechanism: Enclosed worm-gear mechanism and linkage rod that adjusts ladders. a.Tilt: Full. b.Operator:Clear-plastic wand. 3.Manual Lift-Operator and Tilt-Operator Lengths:Length required to extend to 48 inches (1219 mm)above floor level when blind is fully closed. 4.Manual Lift-Operator and Tilt-Operator Locations:Manufacturer's standardunless otherwise indicated. D.Bottom Rail: Manufacturer’s standard matching slats. E.Ladders:Braided cord. F.Valance:Manufacturer's standard. G.Mounting Brackets:With spacers and shims required for blind placement and alignment indicated. 1.Intermediate Support: Provide intermediate support brackets to produce support spacing recommended by blind manufacturer for weight and size of blind. H.Hold-Down Brackets and Hooks or Pinswhen blinds are installed on doors: Manufacturer's standard. I.Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss: 1.Slats:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.Components:Provide rails, cords, ladders, and materials exposed to view matching or coordinating with slat color unless otherwise indicated. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGHORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION122113-2 2.02HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND FABRICATION A.Product Safety Standard: Fabricate horizontal louver blinds to comply with WCMAA100.1 including requirements for corded, flexible, looped devices; lead content of components; and warning labels. B.Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 degF(23 degC): 1.Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which blind is installed less 1/4 inch(6 mm)per side or 1/2 inch(13 mm)total, plus or minus1/8 inch(3.1 mm). Length equal to head-to-sill dimension of opening in which blindis installed less 1/4 inch(6 mm), plus or minus 1/8 inch(3.1 mm). PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION A.Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance. 1.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B.Install horizontal louver blinds level and plumb, aligned and centered on openings, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1.Locate so exterior slat edges as indicated on the drawings, butnot closer than 2 inches (51 mm)from interior faces of glass through full operating ranges of blinds. 2.Install mounting and intermediate brackets to prevent deflection of headrails. 3.Install with clearances that prevent interference with adjacent blinds, adjacent construction, and operating hardware of glazed openings, other window treatments, and similar building components and furnishings. C.Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate free of binding or malfunction through full operating ranges. D.Clean horizontal louver blind surfaces after installation according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGHORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION122113-3 SECTION 12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes manually operated roller shades. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dim components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for ro shadeband materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seas. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and textur D. Roller-Shade Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provid comparable product by one of the following: 1. Hunter Douglas Contract 2. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 3. MechoShade Systems, Inc. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING ROLLER WINDOW SHADES JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 122413 - 1 2.02 ROLLER SHADES A. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently ad 1. Bead Chains: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Spring Lift-Assist Mechanisms: Manufacturer's standard for balancing roller-shade weight and lifting heavy roller shades. B. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and wei shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated dr-end assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for C. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounti conditions indicated. D. Roller-Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and d to three inline rollers into a multiband shade that is operated by one roller drive-end assembly. E. Installation Accessories: 1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and unders operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without expos a. Back covers. b. End covers. 2. Recessed Shade Pocket: Rectangular, extruded-aluminum enclosure designed for recessed ceiling installation; with front, top, and back formed and removable bottom closure panel. 2.03 SHADEBAND MATERIALS A. Shadeband Material Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate ma agency. B. Light-Filtering and Light Blocking Fabric: Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant. 1. Color: As indicated on Drawings, if not indicated, then as selected from the manufacturers full range. 2.04 ROLLER-SHADE FABRICATION A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with A 100.1, including requirements for flexible, chain-loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING ROLLER WINDOW SHADES JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 122413 - 2 B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other o74 deg F (23 deg C). Install in locations noted in the drawings and as applicable bel 1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch (6 mm) per side or 1/2-inch (13-mm) total, plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.1 mm). Length equal to head-to-sill or -floor dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch (6 mm), plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.1 mm). 2. Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, wi shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined ver separations between openings. C. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent except as follows: 1. Vertical Shades: Where width-to-length ratio of shadeband is equal to or greater than 1:4, provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movem of the material. 2. Railroaded Materials: Railroad material where material roll wid required width of shadeband and where indicated. Provide battens and seams as required by railroaded material to produce shadebands with full -width panel(s) plus, if required, one partial roll-width panel located at top of shadeband. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ROLLER-SHADE INSTALLATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions h C. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units written instructions. Locate so shades are no closer than 2 inches to interior face of D. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, say, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. E. Clean roller-shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's w END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING ROLLER WINDOW SHADES JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION 122413 - 3 SECTION123530 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Residential Unit Kitchen cabinets. 2.Residential Unit Vanity cabinets. 3.Other cabinets indicated as “Residential Casework” in the documents. B.Related Sections: 1.Division 06 Section “Interior Architectural Woodwork” for plastic laminate countertops. 2.Division11 Section "Residential Appliances" for appliances. 3.Division12 Section "Simulated Stone Countertops." 4.Division22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for nonintegral sinksandplumbing fittings. 1.02DEFINITIONS A.Exposed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, including visible surfaces in open cabinets or behind glass doors.At locations of removable cabinets, the surfaces that are potentially exposed after the removable cabinet is removed, will be considered exposed surfaces. B.Semi exposedSurfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces behind opaque doors or drawer fronts, including interior faces of doors and interiors and sides of drawers, and bottoms of wall cabinets. C.ConcealedSurfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces not usually visible after installation, including sleepers, web frames, dust panels, bottoms of drawers, ends of cabinets installed directly against and completely concealed by walls or other cabinets, and tops of wall cabinets and utility cabinets. 1.03ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For the following: 1.Cabinets. 2.Cabinet hardware. B.Shop Drawings: For cabinets and countertops. Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments to other work. Show materials, finishes, filler panels, hardware, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining countertops, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGRESIDENTIAL CASEWORK JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION123530-1 C.Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view. D.Samples for Verification: For the following products: 1.Each exteriorfinish,8 by 10 inches(200 by 250 mm). 2.Exposed hardware, for each type of item. 1.04INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Qualification Data: For qualified manufacturer. B.Product Certificates: For casework, from manufacturer. 1.05QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Source Limitations for Cabinets: Obtain cabinetsfrom single source from single manufacturer. B.Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in theIowaaccessibility requirements, andICC/ANSIA117.1for compliance with Type B unit requirements and Type A unit requirements in the residential units. 1.06PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install casework until building is enclosed, wet work is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B.Established Dimensions:Where casework is indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where casework is to fit. Coordinate construction to ensure thatactual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Provide fillers and scribes to allow for trimming and fitting. 1.07COORDINATION A.Coordinate layout and installation of blocking and reinforcement in partitions for support of casework. 1.Locate additional wall cabinet blocking and support in the Type A accessibility units to allow for the future relocation of the wall cabinets with the bottom shelf of the wall cabinet at 48 inches above the finish floor. B.Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetratecountertops or backsplashes. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGRESIDENTIAL CASEWORK JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION123530-2 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01CABINETS–KITCHEN AND VANITY A.Basis of Design Product: The design for cabinets is indicated in the drawings. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: B.Quality Standard: Provide cabinets that comply with KCMAA161.1. 1.KCMA Certification: Provide cabinets with KCMA's "Certified Cabinet" seal affixed in a semi exposedlocation of each unit and showing compliance with the above standard. C.Cabinet Style: Face Frame, solid hardwood construction with glued and nailed mortise and tendon joints. D.Face Style: Full Overlay. E.Cabinet Construction: Sides, tops, bottoms, shelves, hang rails, toe-kicks, fillers, skirts and drawer sides are to be constructed of ½ inch thick medium density, industrial particle board. Semi exposed surfaces are faced with melamine-coated laminate. F.Door and Drawer Fronts: Solid hardwood stiles and rails, veneer-faced plywood center panels. G.Drawer construction: Fived-sided box with ½ inch thick sides, rabbet-jointed, glued and nailed to front and back. H.Factory Finishing: Finish cabinets at factory. Defer only final touchup untilafter installation. 2.02FABRICATION A.Fabricate cabinets in the sizes indicated with adjustability for scribing the cabinets for tight fitting. B.Fabricate cabinets to allow removing of cabinets in locations indicated, without structural changes, to provide clearances in compliance with the accessibility requirements. 1.Finish the sides of cabinets adjacent to the removable cabinets. Finish to match the cabinet exposed finish. 2.03CABINET MATERIALS A.General: 1.Adhesives and Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Do notuse products that contain urea formaldehyde. 2.Hardwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 7 percent moisture content. 3.Softwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 10 percent moisture content. 4.Hardwood Plywood: HPVAHP-1,made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGRESIDENTIAL CASEWORK JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION123530-3 5.Particleboard: ANSIA208.1, GradeM-2,made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 6.Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSIA208.2, GradeMD,made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 7.Hardboard: ANSIA135.4, Class1 Tempered. B.Concealed Materials: Solid wood or plywood, of any hardwood or softwood species, with no defects affecting strength or utility; particleboard; medium-density fiberboard; or hardboard. 2.04CABINET HARDWARE A.General:Complying with BHMAA156.9, of type, size, style, material, and finishasselected . by Architect from manufacturer's full range B.Door and Drawer Pulls: Back mounted with backing plates. 1.Material: Nickel. C.Hinges: Concealed European style, self-closing. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION A.Install cabinets with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces; use concealed shims. Where cabinets abut other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match cabinet face. B.Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawersfit openings, are aligned, and are uniformly spaced. Complete installation of hardware and accessories as indicated. C.Install cabinets and countertop level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet(3 mm in 2.4m). D.Fasten cabinets to adjacent units and to backing. 1.Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less than 24 inches(600 mm)o.c., with toggle bolts through metal backing behind gypsum board. E.Fasten plastic-laminate countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Form seams using splines to align adjacent surfaces, and secure with glue and concealed clamping devices designed for this purpose. 1.Provide cutouts for sinks and lavatories, including holes for faucets and accessories. 2.Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGRESIDENTIAL CASEWORK JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION123530-4 3.02ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Adjust cabinets and hardware so doors and drawers are centered in openings and operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer. B.Clean casework on exposed and semi exposedsurfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGRESIDENTIAL CASEWORK JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION123530-5 SECTION123661 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Simulated stonecountertopsand backsplashes. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For countertop materials. B.Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures. C.Samples: For each type of material exposed to view. 1.03PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements before countertop fabrication is complete. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE A.CountertopConfiguration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style: 1.Front:Radius edge with apron, 2 inches(50 mm)high with 3/8-inch(9.5-mm)radius. 2.Backsplash:Straight, slightly eased at corner. 3.Endsplash:Matching backsplash. B.Countertops:1/2-inch-(12.7-mm-)thick, quartz agglomerate. C.Backsplashes:3/4-inch-(19-mm-)thick, quartz agglomerate. 2.02MATERIALS A.Adhesives: Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde. B.Quartz Agglomerate: Solid sheets consisting of quartz aggregates bound together with a matrix of filled plastic resin and complying with the "Physical Characteristics of Materials" UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION123661-1 Article of ANSISS1. 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.Cambria. b.Cosentino USA. c.E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company. d.LG Chemical, Ltd. e.Meganite Inc. f.Samsung Chemical USA, Inc. 2.Colors and Patterns:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION A.Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. B.Sealant joint: Seal between simulated stone surfaces and adjacent surfaces. Provide sealant per Division 07 Section “Joint Sealers” 1.Seal between backsplashes and wall with sealant. 2.Seal between end splashes and wall with sealant. 3.Seal between countertop and all adjacent materials. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGSIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION123661-2 SECTION124813 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Roll-up rail mats. 2.Matframes. 1.02ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. B.Shop Drawings: 1.Items penetrating floor mats and frames, including door control devices. 2.Divisions between mat sections. 3.Perimeter floor moldings. C.Samples: For each floor mat,tread rail,and frame member. 1.03CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance data. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES, GENERAL A.Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and FacilitiesandICCA117.1. 2.02ROLL-UP RAIL MATS A.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings. B.Roll-up, Hinged Mats:Tread rails, 3/8 inch thick. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION124813-1 1.Tread Inserts: As indicated on the drawings. 2.Colors, Textures, and Patterns of Inserts:Asindicated, if not indicated, as selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 3.Rail Color:Asindicated, if not indicated, as selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities. 4.Mat Size:As indicated. 2.03FRAMES A.Recessed Frames:ASTMB221(ASTMB221M). Manufacturer's standard extrusion. 1.Color:Asindicated, if not indicated, as selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities. 2.04FABRICATION A.Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning. Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units without joints. B.Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum frames that contact cementitious material with manufacturer's standard protective coating. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION A.Install recessed mat frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Set mat tops at height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action; coordinate tops of mat surfaces with bottoms of doors that swing across mats to provide clearance between door and mat. B.Install surface-type units to comply with manufacturer's written instructions at locations indicated; coordinate with entrance locations and traffic patterns. 3.02PROTECTION A.After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA-HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSINGENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES JUNE 7, 2013 -PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION124813-2 SECTION 21 05 00 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Requirements applicable to all Division 23 Sections. Also refer to Division 1 - General Requirements. B. All materials and installation methods shall conform to the applicable standards, guidelines and codes referenced in the specification section. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Specification and the associated drawings govern the furnishing, installing, testing and placing into satisfactory operation the Mechanical Systems. B. Each Contractor shall provide all new materials indicated on the drawings and/or in these specifications, and all items required to make his portion of the Mechanical Work a finished and working system. C. All work will be awarded under a single General Contract. The division of work listed below is for the Contractor's convenience and lists normal breakdown of the work. D. Scope of Work: 1. Plumbing Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to: a. Furnish and install all items listed in the Plumbing Material List. b. Furnish and install a new domestic water service to each building. c. Furnish and install water meters and domestic water backflow preventers as required by Code. d. Furnish and install a complete domestic water piping system including cold, hot, and hot water circulating piping within the building. Insulate all piping as specified. e. Furnish and install gas piping system including all meter requirements. f. Furnish and install water heaters. g. Furnish and install a new fire protection service to each building including backflow preventer as required by Code. h. Furnish and install condensate drain piping from plumbing related equipment such as ice machines. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 00 - 1 i. Furnish and install a complete sanitary sewer and vent system. j. Furnish and install firestopping systems for penetrations of fire-rated construction associated with this Contractor’s work. 2. Heating Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to: a. Furnish and install refrigerant piping, accessories, and final charge of refrigerant. b. Furnish and install condensate drain piping from cooling related equipment such as cooling coil drain pans. c. Furnish and install firestopping systems for penetrations of fire-rated construction associated with this Contractor’s work. 3. Air Conditioning and Ventilating Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to: a. Furnish and install indoor furnaces complete with burners, filters, coils, fans, and motors. b. Furnish and install package outdoor air handling units complete with pads. c. Furnish and install air-cooled condensing units and pads. d. Furnish and install complete supply air ductwork systems including all fittings, insulation, and outlets. e. Furnish and install complete return air ductwork systems including all fittings, insulation, and inlets. f. Furnish and install combustion air ductwork and terminations. g. Furnish and install complete exhaust ductwork systems including all fittings, insulation, inlets, and fans. h. Furnish and install gas flues and terminations. i. Furnish and install all temperature control systems. j. Furnish and install all fire dampers. k. Furnish and install firestopping systems for penetrations of fire-rated construction associated with this Contractor’s work. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 00 - 2 4. Temperature Control Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to: a. Furnish and install a complete temperature control system as specified in Section 23 09 00. b. Furnish automatic control dampers for installation by others. c. Furnish and install firestopping systems for penetrations of fire-rated construction associated with this Contractor’s work. 5. Fire Protection Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to: a. Furnish and install a complete wet pipe sprinkler system for areas noted on the drawings. b. Furnish and install all items listed on the Fire Protection Material List. c. Furnish all hydraulic calculations and working sprinkler drawings. 6. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to: a. Furnish complete testing, adjusting, and balancing as specified in Section 23 05 93, including, but not limited to, air systems, hydronic systems, plumbing systems, and verification of control systems. 1.3 ALTERNATES 1.4 UNIT PRICES 1.5 DIVISION OF WORK BETWEEN MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL & CONTROL CONTRACTORS A. Definitions: 1. "Mechanical Contractors" refers to the following: a. Plumbing Contractor. b. Heating Contractor. c. Air Conditioning and Ventilating Contractor. d. Temperature Control Contractor. e. Fire Protection Contractor. f. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Contractor. 2. Motor Control Wiring: The wiring associated with the remote operation of the magnetic coils of magnetic motor starters or relays, or the wiring that permits direct cycling of motors by means of devices in series with the motor power wiring. In the latter case the devices are usually single phase and are usually connected to the motor power wiring through a manual motor starter having "Manual-Off-Auto" provisions. 3. Control devices such as start-stop push buttons, thermostats, relays, etc., generally represent the types of equipment associated with motor control wiring. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 00 - 3 4. Motor control wiring is single phase and usually 120 volts. In some instances, the voltage will be the same as the motor power wiring. Generally, where the motor power wiring exceeds 120 volts, a control transformer is used to give a control voltage of 120 volts. 5. Temperature Control Wiring: The wiring associated with the operation of a motorized damper, solenoid valve or motorized valve, etc., either modulating or two-position, as opposed to wiring which directly powers or controls a motor used to drive equipment such as fans, pumps, etc. a. This wiring will be from a 120 volt source and may continue as 120 volt, or be reduced in voltage (24 volt) in which case a control transformer shall be furnished as part of the temperature control wiring. 6. Control Motor: An electric device used to operate dampers, valves, etc. It may be two-position or modulating. Conventional characteristics of such a motor are 24 volts, 60 cycles, 1 phase, although other voltages may be encountered. B. General: 1. The purpose of these Specifications is to outline the Electrical and Mechanical Contractor's responsibilities related to electrical work required for items such as temperature controls, mechanical equipment, fans, and the like. The exact wiring requirements for much of the equipment cannot be determined until the systems have been selected and submittals reviewed. Therefore, the electrical drawings show only known wiring related to such items. All wiring not shown on the electrical drawings, but required for mechanical systems, is the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor. 2. Where the drawings require the Electrical Contractor to wire between equipment furnished by the Mechanical Contractor, such wiring shall terminate at terminals provided in the equipment. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide complete wiring diagrams and supervision to the Electrical Contractor and designate the terminal numbers for correct wiring. 3. All electrical work shall conform to the National Electrical Code. All provisions of the Electrical Specifications concerning wiring, protection, etc., apply to wiring provided by the Mechanical Contractor unless noted otherwise. C. Mechanical Contractor's Responsibility: 1. Assumes responsibility for internal wiring of all equipment provided by the Mechanical Contractor, for example: a. Condensing Units. b. Package Air Handling Units. 2. Assumes all responsibility for the Temperature Control wiring, when the Temperature Control Contractor is a Subcontractor to the Mechanical Contractor. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 00 - 4 3. Temperature Control Subcontractor's Responsibility: [*****OR*****] 4. Temperature Control Contractor's Responsibility: a. Wiring of all devices needed to make the Temperature Control System functional. b. Verifying any control wiring on the electrical drawings as being by the Electrical Contractor. All wiring required for the Control System, but not shown on the electrical drawings, is the responsibility of the Temperature Control Subcontractor Contractor. c. Coordinating equipment locations (such as P.E.'s, E.P.'s, relays, transformers, etc.) with the Electrical Contractor, where wiring of the equipment is by the Electrical Contractor. 5. This Contractor is responsible for coordination of utilities with all other Contractors. If any field coordination conflicts are found, the Contractor shall coordinate with other Contractors to determine a viable layout. D. Electrical Contractor's Responsibility: 1. Provides all combination starters, manual starters and disconnect devices shown on the Electrical Drawings or indicated to be by the Electrical Contractor on the Mechanical Drawings or Specifications. 2. Installs and wires all remote control devices furnished by the Mechanical Contractor or Temperature Control Subcontractor Contractor when so noted on the Electrical Drawings. 3. Provides motor control and temperature control wiring, where so noted on the drawings. 4. Furnishes, installs and connects all relays, etc., for automatic shutdown of certain fans upon actuation of the Fire Alarm System as indicated and specified in Division 28. 5. This Contractor is responsible for coordination of utilities with all other Contractors. If any field coordination conflicts are found, the Contractor shall coordinate with other Contractors to determine a viable layout. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor’s Responsibility Prior to Submitting Pricing Data: 1. The Contractor is responsible for constructing complete and operating systems. The Contractor acknowledges and understands that the Contract Documents are a two-dimensional representation of a three-dimensional object, subject to human interpretation. This representation may include imperfect data, interpreted codes, utility guidelines, three-dimensional conflicts, and required field UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 00 - 5 coordination items. Such deficiencies can be corrected when identified prior to ordering material and starting installation. The Contractor agrees to carefully study and compare the individual Contract Documents and report at once in writing to the Design Team any deficiencies the Contractor may discover. The Contractor further agrees to require each subcontractor to likewise study the documents and report at once any deficiencies discovered. 2. The Contractor shall resolve all reported deficiencies with the Architect/Engineer prior to awarding any subcontracts, ordering material, or starting any work with the Contractor’s own employees. Any work performed prior to receipt of instructions from the Design Team will be done at the Contractor’s risk. B. Qualifications: 1. Only products of reputable manufacturers are acceptable. 2. All Contractors and subcontractors shall employ only workers skilled in their trades. C. Compliance with Codes, Laws, Ordinances: 1. Conform to all requirements of the City of Iowa City, Iowa’s Codes, Laws, Ordinances and other regulations having jurisdiction. 2. Conform to all State Codes. 3. If there is a discrepancy between the codes and regulations and these specifications, the Engineer shall determine the method or equipment used. 4. If the Contractor notes, at the time of bidding, any parts of the drawings or specifications that do not comply with the codes or regulations, he shall inform the Architect/Engineer in writing, requesting a clarification. If there is insufficient time for this procedure, he shall submit with his proposal a separate price to make the system comply with the codes and regulations. 5. All changes to the system made after letting of the contract, to comply with codes or requirements of Inspectors, shall be made by the Contractor without cost to the Owner. 6. If there is a discrepancy between manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications, the manufacturer's recommendations shall govern. 7. All rotating shafts and/or equipment shall be completely guarded from all contact. Partial guards and/or guards that do not meet all applicable OSHA standards are not acceptable. Contractor is responsible for providing this guarding if it is not provided with the equipment supplied. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 00 - 6 D. Permits, Fees, Taxes, Inspections: 1. Procure all applicable permits and licenses. 2. Abide by all laws, regulations, ordinances, and other rules of the State or Political Subdivision where the work is done, or as required by any duly constituted public authority. 3. Pay all charges for permits or licenses. 4. Pay all fees and taxes imposed by the State, Municipal and/or other regulatory bodies. 5. Pay all charges arising out of required inspections by an authorized body. 6. Pay all charges arising out of required contract document reviews associated with the project and as initiated by the Owner or authorized agency/consultant. 7. Where applicable, all fixtures, equipment and materials shall be approved or listed by Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. E. Examination of Drawings: 1. The drawings for the mechanical work are completely diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of the work and to indicate the general arrangements and locations of equipment, outlets, etc., and the approximate sizes of equipment. 2. Contractor shall determine the exact locations of equipment and rough-ins, and the exact routing of pipes and ducts to best fit the layout of the job. 3. Scaling of the drawings is not sufficient or accurate for determining these locations. 4. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated arrangements and locations, such changes shall be made by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 5. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items, such as fittings, boxes, valves, unions, etc., may not be shown, but where required by other sections of the specifications or required for proper installation of the work, such items shall be furnished and installed. 6. If an item is either on the drawings or in the specifications, it shall be included in this contract. 7. Determination of quantities of material and equipment required shall be made by the Contractor from the documents. Where discrepancies arise between drawings, schedules and/or specifications, the greater number shall govern. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 00 - 7 8. Where used in mechanical documents, the word "furnish" shall mean supply for use, the word "install" shall mean connect complete and ready for operation, and the word "provide" shall mean to supply for use and connect complete and ready for operation. a. Any item listed as furnished shall also be installed, unless otherwise noted. b. Any item listed as installed shall also be furnished, unless otherwise noted. F. Field Measurements: 1. Verify all pertinent dimensions at the job site before ordering any materials or fabricating any supports, pipes or ducts. G. Electronic Media/Files: 1. Construction drawings for this project have been prepared utilizing AutoCAD MEP. 2. Contractors and Subcontractors may request electronic media files of the contract drawings and/or copies of the specifications. Specifications will be provided in PDF format. 3. Upon request for electronic media, the Contractor shall complete and return a signed “Electronic File Transmittal” form provided by KJWW. 4. If the information requested includes floor plans prepared by others, the Contractor will be responsible for obtaining approval from the appropriate Design Professional for use of that part of the document. 5. The electronic contract documents can be used for preparation of shop drawings and as-built drawings only. The information may not be used in whole or in part for any other project. 6. The drawings prepared by KJWW for bidding purposes may not be used directly for ductwork layout drawings. 7. The use of these CAD documents by the Contractor does not relieve them from their responsibility for coordination of work with other trades and verification of space available for the installation. 8. The information is provided to expedite the project and assist the Contractor with no guarantee by KJWW as to the accuracy or correctness of the information provided. KJWW accepts no responsibility or liability for the Contractor’s use of these documents. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 00 - 8 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be required for the following items, and for additional items where required elsewhere in the specifications or on the drawings. 1. Submittals list: Referenced Submittal Item Specification Section 21 05 00 Owner Training Agenda 21 13 00 Sprinkler Systems 21 13 00 Fire Protection Equipment B. In addition to the provisions of Division 1, the following provisions are required: 1. Submittals shall include all fabrication, erection, layout, and setting drawings; manufacturers' standard drawings; schedules; descriptive literature, catalogs and brochures; performance and test data; wiring and control diagrams; and all other drawings and descriptive data of materials of construction as may be required to show that the materials, equipment or systems and the location thereof conform to the requirements of the contract documents. 2. The Contractor shall submit one electronic copy of each shop drawing for review by the Architect/Engineer BEFORE releasing any equipment for manufacture or shipment. 3. Shop drawings which are larger than 11"x 17" or are plan size layout or erection drawings such as sprinkler system drawings shall be submitted on reproducible media. Submit one reproducible and one print of each drawing or plan. All Contractor approval stamps shall be made on the reproducible. 4. The Contractor shall thoroughly review and approve all shop drawings before submitting them to the Architect/Engineer. CONTRACTOR’S APPROVAL STAMP IS REQUIRED ON ALL SUBMITTALS. APPROVAL WILL INDICATE THE CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW of all material and a COMPLETE UNDERSTANDING OF EXACTLY WHAT IS TO BE FURNISHED. Contractor shall clearly mark all deviations from the contract documents on all submittals. IF DEVIATIONS ARE NOT MARKED BY THE CONTRACTOR, THEN THE ITEM SHALL BE REQUIRED TO MEET ALL DRAWING AND SPECIFICATION REQUIREMENTS. 5. The Contractor shall clearly mark each item with the same nomenclature applied on the drawings or in the specifications. 6. The Contractor shall clearly indicate the size, finish, material, etc. 7. Assemble and submit by specification section numbers for all submittals. All sets shall be identical and contain an index of the items enclosed with a general topic description on the cover. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 00 - 9 8. Each set shall be bound in a manufacturer's folder or inside of a manila file folder. 9. Where more than one model is shown on a manufacturer's sheet, the Contractor shall clearly indicate exactly which item and which data is relevant to the work. 10. Failure to comply with the above shall be reason to resubmit all shop drawing submittals. 11. The Engineer's responsibility shall be to review one set of shop drawing submittals for each product. If the first submittal is incomplete or does not comply with the drawings and/or specifications, the Contractor shall be responsible to bear the cost for the Engineer to recheck and handle the additional shop drawing submittals. C. Provide Schedule of Values: 1. Application forms: Use AIA Document Continuation Sheets G703 (or similar) as the form for application. 2. Provide line items on the Schedule of Values including: a. Mechanical Contractor General Conditions (mobilization, bonds, insurance, etc.) b. Fire Protection 3. Change orders shall have schedule of values broken out as listed above submitted with each change order. 4. Coordinate with the Project Engineer the items included in the Schedule of Values. The intent is to not create schedules in addition to those the Fire Protection Contractor normally submits to the General Contractor for payment. 1.8 EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS' INSPECTION A. The following equipment shall not be placed in operation until a competent installation and service representative of the manufacturer has inspected the installation and certified that the equipment is properly installed, adjusted and lubricated; that preliminary operating instructions have been given; and that the equipment is ready for operation: 1. Fire Seal Systems B. Contractor shall arrange for and obtain supplier's on-site inspection(s) at proper time(s) to assure each phase of equipment installation and/or connection is in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. C. Submit copies of start-up reports to the Architect/Engineer and include copies of Owner’s Operation and Maintenance Manuals. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 00 - 10 1.9 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING & MAINTENANCE A. Exercise care in transporting and handling to avoid damage to materials. Store materials on the site to prevent damage. Keep materials clean, dry and free from harmful conditions. Immediately remove any materials that become wet or that are suspected of becoming contaminated with mold or other organisms. B. Contractor is responsible for moving equipment into the building and/or site. Contractor shall review site prior to bid for path locations and any required building modifications to allow movement of equipment. Contractor shall coordinate his/her work with other trades. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide one-year warranty, unless otherwise noted, to the Owner for all equipment, materials, and workmanship. B. The warranty period for all work in this Division of the specifications shall commence on the date of final acceptance, unless a whole or partial system or any separate piece of equipment or component is put into use for the benefit of any party other than the installing contractor with prior written authorization. In this instance, the warranty period shall commence on the date when such whole system, partial system or separate piece of equipment or component is placed in operation and accepted in writing by the Owner. C. Warranty requirements shall extend to correction, without cost to the Owner, of all Work found to be defective or nonconforming to the contract documents. The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting all damage resulting from defects or nonconformance with contract documents. 1.11 INSURANCE A. Contractor shall maintain insurance coverage as set forth in Division 0 of these specifications. 1.12 MATERIAL SUBSTITUTION A. Where several manufacturers’ names are given, the manufacturer for which a catalog number is given is the basis for job design and establishes the quality required. B. Equivalent equipment manufactured by the other named manufacturers may be used. Contractor shall ensure that all items submitted by these other manufacturers meet all requirements of the drawings and specifications, and fits in the allocated space. C. Any material, article or equipment of other unnamed manufacturers which will adequately perform the services and duties imposed by the design and is of a quality equal to or better than the material, article or equipment identified by the drawings and specifications may be used if approval is secured in writing from the Architect/Engineer not later than ten days prior to the bid opening. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 00 - 11 D. This Contractor assumes all costs incurred as a result of using the offered material, article or equipment, on his part or on the part of other Contractors whose work is affected. E. This Contractor may list voluntary add or deduct prices for alternate materials on the bid form. These items will not be used in determining the low bidder. F. All material substitutions requested later than ten (10) days prior to bid opening must be listed as voluntary changes on the bid form. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 JOBSITE SAFETY A. Neither the professional activities of the Engineer, nor the presence of the Engineer or his or her employee and subconsultants at a construction site, shall relieve the Contractor and other entity of their obligations, duties and responsibilities including, but not limited to, construction means, methods, sequence, techniques or procedures necessary for performing, superintending or coordinating all portions of the work of construction in accordance with the contract documents and any health or safety precautions required by any regulatory agencies. The Engineer and his or her personnel have no authority to exercise any control over any construction contractor or other entity or their employees in connection with their work or any health or safety precautions. The Contractor is solely responsible for jobsite safety. The Engineer and the Engineer’s consultants shall be indemnified and shall be made additional insureds under the Contractor’s general liability insurance policy. 3.2 ENGINEER OBSERVATION OF WORK A. The Contractor shall provide seven (7) calendar days notice to the Engineer prior to: 1. Covering exterior walls, interior partitions and chases. 2. Installing hard or suspended ceilings and soffits. B. The Engineer will have the opportunity to review the installation and provide a written report noting deficiencies requiring correction. The Contractor’s schedule shall account for these reviews and show them as line items in the approved schedule. C. Above-Ceiling Final Observation 1. All work above the ceilings must be complete prior to the Engineer’s review. This includes, but is not limited to: a. Pipe wall penetrations are sealed. b. Pipe identification is installed. c. Branch piping in the location of sprinklers shall be dropped to the ceiling. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 00 - 12 2. In order to prevent the Above-Ceiling Final Observation from occurring too early, the Contractor shall review the status of the work and certify, in writing, that the work is ready for the Above-Ceiling Final Observation. 3. It is understood that if the Engineer finds the ceilings have been installed prior to this review and prior to 7 days elapsing, the Engineer may not recommend further payments to the contractor until such time as full access has been provided. 3.3 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1. B. Final Jobsite Observation: 1. In order to prevent the Final Jobsite Observation from occurring too early, the Contractor is required to review the completion status of the project and certify that the job is ready for the final jobsite observation. 2. Attached to the end of this section is a typical list of items that represent the degree of job completeness expected prior to requesting a review. 3. Upon Contractor certification that the project is complete and ready for a final punch, the Contractor shall sign the attached certification and return it to the Architect/Engineer so that the final observation can be scheduled. 4. It is understood that if the Engineer finds the job not ready for the final observation and that additional trips and observations are required to bring the project to completion, the costs incurred by the Engineers additional time and expenses will be deducted from the Contractor’s contract retainage prior to final payment at the completion of the job. C. Before final payment is authorized, This Contractor must submit the following: 1. Operation and maintenance manuals with copies of approved shop drawings. 2. Record documents including marked-up or reproducible drawings and specifications. 3. A report documenting the instructions given to the Owner's representatives complete with the number of hours spent in the instruction. The report shall bear the signature of an authorized agent of This Contractor and shall be signed by the Owner's representatives. 4. Inspection report by the State Fire Marshal of the fire protection system. 5. Start-up reports on all equipment requiring a factory installation inspection or start-up. 6. Provide spare parts, maintenance, and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification sections. Deliver to project site and place in location as directed; receipt by Architect/Engineer required prior to final payment approval. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 00 - 13 3.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Submit three properly indexed and bound copies, in ‘D’ Ring style notebooks, of the Operations and Maintenance Instructions to the Architect/Engineer. Make all corrections or additions required. B. Manuals shall be completed and in the Owner's possession prior to Owner's acceptance and at least 10 days prior to instruction of operating personnel. C. Operation and maintenance data shall consist of written instructions for the care, maintenance, and operation of all equipment and systems. Include all instruction books, cards, and manuals furnished with the equipment. 3.5 INSTRUCTING THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVES A. Adequately instruct the Owner's designated representatives in the maintenance, care, and operation of all systems installed under this contract. B. Provide verbal and written instructions to the Owner's representatives by FACTORY PERSONNEL in the care, maintenance, and operation of the equipment and systems. C. The instructions shall include: 1. Explanation of all system flow diagrams. 2. Maintenance of equipment. 3. Start-up procedures for all major equipment. 4. Description of emergency system operation. D. The Architect/Engineer shall be notified of the time and place instructions will be given to the Owner's representatives so he or his representative can attend if desired. E. Minimum hours of instruction for each item shall be: 1. Sprinkler System(s) - one (1) hour. F. The Contractor shall prepare a detailed, written training agenda and submit it to the Architect/Engineer a minimum of two weeks prior to the formal training for approval. The written agenda shall include specific training points within the items described above. For example: how to adjust setpoints, troubleshooting, proper start-up, proper shut- down, seasonal changes, draining, venting, changing filters, changing belts, etc. Failure to provide and follow an approved training agenda may result in additional training required at the expense of the Contractor. G. Operating Instructions: 1. Contractor is responsible for all instructions to the Owner's representatives for the fire protection and control systems. 2. If the Contractor does not have staff that can adequately provide the required instructions he shall include in his bid an adequate amount to reimburse the Owner for the Engineer to perform these services. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 00 - 14 3.6 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING A. The fire protection systems shall be complete and operating. System start-up, testing, and satisfactory system performance is the responsibility of the Contractor. B. All operating conditions and control sequences shall be tested during the start-up period. Test all interlocks, safety shutdowns, controls, and alarms. C. The Contractor, subcontractors, and equipment suppliers shall have skilled technicians to ensure that all systems perform properly. If the Architect/Engineer is requested to visit the job site for trouble shooting, assisting in start-up, obtaining satisfactory equipment operation, resolving installation and/or workmanship problems, equipment substitution issues or unsatisfactory system performance, including call backs during the warranty period, through no fault of the design; the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner on a time and materials basis for services rendered at the Architect/Engineer's standard hourly rates in effect when the services are requested. The Contractor shall pay the Owner for services required that are product, installation or workmanship related. Payment is due within 30 days after services are rendered. 3.7 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. The following paragraph supplements Division 1 requirements: Contractor shall maintain at the job site a separate and complete set of fire protection drawings and specifications on which he shall clearly and permanently mark in complete detail all changes made to the fire protection systems. B. Mark drawings to indicate revisions to piping size and location, both exterior and interior; including locations of other control devices, and other units requiring periodic maintenance or repair; actual equipment locations, dimensioned from column lines; actual inverts and locations of underground piping; concealed equipment, dimensioned from column lines; mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located; Change Orders; concealed control system devices. C. Before completion of the project, a set of reproducible fire protection drawings will be given to the Contractor for transfer of all as-built conditions from the paper set maintained at the job site. All marks on reproducibles shall be clear and permanent. D. Mark specifications to show approved substitutions; Change Orders, and actual equipment and materials used. E. Record changes daily and keep the marked drawings available for the Architect/Engineer's examination at any normal work time. F. Upon completing the job, and before final payment is made, give the marked-up drawings to the Architect/Engineer. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 00 - 15 3.8 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Thoroughly clean all equipment and systems prior to the Owner's final acceptance of the project. Clean all foreign paint, grease, oil, dirt, labels, stickers, and other foreign material from all equipment. B. Clean all areas where moisture is present. Immediately report any mold, biological growth, or water damage. C. Remove all rubbish, debris, etc., accumulated during construction from the premises. 3.9 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor shall coordinate the installation of all equipment, valves, etc., with other trades to maintain clear access area for servicing. B. All equipment shall be installed in such a way to maximize access to parts needing service or maintenance. Review the final field location, placement, and orientation of equipment with the Owner’s designated representative prior to setting equipment. C. Installation of equipment or devices without regard to coordination of access requirements and confirmation with the Owner’s designated representative will result in removal and reinstallation of the equipment at the Contractor’s expense. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 00 - 16 READINESS CERTIFICATION PRIOR TO FINAL JOBSITE OBSERVATION In order to prevent the final job observation from occurring too early, we require that the Contractor review the completion status of the project and, by copy of this document, certify that the job is indeed ready for the final job observation. The following is a typical list of items that represent the degree of job completeness expected prior to your requesting a final job observation. 1. Penetrations fire sealed and labeled in accordance with specifications. 2. Fire protection system operational. 3. Pipes labeled. Accepted by: Prime Contractor _______________________________________________ By ___________________________________ Date ___________________ Upon Contractor certification that the project is complete and ready for a final job observation, we require the Contractor to sign this agreement and return it to the Engineer so that the final observation can be scheduled. It is understood that if the Engineer finds the job not ready for the final observation and that additional trips and observations are required to bring the project to completion, the costs incurred by the Engineers for additional time and expenses will be deducted from the Contractor's contract retainage prior to final payment at the completion of the job. * * * * * UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 00 - 17 PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 00 - 18 SECTION 21 05 03 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Through-Penetration Firestopping. 1.2 REFERENCES A. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials B. ANSI/UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops C. UL Fire Resistance Directory Through Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ) D. Warnock Hersey - Directory of Listed Products E. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials F. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops G. The Building Officials and Code Administrators National Building Code H. 1994 1997 Uniform Building Code I. Wisconsin Administrative Code J. 2000 20032006International Building Code. K. NFPA 5000 – Building Construction Safety Code 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: For penetrations through the following fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. 1. Fire-resistance-rated walls including fire partitions, fire barriers, and smoke barriers. 2. Fire-resistance-rated horizontal assemblies including floors, floor/ceiling assemblies, and ceiling membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies. B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined per UL 1479: 1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 2. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration : firestop systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings a. Floor penetrations located outside wall cavities. b. Floor penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 03 - 1 c. Wall penetrations above corridor ceilings which are not part of a fire- resistive assembly. d. Wall penetrations below any ceiling that are larger than 4” diameter or 16 square inches. 3. L-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with L-ratings of not more than 3.0 cfm/sq. ft at both ambient temperature and 400F. C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to light, traffic, moisture, or physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction. D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame- spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. E. For through-penetration firestop systems in air plenums, provide products with flame- spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 50, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. F. In accordance with LEED EQc4.1, Low-Emitting Materials - Adhesives and Sealants, all adhesives and sealants used on the interior of the building must comply with the following requirements: 1. Adhesives, sealants and sealant primers must comply with South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1168. 2. Aerosol adhesives must comply with Green Seal Standard for Commercial Adhesives GS-36 requirements in effect on October 19, 2000. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1 Section 21 05 00. B. Submit Firestopping Installers Certification for all installers on the project. C. Shop Drawings: Submit for each condition requiring firestopping. Include descriptions of the specific penetrating item, actual wall/floor construction, manufacturer’s installation instructions, and UL or Warnock Hersey Assembly number. D. Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through- penetration firestop system, along with the following information: 1. Types of penetrating items. 2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated. 3. Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 4. F and T ratings for each firestop system. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 03 - 2 E. Maintain a notebook on the job site at all times that contains copies of approved submittals for all through penetration firestopping to be installed. Notebook shall be made available to the Authority Having Jurisdiction at their request and turned over to the Owner at the end of construction as part of the O&M Manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section. B. Installer: Individuals performing work shall be certified by the manufacturer of the system selected for installation. 1.6 MEETINGS A. Pre-installation meeting: A pre-installation meeting shall be scheduled and shall include the Construction Manager, General Contractor, all Subcontractors associated with the installation of systems penetrating fire barriers, Firestopping Manufacturer’s Representative, and the Owner. 1. Review foreseeable methods related to firestopping work. 2. Tour representative areas where firestopping is to be installed; inspect and discuss each type of condition and each type of substrate that will be encountered, and preparation to be performed by other trades. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store, protect and handle products on site. Accept material on site in factory containers and packing. Inspect for damage. Protect from deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for storage. B. Install material prior to expiration of product shelf life. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide one year warranty on parts and labor. B. Warranty shall cover repair or replacement of firestop systems which fail in joint adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, stain resistance, general durability, or appear to deteriorate in any manner not clearly specified by the manufacturer as an inherent quality of the material. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the through- penetration firestop systems indicated for each application that are produced by one of the following manufacturers. All firestopping systems installed shall be provided by a single manufacturer. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 03 - 3 1. 3M; Fire Protection Produces Division. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. RectorSeal Corporation, Metacaulk. 4. Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division. 5. Johns-Manville. 6. Specified Technologies Inc. (S.T.I.) 7. Spec Seal Firestop Products 8. AD Firebarrier Protection Systems 2.2 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS A. Provide materials and systems classified by or listed by Warnock Hersey to provide firestopping equal to time rating of construction being penetrated. B. All firestopping materials shall be free of asbestos, lead, PCB’s, and other materials that would require hazardous waste removal. C. Firestopping shall be flexible to allow for normal penetrating item movement due to expansion and contraction. D. Firestopping systems for plumbing and wet pipe sprinkler piping shall be moisture resistant. E. Provide firestopping systems capable of supporting floor loads where systems are exposed to possible floor loading or traffic. F. Provide firestopping systems allowing continuous insulation for all insulated pipes. G. Provide firestopping systems classified by UL or listed by Warnock Hersey for penetrations through all fire rated construction. Firestopping systems shall be selected from the UL or listed by Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory Category XHEZ based on substrate construction and penetrating item size and material and shall fall within the range of numbers listed: 1. Combustible Framed Floors and Chase Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated F Rating = Floor/Wall Rating T Rating = Floor/Wall Rating L Rating = Penetrating Item UL System No. No Penetrating ItemFC 0000-0999* Metallic Pipe or ConduitFC 1000-1999 Non-Metallic Pipe or ConduitFC 2000-2999 Electrical Cables FC 3000-3999 Cable Trays FC 4000-4999 Insulated Pipes FC 5000-5999 Bus Duct and Misc. ElectricalFC 6000-6999 Duct without Damper and Misc. MechanicalFC 7000-7999 Multiple PenetrationsFC 8000-8999 UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 03 - 4 2. Non-Combustible Framed Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated F Rating = Wall Rating T Rating = 0 L Rating = UL System No. Penetrating Item No Penetrating ItemWL0000-0999* Metallic Pipe or ConduitWL 1000-1999 Non-Metallic Pipe or ConduitWL 2000-2999 Electrical CablesWL 3000-3999 Cable Trays WL 4000-4999 Insulated PipesWL 5000-5999 Bus Duct and Misc. ElectricalWL 6000-6999 Duct without Damper and Misc.MechanicalWL 7000-7999 Multiple PenetrationsWL 8000-8999 3. Concrete or Masonry Floors and Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated F Rating = Wall/Floor Rating T Rating (Walls) = 0 or Wall Rating T Rating (Floors) = Floor Rating L Rating = Penetrating ItemUL System No. No Penetrating ItemCAJ 0000-0999* Metallic Pipe or ConduitCAJ 1000-1999 Non-Metallic Pipe or ConduitCAJ 2000-2999 Electrical CablesCAJ 3000-3999 Cable Trays CAJ 4000-4999 Insulated PipesCAJ 5000-5999 Bus Duct and Misc. ElectricalCAJ 6000-6999 Duct without Damper and Misc. MechanicalCAJ 7000-7999 Multiple PenetrationsCAJ 8000-8999 *Alternate method of firestopping is patching opening to match original rated construction. H. Any opening in walls or floors not covered by the listed series of numbers shall be coordinated with the firestopping manufacturer. I. Any openings in floors or walls not described in the UL or listed by Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory, or outlined in manufacturer’s information shall be sealed in a manner agreed upon by the Firestopping Manufacturer, Owner, and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 03 - 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Ensure all surfaces that contact seal materials are free of dirt, dust, grease, oil, rust, or loose materials. Clean and repair surfaces as required. Remove laitance and form- release agents from concrete. B. Ensure substrate and penetrating items have been permanently installed prior to installing firestopping systems. Ensure penetrating items have been properly spaced and have proper clearance prior to installing firestopping systems. C. Surfaces to which sealing materials are to be installed must meet the selected UL or Warnock Hersey system substrate criteria. D. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer. Confine primer to area of bond. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. In existing construction, provide firestopping of openings prior to and after installation of penetrating items. Remove any existing coatings on surfaces prior to firestopping installation. Temporary firestopping shall consist of packing openings with fire resistant mineral wool for the full thickness of substrate, or an alternate method approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. All openings shall be temporarily firestopped immediately upon their installation and shall remain so until the permanent UL or listed by Warnock Hersey listed firestopping system is installed. B. Install penetration seal materials in accordance with printed instructions of the UL or Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory and with the manufacturer’s printed application instructions. C. Install dams as required to properly contain firestopping materials within openings and as required to achieve required fire resistance rating. Remove combustible damming after appropriate curing. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Clean excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not cause damage. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 03 - 6 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Provide and install labels adjacent to each firestopping location. Label shall be provided by the firestop system supplier and contain the following information in a contrasting color: 1. The words "Warning - Through Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Firestop System Supplier; UL or listed by Warnock Hersey system number; date installed; contractor name and phone number; manufacturer’s representative name, address, and phone number. 3.5 INSPECTION A. All penetrations shall be inspected by the manufacturer’s representative to ensure proper installation. B. Access to firestop systems shall be maintained for examination by the Authority Having Jurisdiction at their request. C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop system with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements. D. The contractor shall allow for visual destructive review of 5% of installed firestop systems (minimum of one) to prove compliance with specifications and manufacturer’s instructions and details. Destructive system removal shall be performed by the contractor and witnessed by the engineer and manufacturer’s factory representative. The engineer shall have sole discretion of which firestop system installations will be reviewed. The contractor is responsible for all costs associated with this requirement including labor and material for removing and replacing the installed firestop system. If any firestop system is found to not be installed per manufacturer’s specific instructions and details, all firestop systems are subject to destructive review and replacement at the engineer’s discretion and the contractor’s expense. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 03 - 7 PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 03 - 8 SECTION 21 05 29 FIRE SUPPRESSION SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hangers, Supports, and Associated Anchors. B. Sleeves and Seals. C. Cutting of Openings. D. Escutcheon Plates and Trim. 1.2 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. Furnish sleeves and hanger inserts to General Contractor for placement into formwork. 1.3 REFERENCES A. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, and Manufacture. B. MSS SP-69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. C. MSS SP-89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices. D. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Support Sprinkler Piping in conformance with NFPA 13. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 21 05 00. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HANGER RODS A. Hanger rods for single rod hangers shall conform to the following: Hanger Rod Diameter Pipe Size Column #1 Column #2 2" and smaller 3/8" 3/8" 2-1/2" through 3-1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 4" 5/8" 1/2" Column #1: Steel pipe. Column #2: Copper and plastic pipe. B. Rods for double rod hangers may be reduced one size. Minimum rod diameter is 3/8 inches. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIRE SUPPRESSION SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 29 - 1 C. Hanger rods and accessories used in mechanical spaces or otherwise dry areas shall have ASTM B633 electro-plated zinc finish. 2.2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. All pipe hangers, clamps, and supports shall conform to Manufacturers Standardization Society MSS-SP-69. B. Support and laterally brace vertical pipes at every floor level in multi-story structures, but never at intervals over 15 feet. Support vertical pipes with riser clamps installed below hubs, couplings or lugs welded to the pipe. Acceptable Products: Anvil - Fig. CT121 Cooper/B-Line - Fig. B3373CT Erico - Model 510 Nibco/Tolco - Fig. 82 C. Unless otherwise indicated, hangers shall be as follows: 1. Adjustable Swivel Ring Type: Service: Bare Metal Pipe - 4 inches and Smaller Acceptable Products: Bare Steel Pipe Bare Copper Pipe Anvil Fig. 69 Fig. CT69 Cooper/B-Line Fig. B3170NF Fig. B170CT Erico Model FCN Nibco/Tolco Fig. 200 Fig. 202 D. Support may be fabricated from U-Channel strut or similar shapes. Piping less than 4” in diameter shall be secured to strut with clamps of proper design and capacity as required to maintain spacing and alignment. Strut shall be independently supported from hanger drops or building structure. Size and support shall be per manufacturer’s installation requirements for structural support of piping. Clamps shall not interrupt piping insulation. 1. Strut used in mechanical spaces or otherwise dry areas shall have ASTM B633 electro-plated zinc finish. E. Unless otherwise indicated, pipe supports for use with struts shall be as follows: 1. Clamp Type: Service: Bare Metal Pipe Rigid Plastic Pipe a. Clamps in direct contact with copper pipe shall be plastic coated. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIRE SUPPRESSION SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 29 - 2 b. Pipes subject to expansion and contraction shall have clamps slightly oversized to allow limited pipe movement. Acceptable Products: Bare Steel, Plastic Bare Copper Pipe or Insulated Pipe Unistrut Fig. P1100 or P2500 Cooper/B-Line Fig. B2000 or B2400 Fig. BVT Nibco/Tolco Fig. A-14 or 2STR F. Unless otherwise shown, upper attachments for hanger rods or support struts shall be as follows: 1. Beam Clamps: Acceptable Products: Anvil Fig. 228, 292 Cooper/B-Line Fig. B3054 Erico Model 360 Nibco/Tolco Fig. 329 G. Wall supports shall be used where vertical height of structure exceeds minimum spacing requirements. Install wall supports at same spacing as hangers or strut supports along vertical length of pipe runs. H. Welding: 1. Unless otherwise noted, hangers, clips, and auxiliary support steel may be welded in lieu of bolting, clamping, or riveting to the building structural frame. Take adequate precautions during all welding operations for fire prevention and for protecting walls and ceilings from being damaged by smoke. 2.3 OPENINGS IN FLOORS, WALLS AND CEILINGS A. Exact locations of all openings for the installation of materials shall be determined by the Contractor and given to the General Contractor for installation or construction as the structure is built. B. Coordinate all openings with other Contractors. C. Hire the proper tradesman and furnish all labor, material and equipment to cut openings in or through existing structures, or openings in new structures that were not installed, or additional openings. Repair all spalling and damage to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer. Make saw cuts before breaking out concrete to ensure even and uniform opening edges. D. Said cutting shall be at the complete expense of each Contractor. Failure to coordinate openings with other Contractors shall not exempt the Contractor from providing openings at his expense. E. Do not cut structural members without written approval of the Architect or Structural Engineer. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIRE SUPPRESSION SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 29 - 3 2.4 ESCUTCHEON PLATES AND TRIM A. Fit escutcheons to all uninsulated exposed pipes passing through walls, floors, or ceilings of finished rooms. B. Escutcheons shall be heavy gauge, cold rolled steel, copper coated under a chromium plated finish, heavy spring clip, rigid hinge and latch. 2.5 PIPE PENETRATIONS A. Seal all pipe penetrations. Seal non-rated walls and floor penetrations with grout or caulk. Backing material may be used. B. Seal fire rated wall and floor penetrations with fire seal system as specified. 2.6 PIPE ANCHORS A. Provide all items needed to allow adequate expansion and contraction of all piping. All piping shall be supported, guided, aligned, and anchored as required. B. Repair all piping leaks and associated damage. Pipes shall not rub on any part of the building. 2.7 FINISH A. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FIRE SUPPRESSION SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS A. Install all items per manufacturer's instructions. B. Support all piping and equipment, including valves and other specialties and accessories to avoid objectionable or excessive stress, deflection, swaying, sagging or vibration in the piping or building structure during erection, cleaning, testing and normal operation of the systems. C. Do not, however, restrain piping to cause it to snake or buckle between supports or to prevent proper movement due to expansion and contraction. D. Support piping at equipment and valves so they can be disconnected and removed without further supporting the piping. E. Piping shall not introduce strains or distortion to connected equipment. F. Install hangers and supports complete with lock nuts, clamps, rods, bolts, couplings, swivels, inserts and required accessories. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIRE SUPPRESSION SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 29 - 4 G. Hangers for horizontal piping shall have adequate means of vertical adjustment for alignment. H. Parallel horizontal pipes may be supported on trapeze hangers made of structural shapes and hanger rods; otherwise, pipes shall be supported with individual hangers. I. Trapeze hangers may be used where ducts interfere with normal pipe hanging. J. Coordinate the location and method of support of piping systems with all installations under other Divisions and Sections of the Specifications. K. Provided the installation complies with all loading requirements of truss and joist manufacturers, the following practices are acceptable: 1. Loads of 100 lbs. or less may be attached anywhere along the top or bottom chords of trusses or joists with a minimum 3’spacing between loads. 2. Loads greater than 100 lbs. must be hung concentrically and may be hung from top or bottom chord, provided one of the following conditions is met: a. The hanger is attached within 6” from a web/chord joint. b. Additional L2x2x1/4 web reinforcement is installed per manufacturer’s requirements. 3. It is prohibited to cantilever a load using an angle or other structural component that is attached to a truss or joist in such a fashion that a torsional force is applied to that structural member. 4. If conditions cannot be met, coordinate installation with truss or joist manufacturer and contact Architect/Engineer. L. Do not exceed the manufacturer's recommended maximum load for any hanger or support. M. Provide additional supports where pipe changes direction, adjacent to flanged valves at equipment connections and heavy fittings. N. Provide at least one hanger adjacent to each joint in grooved end steel pipe with mechanical couplings. O. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. P. Spacing of Hangers shall in no case shall exceed the following: Pipe Material Maximum Spacing 1. Steel (Std. Weight or Heavier – Liquid Service): 1-1/4" & under 7'-0" 1-1/2" 9'-0" 2" 10'-0" 2-1/2" 11'-0" UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIRE SUPPRESSION SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 29 - 5 Pipe Material Maximum Spacing 3" 12'-0" 4" & larger 12'-0" 2. Rigid Plastic Pipe: a. Space hangers at 4’-0” maximum centers. 3. Installation of hangers shall conform to MSS SP-69, MSS SP-89 and applicable NFPA standards. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIRE SUPPRESSION SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 29 - 6 SECTION 21 05 53 FIRE SUPPRESSION IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Identification of products installed under Division 21. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Include valve chart and schedule listing valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. 3M, Bunting, Calpico, Craftmark, Emedco, Kolbi Industries, Seton, W.H. Brady, Marking Services. 2.2 MATERIALS A. All pipe markers (purchased or stenciled) shall conform to ANSI A13.1. Marker lengths and letter sizes shall be at least the following: O.D. of Pipe or insulation Marker Length Size of Letters Up to and including 1-8” 1/2” 1/4” 1-1/2” to 2” 8” 3/4” 2-1/2” to 6” 12” 1-1/4 Plastic tags may be used for outside diameters under 3/4". B. Brass Tags: Brass background with engraved black letters. Tag size minimum 1-1/2" square or 1-1/2" round. C. Plastic Pipe Markers: Semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering; indicating flow direction and fluid conveyed. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIRE SUPPRESSION IDENTIFICATION APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 53 - 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install all products per manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. C. Valves: 1. All valves (except shut-off valves at equipment) shall have numbered tags. 2. Secure tags with heavy duty key chain and brass "S" link or with mechanically fastened plastic straps. 3. Attach to handwheel or around valve stem. On lever operated valves, drill the lever to attach tags. 4. Number all tags and show the service of the pipe. 5. Provide two sets of laminated 8-1/2" x 11" copies of a valve directory listing all valves, with respective tag numbers, uses, and locations. The directory shall be reviewed by the Owner and Engineer prior to laminating final copies. Laminated copies shall have brass eyelet in at least one corner for easy hanging. D. Pipe Markers: 1. Adhesive Backed Markers: Use Brady Style 1, 2, or 3 on pipes 3" diameter and larger. Use Brady Style 4, 6, or 8 on pipes under 3" diameter. Similar styles by other listed manufacturers are acceptable. Secure all markers at both ends with a wrap of pressure sensitive tape completely around the pipe. 2. Apply markers and arrows in the following locations where clearly visible: a. At each valve. b. On both sides of walls that pipes penetrate. c. At least every 20 feet along all pipes. d. On each riser and each leg of each "T" joint. e. At least once in every room and each story traversed. E. Equipment: 1. All equipment not easily identifiable such as controls, relays, gauges, etc.; and all equipment in an area remote from its function shall have nameplates or plastic tags listing name, function, and drawing symbol. Do not label exposed equipment in public areas. 2. Fasten nameplates or plastic tags with stainless steel self-tapping screws or permanently bonding cement. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIRE SUPPRESSION IDENTIFICATION APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 53 - 2 3. Mechanical equipment that is not covered by the U.S. National Appliance Energy Conservation Act (NAECA) of 1987 shall carry a permanent label installed by the manufacturer stating that the equipment complies with the requirements of Standard 90.1. 3.2 SCHEDULE A. Pipes to be marked: Lettering Background Pipe Service ColorColor Fire Protection Water WhiteRed END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIRE SUPPRESSION IDENTIFICATION APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 53 - 3 PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIRE SUPPRESSION IDENTIFICATION APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 05 53 - 4 SECTION 21 13 00 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, Fittings, Valves, and Connections for Fire Protection System. B. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 150 and 300. B. ANSI/ASME B16.4 - Cast Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 125 and 250. C. ANSI/ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. D. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless. E. IBC - International Building Code. F. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. G. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems. H. NFPA 13R - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems in Residential Occupancies up to and Including Four Stories in Height. I. NFPA 25 - Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems. J. UL - Underwriter’s Laboratory Fire Protection Equipment Directory. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System shall cover building areas noted. B. System shall interface with building fire alarm system. C. Provide wet pipe sprinkler system(s) to NFPA 13R and building code requirements as required by Owner’s insurance company and as shown on the drawings. D. Provide a Fire Department connection. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equipment and Components: Bear UL label or marking. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 13 00 - 1 B. Valves: Bear UL label or marking. Provide manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. Pressure rating shall match specified pipe system pressure rating. Remanufactured valves are not acceptable. C. Specialist Firm: Company specializing in sprinkler systems with minimum three years experience. D. Sprinkler design drawings submitted by the contractor shall be designed, certified, and shall include the NICET certification block or the Professional Engineer seal of the fire protection designer. Fire protection designer shall be NICET Level III or Level IV certified or be a licensed Professional Engineer. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. All material, equipment, and installation shall be approved by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction and the Owner’s Insurance Company. B. The Authorities Having Jurisdiction and the Owner’s Insurance Company shall have precedence over the drawings and specifications in case of discrepancies. C. The entire installation shall comply with all applicable codes. 1.6 SYSTEM DESIGN A. Design and install a complete, hydraulically calculated wet-pipe sprinkler system for the entire building. B. Provide all required equipment and accessories. C. System shall include a 5 psi allowance for future decrease in available pressure and an allowance for outside hose streams. D. Provide monitor switches on all shut-off valves. E. Install sprinkler riser in location shown on drawings or as approved by the Architect/Engineer. F. Coordinate with Plumbing Contractor for installation of a floor drain with collection funnel below the backflow preventer. G. Provide service shut-off valve in the sprinkler main with a post indicator wall indicator assembly. H. Provide pressure gauge with valve in the main riser. I. Provide main drain valve piped to outside the building. Locate so discharge does not damage lawn or other surfaces. J. Provide flow switch in the main riser and as indicated on drawings. K. Provide horn and strobe. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 13 00 - 2 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings per Section 21 05 00. Indicate pipe materials, joining methods, supports, floor and wall penetration seals, sprinklers, equipment data and ratings, and hydraulic calculations. B. Submit detailed pipe and sprinkler layout and other calculations and forms as described in NFPA 13. C. Submit detailed working drawings and obtain review of them in the following order: 1. Engineer/Architect. 2. State Fire Marshal/Authority Having Jurisdiction 3. Owner’s Insurance Company 4. Architect/Engineer 5. Local Fire Department 6. Owner’s Insurance Company 7. Architect/Engineer Begin construction after all approvals are received. D. Working drawings shall include piping and sprinkler layout, sprinkler types and ratings, sections and elevations at critical points. Show coordination with lighting, ductwork, and diffusers, and indicate basic flow and hydraulic design information, including main location and date that the test was taken. E. Provide the Owner with one copy of NFPA 25. Standard for the Inspection Testing and Maintenance of Water-based Fire Protection Systems. 1.8 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Reference Coordination Drawings article in Section 21 05 00 for required fire protection systems electronic CAD drawings to be provided to Coordinating Contractor for inclusion into composite coordination drawings. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store valves and sprinklers in shipping containers, with labels in place. B. Provide temporary protective coating on iron and steel valves. C. Maintain temporary end caps and closures in place until installation. 1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit manufacturers’ operation and maintenance data. Include written maintenance data on components of system, servicing requirements, and record drawings. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 13 00 - 3 1.11 JOB CONDITIONS A. Fire Protection Contractor shall determine the flow and pressure available at the service connection. The Fire Protection Contractor is responsible to verify this information and make all tests required. Base all pipe sizing and hydraulic calculations on flow test data no older than 18 months. B. Pipe sizing shown on drawings for service entrance and main risers is preliminary for coordination purposes only. Contractor is responsible for final sizing from hydraulic calculations. 1.12 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide metal storage cabinet, wrenches for each sprinkler type, and extra sprinklers per NFPA 13 and applicable building code. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe (Inside Building-Above Grade): 1. Pipe: 2" and Under - Schedule 40, black steel, ASTM A53. Threaded and coupled or flanged. 2. Joints: 2" and under - screwed or flanged. 3. Fittings: Screwed - cast iron, 125 lb., black, ANSI/ASME B16.4 or malleable iron, 150 lb., black, ANSI/ASME B16.3. Flanged-cast iron, 125 lb., ANSI/ASME B16.1. B. Steel Pipe (Inside Building-Above Grade): 1. Pipe: 2-1/2" and Over - Schedule 10, black steel, grooved, ASTM A135. [*****OR*****] 2. Pipe: 2-1/2" and Over - Schedule 40, black steel, grooved, ASTM A53. 3. Joints: Mechanically coupled grooved. 4. Fittings: 500 lb. WOG, black, malleable iron, ASTM A47. 5. Plain end fittings and couplings are not acceptable. C. CPVC (Inside Building-Above Grade) Contractor's Option: 1. Pipe 3"and under: Pipe shall be post-chlorinated polyvinyl chloride and meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM F442 in standard dimension ratio (SDR) 13.5. Pipe shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories for use in wet automatic fire sprinkler systems and shall bear the logo of the listing agency. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 13 00 - 4 2. Joints - Solvent Cement Type Joints: All socket type joints shall be made by employing solvent cements that meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM F493. The standard practice for safe handling of solvent cements shall be in accordance with ASTM F402. Solvent cement shall be listed by NSF International for use with potable water and approved by the CPVC manufacturer. 3. Fittings: Fittings shall meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM F437 (Schedule 80 threaded), ASTM F438 (Schedule 40 socket) and ASTM F439 (Schedule 80 socket). Fittings shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories for use in wet automatic fire sprinkler systems and shall bear the logo of the listing agency. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Tyco Fire Products, 451 N. Cannon Avenue, Lansdale, PA 19446, phone: 215-362-0700, fax: 215-362-5385. b. Viking Corporation, 210 N. Industrial Park Road, Hastings, MI 49058, phone: 269-945-9501, fax: 269-945-9599. D. Fire Protection Service to Building (by others): 1. Refer to Section 22 10 00. 2.2 UNIONS AND COUPLINGS A. Unions: 175 psi malleable iron for threaded ferrous piping. B. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, designed to permit some angular and longitudinal deflection; “C” shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers. 175 psi, ASTM A47. Plain end fittings and couplings are not acceptable. Rolled groove couplings for Schedule 10 pipe. Cut groove couplings for Schedule 40 pipe. Couplings shall be enamel coated for wet systems. Acceptable Manufacturers: Victaulic, ITT, Grinnell, Central, Anvil GruvLok, Star Fittings. C. Coupling gaskets for wet systems shall be Grade “E” EDPM Type A. 2.3 VALVE OPERATORS A. Provide handwheels for gate valves. Provide gear operators for butterfly valves. 2.4 VALVE CONNECTIONS A. Provide all connections to match pipe joints. Valves shall be same size as pipe. 2.5 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Provide backflow preventers as required by code and as specified on the drawings. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 13 00 - 5 2.6 EQUIPMENT A. Equipment shall be as scheduled on the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - PIPING A. Coordinate piping and sprinkler locations with all other trades. Ductwork, diffusers and light fixture locations shall have priority over sprinkler piping and sprinklers. B. Ream pipe and tube ends to full inside diameter. Remove burrs. Remove scale and foreign material, inside and outside, before assembly. C. Die cut screw joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads. D. Coat threads with pipe joint compound or wrap with Teflon tape. E. In steel piping, main sized saddle branch connections or direct connection of branches to main is permitted if main is one pipe size larger than the branch for up to 6" mains. F. Provide sleeves when penetrating floors and walls. G. Fire seal all pipe and sleeve penetrations (both wall and floor) to maintain fire separation required without restraining pipe. H. Locate piping to minimize obstruction of other work. I. Route piping in concealed spaces above finished ceiling. J. Use full and double lengths of pipe wherever possible. K. Do not install piping or other equipment above electrical switchboards or panelboards. This includes a dedicated space extending 25 feet from the floor to the structural ceiling with width and depth equal to the equipment. Fire protection equipment dedicated to the electrical equipment room or space may be installed above equipment if other alternatives are not available. L. Provide hangers and supports as required by NFPA 13 and UL, with the following exceptions: 1. Do not use powder driven devices, explosive devices, wooden plugs, or plastic inserts. 2. Do not install fasteners to carry the load in tension, unless absolutely necessary. M. Slope all piping for complete drainage. Install auxiliary drains for all trapped piping per NFPA 13. N. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons where exposed pipes penetrate walls or floors. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 13 00 - 6 O. Reducers are generally not shown. Where pipe sizes change at tee, the tee shall be the size of the largest pipe shown connecting to it. P. Comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions. 3.2 INSTALLATION - VALVES A. Install gate valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. B. Backflow Preventer: 1. Units shall be field tested and tagged in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions by a certified tester before initial operation. 2. Install unit between 12" and 60" above finish floor. C. Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus. 3.3 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT A. Coordinate piping and sprinkler locations with all other trades. Ductwork, diffusers and light fixture locations shall have priority over system equipment and sprinklers. B. Locate fire department connection in an accessible location as approved by the local fire department with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions, and adjacent Siamese connectors to allow full swing of fire department wrench handle. C. Locate outside horn and strobe on building wall as shown on drawings. D. Install test valves where required. Pipe to outdoors or drain. Test connection shall have flow equivalent to the smallest K-factor sprinkler. E. Locate sprinklers to clear lights, ducts and diffusers. Do not run sprinkler pipes through ducts. Ductwork has priority over sprinkler pipes. Offset pipes as needed. F. Center sprinklers in two directions in ceiling tiles and provide offsets as required. G. Do not allow concealed sprinkler cover plates to be painted. Sprinkler cover plates are to be factory painted only. Do not field paint. H. Apply strippable or paper covers so concealed sprinkler cover plates do not receive field paint finish. 3.4 SYSTEMS CLEANING AND TESTING A. Flush all interior piping to remove scale and other foreign material before placing system into service. B. Hydrostatically test the entire interior piping system at a minimum of 200 psig or 50 psig in excess of the normal system working pressure for systems subjected to pressures in excess of 150 psig. Maintain test pressure for 2 hours without loss of pressure. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 13 00 - 7 C. Verify adequate water flow at the inspector's test connection. D. Test the alarm system by operating the inspector's test connection or the alarm test valves. Verify that the building fire alarm system activates. E. Adjust all monitor switches for proper operation. F. All water used for testing and remaining in the piping system shall be obtained from a potable water source. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 21 13 00 - 8 SECTION 21 05 00 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Requirements applicable to all Division 23 Sections. Also refer to Division 1 - General Requirements. B. All materials and installation methods shall conform to the applicable standards, guidelines and codes referenced in the specification section. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Specification and the associated drawings govern the furnishing, installing, testing and placing into satisfactory operation the Mechanical Systems. B. Each Contractor shall provide all new materials indicated on the drawings and/or in these specifications, and all items required to make his portion of the Mechanical Work a finished and working system. C. All work will be awarded under a single General Contract. The division of work listed below is for the Contractor's convenience and lists normal breakdown of the work. D. Scope of Work: 1. Plumbing Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to: a. Furnish and install all items listed in the Plumbing Material List. b. Furnish and install a new domestic water service to each building. c. Furnish and install water meters and domestic water backflow preventers as required by Code. d. Furnish and install a complete domestic water piping system including cold, hot, and hot water circulating piping within the building. Insulate all piping as specified. e. Furnish and install gas piping system including all meter requirements. f. Furnish and install water heaters. g. Furnish and install condensate drain piping from plumbing related equipment such as ice machines. h. Furnish and install a complete sanitary sewer and vent system. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 05 00 - 1 i. Furnish and install condensate drain piping from cooling related equipment such as cooling coil drain pans and furnace combustion burners. j. Furnish and install firestopping systems for penetrations of fire-rated construction associated with this Contractor’s work. k. Furnish and install new fire protection service to each building. 2. Heating, Air Conditioning and Ventilating Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to: a. Furnish and install indoor furnaces complete with burners, filters, coils, fans, and motors. b. Furnish and install package outdoor air handling units complete with pads. c. Furnish and install air-cooled condensing units and pads. d. Furnish and install complete supply air ductwork systems including all fittings, insulation, and outlets. e. Furnish and install complete return air ductwork systems including all fittings, insulation, and inlets. f. Furnish and install combustion air piping and terminations. g. Furnish and install complete exhaust ductwork systems including all fittings, insulation, inlets, and fans. h. Furnish and install gas flues and terminations. i. Furnish and install all temperature control systems. j. Furnish and install all fire dampers. k. Furnish and install firestopping systems for penetrations of fire-rated construction associated with this Contractor’s work. l. Furnish and install refrigerant piping, accessories, and final charge of refrigerant. 3. Fire Protection Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to: a. Furnish and install a complete wet pipe sprinkler system for areas noted on the drawings. b. Furnish and install all items listed on the Fire Protection Material List. c. Furnish all hydraulic calculations and working sprinkler drawings. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 05 00 - 2 d. Furnish and install a new fire protection service to each building including backflow preventer as required by Code. 4. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to: a. Furnish complete testing, adjusting, and balancing as specified in Section 23 05 93, including, but not limited to, air systems, plumbing systems, and verification of control systems. 1.3 DIVISION OF WORK BETWEEN MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS A. Definitions: 1. "Mechanical Contractors" refers to the following: a. Plumbing Contractor. b. Heating, Air Conditioning and Ventilating Contractor. c. Fire Protection Contractor. d. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Contractor. 2. Motor Control Wiring: The wiring associated with the remote operation of the magnetic coils of magnetic motor starters or relays, or the wiring that permits direct cycling of motors by means of devices in series with the motor power wiring. In the latter case the devices are usually single phase and are usually connected to the motor power wiring through a manual motor starter having "Manual-Off-Auto" provisions. 3. Control devices such as start-stop push buttons, thermostats, relays, etc., generally represent the types of equipment associated with motor control wiring. 4. Motor control wiring is single phase and usually 120 volts. In some instances, the voltage will be the same as the motor power wiring. Generally, where the motor power wiring exceeds 120 volts, a control transformer is used to give a control voltage of 120 volts. 5. Temperature Control Wiring: The wiring associated with the operation of a motorized damper, solenoid valve or motorized valve, etc., either modulating or two-position, as opposed to wiring which directly powers or controls a motor used to drive equipment such as fans, pumps, etc. a. This wiring will be from a 120 volt source and may continue as 120 volt, or be reduced in voltage (24 volt) in which case a control transformer shall be furnished as part of the temperature control wiring. 6. Control Motor: An electric device used to operate dampers, valves, etc. It may be two-position or modulating. Conventional characteristics of such a motor are 24 volts, 60 cycles, 1 phase, although other voltages may be encountered. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 05 00 - 3 B. General: 1. The purpose of these Specifications is to outline the Electrical and Mechanical Contractor's responsibilities related to electrical work required for items such as temperature controls, mechanical equipment, fans, and the like. The exact wiring requirements for much of the equipment cannot be determined until the systems have been selected and submittals reviewed. Therefore, the electrical drawings show only known wiring related to such items. All wiring not shown on the electrical drawings, but required for mechanical systems, is the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor. 2. Where the drawings require the Electrical Contractor to wire between equipment furnished by the Mechanical Contractor, such wiring shall terminate at terminals provided in the equipment. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide complete wiring diagrams and supervision to the Electrical Contractor and designate the terminal numbers for correct wiring. 3. All electrical work shall conform to the National Electrical Code. All provisions of the Electrical Specifications concerning wiring, protection, etc., apply to wiring provided by the Mechanical Contractor unless noted otherwise. C. Mechanical Contractor's Responsibility: 1. Assumes responsibility for internal wiring of all equipment provided by the Mechanical Contractor, for example: a. Condensing Units. b. Package Air Handling Units. 2. Assumes all responsibility for the Temperature Control wiring, when the Temperature Control Contractor is a Subcontractor to the Mechanical Contractor. 3. Temperature Control Subcontractor's Responsibility: a. Wiring of all devices needed to make the Temperature Control System functional. b. Verifying any control wiring on the electrical drawings as being by the Electrical Contractor. All wiring required for the Control System, but not shown on the electrical drawings, is the responsibility of the Temperature Control Subcontractor. c. Coordinating equipment locations (such as P.E.'s, E.P.'s, relays, transformers, etc.) with the Electrical Contractor, where wiring of the equipment is by the Electrical Contractor. 4. This Contractor is responsible for coordination of utilities with all other Contractors. If any field coordination conflicts are found, the Contractor shall coordinate with other Contractors to determine a viable layout. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 05 00 - 4 D. Electrical Contractor's Responsibility: 1. Provides all combination starters, manual starters and disconnect devices shown on the Electrical Drawings or indicated to be by the Electrical Contractor on the Mechanical Drawings or Specifications. 2. Installs and wires all remote control devices furnished by the Mechanical Contractor or Temperature Control Subcontractor when so noted on the Electrical Drawings. 3. Provides motor control and temperature control wiring, where so noted on the drawings. 4. Furnishes, installs and connects all relays, etc., for automatic shutdown of certain fans upon actuation of the Fire Alarm System as indicated and specified in Division 28. 5. This Contractor is responsible for coordination of utilities with all other Contractors. If any field coordination conflicts are found, the Contractor shall coordinate with other Contractors to determine a viable layout. 1.4 COORDINATION PROCESS A. Definitions: 1. The contractors shall use the coordination process to identify the proper sequence of installation of all utilities above ceilings and in other congested areas, to ensure an orderly and coordinated end result, and to provide adequate access for service and maintenance. B. Participation: 1. All contractors and subcontractors responsible for work defined above shall participate in the coordination process. C. General: 1. The contract drawings are schematic in nature and do not show every fitting and appurtenance for each utility. Each contractor is expected to have included in his/her bid sufficient fittings, material, and labor to allow for adjustments in routing of utilities made necessary by the coordination process and to provide a complete and functional system. 2. The contractors will not be allowed additional costs or time extensions due to participation in the coordination process. 3. The contractors will not be allowed additional costs or time extensions for additional fittings, reroutings or changes of duct size, that are essentially equivalent sizes to those shown on the drawings and determined necessary through the coordination process. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 05 00 - 5 4. The A/E reserves the right to determine space priority of equipment in the event of spatial conflicts or interference between equipment, piping, conduit, ducts, and equipment provided by the trades. 5. Changes to the contract documents that are necessary for systems installation and coordination shall be brought to the attention of the A/E. 6. Access panels shall preferably occur only in gypsum board walls or plaster ceilings where indicated on the drawings. a. Access to mechanical, electrical, technology, and other items located above the ceiling shall be through accessible lay-in ceiling tile areas. b. Potential layout changes shall be made to avoid additional access panels. c. Additional access panels shall not be allowed without written approval from the A/E at the coordination drawing stage. d. Providing additional access panels shall be considered after other alternatives are reviewed and discarded by the A/E and the Owner's Representative. e. When additional access panels are required, they shall be provided without additional cost to the Owner. 7. Conflicts that result shall be the responsibility of the contractor or subcontractor who did not properly identify their work requirements, or installed their work without proper coordination. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor’s Responsibility Prior to Submitting Pricing Data: 1. The Contractor is responsible for constructing complete and operating systems. The Contractor acknowledges and understands that the Contract Documents are a two-dimensional representation of a three-dimensional object, subject to human interpretation. This representation may include imperfect data, interpreted codes, utility guidelines, three-dimensional conflicts, and required field coordination items. Such deficiencies can be corrected when identified prior to ordering material and starting installation. The Contractor agrees to carefully study and compare the individual Contract Documents and report at once in writing to the Design Team any deficiencies the Contractor may discover. The Contractor further agrees to require each subcontractor to likewise study the documents and report at once any deficiencies discovered. 2. The Contractor shall resolve all reported deficiencies with the Architect/Engineer prior to awarding any subcontracts, ordering material, or starting any work with the Contractor’s own employees. Any work performed prior to receipt of instructions from the Design Team will be done at the Contractor’s risk. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 05 00 - 6 B. Qualifications: 1. Only products of reputable manufacturers are acceptable. 2. All Contractors and subcontractors shall employ only workers skilled in their trades. C. Compliance with Codes, Laws, Ordinances: 1. Conform to all requirements of the City of Iowa City, Iowa’s Codes, Laws, Ordinances and other regulations having jurisdiction. 2. Conform to all State Codes. 3. If there is a discrepancy between the codes and regulations and these specifications, the Engineer shall determine the method or equipment used. 4. If the Contractor notes, at the time of bidding, any parts of the drawings or specifications that do not comply with the codes or regulations, he shall inform the Architect/Engineer in writing, requesting a clarification. If there is insufficient time for this procedure, he shall submit with his proposal a separate price to make the system comply with the codes and regulations. 5. All changes to the system made after letting of the contract, to comply with codes or requirements of Inspectors, shall be made by the Contractor without cost to the Owner. 6. If there is a discrepancy between manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications, the manufacturer's recommendations shall govern. 7. All rotating shafts and/or equipment shall be completely guarded from all contact. Partial guards and/or guards that do not meet all applicable OSHA standards are not acceptable. Contractor is responsible for providing this guarding if it is not provided with the equipment supplied. D. Permits, Fees, Taxes, Inspections: 1. Procure all applicable permits and licenses. 2. Abide by all laws, regulations, ordinances, and other rules of the State or Political Subdivision where the work is done, or as required by any duly constituted public authority. 3. Pay all charges for permits or licenses. 4. Pay all fees and taxes imposed by the State, Municipal and/or other regulatory bodies. 5. Pay all charges arising out of required inspections by an authorized body. 6. Pay all charges arising out of required contract document reviews associated with the project and as initiated by the Owner or authorized agency/consultant. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 05 00 - 7 7. Where applicable, all fixtures, equipment and materials shall be approved or listed by Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. E. Examination of Drawings: 1. The drawings for the mechanical work are completely diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of the work and to indicate the general arrangements and locations of equipment, outlets, etc., and the approximate sizes of equipment. 2. Contractor shall determine the exact locations of equipment and rough-ins, and the exact routing of pipes and ducts to best fit the layout of the job. 3. Scaling of the drawings is not sufficient or accurate for determining these locations. 4. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated arrangements and locations, such changes shall be made by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 5. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items, such as fittings, boxes, valves, unions, etc., may not be shown, but where required by other sections of the specifications or required for proper installation of the work, such items shall be furnished and installed. 6. If an item is either on the drawings or in the specifications, it shall be included in this contract. 7. Determination of quantities of material and equipment required shall be made by the Contractor from the documents. Where discrepancies arise between drawings, schedules and/or specifications, the greater number shall govern. 8. Where used in mechanical documents, the word "furnish" shall mean supply for use, the word "install" shall mean connect complete and ready for operation, and the word "provide" shall mean to supply for use and connect complete and ready for operation. a. Any item listed as furnished shall also be installed, unless otherwise noted. b. Any item listed as installed shall also be furnished, unless otherwise noted. F. Field Measurements: 1. Verify all pertinent dimensions at the job site before ordering any materials or fabricating any supports, pipes or ducts. G. Electronic Media/Files: 1. Construction drawings for this project have been prepared utilizing AutoCAD MEP. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 05 00 - 8 2. Contractors and Subcontractors may request electronic media files of the contract drawings and/or copies of the specifications. Specifications will be provided in PDF format. 3. Upon request for electronic media, the Contractor shall complete and return a signed “Electronic File Transmittal” form provided by KJWW. 4. If the information requested includes floor plans prepared by others, the Contractor will be responsible for obtaining approval from the appropriate Design Professional for use of that part of the document. 5. The electronic contract documents can be used for preparation of shop drawings and as-built drawings only. The information may not be used in whole or in part for any other project. 6. The drawings prepared by KJWW for bidding purposes may not be used directly for ductwork layout drawings. 7. The use of these CAD documents by the Contractor does not relieve them from their responsibility for coordination of work with other trades and verification of space available for the installation. 8. The information is provided to expedite the project and assist the Contractor with no guarantee by KJWW as to the accuracy or correctness of the information provided. KJWW accepts no responsibility or liability for the Contractor’s use of these documents. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be required for the following items, and for additional items where required elsewhere in the specifications or on the drawings. 1. Submittals list: Referenced Submittal Item Specification Section 21 05 00 Owner Training Agenda 21 13 00 Sprinkler Systems 21 13 00 Fire Protection Equipment B. In addition to the provisions of Division 1, the following provisions are required: 1. Submittals shall include all fabrication, erection, layout, and setting drawings; manufacturers' standard drawings; schedules; descriptive literature, catalogs and brochures; performance and test data; wiring and control diagrams; and all other drawings and descriptive data of materials of construction as may be required to show that the materials, equipment or systems and the location thereof conform to the requirements of the contract documents. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 05 00 - 9 2. The Contractor shall submit one electronic copy of each shop drawing for review by the Architect/Engineer BEFORE releasing any equipment for manufacture or shipment. 3. Shop drawings which are larger than 11" x 17" or are plan size layout or erection drawings such as sprinkler system drawings shall be submitted on reproducible media. Submit one reproducible and one print of each drawing or plan. All Contractor approval stamps shall be made on the reproducible. 4. The Contractor shall thoroughly review and approve all shop drawings before submitting them to the Architect/Engineer. CONTRACTOR’S APPROVAL STAMP IS REQUIRED ON ALL SUBMITTALS. APPROVAL WILL INDICATE THE CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW of all material and a COMPLETE UNDERSTANDING OF EXACTLY WHAT IS TO BE FURNISHED. Contractor shall clearly mark all deviations from the contract documents on all submittals. IF DEVIATIONS ARE NOT MARKED BY THE CONTRACTOR, THEN THE ITEM SHALL BE REQUIRED TO MEET ALL DRAWING AND SPECIFICATION REQUIREMENTS. 5. The Contractor shall clearly mark each item with the same nomenclature applied on the drawings or in the specifications. 6. The Contractor shall clearly indicate the size, finish, material, etc. 7. Assemble and submit by specification section numbers for all submittals. All sets shall be identical and contain an index of the items enclosed with a general topic description on the cover. 8. Each set shall be bound in a manufacturer's folder or inside of a manila file folder. 9. Where more than one model is shown on a manufacturer's sheet, the Contractor shall clearly indicate exactly which item and which data is relevant to the work. 10. Failure to comply with the above shall be reason to resubmit all shop drawing submittals. 11. The Engineer's responsibility shall be to review one set of shop drawing submittals for each product. If the first submittal is incomplete or does not comply with the drawings and/or specifications, the Contractor shall be responsible to bear the cost for the Engineer to recheck and handle the additional shop drawing submittals. C. Provide Schedule of Values: 1. Application forms: Use AIA Document Continuation Sheets G703 (or similar) as the form for application. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 05 00 - 10 2. Provide line items on the Schedule of Values including: a. Mechanical Contractor General Conditions (mobilization, bonds, insurance, etc.) b. Fire Protection 3. Change orders shall have schedule of values broken out as listed above submitted with each change order. 4. Coordinate with the Project Engineer the items included in the Schedule of Values. The intent is to not create schedules in addition to those the Fire Protection Contractor normally submits to the General Contractor for payment. 1.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS' INSPECTION A. The following equipment shall not be placed in operation until a competent installation and service representative of the manufacturer has inspected the installation and certified that the equipment is properly installed, adjusted and lubricated; that preliminary operating instructions have been given; and that the equipment is ready for operation: 1. Fire Seal Systems B. Contractor shall arrange for and obtain supplier's on-site inspection(s) at proper time(s) to assure each phase of equipment installation and/or connection is in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. C. Submit copies of start-up reports to the Architect/Engineer and include copies of Owner’s Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING & MAINTENANCE A. Exercise care in transporting and handling to avoid damage to materials. Store materials on the site to prevent damage. Keep materials clean, dry and free from harmful conditions. Immediately remove any materials that become wet or that are suspected of becoming contaminated with mold or other organisms. B. Contractor is responsible for moving equipment into the building and/or site. Contractor shall review site prior to bid for path locations and any required building modifications to allow movement of equipment. Contractor shall coordinate his/her work with other trades. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Provide one-year warranty, unless otherwise noted, to the Owner for all equipment, materials, and workmanship. B. The warranty period for all work in this Division of the specifications shall commence on the date of final acceptance, unless a whole or partial system or any separate piece of equipment or component is put into use for the benefit of any party other than the installing contractor with prior written authorization. In this instance, the warranty period UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 05 00 - 11 shall commence on the date when such whole system, partial system or separate piece of equipment or component is placed in operation and accepted in writing by the Owner. C. Warranty requirements shall extend to correction, without cost to the Owner, of all Work found to be defective or nonconforming to the contract documents. The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting all damage resulting from defects or nonconformance with contract documents. 1.10 INSURANCE A. Contractor shall maintain insurance coverage as set forth in Division 0 of these specifications. 1.11 MATERIAL SUBSTITUTION A. Where several manufacturers’ names are given, the manufacturer for which a catalog number is given is the basis for job design and establishes the quality required. B. Equivalent equipment manufactured by the other named manufacturers may be used. Contractor shall ensure that all items submitted by these other manufacturers meet all requirements of the drawings and specifications, and fits in the allocated space. C. Any material, article or equipment of other unnamed manufacturers which will adequately perform the services and duties imposed by the design and is of a quality equal to or better than the material, article or equipment identified by the drawings and specifications may be used if approval is secured in writing from the Architect/Engineer not later than ten days prior to the bid opening. D. This Contractor assumes all costs incurred as a result of using the offered material, article or equipment, on his part or on the part of other Contractors whose work is affected. E. This Contractor may list voluntary add or deduct prices for alternate materials on the bid form. These items will not be used in determining the low bidder. F. All material substitutions requested later than ten (10) days prior to bid opening must be listed as voluntary changes on the bid form. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 JOBSITE SAFETY A. Neither the professional activities of the Engineer, nor the presence of the Engineer or his or her employee and subconsultants at a construction site, shall relieve the Contractor and other entity of their obligations, duties and responsibilities including, but not limited to, construction means, methods, sequence, techniques or procedures UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 05 00 - 12 necessary for performing, superintending or coordinating all portions of the work of construction in accordance with the contract documents and any health or safety precautions required by any regulatory agencies. The Engineer and his or her personnel have no authority to exercise any control over any construction contractor or other entity or their employees in connection with their work or any health or safety precautions. The Contractor is solely responsible for jobsite safety. The Engineer and the Engineer’s consultants shall be indemnified and shall be made additional insureds under the Contractor’s general liability insurance policy. 3.2 ENGINEER OBSERVATION OF WORK A. The Contractor shall provide seven (7) calendar days notice to the Engineer prior to: 1. Covering exterior walls, interior partitions and chases. 2. Installing hard or suspended ceilings and soffits. B. The Engineer will have the opportunity to review the installation and provide a written report noting deficiencies requiring correction. The Contractor’s schedule shall account for these reviews and show them as line items in the approved schedule. C. Above-Ceiling Final Observation 1. All work above the ceilings must be complete prior to the Engineer’s review. This includes, but is not limited to: a. Pipe wall penetrations are sealed. b. Pipe identification is installed. c. Branch piping in the location of sprinklers shall be dropped to the ceiling. 2. In order to prevent the Above-Ceiling Final Observation from occurring too early, the Contractor shall review the status of the work and certify, in writing, that the work is ready for the Above-Ceiling Final Observation. 3. It is understood that if the Engineer finds the ceilings have been installed prior to this review and prior to 7 days elapsing, the Engineer may not recommend further payments to the contractor until such time as full access has been provided. 3.3 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1. B. Final Jobsite Observation: 1. In order to prevent the Final Jobsite Observation from occurring too early, the Contractor is required to review the completion status of the project and certify that the job is ready for the final jobsite observation. 2. Attached to the end of this section is a typical list of items that represent the degree of job completeness expected prior to requesting a review. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 05 00 - 13 3. Upon Contractor certification that the project is complete and ready for a final punch, the Contractor shall sign the attached certification and return it to the Architect/Engineer so that the final observation can be scheduled. 4. It is understood that if the Engineer finds the job not ready for the final observation and that additional trips and observations are required to bring the project to completion, the costs incurred by the Engineers additional time and expenses will be deducted from the Contractor’s contract retainage prior to final payment at the completion of the job. C. Before final payment is authorized, This Contractor must submit the following: 1. Operation and maintenance manuals with copies of approved shop drawings. 2. Record documents including marked-up or reproducible drawings and specifications. 3. A report documenting the instructions given to the Owner's representatives complete with the number of hours spent in the instruction. The report shall bear the signature of an authorized agent of This Contractor and shall be signed by the Owner's representatives. 4. Inspection report by the State Fire Marshal of the fire protection system. 5. Start-up reports on all equipment requiring a factory installation inspection or start-up. 6. Provide spare parts, maintenance, and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification sections. Deliver to project site and place in location as directed; receipt by Architect/Engineer required prior to final payment approval. 3.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Submit three properly indexed and bound copies, in ‘D’ Ring style notebooks, of the Operations and Maintenance Instructions to the Architect/Engineer. Make all corrections or additions required. B. Manuals shall be completed and in the Owner's possession prior to Owner's acceptance and at least 10 days prior to instruction of operating personnel. C. Operation and maintenance data shall consist of written instructions for the care, maintenance, and operation of all equipment and systems. Include all instruction books, cards, and manuals furnished with the equipment. 3.5 INSTRUCTING THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVES A. Adequately instruct the Owner's designated representatives in the maintenance, care, and operation of all systems installed under this contract. B. Provide verbal and written instructions to the Owner's representatives by FACTORY PERSONNEL in the care, maintenance, and operation of the equipment and systems. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 05 00 - 14 C. The instructions shall include: 1. Explanation of all system flow diagrams. 2. Maintenance of equipment. 3. Start-up procedures for all major equipment. 4. Description of emergency system operation. D. The Architect/Engineer shall be notified of the time and place instructions will be given to the Owner's representatives so he or his representative can attend if desired. E. Minimum hours of instruction for each item shall be: 1. Sprinkler System(s) - one (1) hour. F. The Contractor shall prepare a detailed, written training agenda and submit it to the Architect/Engineer a minimum of two weeks prior to the formal training for approval. The written agenda shall include specific training points within the items described above. For example: how to adjust setpoints, troubleshooting, proper start-up, proper shut- down, seasonal changes, draining, venting, changing filters, changing belts, etc. Failure to provide and follow an approved training agenda may result in additional training required at the expense of the Contractor. G. Operating Instructions: 1. Contractor is responsible for all instructions to the Owner's representatives for the fire protection and control systems. 2. If the Contractor does not have staff that can adequately provide the required instructions he shall include in his bid an adequate amount to reimburse the Owner for the Engineer to perform these services. 3.6 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING A. The fire protection systems shall be complete and operating. System start-up, testing, and satisfactory system performance is the responsibility of the Contractor. B. All operating conditions and control sequences shall be tested during the start-up period. Test all interlocks, safety shutdowns, controls, and alarms. C. The Contractor, subcontractors, and equipment suppliers shall have skilled technicians to ensure that all systems perform properly. If the Architect/Engineer is requested to visit the job site for trouble shooting, assisting in start-up, obtaining satisfactory equipment operation, resolving installation and/or workmanship problems, equipment substitution issues or unsatisfactory system performance, including call backs during the warranty period, through no fault of the design; the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner on a time and materials basis for services rendered at the Architect/Engineer's standard hourly rates in effect when the services are requested. The Contractor shall pay the Owner for services required that are product, installation or workmanship related. Payment is due within 30 days after services are rendered. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 05 00 - 15 3.7 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. The following paragraph supplements Division 1 requirements: Contractor shall maintain at the job site a separate and complete set of fire protection drawings and specifications on which he shall clearly and permanently mark in complete detail all changes made to the fire protection systems. B. Mark drawings to indicate revisions to piping size and location, both exterior and interior; including locations of other control devices, and other units requiring periodic maintenance or repair; actual equipment locations, dimensioned from column lines; actual inverts and locations of underground piping; concealed equipment, dimensioned from column lines; mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located; Change Orders; concealed control system devices. C. Before completion of the project, a set of reproducible fire protection drawings will be given to the Contractor for transfer of all as-built conditions from the paper set maintained at the job site. All marks on reproducibles shall be clear and permanent. D. Mark specifications to show approved substitutions; Change Orders, and actual equipment and materials used. E. Record changes daily and keep the marked drawings available for the Architect/Engineer's examination at any normal work time. F. Upon completing the job, and before final payment is made, give the marked-up drawings to the Architect/Engineer. 3.8 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Thoroughly clean all equipment and systems prior to the Owner's final acceptance of the project. Clean all foreign paint, grease, oil, dirt, labels, stickers, and other foreign material from all equipment. B. Clean all areas where moisture is present. Immediately report any mold, biological growth, or water damage. C. Remove all rubbish, debris, etc., accumulated during construction from the premises. 3.9 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor shall coordinate the installation of all equipment, valves, etc., with other trades to maintain clear access area for servicing. B. All equipment shall be installed in such a way to maximize access to parts needing service or maintenance. Review the final field location, placement, and orientation of equipment with the Owner’s designated representative prior to setting equipment. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 05 00 - 16 C. Installation of equipment or devices without regard to coordination of access requirements and confirmation with the Owner’s designated representative will result in removal and reinstallation of the equipment at the Contractor’s expense. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 05 00 - 17 READINESS CERTIFICATION PRIOR TO FINAL JOBSITE OBSERVATION In order to prevent the final job observation from occurring too early, we require that the Contractor review the completion status of the project and, by copy of this document, certify that the job is indeed ready for the final job observation. The following is a typical list of items that represent the degree of job completeness expected prior to your requesting a final job observation. 1. Penetrations fire sealed and labeled in accordance with specifications. 2. Fire protection system operational. 3. Pipes labeled. Accepted by: Prime Contractor _______________________________________________ By ___________________________________ Date ___________________ Upon Contractor certification that the project is complete and ready for a final job observation, we require the Contractor to sign this agreement and return it to the Engineer so that the final observation can be scheduled. It is understood that if the Engineer finds the job not ready for the final observation and that additional trips and observations are required to bring the project to completion, the costs incurred by the Engineers for additional time and expenses will be deducted from the Contractor's contract retainage prior to final payment at the completion of the job. * * * * * UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 05 00 - 18 SECTION 21 05 03 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Through-Penetration Firestopping. 1.2 REFERENCES A. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials B. ANSI/UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops C. UL Fire Resistance Directory Through Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ) D. Warnock Hersey - Directory of Listed Products E. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials F. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops G. The Building Officials and Code Administrators National Building Code H. 2006International Building Code. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: For penetrations through the following fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. 1. Fire-resistance-rated walls including fire partitions, fire barriers, and smoke barriers. 2. Fire-resistance-rated horizontal assemblies including floors, floor/ceiling assemblies, and ceiling membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies. B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined per UL 1479: 1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 2. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration : firestop systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings a. Floor penetrations located outside wall cavities. b. Floor penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures. c. Wall penetrations above corridor ceilings which are not part of a fire- resistive assembly. d. Wall penetrations below any ceiling that are larger than 4” diameter or 16 square inches. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 05 03 - 1 C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to light, traffic, moisture, or physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction. D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame- spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Firestopping Installers Certification for all installers on the project. B. Shop Drawings: Submit for each condition requiring firestopping. Include descriptions of the specific penetrating item, actual wall/floor construction, manufacturer’s installation instructions, and UL or Warnock Hersey Assembly number. C. Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through- penetration firestop system, along with the following information: 1. Types of penetrating items. 2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated. 3. Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 4. F and T ratings for each firestop system. D. Maintain a notebook on the job site at all times that contains copies of approved submittals for all through penetration firestopping to be installed. Notebook shall be made available to the Authority Having Jurisdiction at their request and turned over to the Owner at the end of construction as part of the O&M Manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section. B. Installer: Individuals performing work shall be certified by the manufacturer of the system selected for installation. 1.6 MEETINGS A. Pre-installation meeting: A pre-installation meeting shall be scheduled and shall include the General Contractor and all Subcontractors associated with the installation of systems penetrating fire barriers, Firestopping Manufacturer’s Representative, and the Owner. 1. Review foreseeable methods related to firestopping work. 2. Tour representative areas where firestopping is to be installed; inspect and discuss each type of condition and each type of substrate that will be encountered, and preparation to be performed by other trades. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 05 03 - 2 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store, protect and handle products on site. Accept material on site in factory containers and packing. Inspect for damage. Protect from deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for storage. B. Install material prior to expiration of product shelf life. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide one year warranty on parts and labor. B. Warranty shall cover repair or replacement of firestop systems which fail in joint adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, stain resistance, general durability, or appear to deteriorate in any manner not clearly specified by the manufacturer as an inherent quality of the material. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the through- penetration firestop systems indicated for each application that are produced by one of the following manufacturers. All firestopping systems installed shall be provided by a single manufacturer. 1. 3M; Fire Protection Produces Division. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. RectorSeal Corporation, Metacaulk. 4. Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division. 5. Johns-Manville. 6. Specified Technologies Inc. (S.T.I.) 7. Spec Seal Firestop Products 8. AD Firebarrier Protection Systems 2.2 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS A. Provide materials and systems classified by or listed by Warnock Hersey to provide firestopping equal to time rating of construction being penetrated. B. All firestopping materials shall be free of asbestos, lead, PCB’s, and other materials that would require hazardous waste removal. C. Firestopping shall be flexible to allow for normal penetrating item movement due to expansion and contraction. D. Firestopping systems for plumbing and wet pipe sprinkler piping shall be moisture resistant. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 05 03 - 3 E. Provide firestopping systems capable of supporting floor loads where systems are exposed to possible floor loading or traffic. F. Provide firestopping systems classified by UL or listed by Warnock Hersey for penetrations through all fire rated construction. Firestopping systems shall be selected from the UL or listed by Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory Category XHEZ based on substrate construction and penetrating item size and material and shall fall within the range of numbers listed: 1. Combustible Framed Floors and Chase Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated F Rating = Floor/Wall Rating T Rating = Floor/Wall Rating Penetrating Item UL System No. No Penetrating ItemFC 0000-0999* Metallic Pipe or ConduitFC 1000-1999 Non-Metallic Pipe or ConduitFC 2000-2999 *Alternate method of firestopping is patching opening to match original rated construction. G. Any opening in walls or floors not covered by the listed series of numbers shall be coordinated with the firestopping manufacturer. H. Any openings in floors or walls not described in the UL or listed by Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory, or outlined in manufacturer’s information shall be sealed in a manner agreed upon by the Firestopping Manufacturer, Owner, and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Ensure all surfaces that contact seal materials are free of dirt, dust, grease, oil, rust, or loose materials. Clean and repair surfaces as required. B. Ensure substrate and penetrating items have been permanently installed prior to installing firestopping systems. Ensure penetrating items have been properly spaced and have proper clearance prior to installing firestopping systems. C. Surfaces to which sealing materials are to be installed must meet the selected UL or Warnock Hersey system substrate criteria. D. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer. Confine primer to area of bond. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 05 03 - 4 3.2 INSTALLATION A. In existing construction, provide firestopping of openings prior to and after installation of penetrating items. Remove any existing coatings on surfaces prior to firestopping installation. Temporary firestopping shall consist of packing openings with fire resistant mineral wool for the full thickness of substrate, or an alternate method approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. All openings shall be temporarily firestopped immediately upon their installation and shall remain so until the permanent UL or listed by Warnock Hersey listed firestopping system is installed. B. Install penetration seal materials in accordance with printed instructions of the UL or Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory and with the manufacturer’s printed application instructions. C. Install dams as required to properly contain firestopping materials within openings and as required to achieve required fire resistance rating. Remove combustible damming after appropriate curing. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Clean excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not cause damage. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Provide and install labels adjacent to each firestopping location. Label shall be provided by the firestop system supplier and contain the following information in a contrasting color: 1. The words "Warning - Through Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Firestop System Supplier; UL or listed by Warnock Hersey system number; date installed; contractor name and phone number; manufacturer’s representative name, address, and phone number. 3.5 INSPECTION A. All penetrations shall be inspected by the manufacturer’s representative to ensure proper installation. B. Access to firestop systems shall be maintained for examination by the Authority Having Jurisdiction at their request. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 05 03 - 5 C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop system with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 05 03 - 6 SECTION 21 05 29 FIRE SUPPRESSION SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hangers, Supports, and Associated Anchors. B. Sleeves and Seals. C. Cutting of Openings. D. Escutcheon Plates and Trim. 1.2 REFERENCES A. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, and Manufacture. B. MSS SP-69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. C. MSS SP-89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices. D. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Support Sprinkler Piping in conformance with NFPA 13. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HANGER RODS A. Hanger rods for single rod hangers shall conform to the following: Hanger Rod Diameter Pipe Size Column #1 Column #2 2" and smaller 3/8" 3/8" 2-1/2" through 3-1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 4" 5/8" 1/2" Column #1: Steel pipe. Column #2: Plastic pipe. B. Rods for double rod hangers may be reduced one size. Minimum rod diameter is 3/8 inches. C. Hanger rods and accessories used in mechanical spaces or otherwise dry areas shall have ASTM B633 electro-plated zinc finish. 2.2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. All pipe hangers, clamps, and supports shall conform to Manufacturers Standardization Society MSS-SP-69. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIRE SUPPRESSION SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 05 29 - 1 B. Support and laterally brace vertical pipes at every floor level in multi-story structures, but never at intervals over 15 feet. Support vertical pipes with riser clamps installed below hubs, couplings or lugs welded to the pipe. Acceptable Products: Anvil - Fig. CT121 Cooper/B-Line - Fig. B3373CT Erico - Model 510 Nibco/Tolco - Fig. 82 C. Unless otherwise indicated, hangers shall be as follows: 1. Adjustable Swivel Ring Type: Service: Bare Metal Pipe - 4 inches and Smaller Acceptable Products: Bare Steel Pipe Anvil Fig. 69 Cooper/B-Line Fig. B3170NF Erico Model FCN Nibco/Tolco Fig. 200 D. Support may be fabricated from U-Channel strut or similar shapes. Piping less than 4” in diameter shall be secured to strut with clamps of proper design and capacity as required to maintain spacing and alignment. Strut shall be independently supported from hanger drops or building structure. Size and support shall be per manufacturer’s installation requirements for structural support of piping. Clamps shall not interrupt piping insulation. 1. Strut used in mechanical spaces or otherwise dry areas shall have ASTM B633 electro-plated zinc finish. E. Unless otherwise indicated, pipe supports for use with struts shall be appropriate for wood construction. F. Wall supports shall be used where vertical height of structure exceeds minimum spacing requirements. Install wall supports at same spacing as hangers or strut supports along vertical length of pipe runs. G. Welding: 1. Unless otherwise noted, hangers, clips, and auxiliary support steel may be welded in lieu of bolting, clamping, or riveting to the building structural frame. Take adequate precautions during all welding operations for fire prevention and for protecting walls and ceilings from being damaged by smoke. 2.3 OPENINGS IN FLOORS, WALLS AND CEILINGS A. Coordinate all openings with other Contractors. B. Do not cut structural members without written approval of the Architect or Structural Engineer. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIRE SUPPRESSION SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 05 29 - 2 2.4 ESCUTCHEON PLATES AND TRIM A. Fit escutcheons to all uninsulated exposed pipes passing through walls, floors, or ceilings of finished rooms. B. Escutcheons shall be heavy gauge, cold rolled steel, copper coated under a chromium plated finish, heavy spring clip, rigid hinge and latch. 2.5 PIPE PENETRATIONS A. Seal all pipe penetrations. Seal non-rated walls and floor penetrations with grout or caulk. Backing material may be used. B. Seal fire rated wall and floor penetrations with fire seal system as specified. 2.6 FINISH A. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FIRE SUPPRESSION SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS A. Install all items per manufacturer's instructions. B. Support all piping and equipment, including valves and other specialties and accessories to avoid objectionable or excessive stress, deflection, swaying, sagging or vibration in the piping or building structure during erection, cleaning, testing and normal operation of the systems. C. Do not, however, restrain piping to cause it to snake or buckle between supports or to prevent proper movement due to expansion and contraction. D. Support piping at equipment and valves so they can be disconnected and removed without further supporting the piping. E. Piping shall not introduce strains or distortion to connected equipment. F. Install hangers and supports complete with lock nuts, clamps, rods, bolts, couplings, swivels, inserts and required accessories. G. Hangers for horizontal piping shall have adequate means of vertical adjustment for alignment. H. Parallel horizontal pipes may be supported on trapeze hangers made of structural shapes and hanger rods; otherwise, pipes shall be supported with individual hangers. I. Trapeze hangers may be used where ducts interfere with normal pipe hanging. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIRE SUPPRESSION SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 05 29 - 3 J. Coordinate the location and method of support of piping systems with all installations under other Divisions and Sections of the Specifications. K. Provided the installation complies with all loading requirements of truss and joist manufacturers, the following practices are acceptable: 1. Loads of 100 lbs. or less may be attached anywhere along the top or bottom chords of trusses or joists with a minimum 3’spacing between loads. 2. Loads greater than 100 lbs. must be hung concentrically and may be hung from top or bottom chord, provided one of the following conditions is met: a. The hanger is attached within 6” from a web/chord joint. b. Additional L2x2x1/4 web reinforcement is installed per manufacturer’s requirements. 3. It is prohibited to cantilever a load using an angle or other structural component that is attached to a truss or joist in such a fashion that a torsional force is applied to that structural member. 4. If conditions cannot be met, coordinate installation with truss or joist manufacturer and contact Architect/Engineer. L. Do not exceed the manufacturer's recommended maximum load for any hanger or support. M. Provide additional supports where pipe changes direction, adjacent to flanged valves at equipment connections and heavy fittings. N. Provide at least one hanger adjacent to each joint in grooved end steel pipe with mechanical couplings. O. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. P. Spacing of Hangers shall in no case shall exceed the following: Pipe Material Maximum Spacing 1. Steel (Std. Weight or Heavier – Liquid Service): 1-1/4" & under 7'-0" 1-1/2" 9'-0" 2" 10'-0" 2-1/2" 11'-0" 3" 12'-0" 4" & larger 12'-0" UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIRE SUPPRESSION SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 05 29 - 4 2. Rigid Plastic Pipe: a. Space hangers at 4’-0” maximum centers. 3. Installation of hangers shall conform to MSS SP-69, MSS SP-89 and applicable NFPA standards. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIRE SUPPRESSION SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 05 29 - 5 PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIRE SUPPRESSION SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 05 29 - 6 SECTION 21 13 00 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, Fittings, Valves, and Connections for Fire Protection System. B. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 150 and 300. B. ANSI/ASME B16.4 - Cast Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 125 and 250. C. ANSI/ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. D. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless. E. IBC - International Building Code. F. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems. G. NFPA 13R - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems in Residential Occupancies up to and Including Four Stories in Height. H. NFPA 25 - Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems. I. UL - Underwriter’s Laboratory Fire Protection Equipment Directory. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System shall cover building areas noted. B. System shall interface with building fire alarm system. C. Provide wet pipe sprinkler system(s) to NFPA 13R and building code requirements and as shown on the drawings. D. Provide Fire Department connections. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equipment and Components: Bear UL label or marking. B. Valves: Bear UL label or marking. Provide manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. Pressure rating shall match specified pipe system pressure rating. Remanufactured valves are not acceptable. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 13 00 - 1 C. Specialist Firm: Company specializing in sprinkler systems with minimum three years experience. D. Sprinkler design drawings submitted by the contractor shall be designed, certified, and shall include the NICET certification block or the Professional Engineer seal of the fire protection designer. Fire protection designer shall be NICET Level III or Level IV certified or be a licensed Professional Engineer. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. All material, equipment, and installation shall be approved by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction and the Owner’s Insurance Company. B. The Authorities Having Jurisdiction and the Owner’s Insurance Company shall have precedence over the drawings and specifications in case of discrepancies. C. The entire installation shall comply with all applicable codes. 1.6 SYSTEM DESIGN A. Design and install a complete, hydraulically calculated wet-pipe sprinkler system for the entire building. B. Provide all required equipment and accessories. C. System shall include a 5 psi allowance for future decrease in available pressure and an allowance for outside hose streams. D. Provide monitor switches on all shut-off valves. E. Install sprinkler riser in location shown on drawings or as approved by the Architect/Engineer. F. Coordinate with Plumbing Contractor for installation of a floor drain with collection funnel below the backflow preventer. G. Provide pressure gauge with valve in the main riser. H. Provide main drain valve piped to outside the building. Locate so discharge does not damage lawn or other surfaces. I. Provide flow switch in the main riser and as indicated on drawings. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings per Section 21 05 00. Indicate pipe materials, joining methods, supports, floor and wall penetration seals, sprinklers, equipment data and ratings, and hydraulic calculations. B. Submit detailed pipe and sprinkler layout and other calculations and forms as described in NFPA 13. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 13 00 - 2 C. Submit detailed working drawings and obtain review of them in the following order: 1. Engineer/Architect. 2. State Fire Marshal/Authority Having Jurisdiction 3. Architect/Engineer 4. Local Fire Department 5. Architect/Engineer Begin construction after all approvals are received. D. Working drawings shall include piping and sprinkler layout, sprinkler types and ratings, sections and elevations at critical points. Show coordination with lighting, ductwork, and diffusers, and indicate basic flow and hydraulic design information, including main location and date that the test was taken. E. Provide the Owner with one copy of NFPA 25. Standard for the Inspection Testing and Maintenance of Water-based Fire Protection Systems. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store valves and sprinklers in shipping containers, with labels in place. B. Provide temporary protective coating on iron and steel valves. C. Maintain temporary end caps and closures in place until installation. 1.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit manufacturers’ operation and maintenance data. Include written maintenance data on components of system, servicing requirements, and record drawings. 1.10 JOB CONDITIONS A. Fire Protection Contractor shall determine the flow and pressure available at the service connection. The Fire Protection Contractor is responsible to verify this information and make all tests required. Base all pipe sizing and hydraulic calculations on flow test data no older than 18 months. B. Pipe sizing shown on drawings for service entrance and main risers is preliminary for coordination purposes only. Contractor is responsible for final sizing from hydraulic calculations. 1.11 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide metal storage cabinet, wrenches for each sprinkler type, and extra sprinklers per NFPA 13 and applicable building code. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 13 00 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe (Inside Building-Above Grade) (Sprinkler Zone Risers): 1. Pipe: 2" and Under - Schedule 40, black steel, ASTM A53. Threaded and coupled or flanged. 2. Joints: 2" and under - screwed or flanged. 3. Fittings: Screwed - cast iron, 125 lb., black, ANSI/ASME B16.4 or malleable iron, 150 lb., black, ANSI/ASME B16.3. Flanged-cast iron, 125 lb., ANSI/ASME B16.1. B. Steel Pipe (Inside Building-Above Grade) (Sprinkler Zone Risers): 1. Pipe: 2-1/2" and Over - Schedule 10, black steel, grooved, ASTM A135. 2. Joints: Mechanically coupled grooved. 3. Fittings: 500 lb. WOG, black, malleable iron, ASTM A47. 4. Plain end fittings and couplings are not acceptable. C. CPVC (Inside Building-Above Grade; First, Second and Third Floors) Contractor's Option: 1. Pipe 3"and under: Pipe shall be post-chlorinated polyvinyl chloride and meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM F442 in standard dimension ratio (SDR) 13.5. Pipe shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories for use in wet automatic fire sprinkler systems and shall bear the logo of the listing agency. 2. Joints - Solvent Cement Type Joints: All socket type joints shall be made by employing solvent cements that meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM F493. The standard practice for safe handling of solvent cements shall be in accordance with ASTM F402. Solvent cement shall be listed by NSF International for use with potable water and approved by the CPVC manufacturer. 3. Fittings: Fittings shall meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM F437 (Schedule 80 threaded), ASTM F438 (Schedule 40 socket) and ASTM F439 (Schedule 80 socket). Fittings shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories for use in wet automatic fire sprinkler systems and shall bear the logo of the listing agency. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Tyco Fire Products, 451 N. Cannon Avenue, Lansdale, PA 19446, phone: 215-362-0700, fax: 215-362-5385. b. Viking Corporation, 210 N. Industrial Park Road, Hastings, MI 49058, phone: 269-945-9501, fax: 269-945-9599. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 13 00 - 4 D. Fire Protection Service to Building (by others): 1. Refer to Section 22 10 00. 2.2 UNIONS AND COUPLINGS A. Unions: 175 psi malleable iron for threaded ferrous piping. B. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, designed to permit some angular and longitudinal deflection; “C” shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers. 175 psi, ASTM A47. Plain end fittings and couplings are not acceptable. Rolled groove couplings for Schedule 10 pipe. Cut groove couplings for Schedule 40 pipe. Couplings shall be enamel coated for wet systems. Acceptable Manufacturers: Victaulic, ITT, Grinnell, Central, Anvil GruvLok, Star Fittings. C. Coupling gaskets for wet systems shall be Grade “E” EDPM Type A. 2.3 VALVE OPERATORS A. Provide handwheels for gate valves. Provide gear operators for butterfly valves. 2.4 VALVE CONNECTIONS A. Provide all connections to match pipe joints. Valves shall be same size as pipe. 2.5 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Provide backflow preventers as required by code and as specified on the drawings. 2.6 EQUIPMENT A. Equipment shall be as scheduled on the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - PIPING A. Coordinate piping and sprinkler locations with all other trades. Ductwork, diffusers and light fixture locations shall have priority over sprinkler piping and sprinklers. B. Ream pipe and tube ends to full inside diameter. Remove burrs. Remove scale and foreign material, inside and outside, before assembly. C. Die cut screw joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads. D. Coat threads with pipe joint compound or wrap with Teflon tape. E. In steel piping, main sized saddle branch connections or direct connection of branches to main is permitted if main is one pipe size larger than the branch for up to 6" mains. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 13 00 - 5 F. Provide sleeves when penetrating floors and walls. G. Fire seal all pipe and sleeve penetrations (both wall and floor) to maintain fire separation required without restraining pipe. H. Locate piping to minimize obstruction of other work. I. Route piping in concealed spaces above finished ceiling. J. Use full and double lengths of pipe wherever possible. K. Do not install piping or other equipment above electrical switchboards or panelboards. This includes a dedicated space extending 25 feet from the floor to the structural ceiling with width and depth equal to the equipment. Fire protection equipment dedicated to the electrical equipment room or space may be installed above equipment if other alternatives are not available. L. Provide hangers and supports as required by NFPA 13 and UL, with the following exceptions: 1. Do not use powder driven devices, explosive devices, wooden plugs, or plastic inserts. 2. Do not install fasteners to carry the load in tension, unless absolutely necessary. M. Slope all piping for complete drainage. Install auxiliary drains for all trapped piping per NFPA 13. N. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons where exposed pipes penetrate walls or floors. O. Reducers are generally not shown. Where pipe sizes change at tee, the tee shall be the size of the largest pipe shown connecting to it. P. Comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions. 3.2 INSTALLATION - VALVES A. Install gate valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. B. Backflow Preventer: 1. Units shall be field tested and tagged in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions by a certified tester before initial operation. 2. Install unit between 12" and 60" above finish floor. C. Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 13 00 - 6 3.3 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT A. Coordinate piping and sprinkler locations with all other trades. Ductwork, diffusers and light fixture locations shall have priority over system equipment and sprinklers. B. Locate fire department connection in an accessible location as approved by the local fire department with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions, and adjacent Siamese connectors to allow full swing of fire department wrench handle. C. Install test valves where required. Pipe to outdoors or drain. Test connection shall have flow equivalent to the smallest K-factor sprinkler. D. Locate sprinklers to clear lights, ducts and diffusers. Do not run sprinkler pipes through ducts. Ductwork has priority over sprinkler pipes. Offset pipes as needed. E. Center sprinklers in two directions in ceiling tiles and provide offsets as required. F. Do not allow concealed sprinkler cover plates to be painted. Sprinkler cover plates are to be factory painted only. Do not field paint. G. Apply strippable or paper covers so concealed sprinkler cover plates do not receive field paint finish. 3.4 SYSTEMS CLEANING AND TESTING A. Flush all interior piping to remove scale and other foreign material before placing system into service. B. Hydrostatically test the entire interior piping system at a minimum of 200 psig or 50 psig in excess of the normal system working pressure for systems subjected to pressures in excess of 150 psig. Maintain test pressure for 2 hours without loss of pressure. C. Verify adequate water flow at the inspector's test connection. D. Test the alarm system by operating the inspector's test connection or the alarm test valves. Verify that the building fire alarm system activates. E. Adjust all monitor switches for proper operation. F. All water used for testing and remaining in the piping system shall be obtained from a potable water source. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 13 00 - 7 PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS JUNE 7, 2013 - PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION 21 13 00 - 8 SECTION 22 05 00 BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Requirements applicable to all Division 23 Sections. Also refer to Division 1 - General Requirements. B. All materials and installation methods shall conform to the applicable standards, guidelines and codes referenced in the specification section. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Specification and the associated drawings govern the furnishing, installing, testing and placing into satisfactory operation the Mechanical Systems. B. Each Contractor shall provide all new materials indicated on the drawings and/or in these specifications, and all items required to make his portion of the Mechanical Work a finished and working system. C. All work will be awarded under a single General Contract. The division of work listed below is for the Contractor's convenience and lists normal breakdown of the work. D. Scope of Work: 1. Plumbing Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to: a. Furnish and install all items listed in the Plumbing Material List. b. Furnish and install a new domestic water service to each building. c. Furnish and install water meters and domestic water backflow preventers as required by Code. d. Furnish and install a complete domestic water piping system including cold, hot, and hot water circulating piping within the building. Insulate all piping as specified. e. Furnish and install gas piping system including all meter requirements. f. Furnish and install water heaters. g. Furnish and install a new fire protection service to each building including backflow preventer as required by Code. h. Furnish and install condensate drain piping from plumbing related equipment such as ice machines. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 00 - 1 i. Furnish and install a complete sanitary sewer and vent system. j. Furnish and install firestopping systems for penetrations of fire-rated construction associated with this Contractor’s work. 2. Heating Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to: a. Furnish and install refrigerant piping, accessories, and final charge of refrigerant. b. Furnish and install condensate drain piping from cooling related equipment such as cooling coil drain pans. c. Furnish and install firestopping systems for penetrations of fire-rated construction associated with this Contractor’s work. 3. Air Conditioning and Ventilating Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to: a. Furnish and install indoor furnaces complete with burners, filters, coils, fans, and motors. b. Furnish and install package outdoor air handling units complete with pads. c. Furnish and install air-cooled condensing units and pads. d. Furnish and install complete supply air ductwork systems including all fittings, insulation, and outlets. e. Furnish and install complete return air ductwork systems including all fittings, insulation, and inlets. f. Furnish and install combustion air ductwork and terminations. g. Furnish and install complete exhaust ductwork systems including all fittings, insulation, inlets, and fans. h. Furnish and install gas flues and terminations. i. Furnish and install all temperature control systems. j. Furnish and install all fire dampers. k. Furnish and install firestopping systems for penetrations of fire-rated construction associated with this Contractor’s work. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 00 - 2 4. Temperature Control Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to: a. Furnish and install a complete temperature control system as specified in Section 23 09 00. b. Furnish automatic control dampers for installation by others. c. Furnish and install firestopping systems for penetrations of fire-rated construction associated with this Contractor’s work. 5. Fire Protection Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to: a. Furnish and install a complete wet pipe sprinkler system for areas noted on the drawings. b. Furnish and install all items listed on the Fire Protection Material List. c. Furnish all hydraulic calculations and working sprinkler drawings. 6. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to: a. Furnish complete testing, adjusting, and balancing as specified in Section 23 05 93, including, but not limited to, air systems, hydronic systems, plumbing systems, and verification of control systems. 1.3 ALTERNATES 1.4 UNIT PRICES 1.5 DIVISION OF WORK BETWEEN MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL & CONTROL CONTRACTORS A. Definitions: 1. "Mechanical Contractors" refers to the following: a. Plumbing Contractor. b. Heating Contractor. c. Air Conditioning and Ventilating Contractor. d. Temperature Control Contractor. e. Fire Protection Contractor. f. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Contractor. 2. Motor Control Wiring: The wiring associated with the remote operation of the magnetic coils of magnetic motor starters or relays, or the wiring that permits direct cycling of motors by means of devices in series with the motor power wiring. In the latter case the devices are usually single phase and are usually connected to the motor power wiring through a manual motor starter having "Manual-Off-Auto" provisions. 3. Control devices such as start-stop push buttons, thermostats, relays, etc., generally represent the types of equipment associated with motor control wiring. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 00 - 3 4. Motor control wiring is single phase and usually 120 volts. In some instances, the voltage will be the same as the motor power wiring. Generally, where the motor power wiring exceeds 120 volts, a control transformer is used to give a control voltage of 120 volts. 5. Temperature Control Wiring: The wiring associated with the operation of a motorized damper, solenoid valve or motorized valve, etc., either modulating or two-position, as opposed to wiring which directly powers or controls a motor used to drive equipment such as fans, pumps, etc. a. This wiring will be from a 120 volt source and may continue as 120 volt, or be reduced in voltage (24 volt) in which case a control transformer shall be furnished as part of the temperature control wiring. 6. Control Motor: An electric device used to operate dampers, valves, etc. It may be two-position or modulating. Conventional characteristics of such a motor are 24 volts, 60 cycles, 1 phase, although other voltages may be encountered. B. General: 1. The purpose of these Specifications is to outline the Electrical and Mechanical Contractor's responsibilities related to electrical work required for items such as temperature controls, mechanical equipment, fans, and the like. The exact wiring requirements for much of the equipment cannot be determined until the systems have been selected and submittals reviewed. Therefore, the electrical drawings show only known wiring related to such items. All wiring not shown on the electrical drawings, but required for mechanical systems, is the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor. 2. Where the drawings require the Electrical Contractor to wire between equipment furnished by the Mechanical Contractor, such wiring shall terminate at terminals provided in the equipment. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide complete wiring diagrams and supervision to the Electrical Contractor and designate the terminal numbers for correct wiring. 3. All electrical work shall conform to the National Electrical Code. All provisions of the Electrical Specifications concerning wiring, protection, etc., apply to wiring provided by the Mechanical Contractor unless noted otherwise. C. Mechanical Contractor's Responsibility: 1. Assumes responsibility for internal wiring of all equipment provided by the Mechanical Contractor, for example: a. Condensing Units. b. Package Air Handling Units. 2. Assumes all responsibility for the Temperature Control wiring, when the Temperature Control Contractor is a Subcontractor to the Mechanical Contractor. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 00 - 4 3. Temperature Control Subcontractor's Responsibility: [*****OR*****] 4. Temperature Control Contractor's Responsibility: a. Wiring of all devices needed to make the Temperature Control System functional. b. Verifying any control wiring on the electrical drawings as being by the Electrical Contractor. All wiring required for the Control System, but not shown on the electrical drawings, is the responsibility of the Temperature Control Subcontractor Contractor. c. Coordinating equipment locations (such as P.E.'s, E.P.'s, relays, transformers, etc.) with the Electrical Contractor, where wiring of the equipment is by the Electrical Contractor. 5. This Contractor is responsible for coordination of utilities with all other Contractors. If any field coordination conflicts are found, the Contractor shall coordinate with other Contractors to determine a viable layout. D. Electrical Contractor's Responsibility: 1. Provides all combination starters, manual starters and disconnect devices shown on the Electrical Drawings or indicated to be by the Electrical Contractor on the Mechanical Drawings or Specifications. 2. Installs and wires all remote control devices furnished by the Mechanical Contractor or Temperature Control Subcontractor Contractor when so noted on the Electrical Drawings. 3. Provides motor control and temperature control wiring, where so noted on the drawings. 4. Furnishes, installs and connects all relays, etc., for automatic shutdown of certain fans upon actuation of the Fire Alarm System as indicated and specified in Division 28. 5. This Contractor is responsible for coordination of utilities with all other Contractors. If any field coordination conflicts are found, the Contractor shall coordinate with other Contractors to determine a viable layout. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor’s Responsibility Prior to Submitting Pricing Data: 1. The Contractor is responsible for constructing complete and operating systems. The Contractor acknowledges and understands that the Contract Documents are a two-dimensional representation of a three-dimensional object, subject to human interpretation. This representation may include imperfect data, interpreted codes, utility guidelines, three-dimensional conflicts, and required field UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 00 - 5 coordination items. Such deficiencies can be corrected when identified prior to ordering material and starting installation. The Contractor agrees to carefully study and compare the individual Contract Documents and report at once in writing to the Design Team any deficiencies the Contractor may discover. The Contractor further agrees to require each subcontractor to likewise study the documents and report at once any deficiencies discovered. 2. The Contractor shall resolve all reported deficiencies with the Architect/Engineer prior to awarding any subcontracts, ordering material, or starting any work with the Contractor’s own employees. Any work performed prior to receipt of instructions from the Design Team will be done at the Contractor’s risk. B. Qualifications: 1. Only products of reputable manufacturers are acceptable. 2. All Contractors and subcontractors shall employ only workers skilled in their trades. C. Compliance with Codes, Laws, Ordinances: 1. Conform to all requirements of the City of Iowa City, Iowa’s Codes, Laws, Ordinances and other regulations having jurisdiction. 2. Conform to all State Codes. 3. If there is a discrepancy between the codes and regulations and these specifications, the Engineer shall determine the method or equipment used. 4. If the Contractor notes, at the time of bidding, any parts of the drawings or specifications that do not comply with the codes or regulations, he shall inform the Architect/Engineer in writing, requesting a clarification. If there is insufficient time for this procedure, he shall submit with his proposal a separate price to make the system comply with the codes and regulations. 5. All changes to the system made after letting of the contract, to comply with codes or requirements of Inspectors, shall be made by the Contractor without cost to the Owner. 6. If there is a discrepancy between manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications, the manufacturer's recommendations shall govern. 7. All rotating shafts and/or equipment shall be completely guarded from all contact. Partial guards and/or guards that do not meet all applicable OSHA standards are not acceptable. Contractor is responsible for providing this guarding if it is not provided with the equipment supplied. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 00 - 6 D. Permits, Fees, Taxes, Inspections: 1. Procure all applicable permits and licenses. 2. Abide by all laws, regulations, ordinances, and other rules of the State or Political Subdivision where the work is done, or as required by any duly constituted public authority. 3. Pay all charges for permits or licenses. 4. Pay all fees and taxes imposed by the State, Municipal and/or other regulatory bodies. 5. Pay all charges arising out of required inspections by an authorized body. 6. Pay all charges arising out of required contract document reviews associated with the project and as initiated by the Owner or authorized agency/consultant. 7. Where applicable, all fixtures, equipment and materials shall be approved or listed by Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. E. Examination of Drawings: 1. The drawings for the mechanical work are completely diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of the work and to indicate the general arrangements and locations of equipment, outlets, etc., and the approximate sizes of equipment. 2. Contractor shall determine the exact locations of equipment and rough-ins, and the exact routing of pipes and ducts to best fit the layout of the job. 3. Scaling of the drawings is not sufficient or accurate for determining these locations. 4. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated arrangements and locations, such changes shall be made by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 5. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items, such as fittings, boxes, valves, unions, etc., may not be shown, but where required by other sections of the specifications or required for proper installation of the work, such items shall be furnished and installed. 6. If an item is either on the drawings or in the specifications, it shall be included in this contract. 7. Determination of quantities of material and equipment required shall be made by the Contractor from the documents. Where discrepancies arise between drawings, schedules and/or specifications, the greater number shall govern. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 00 - 7 8. Where used in mechanical documents, the word "furnish" shall mean supply for use, the word "install" shall mean connect complete and ready for operation, and the word "provide" shall mean to supply for use and connect complete and ready for operation. a. Any item listed as furnished shall also be installed, unless otherwise noted. b. Any item listed as installed shall also be furnished, unless otherwise noted. F. Field Measurements: 1. Verify all pertinent dimensions at the job site before ordering any materials or fabricating any supports, pipes or ducts. G. Electronic Media/Files: 1. Construction drawings for this project have been prepared utilizing AutoCAD MEP. 2. Contractors and Subcontractors may request electronic media files of the contract drawings and/or copies of the specifications. Specifications will be provided in PDF format. 3. Upon request for electronic media, the Contractor shall complete and return a signed “Electronic File Transmittal” form provided by KJWW. 4. If the information requested includes floor plans prepared by others, the Contractor will be responsible for obtaining approval from the appropriate Design Professional for use of that part of the document. 5. The electronic contract documents can be used for preparation of shop drawings and as-built drawings only. The information may not be used in whole or in part for any other project. 6. The drawings prepared by KJWW for bidding purposes may not be used directly for ductwork layout drawings. 7. The use of these CAD documents by the Contractor does not relieve them from their responsibility for coordination of work with other trades and verification of space available for the installation. 8. The information is provided to expedite the project and assist the Contractor with no guarantee by KJWW as to the accuracy or correctness of the information provided. KJWW accepts no responsibility or liability for the Contractor’s use of these documents. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 00 - 8 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be required for the following items, and for additional items where required elsewhere in the specifications or on the drawings. 1. Submittals List: Referenced Specification Section Submittal Item 22 05 00 Owner Training Agenda 22 05 03 Fire Seal Systems 22 05 13 Motors 22 05 16 Expansion Compensation 22 05 48 Vibration Isolation Equipment 22 09 00 Instrumentation 22 14 29 Sump Pumps Refer to drawings Plumbing Material List Items B. In addition to the provisions of Division 1, the following provisions are required: 1. Submittals shall include all fabrication, erection, layout, and setting drawings; manufacturers' standard drawings; schedules; descriptive literature, catalogs and brochures; performance and test data; wiring and control diagrams; and all other drawings and descriptive data of materials of construction as may be required to show that the materials, equipment or systems and the location thereof conform to the requirements of the contract documents. 2. The Contractor shall submit one electronic copy of each shop drawing for review by the Architect/Engineer BEFORE releasing any equipment for manufacture or shipment. 3. Shop drawings which are larger than 11"x 17" or are plan size layout or erection drawings shall be submitted on reproducible media. Submit one reproducible and one print of each drawing or plan. All Contractor approval stamps shall be made on the reproducible. 4. The Contractor shall thoroughly review and approve all shop drawings before submitting them to the Architect/Engineer. CONTRACTOR’S APPROVAL STAMP IS REQUIRED ON ALL SUBMITTALS. APPROVAL WILL INDICATE THE CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW of all material and a COMPLETE UNDERSTANDING OF EXACTLY WHAT IS TO BE FURNISHED. Contractor shall clearly mark all deviations from the contract documents on all submittals. IF DEVIATIONS ARE NOT MARKED BY THE CONTRACTOR, THEN THE ITEM SHALL BE REQUIRED TO MEET ALL DRAWING AND SPECIFICATION REQUIREMENTS. 5. The Contractor shall clearly mark each item with the same nomenclature applied on the drawings or in the specifications. 6. The Contractor shall clearly indicate the size, finish, material, etc. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 00 - 9 7. Assemble and submit by specification section numbers for all submittals. All sets shall be identical and contain an index of the items enclosed with a general topic description on the cover. 8. Each set shall be bound in a manufacturer's folder or inside of a manila file folder. 9. Where more than one model is shown on a manufacturer's sheet, the Contractor shall clearly indicate exactly which item and which data is relevant to the work. 10. Failure to comply with the above shall be reason to resubmit all shop drawing submittals. 11. The Engineer's responsibility shall be to review one set of shop drawing submittals for each product. If the first submittal is incomplete or does not comply with the drawings and/or specifications, the Contractor shall be responsible to bear the cost for the Engineer to recheck and handle the additional shop drawing submittals. C. Provide Schedule of Values: 1. Application forms: Use AIA Document Continuation Sheets G703 (or similar) as the form for application. 2. Provide line items on the Schedule of Values including: a. Mechanical Contractor General Conditions (mobilization, bonds, insurance, etc.) b. Plumbing (sanitary waste & vent, domestic water piping, pipe insulation, water heater, etc.) c. Piping (refrigerant, heating, cooling, pipe insulation, etc.) d. Central Plant e. Site Utilities (from 5 feet outside of building) f. Medical Gas 3. Change orders shall have schedule of values broken out as listed above submitted with each change order. 4. Coordinate with the Project Engineer the items included in the Schedule of Values. The intent is to not create schedules in addition to those the Plumbing Contractor normally submits to the General Contractor for payment. 1.8 EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS' INSPECTION A. The following equipment shall not be placed in operation until a competent installation and service representative of the manufacturer has inspected the installation and certified that the equipment is properly installed, adjusted and lubricated; that preliminary operating instructions have been given; and that the equipment is ready for operation: 1. Fire Seal Systems 2. Mixing Valves UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 00 - 10 B. Contractor shall arrange for and obtain supplier's on-site inspection(s) at proper time(s) to assure each phase of equipment installation and/or connection is in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. C. Submit copies of start-up reports to the Architect/Engineer and include copies of Owner’s Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 1.9 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING & MAINTENANCE A. Exercise care in transporting and handling to avoid damage to materials. Store materials on the site to prevent damage. Keep materials clean, dry and free from harmful conditions. Immediately remove any materials that become wet or that are suspected of becoming contaminated with mold or other organisms. B. Keep all bearings properly lubricated and all belts properly tensioned and aligned. C. Coordinate the installation of heavy and large equipment with the General Contractor and/or Owner. If the Mechanical Contractor does not have prior documented experience in rigging and lifting similar equipment, he/she shall contract with a qualified lifting and rigging service that has similar documented experience. Follow all equipment lifting and support guidelines for handling and moving. D. Contractor is responsible for moving equipment into the building and/or site. Contractor shall review site prior to bid for path locations and any required building modifications to allow movement of equipment. Contractor shall coordinate his/her work with other trades. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide one-year warranty, unless otherwise noted, to the Owner for all fixtures, equipment, materials, and workmanship. B. The warranty period for all work in this Division of the specifications shall commence on the date of final acceptance, unless a whole or partial system or any separate piece of equipment or component is put into use for the benefit of any party other than the installing contractor with prior written authorization. In this instance, the warranty period shall commence on the date when such whole system, partial system or separate piece of equipment or component is placed in operation and accepted in writing by the Owner. C. Warranty requirements shall extend to correction, without cost to the Owner, of all Work found to be defective or nonconforming to the contract documents. The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting all damage resulting from defects or nonconformance with contract documents. 1.11 INSURANCE A. Contractor shall maintain insurance coverage as set forth in Division 0 of these specifications. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 00 - 11 1.12 MATERIAL SUBSTITUTION A. Where several manufacturers’ names are given, the manufacturer for which a catalog number is given is the basis for job design and establishes the quality required. B. Equivalent equipment manufactured by the other named manufacturers may be used. Contractor shall ensure that all items submitted by these other manufacturers meet all requirements of the drawings and specifications, and fits in the allocated space. C. Any material, article or equipment of other unnamed manufacturers which will adequately perform the services and duties imposed by the design and is of a quality equal to or better than the material, article or equipment identified by the drawings and specifications may be used if approval is secured in writing from the Architect/Engineer not later than ten days prior to the bid opening. D. This Contractor assumes all costs incurred as a result of using the offered material, article or equipment, on his part or on the part of other Contractors whose work is affected. E. This Contractor may list voluntary add or deduct prices for alternate materials on the bid form. These items will not be used in determining the low bidder. F. All material substitutions requested later than ten (10) days prior to bid opening must be listed as voluntary changes on the bid form. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 JOBSITE SAFETY A. Neither the professional activities of the Engineer, nor the presence of the Engineer or his or her employee and subconsultants at a construction site, shall relieve the Contractor and other entity of their obligations, duties and responsibilities including, but not limited to, construction means, methods, sequence, techniques or procedures necessary for performing, superintending or coordinating all portions of the work of construction in accordance with the contract documents and any health or safety precautions required by any regulatory agencies. The Engineer and his or her personnel have no authority to exercise any control over any construction contractor or other entity or their employees in connection with their work or any health or safety precautions. The Contractor is solely responsible for jobsite safety. The Engineer and the Engineer’s consultants shall be indemnified and shall be made additional insureds under the Contractor’s general liability insurance policy. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 00 - 12 3.2 EXCAVATION, FILL, BACKFILL, COMPACTION A. General: 1. Prior to the commencement of any excavation or digging, the Contractor shall verify all underground utilities with the regional utility locator.Provide prior notice to the locator before excavations. Contact information for most regional utility locaters can be found by calling 811. 2. The Contractor shall do all excavating, filling, backfilling and compacting associated with his work. B. Excavation: 1. Make all excavations to accurate, solid, undisturbed earth, and to proper dimensions. 2. Where excavations are made in error below foundations, concrete of same strength as specified for the foundations or thoroughly compacted sand-gravel fill, as determined by the Architect/Engineer, shall be placed in such excess excavations. Place thoroughly compacted, clean, stable fill in excess excavations under slabs on grade, at the Contractor's expense. 3. Trim bottom and sides of excavations to grades required for foundations. 4. Protect excavations against frost and freezing. 5. Take care in excavating not to damage surrounding structures, equipment or buried pipe. Do not undermine footing or foundation. 6. Perform all trenching in a manner to prevent cave-ins and risk to workmen. 7. Where original surface is pavement or concrete, the surface shall be saw cut to provide clean edges and assist in the surface restoration. 8. Where satisfactory bearing soil for foundations is not found at the indicated levels, the Architect/Engineer or their representative shall be notified immediately, and no further work shall be done until further instructions are given by the Architect/Engineer or their representative. C. Dewatering: 1. Contractor shall furnish, install, operate and remove all dewatering pumps and pipes needed to keep trenches and pits free of water. D. Underground Obstructions: 1. Known underground piping, foundations, and other obstructions in the vicinity of construction are shown on the drawings. Use great care in making installations near underground obstruction. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 00 - 13 2. If objects not shown on the drawings are encountered, remove, relocate, or perform extra work as directed by the Architect/Engineer. E. Fill and Backfilling: 1. No rubbish or waste material is permitted for fill or backfill. 2. Provide all necessary sand for backfilling. 3. Dispose of the excess excavated earth as directed. 4. Backfill materials shall be suitable for required compaction, clean and free of perishable materials and stones greater than 4 inches in diameter. Water shall not be permitted to rise in unbackfilled trenches. No material shall be used for backfilling that contains frozen earth, debris or earth with a high void content. 5. Backfill all trenches and excavations immediately after installing pipes, or removal of forms, unless other protection is provided. 6. Around piers and isolated foundations and structures, backfill and fill shall be placed and consolidated simultaneously on all sides to prevent wedge action and displacement. Fill and backfill materials shall be spread in 6 inch uniform horizontal layers with each layer compacted separately to required density. 7. Lay all piping on a compacted bed of sand at least 3 inches deep. Backfill around pipes with sand, 6 inch layers, and compact each layer. 8. Use sand for backfill up to grade for all piping under slabs or paved areas. All other piping shall have sand backfill to 6 inches above the top of the pipe. 9. Place all backfill above the sand in uniform layers not exceeding 6 inches deep. Each layer shall be placed, then carefully and uniformly tamped, to eliminate lateral or vertical displacement. 10. Where the fill and backfill will ultimately be under a building, floor or paving, each layer of fill shall be compacted to 95% of the maximum density determined by AASHTO Designation T-99 or ASTM Designation D-698. Moisture content of soil at time of compaction shall not exceed plus or minus 2% of optimum moisture content determined by AASHTO T-99 or ASTM D-698 test. F. Surface Restoration: 1. Where trenches are cut through graded, planted or landscaped areas, the areas shall be restored to the original condition. Replace all planting removed or damaged to its original condition. A minimum of 6 inches of topsoil shall be applied where disturbed areas are to be seeded or sodded. 2. Concrete or asphalt type pavement, seal coat, rock, gravel or earth surfaces removed or damaged shall be replaced with comparable materials and restored to original condition. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 00 - 14 3.3 ENGINEER OBSERVATION OF WORK A. The Contractor shall provide seven (7) calendar days notice to the Engineer prior to: 1. Placing fill over underground and underslab utilities. 2. Covering exterior walls, interior partitions and chases. 3. Installing hard or suspended ceilings and soffits. B. The Engineer will have the opportunity to review the installation and provide a written report noting deficiencies requiring correction. The Contractor’s schedule shall account for these reviews and show them as line items in the approved schedule. C. Above-Ceiling Final Observation 1. All work above the ceilings must be complete prior to the Engineer’s review. This includes, but is not limited to: a. Pipe insulation is installed and fully sealed. b. Pipe wall penetrations are sealed. c. Pipe identification and valve tags are installed. 2. In order to prevent the Above-Ceiling Final Observation from occurring too early, the Contractor shall review the status of the work and certify, in writing, that the work is ready for the Above-Ceiling Final Observation. 3. It is understood that if the Engineer finds the ceilings have been installed prior to this review and prior to 7 days elapsing, the Engineer may not recommend further payments to the contractor until such time as full access has been provided. 3.4 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1. B. Final Jobsite Observation: 1. In order to prevent the Final Jobsite Observation from occurring too early, the Contractor is required to review the completion status of the project and certify that the job is ready for the final jobsite observation. 2. Attached to the end of this section is a typical list of items that represent the degree of job completeness expected prior to requesting a review. 3. Upon Contractor certification that the project is complete and ready for a final punch, the Contractor shall sign the attached certification and return it to the Architect/Engineer so that the final observation can be scheduled. 4. It is understood that if the Engineer finds the job not ready for the final observation and that additional trips and observations are required to bring the project to completion, the costs incurred by the Engineers additional time and expenses will be deducted from the Contractor’s contract retainage prior to final payment at the completion of the job. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 00 - 15 C. Before final payment is authorized, This Contractor must submit the following: 1. Operation and maintenance manuals with copies of approved shop drawings. 2. Record documents including marked-up drawings and specifications. 3. A report documenting the instructions given to the Owner's representatives complete with the number of hours spent in the instruction. The report shall bear the signature of an authorized agent of This Contractor and shall be signed by the Owner's representatives. 4. Start-up reports on all equipment requiring a factory installation inspection or start-up. 5. Provide spare parts, maintenance, and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification sections. Deliver to project site and place in location as directed; receipt by Architect/Engineer required prior to final payment approval. 3.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Submit three properly indexed and bound copies, in ‘D’ Ring style notebooks, of the Operations and Maintenance Instructions to the Architect/Engineer. Make all corrections or additions required. B. Manuals shall be completed and in the Owner's possession prior to Owner's acceptance and at least 10 days prior to instruction of operating personnel. C. Operation and Maintenance Instructions shall include: 1. Notebooks shall be heavy duty locking three ring binders and incorporate clear vinyl sheet sleeves on the front cover and spine for slip-in labeling. “Peel and not stick” labels are acceptable. Sheet lifters shall be supplied at the front of each notebook. Provide “Wilson-Jones” or equal, color black. Size notebooks a minimum of 1/2" thicker than material for future inserts. Label the spine and front cover of each notebook. If more than one notebook is required, label in consecutive order. For example; 1 of 2, 2 of 2. No other forms of binding will be acceptable. 2. Prepare binder covers (front and spine) with printed title “Operation and Maintenance Instructions”, Title of project and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. 3. Title page with project title, Architect, Engineer, Contractor, and Subcontractors with addresses, telephone numbers, and contacts. 4. Table of Contents describing all index tabs. 5. Listing of all Subcontractors and major equipment suppliers with addresses, telephone numbers, and contacts. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 00 - 16 6. Index tabs dividing information by specification section, major equipment, or systems. All tab titling shall be clearly printed under reinforced plastic tabs. All equipment shall be labeled to match the identification in the construction documents. 7. Copies of warranties. 8. Copies of all final approved shop drawings and submittals. Include Architect’s/Engineer’s shop drawing review comments. 9. Copy of final approved test and balance report. 10. Copies of all factory inspections and/or equipment start-up reports. 11. Dimensional drawings of equipment. 12. Capacities and utility consumption of equipment. 13. Detailed parts lists with lists of suppliers. 14. Operating procedures for each system. 15. Maintenance schedule and procedures. Include a chart listing maintenance requirements and frequency. 16. Repair procedures for major components. 17. List of lubricants in all equipment and recommended frequency of lubrication. 18. Instruction books, cards, and manuals furnished with the equipment. 3.6 INSTRUCTING THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVES A. Adequately instruct the Owner's designated representatives in the maintenance, care, and operation of all systems installed under this contract. B. Provide verbal and written instructions to the Owner's representatives by FACTORY PERSONNEL in the care, maintenance, and operation of the equipment and systems. C. The Owner has the option to make a video recording of all instructions. Coordinate schedule of instructions to facilitate this recording. D. The instructions shall include: 1. Maintenance of equipment. 2. Start-up procedures for all major equipment. E. The Architect/Engineer shall be notified of the time and place instructions will be given to the Owner's representatives so he or his representative can attend if desired. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 00 - 17 F. The Contractor shall prepare a detailed, written training agenda and submit it to the Architect/Engineer a minimum of two weeks prior to the formal training for approval. The written agenda shall include specific training points within the items described above. For example: how to adjust setpoints, troubleshooting, proper start-up, proper shut- down, seasonal changes, draining, venting, changing filters, changing belts, etc. Failure to provide and follow an approved training agenda may result in additional training required at the expense of the Contractor. G. Operating Instructions: 1. Contractor is responsible for all instructions to the Owner's representatives for the mechanical and control systems. 2. If the Contractor does not have staff that can adequately provide the required instructions he shall include in his bid an adequate amount to reimburse the Owner for the Engineer to perform these services. 3.7 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING A. The plumbing systems shall be complete and operating. System start-up, testing, balancing, and satisfactory system performance is the responsibility of the Contractor. This includes calibration and adjustments of all controls, noise level adjustments and final adjustments as required. B. Contractor shall adjust the plumbing systems and controls at season changes during the one year warranty period, as required, to provide satisfactory operation and to prove performance of all systems in all seasons. C. All operating conditions and control sequences shall be tested during the start-up period. Test all interlocks, safety shutdowns, controls, and alarms. D. The Contractor, subcontractors, and equipment suppliers shall have skilled technicians to ensure that all systems perform properly. If the Architect/Engineer is requested to visit the job site for trouble shooting, assisting in start-up, obtaining satisfactory equipment operation, resolving installation and/or workmanship problems, equipment substitution issues or unsatisfactory system performance, including call backs during the warranty period, through no fault of the design; the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner on a time and materials basis for services rendered at the Architect/Engineer's standard hourly rates in effect when the services are requested. The Contractor shall pay the Owner for services required that are product, installation or workmanship related. Payment is due within 30 days after services are rendered. 3.8 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. The following paragraph supplements Division 1 requirements: Contractor shall maintain at the job site a separate and complete set of plumbing drawings and specifications on which he shall clearly and permanently mark in complete detail all changes made to the plumbing systems. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 00 - 18 B. Mark drawings to indicate revisions to piping size and location, both exterior and interior; including locations devices, requiring periodic maintenance or repair; actual equipment locations, dimensioned from column lines; actual inverts and locations of underground piping; concealed equipment, dimensioned from column lines; mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located; Change Orders; concealed control system devices. C. Mark specifications to show approved substitutions; Change Orders, and actual equipment and materials used. D. Record changes daily and keep the marked drawings available for the Architect/Engineer's examination at any normal work time. E. Upon completing the job, and before final payment is made, give the marked-up drawings to the Architect/Engineer. 3.9 PAINTING A. This Contractor shall paint all exterior gas piping. B. Paint all equipment that is marred or damaged prior to the Owner's acceptance. Paint and color shall match original equipment paint and shall be obtained from the equipment supplier if available. C. Equipment in finished areas that will be painted to match the room decor will be painted by others. Should this Contractor install equipment in a finished area after the area has been painted, he shall have the equipment and all its supports, hangers, etc., painted to match the room decor. D. Equipment cabinets, casings, covers, metal jackets, etc., in equipment rooms or concealed spaces, shall be furnished in standard or prime finish, free from scratches, abrasions, chips, etc. E. Equipment in occupied spaces, or if standard to the unit, shall have a baked primer with baked enamel finish coat free from scratches, abrasions, chips, etc. If color option is specified or is standard to the unit, this Contractor shall, before ordering, verify with the Architect/Engineer his color preference and furnish this color. F. Paint all equipment in unfinished areas such as boiler room, mechanical spaces, storage room, etc., furnished by this Contractor. Equipment furnished with a factory coat of paint and enamel need not be painted, provided the factory applied finish is not marred or spattered. If so, equipment shall be refinished with the same paint as was factory applied. G. Paint all outdoor uninsulated steel piping the color selected by Owner or Architect/Engineer. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 00 - 19 H. After surfaces have been thoroughly cleaned and are free of oil, dirt, and other foreign matter; paint all pipes and equipment with the following: 1. Bare Metal Surfaces - Apply one coat of primer suitable for the metal being painted. Finish with two coats of Alkyd base enamel paint. 2. Insulated Surfaces - Paint insulation jackets with two coats of semi-gloss acrylic latex paint. 3. Color of paint shall be as directed by the Architect. I. In accordance with LEED EQc4.2: Low-Emitting Materials - Paints and Coatings, all paints and coatings used on the interior of the building must comply with the following criteria: 1. Architectural paints and coatings applied to interior walls and ceilings must not exceed the volatile organic compound (VOC) content limits established in Green Seal Standard GS-11, Paints, 1st Edition, May 20, 1993. 2. Anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to interior ferrous metal substrates must not exceed the VOC content limit of 250 g/L (2 lb./gal) established in Green Seal Standard GC-03, Anti-Corrosive Paints, 2nd Edition, January 7, 1997. 3. Clear wood finishes, floor coatings, stains, primers, sealers, and shellacs applied to interior elements must not exceed the VOC content limits established in South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113, Architectural Coatings, rules in effect on January 1, 2004. 3.10 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Thoroughly clean all equipment and systems prior to the Owner's final acceptance of the project. Clean all foreign paint, grease, oil, dirt, labels, stickers, and other foreign material from all equipment. B. Clean all areas where moisture is present. Immediately report any mold, biological growth, or water damage. C. Remove all rubbish, debris, etc., accumulated during construction from the premises. 3.11 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor shall coordinate the installation of all equipment, valves, dampers, operators, etc., with other trades to maintain clear access area for servicing. B. All equipment shall be installed in such a way to maximize access to parts needing service or maintenance. Review the final field location, placement, and orientation of equipment with the Owner’s designated representative prior to setting equipment. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 00 - 20 C. Installation of equipment or devices without regard to coordination of access requirements and confirmation with the Owner’s designated representative will result in removal and reinstallation of the equipment at the Contractor’s expense. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 00 - 21 READINESS CERTIFICATION PRIOR TO FINAL JOBSITE OBSERVATION In order to prevent the final job observation from occurring too early, we require that the Contractor review the completion status of the project and, by copy of this document, certify that the job is indeed ready for the final job observation. The following is a typical list of items that represent the degree of job completeness expected prior to your requesting a final job observation. 1. Penetrations fire sealed and labeled in accordance with specifications. 2. All pumps operating and balanced. 3. All plumbing fixtures installed and caulked. 4. Pipe insulation complete, pipes labeled and valves tagged. Accepted by: Prime Contractor _______________________________________________ By ___________________________________ Date ___________________ Upon Contractor certification that the project is complete and ready for a final job observation, we require the Contractor to sign this agreement and return it to the Engineer so that the final observation can be scheduled. It is understood that if the Engineer finds the job not ready for the final observation and that additional trips and observations are required to bring the project to completion, the costs incurred by the Engineers for additional time and expenses will be deducted from the Contractor's contract retainage prior to final payment at the completion of the job. * * * * * UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 00 - 22 SECTION 22 05 03 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Through-Penetration Firestopping. 1.2 REFERENCES A. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials B. ANSI/UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops C. UL Fire Resistance Directory Through Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ) D. Warnock Hersey - Directory of Listed Products E. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials F. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops G. 2009International Building Code H. NFPA 5000 – Building Construction Safety Code 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: For penetrations through the following fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. 1. Fire-resistance-rated walls including fire partitions, fire barriers, and smoke barriers. 2. Fire-resistance-rated horizontal assemblies including floors, floor/ceiling assemblies, and ceiling membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies. B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined per UL 1479: 1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 2. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration : firestop systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings a. Floor penetrations located outside wall cavities. b. Floor penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures. c. Wall penetrations above corridor ceilings which are not part of a fire- resistive assembly. d. Wall penetrations below any ceiling that are larger than 4” diameter or 16 square inches. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 03 - 1 3. L-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with L-ratings of not more than 3.0 cfm/sq. ft at both ambient temperature and 400F. C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to light, traffic, moisture, or physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction. D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame- spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. E. For through-penetration firestop systems in air plenums, provide products with flame- spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 50, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. F. In accordance with LEED EQc4.1, Low-Emitting Materials - Adhesives and Sealants, all adhesives and sealants used on the interior of the building must comply with the following requirements: 1. Adhesives, sealants and sealant primers must comply with South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1168. 2. Aerosol adhesives must comply with Green Seal Standard for Commercial Adhesives GS-36 requirements in effect on October 19, 2000. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 22 05 00. B. Submit Firestopping Installers Certification for all installers on the project. C. Shop Drawings: Submit for each condition requiring firestopping. Include descriptions of the specific penetrating item, actual wall/floor construction, manufacturer’s installation instructions, and UL or Warnock Hersey Assembly number. D. Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through- penetration firestop system, along with the following information: 1. Types of penetrating items. 2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated. 3. Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 4. F and T ratings for each firestop system. E. Maintain a notebook on the job site at all times that contains copies of approved submittals for all through penetration firestopping to be installed. Notebook shall be made available to the Authority Having Jurisdiction at their request and turned over to the Owner at the end of construction as part of the O&M Manuals. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 03 - 2 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section. B. Installer: Individuals performing work shall be certified by the manufacturer of the system selected for installation. 1.6 MEETINGS A. Pre-installation meeting: A pre-installation meeting shall be scheduled and shall include the General Contractor, all Subcontractors associated with the installation of systems penetrating fire barriers, Firestopping Manufacturer’s Representative, and the Owner. 1. Review foreseeable methods related to firestopping work. 2. Tour representative areas where firestopping is to be installed; inspect and discuss each type of condition and each type of substrate that will be encountered, and preparation to be performed by other trades. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store, protect and handle products on site. Accept material on site in factory containers and packing. Inspect for damage. Protect from deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for storage. B. Install material prior to expiration of product shelf life. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide one year warranty on parts and labor. B. Warranty shall cover repair or replacement of firestop systems which fail in joint adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, stain resistance, general durability, or appear to deteriorate in any manner not clearly specified by the manufacturer as an inherent quality of the material. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the through- penetration firestop systems indicated for each application that are produced by one of the following manufacturers. All firestopping systems installed shall be provided by a single manufacturer. 1. 3M; Fire Protection Produces Division. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. RectorSeal Corporation, Metacaulk. 4. Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division. 5. Johns-Manville. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 03 - 3 6. Specified Technologies Inc. (S.T.I.) 7. Spec Seal Firestop Products 8. AD Firebarrier Protection Systems 2.2 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS A. Provide materials and systems classified by or listed by Warnock Hersey to provide firestopping equal to time rating of construction being penetrated. B. All firestopping materials shall be free of asbestos, lead, PCB’s, and other materials that would require hazardous waste removal. C. Firestopping shall be flexible to allow for normal penetrating item movement due to expansion and contraction. D. Firestopping systems for plumbing and wet pipe sprinkler piping shall be moisture resistant. E. Provide firestopping systems capable of supporting floor loads where systems are exposed to possible floor loading or traffic. F. Provide firestopping systems allowing continuous insulation for all insulated pipes. G. Provide firestopping systems classified by UL or listed by Warnock Hersey for penetrations through all fire rated construction. Firestopping systems shall be selected from the UL or listed by Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory Category XHEZ based on substrate construction and penetrating item size and material and shall fall within the range of numbers listed: 1. Combustible Framed Floors and Chase Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated F Rating = Floor/Wall Rating T Rating = Floor/Wall Rating Penetrating Item UL System No. No Penetrating ItemFC 0000-0999* Metallic Pipe or ConduitFC 1000-1999 Non-Metallic Pipe or ConduitFC 2000-2999 Electrical Cables FC 3000-3999 Cable Trays FC 4000-4999 Insulated Pipes FC 5000-5999 Bus Duct and Misc. ElectricalFC 6000-6999 Duct without Damper and Misc. MechanicalFC 7000-7999 Multiple PenetrationsFC 8000-8999 UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 03 - 4 2. Non-Combustible Framed Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated F Rating = Wall Rating T Rating = 0 Penetrating ItemUL System No. No Penetrating ItemWL 0000-0999* Metallic Pipe or ConduitWL 1000-1999 Non-Metallic Pipe or ConduitWL 2000-2999 Electrical CablesWL 3000-3999 Cable Trays WL 4000-4999 Insulated PipesWL 5000-5999 Bus Duct and Misc. ElectricalWL 6000-6999 Duct without Damper and Misc. MechanicalWL 7000-7999 Multiple PenetrationsWL 8000-8999 3. Concrete or Masonry Floors and Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated F Rating = Wall/Floor Rating T Rating (Walls) = 0 or Wall Rating T Rating (Floors) = Floor Rating Penetrating ItemUL System No. No Penetrating ItemCAJ 0000-0999* Metallic Pipe or ConduitCAJ 1000-1999 Non-Metallic Pipe or ConduitCAJ 2000-2999 Electrical CablesCAJ 3000-3999 Cable Trays CAJ 4000-4999 Insulated PipesCAJ 5000-5999 Bus Duct and Misc. ElectricalCAJ 6000-6999 Duct without Damper and Misc. MechanicalCAJ 7000-7999 Multiple PenetrationsCAJ 8000-8999 *Alternate method of firestopping is patching opening to match original rated construction. H. Any opening in walls or floors not covered by the listed series of numbers shall be coordinated with the firestopping manufacturer. I. Any openings in floors or walls not described in the UL or listed by Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory, or outlined in manufacturer’s information shall be sealed in a manner agreed upon by the Firestopping Manufacturer, Owner, and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 03 - 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Ensure all surfaces that contact seal materials are free of dirt, dust, grease, oil, rust, or loose materials. Clean and repair surfaces as required. Remove laitance and form- release agents from concrete. B. Ensure substrate and penetrating items have been permanently installed prior to installing firestopping systems. Ensure penetrating items have been properly spaced and have proper clearance prior to installing firestopping systems. C. Surfaces to which sealing materials are to be installed must meet the selected UL or Warnock Hersey system substrate criteria. D. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer. Confine primer to area of bond. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. In existing construction, provide firestopping of openings prior to and after installation of penetrating items. Remove any existing coatings on surfaces prior to firestopping installation. Temporary firestopping shall consist of packing openings with fire resistant mineral wool for the full thickness of substrate, or an alternate method approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. All openings shall be temporarily firestopped immediately upon their installation and shall remain so until the permanent UL or listed by Warnock Hersey listed firestopping system is installed. B. Install penetration seal materials in accordance with printed instructions of the UL or Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory and with the manufacturer’s printed application instructions. C. Install dams as required to properly contain firestopping materials within openings and as required to achieve required fire resistance rating. Remove combustible damming after appropriate curing. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Clean excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not cause damage. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 03 - 6 3.4 INSPECTION A. All penetrations shall be inspected by the manufacturer’s representative to ensure proper installation. B. Access to firestop systems shall be maintained for examination by the Authority Having Jurisdiction at their request. C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop system with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements. D. The contractor shall allow for visual destructive review of 5% of installed firestop systems (minimum of one) to prove compliance with specifications and manufacturer’s instructions and details. Destructive system removal shall be performed by the contractor and witnessed by the engineer and manufacturer’s factory representative. The Engineer shall have sole discretion of which firestop system installations will be reviewed. The contractor is responsible for all costs associated with this requirement including labor and material for removing and replacing the installed firestop system. If any firestop system is found to not be installed per manufacturer’s specific instructions and details, all firestop systems are subject to destructive review and replacement at the engineer’s discretion and the contractor’s expense. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 03 - 7 PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 03 - 8 SECTION 22 05 13 MOTORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Single Phase and Three Phase Electric Motors. 1.2 REFERENCES A. AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. B. AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. C. ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1-2007 2010 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings. D. ANSI/IEEE 112 - Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators. E. ANSI/NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators. F. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. G. Energy Independence and Security Act of 2007. H. Energy Policy Act (EPAct) of 1992. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 22 05 00. Include nominal efficiency and power factor for all premium efficiency motors. Efficiencies must meet or exceed the nominal energy efficiency levels presented below. B. Submit shop drawings for all three phase motors. C. Submit motor data with equipment when motor is installed by the manufacturer at the factory. 1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data including assembly drawings, bearing data including replacement sizes, and lubrication instructions. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the manufacture of commercial and industrial motors and accessories, with a minimum of three years documented manufacturing experience. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING MOTORS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 13 - 1 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and suitable weatherproof coverings. For extended outdoor storage, follow manufacturer’s recommendations for equipment and motor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to the drawings for required electrical characteristics. B. Design motors for continuous operation in 40ºC environment, and for temperature rise in accordance with ANSI/NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class, service factor, and motor enclosure type. C. Visible Nameplate: Indicating horsepower, voltage, phase, hertz, RPM, full load amps, locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer's name and model number, service factor, power factor, insulation class. D. Electrical Connection: Boxes, threaded for conduit. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide conduit connection in end frame. E. Unless otherwise indicated, motors 3/4 HP and smaller shall be single phase, 60 hertz, open drip-proof or totally enclosed fan-cooled type. F. Unless otherwise indicated, motors 1 HP and larger shall be three phase, 60 hertz, squirrel cage type, NEMA Design B (low current in-rush, normal starting torque), open drip-proof or totally enclosed fan-cooled type. G. Each contractor shall set all motors furnished by him. H. All motors shall have a minimum service factor of 1.15. I. All motors shall have ball or roller bearings with a minimum L-10 fatigue life of 150,000 hours in direct-coupled applications and 50,000 hours for belted applications. Belted rating shall be based on radial loads and pulley sizes called out in NEMA MG1-14.43. J. Bearings shall be sealed type for 10 HP and smaller motors. Bearings shall be regreasable type for larger motors. K. Aluminum end housings are not permitted on motors 15 HP or larger. L. Provide all belted motors with a means of moving and securing the motor to tighten belts. Motors over 2 HP shall have screw type tension adjustment. Motors over 40 HP shall have dual screw adjusters. Slide bases shall conform to NEMA standards. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING MOTORS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 13 - 2 2.2 PREMIUM EFFICIENCY MOTORS (INCLUDING MOST 3-PHASE GENERAL PURPOSE MOTORS) A. All motors, unless exempted by EPAct legislation that becomes federal law on December 19, 2010, shall comply with the efficiencies listed in that standard, which are reprinted below. These match the 2010 NEMA premium efficiency ratings. All ratings listed are nominal full load efficiencies, verified in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B. Average expected (not guaranteed minimum) power factors shall also be at least the following: Full-Load Efficiencies % Open Drip-Proof Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled HP 1200 18003600120018003600 rpmrpmrpmrpmrpmrpm 1.0 82.5 85.5 77.0 82.5 85.5 77.0 1.5 86.5 86.5 84.0 87.5 86.5 84.0 2.0 87.5 86.5 85.5 88.5 86.5 85.5 3.0 88.5 89.5 85.5 89.5 89.5 86.5 5.0 89.5 89.5 86.5 89.5 89.5 88.5 B. Motor nameplate shall be noted with the above ratings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All rotating shafts and/or equipment shall be completely guarded from all contact. Partial guards and/or guards that do not meet all applicable OSHA standards are not acceptable. Contractor is responsible for providing this guarding if it is not provided with the equipment supplied. B. For flexible coupled drive motors, mount coupling to the shafts in accordance with the coupling manufacturer’s recommendations. Align shafts to manufacturer’s requirements or within 0.002 inch per inch diameter of coupling hub. END OF SECTION UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING MOTORS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 13 - 3 PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING MOTORS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 13 - 4 SECTION 22 05 29 PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hangers, Supports, and Associated Anchors. B. Equipment Bases and Supports. C. Sleeves and Seals. D. Flashing and Sealing of Equipment and Pipe Stacks. E. Cutting of Openings. F. Escutcheon Plates and Trim. 1.2 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. Furnish sleeves and hanger inserts to General Contractor for placement into formwork. 1.3 REFERENCES A. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, and Manufacture. B. MSS SP-69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. C. MSS SP-89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HANGER RODS A. Hanger rods for single rod hangers shall conform to the following: Hanger Rod Diameter Pipe Size Column #1 Column #2 2" and smaller 3/8" 3/8" 2-1/2" through 3-1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 4" and 5" 5/8" 1/2" 6" 3/4" 5/8" Column #1: Cast iron pipe. Column #2: Copper and plastic pipe. B. Rods for double rod hangers may be reduced one size. Minimum rod diameter is 3/8 inches. C. Hanger rods and accessories used in mechanical spaces or otherwise dry areas shall have ASTM B633 electro-plated zinc finish. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 29 - 1 2.2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. All pipe hangers, clamps, and supports shall conform to Manufacturers Standardization Society MSS-SP-69. B. Oversize all hangers, clamps, and supports on insulated piping to allow insulation and jacket to pass through unbroken. This applies to both hot and cold pipes. C. On all insulated piping, provide a semi-cylindrical metallic shield and fire resistant vapor barrier jacket. D. As an alternative to separate pipe insulation insert and saddle, properly sized integral rigid insulation sections may be used for this application. Acceptable Products: Cooper/B-Line - Fig. B3380 through B3384 Pipe Shields - A1000, A2000 Erico - Model 124, 127 E. Support and laterally brace vertical pipes at every floor level in multi-story structures, but never at intervals over 15 feet. Support vertical pipes with riser clamps installed below hubs, couplings or lugs welded to the pipe. Acceptable Products: Anvil - Fig. CT121 Cooper/B-Line - Fig. B3373CT Erico - Model 510 Nibco/Tolco - Fig. 82 F. Place restrained neoprene mounts beneath vertical pipe riser clamps to prevent sweating of cold pipes. Insulate over mounts. Acceptable Products: Mason RBA, RCA, or BR. G. Hangers in direct contact with copper pipe shall be coated with plastic with appropriate temperature range. HYDRA-ZORB clamps are permitted for this application for bare pipes within their temperature limits of -65F to +275F. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 29 - 2 H. Unless otherwise indicated, hangers shall be as follows: 1. Clevis Type: Service: Bare Metal Pipe Rigid Plastic Pipe Insulated Cold Pipe Insulated Hot Pipe - 3 inches & Smaller Acceptable Products: Bare Steel, Plastic Bare Copper Pipe or Insulated Pipe Anvil Fig. 260 Cooper/B-Line Fig. 3100 Fig. B3100C Erico Model 400 Nibco/Tolco Fig. 1 Fig. 81PVC 2. Continuous Channel with Clevis Type: Service: Plastic Tubing Flexible Hose Soft Copper Tubing Acceptable Products: Cooper/B-Line - Fig. B3106, with Fig. B3106V Erico - Model 104, with Model 104V Nibco/Tolco - Fig. 1V 3. Adjustable Swivel Ring Type: Service: Bare Metal Pipe - 4 inches and Smaller Acceptable Products: Bare Steel Pipe Bare Copper Pipe Anvil Fig. 69 Cooper/B-Line Fig. B3170NF Fig. B3170CTC Erico Model FCN 102A0 Series Nibco/Tolco Fig. 200 Fig. 203 I. Support may be fabricated from U-Channel strut or similar shapes. Piping less than 4” in diameter shall be secured to strut with clamps of proper design and capacity as required to maintain spacing and alignment. Strut shall be independently supported from hanger drops or building structure. Size and support shall be per manufacturer’s installation requirements for structural support of piping. Clamps shall not interrupt piping insulation. 1. Strut used in mechanical spaces or otherwise dry areas shall have ASTM B633 electro-plated zinc finish. 2. Strut used in damp areas listed in hanger rods shall have ASTM A123 hot-dip galvanized finish applied after fabrication. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 29 - 3 J. Unless otherwise indicated, pipe supports for use with struts shall be as follows: 1. Clamp Type: Service: Bare Metal Pipe Rigid Plastic Pipe Insulated Cold Pipe Insulated Hot Pipe - 3 inches and smaller a. Clamps in direct contact with copper pipe shall be plastic coated. b. Pipes subject to expansion and contraction shall have clamps slightly oversized to allow limited pipe movement. Acceptable Products: Bare Steel, Plastic Bare Copper Pipe or Insulated Pipe Unistrut Fig. P1100 or P2500 Cooper/B-Line Fig. B2000 or B2400 Fig. BVT Nibco/Tolco Fig. A-14 or 2STR K. Unless otherwise shown, upper attachments for hanger rods or support struts shall be as follows: 1. Beam Clamps: Acceptable Products: Anvil Fig. 228, 292 Cooper/B-Line Fig. B3054 Erico Model 360 Nibco/Tolco Fig. 329 2. Concrete Inserts, Single Rod Galvanized: Acceptable Products: Anvil Fig. 282 Cooper/B-Line Fig. B3014 Erico Model 355 Nibco/Tolco Fig. 310 3. Concrete Inserts, Continuous Strip Galvanized: Acceptable Products: Unistrut Corp P3200 Series Cooper/B-Line Fig. B22-J Erico CONCT UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 29 - 4 4. Masonry Anchors: Fasten to concrete masonry units with expansion anchors or self-tapping masonry screws. For expansion anchors into hollow concrete block, use sleeve-type anchors designed for the specific application. Do not fasten in masonry joints. Do not use powder actuated fasteners, wooden plugs, or plastic inserts. L. Copper piping located in an exposed area, including indirect waste piping in janitors closets, shall use split ring standoff hangers for copper tubing. Support shall have copper electroplating for corrosion resistance. Use electro-galvanized or more corrosion resistant and threaded rod for floor applications. Use anchors applicable to the wall type with corrosion resistant threaded rod for wall applications. Acceptable Products: Erico/M-Co Model #456 B-Line Fig. 3198HCT Anvil Fig. CT138R Nibco/Tolco Fig. 301CT M. Wall supports shall be used where vertical height of structure exceeds minimum spacing requirements. Install wall supports at same spacing as hangers or strut supports along vertical length of pipe runs. 2.3 FOUNDATIONS, BASES, AND SUPPORTS A. Basic Requirements: 1. Furnish and install foundations, bases, and supports (not specifically indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications of either the General Construction or Mechanical work as provided by another Contractor) for mechanical equipment. 2. All concrete foundations, bases and supports, shall be reinforced. All steel bases and supports shall receive a prime coat of zinc chromate or red metal primer. After completion of work, give steel supports a final coat of gray enamel. B. Concrete Bases (Housekeeping Pads): 1. Unless shown otherwise on the drawings, concrete bases shall be nominal 4 inches thick and shall extend 3 inches on all sides of the equipment (6 inches larger than factory base). 2. Where a base is less than 12 inches from a wall, extend the base to the wall to prevent a “dirt-trap”. 3. Concrete materials and workmanship required for the Contractor's work shall be provided by him. Materials and workmanship shall conform to the applicable standards of the Portland Cement Association. Reinforce with 6” x 6”, W1.4- W1.4 welded wire fabric. Concrete shall withstand 3,000 pounds compression per square inch at 28 days. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 29 - 5 4. Equipment requiring bases is as follows: a. Water Heater C. Supports: 1. Provide sufficient clips, inserts, hangers, racks, rods, and auxiliary steel to securely support all suspended material, equipment and conduit without sag. 2. Hang heavy equipment from concrete floors or ceilings with Architect-approved concrete inserts, furnished and installed by the Contractor whose work requires them, except where indicated otherwise. D. Grout: 1. Grout shall be non-shrinking premixed (Master Builders Company "Embecco"), unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or approved by the Architect/Engineer. 2. Use Mix No. 1 for clearances of 1" or less, and Mix No. 2 for all larger clearances. 3. Grout under equipment bases, around pipes, at pipe sleeves, etc., and where shown on the drawings. 2.4 OPENINGS IN FLOORS, WALLS AND CEILINGS A. Exact locations of all openings for the installation of materials shall be determined by the Contractor and given to the General Contractor for installation or construction as the structure is built. B. Coordinate all openings with other Contractors. C. Hire the proper tradesman and furnish all labor, material and equipment to cut openings in or through existing structures, or openings in new structures that were not installed, or additional openings. Repair all spalling and damage to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer. Make saw cuts before breaking out concrete to ensure even and uniform opening edges. D. Said cutting shall be at the complete expense of each Contractor. Failure to coordinate openings with other Contractors shall not exempt the Contractor from providing openings at his expense. E. Do not cut structural members without written approval of the Architect or Structural Engineer. 2.5 ROOF PENETRATIONS A. Seal pipes with surface temperature below 150ºF penetrating single-ply roofs with conical stepped pipe flashings and stainless steel clamps equal to Portals Plus Pipe Boots. Material shall match roofing membrane. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 29 - 6 B. Break insulation only at the clamp for pipes between 60ºF and 150ºF. Seal outdoor insulation edges watertight. 2.6 PIPE SLEEVES AND LINTELS A. Each Contractor shall provide pipe sleeves and lintels for all openings required for the Contractor’s work in masonry walls and floors, unless specifically shown as being by others. B. Fabricate all sleeves from standard weight black steel pipe or as indicated on the drawings. Provide continuous sleeve. Cut or split sleeves are not acceptable. C. Fabricate all lintels from structural steel shapes or as indicated on the drawings. Have all lintels approved by the Architect or Structural Engineer. D. Sleeves through the floors on exposed risers shall be flush with the ceiling, with planed squared ends extending 1" above the floor in unfinished areas, and flush with the floor in finished areas, to accept spring closing floor plates. E. Sleeves shall not penetrate structural members without approval from the Structural Engineer. Sleeves shall then comply with the Engineer’s design. F. Openings through unexcavated floors and/or foundation walls below the floor shall have a smooth finish with sufficient annular space around material passing through opening so slight settling will not place stress on the material or building structure. G. Install all sleeves concentric with pipes. Secure sleeves in concrete to wood forms. This Contractor is responsible for sleeves dislodged or moved when pouring concrete. H. Where pipes rise through concrete floors that are on earthen grade, provide 3/4" resilient expansion joint material (asphalt and cork) wrapped around the pipe, the full depth of concrete, at the point of penetration. Secure to prevent shifting during concrete placement and finishing. I. Size sleeves large enough to allow expansion and contraction movement. Provide continuous insulation wrapping. 2.7 ESCUTCHEON PLATES AND TRIM A. Fit escutcheons to all insulated or uninsulated exposed pipes passing through walls, floors, or ceilings of finished rooms. B. Escutcheons shall be heavy gauge, cold rolled steel, copper coated under a chromium plated finish, heavy spring clip, rigid hinge and latch. C. Install galvanized steel (unless otherwise indicated) trim strip to cover vacant space and raw construction edges of all rectangular openings in finished rooms. This includes pipe openings. UNIVERSITY OF IOWA - HAWKEYE COURT STUDENT HOUSING PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS APRIL 11, 2013 - DD 22 05 29 - 7